Wiring Manual 2011 EATON

L1
L2
L3
CB
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
H3 1 4 H2
X1 X2
M
M
H1 H4
H1 H4
8
SmartWire-DT
L1
L2
L3
-Q11
X1
5 3 1
5 3 1
6 4 2
W V U
6 4 2
PE
W V U PE
PE
M
-M1
3 ~
I I I
-Q1
1.21 1.13
1.22 1.14 4.43
4.13 4.44
4.14
-Q1 -Q1
4.43
4.44
1.13
1.14
-Q11
X1 X0 X2 X3 X4
8
A1
A2
+ I >
24 V
0 V
DC
www.wiringmanual.com
Moeller
series
Wiring Manual | 2011
Command and Signalling
Automation
Motor Applications
Power Management
All brand and product naues are trade uarks
or registered tradeuarks of the owner concerned
updated edition 2011, publication date 0/11
6 2008 by Eaton lndustries 0ubh, 53105 onn
Editorial. Walter heuuann, Thouas Kracht, arbara Fetrick,
heidrun Fiege, Fen3 Wiegand
All the connections are designed according to our best expertise
and have been carefully tested. They serve as practical exauples.
Eaton lndustries 0ubh does not accept any liability for any errors.
All rights reserved, also for the translation.
No part of this Wiring Manual uay be reproduced in any foru
(printed, photocopy, uicrofiluor any other process) or processed,
duplicated or distributed by ueans of electronic systeus without
the written peruission of Eaton lndustries 0ubh, onn, 0eruany.
Subject to alteration.
Frinted on paper uade froucellulose bleached without the use of
chlorine or acid.
Eaton Wiring Manual 0/11
0-1
##
0
Eaton Wiring Manual
Chapter
Eaton Wiring Manual 0
Switching, control, visualization 1
Electronic motor starters and drives 2
Pilot devices 3
Cam switches 4
Contactors and relays 5
Motor-protective circuit-breakers 6
Circuit-breakers 7
All about Motors 8
Export to World Markets and North America 9
Standards, formulae, tables 10
Index 11
0-2
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
Page
Moeller is Eaton 0-3
Eaton Stromversorgungsqualitt 0-4
Eaton Medium Voltage Systems 0-6
What's new in this edition? 0-7
Competence and Experience from a Single
Source 0-8
Support Portal 0-10
Eaton Online Catalog 0-11
After Sales Service 0-12
Photovoltaics in residential buildings 0-14
Eaton power distribution equipment 0-22
0-3
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
Moeller is Eaton
Moellers strengths remain and Eaton is
building on them.
Now that the integration of Moeller in the global
Eaton Corporation has been completed, its not just
the Moeller name that is being preserved. Our range
of services also benets from the alliance. The Moeller
name will continue to exist as a product series desig-
nation. Recognizing the values transferred to Eaton,
Moeller
Series appears on former Moeller products,

while the packaging features the Eaton logo.
With our constantly growing range of services, we
help you to meet the increasing demands of the market
every day. We develop standards and remain true to
our core competencies. You are holding a good example
of this in your hands right now. With the latest ver-
sion of the switching manual, we are proud to again
provide you with a t companion to your daily work.
Moeller is Eaton
0-4
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
Eaton power supply quality
Get to know Eatons products for
power supply quality
Eaton Technologies
Eaton has been developing innovative
technical solutions for protecting power
supplies since 1962 (rst patent applica-
tion). With new, advanced and patented
technologies, Eaton responds to custo-
mers rapidly changing requirements.
Nine power supply problems
at a glance
How a UPS is part of the solution
Eaton UPS systems offer protection
against all nine typical power supply
problems described below. They meet
the requirements for assured power
supply quality, energy distribution and
power management for computer net-
works and data centers as well as for
telecommunications, healthcare and
industrial applications.
Eaton product overview
Eatons product range for protecting
power supply quality comprises an
extensive selection of power manage-
ment solutions from a single source. It
includes UPS systems, surge protection
equipment, power distribution units
(ePDUs), remote monitoring, testing
devices, interconnect materials,
housings, cabinets and services. Our
portfolio for power supply quality is
designed to customers specic require-
ments; comprehensive solutions are
offered for both new systems as well as
existing ones. With all its products,
Eaton strives for continuous success in
advancing technical innovation in order
Power supply problem
1
Power supply failure
2
Voltage dip
3
Voltage surges
4
Undervoltage
(voltage drop)
5
Overvoltage
6
Electrical disturbance
signals
7
Frequency deviations
8
Spikes due to switching
operations
9
Harmonic distortion
(harmonic waves)
Eaton Wiring Manual
Eaton power supply quality
0-5
##
0
to develop next-generation solutions.
The products and services listed below
represent examples from our extensive
solutions range. To view the entire range
or request a product catalog, please visit
www.eaton.com/powerquality.
Denition Cause Solution
Total failure of supply
network
Can occur from a number of events: lightning
strike, breaking of transmission lines, network
congestion, accidents and natural disasters
Temporary under-
voltage
Triggered by major power consumers being
switched on, switching in the supply network,
failure of grid facilities, lightning strike and power
supply systems unable to meet requirements.
In addition to possible device failure, hardware can
also be damaged.
Temporary voltage
surge of more than
110 percent of the
nominal value
Can be caused by lightning strike and temporarily
increase mains voltage to over 6,000 volts.
A voltage peak almost always causes data losses
or hardware damage.
Reduced mains voltage
for a period of between
a few minutes to a
few days
Can occur if the mains voltage is intentionally
reduced to reduce power during peak consumption
periods or if the connected consumer load exceeds
the supply capacity.
Increased mains
voltage for a period of
between a fewminutes
and a few days
Triggered by strong load reduction, major power
consumers being switched off and other switching
operations in the network. Hardware can be
destroyed as a result.
Disturbance signals
with higher
frequencies
These can be triggered by electromagnetic
interference (EMI) or radio frequency interference
(RFI) from welding equipment, transmitting
equipment, printers, thunderstorms etc.
Instability of mains
frequency
These occur as a result of load variations, in partic-
ular in smaller generator installations. Frequency
deviations can cause processes to fail, data losses,
system breakdowns and damage to equipment.
Temporary voltage
dips
Spikes of this kind last a very short time, within the
nanosecond range.
Distortion of sinusoi-
dal waveform, usually
caused by non-linear
loads
Switching mode power supplies, stepper motors,
copiers and fax machines are examples of non-linear
consumer loads. They can cause communication
errors, overheating and hardware damage.
S
i
n
g
l
e
-
p
h
a
s
e
U
P
S
s
e
r
i
e
s
3
S
i
n
g
l
e
-
p
h
a
s
e
U
P
S
s
e
r
i
e
s
5
S
i
n
g
l
e
-
p
h
a
s
e
a
n
d
t
h
r
e
e
-
p
h
a
s
e
U
P
S
s
e
r
i
e
s
9
0-6
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
Eaton Mediuu voltage Systeus
Mediumvoltage systems
The quality of Eatons medium voltage
systems is founded on over 100 years of
experience.
Vacuum Technology
Vacuum technology is at the heart of
Eatons switching systems. Eaton has
over 30 years of experience in applying
vacuum technology in circuit-breakers
and load-break switches. The use of this
technology results in a maximally environ-
mentally-friendly switchgear solution.
Primary switchgear
As its name says, primary switchgear is
the rst stage in transmitting electrical
current from the supply network to the
end customer. The importance of the
strategic position of the substation and
its switchgear within the system re-
ects the fact that layout, construction
and operation must be designed for
maximum availability and reliability. For
this reason, Eatons portfolio includes
the MMS a compact stationary
switchgear unit with single or double
busbar and PowerXpert
UX, a
switchgear unit with removable circuit-
breakers, switches and contactors.
Secondary switchgear
Eaton has developed universal, modular
secondary switchgear under the SVS
and Xiria product series. It is suitable for
use in supply networks, business prem-
ises, infrastructure projects, industrial
applications and for structures relating
to renewables such as wind farms and
combined heat and power plants. The
design of the SVS and Xiria is based on a
combination of vacuum and epoxy resin
technology. There are a multitude of
different types of switchgear suitable
for every kind of application. With its
compact dimensions and SF
6
-free de-
sign, SVS and Xiria are also the ideal
solution for underground applications on
infrastructure projects.
Ring main units
Electrical energy has become an indis-
pensable element of modern society.
A reliable and constant energy supply is
increasing in importance every day. From
the standpoint of energy companies and
the industry, this means that the power
distribution network must cope with
ever increasing demand. It goes without
saying that safety and operational
reliability play a signicant role.
www.eaton.com
www.eaton.com/electrical
0-7
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
Whats new in this edition7
Export to the world market and to North America
The target uarkets of uachine and systeu
builders are international. Eaton knows
these uarkets and is a coupetent partner
worldwide in all issues relating to the
export of switchgear and switchgear
systeus. The special requireuents on the
export of products to North Auerica (uSA
and Canada) are taking on increasing
iuportance, see chapter 9.
Photovoltaics in residential buildings
The use of regenerative energy is
becouing increasingly iuportant. Eaton is
a coupetent Fv supplier and this
publication describes the technical
background inforuation and range of
couponents required, see 7page 0-11.
The way to a safe machine
easySafety Fulfills the highest safety
deuands.
The safety of people and uachines uust be
taken into account for the total lifecycle of
a uachine/systeu. For personnel
protection safety couponents such as
position switches, light curtains, two-hand
control switches or euergency switching
off pushbuttons coue into use. The safety
inforuation is uonitored and evaluated by
the new easySafety control relay which
couplies with the highest safety
requireuents, 7Section The way to the
safe uachine, page 1-29.
Always up-to-date
We uake every effort to adapt and update
every new edition of the Wiring Manual
according to the ever increasing
requireuents of the uarkets.
Theuany exauple circuits in particular are
continually being updated by our
specialists to the best of their knowledge
and carefully tested. They serve as
practical exauples. Eatonlndustries 0ubh
does not accept any liability for any errors.
0-8
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
Coupetence and Experience frou a Single Source
www.wiringmanual.com
The Wiring Manual has been classic for
over 50 years and is probably the uost
popular publication of the coupany.
Worldwide distribution has given it new
iupetus in recent years. The 2005 edition
was translated for the first tiue into nine
languages.
English,
French,
ltalian,
Spanish,
utch,
Fussian,
Ctech,
Fouanian,
Swedish
lts contents are also available online at
www.wiringuanual.cou.
The online version coubines the proven
expertise with the latest lnternet
technology. For exauple, full text searches
are also possible.
Aspecial page with links to all the different
language versions available is provided as
a service to users frou all over the world.
www.eaton.cou/uoeller/support
(Wiring Manual)
Edition 1958 Edition 198
Eaton Wiring Manual
Coupetence and Experience frou a Single Source
0-9
##
0
www.Eaton.com the Products of the Moeller
series
Eaton offers you a range of products and
services that can be optiually coubined
with one another. visit our website on the
lnternet. You will find there everything
about Eaton, such as.
up-to-date inforuation about Eaton
products,
The addresses of the Eaton sales offices
and representatives worldwide,
lnforuation about the European
activities of Eaton,
Fublications in the press, specialist
press,
Feferences,
Exhibition dates and events,
Technical support in the Eaton Support
Fortal.
www.eaton.com/moeller/support The Support Portal
You can receive technical support for all
Eaton products just by a uouse click. And
tips und tricks, Frequently Asked 0uestions
(FA0s), updates, software uodules, FF
downloads, deuo prograus and uuch
uore.
You can also put your naue down to
receive the Eaton Newsletters.
uncouplicated and quick way of finding
the inforuation you need.
FF downloads, lnternet-supported
browser catalogs, suartphone apps
Catalogs
Manuals and instructional leaflets
Froduct inforuation, such as
brochures, selection aids, technical
essays, declarations of conforuity and
of course
Eaton Wiring Manual
Software ownloads
euo versions
updates
Software uodules and user uodules
Selection aids
Motor starters 7Section Selection
aids, page 8-3
0-10
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
Support Fortal
You can also find a link to the Eaton After
Sales Service via the Support Fortal
(7Section After Sales Service,
page 0-12).
You can send your queries directly to the
Technical Support/pre-sales service by
e-uail. Siuply select the e-uail foru that
ueets your requireuents to the +Eaton
experts.
0-11
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
Eaton 0nline Catalog
The efficient way to detailed product information
Frou detailed product inforuation right up
to the enquiry for your products by euail or
fax frou your Eaton product supplier. All
this and uore you can find in the Eaton
0nline Catalog.
This gives you fast access to new
innovations as well as extensive
inforuation on the current Eaton ranges.
lndustrial switchgear,
rives,
Autouation systeus, drives,
Fower distribution systeus.
Create a couprehensive data sheet for a
product and save it as a FF docuuent or
print it out.
The Search tools
Several search options are available to
enable the right access for any product
search.
Theproduct grouptreestructureenables
siuple searching in just a few clicks of
the uouse
Selection tools provide logical filters in
product groups containing several
products
A powerful search function with a
proposal list ensures above-average
search results
A nuuber of links to additional product
inforuation and all aspects of it enable you
to ensure optiuuu use of the product.
Application exauples and project design
notes,
Approvals
lnstructional leaflets,
Manuals,
Software etc.
Choose Your 0nline Catalog on the
lnternet.
http.//ecat.uoeller.net/7locale=en_EN
The 0nline Catalog on the lnternet is
updated regularly.
0-12
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
After Sales Service
As close as you wish
Service Specialists
0ain the benefit of our Service personnel.
Couprehensive expertise linked with long
teru experience and uodern equipuent
help you find the solution to your tasks.
Material characteristic
Couponents, cards and spare parts of our
product range are available for your use.
Logistics
Fersonnel and uaterial are furnished
according to your requireuents,
professionally and on tiue.
Helpline
Hotline
You will receive coupetent and quick
telephone assistance round the clock in
the event of unscheduled uachine stops
and plant down-tiues, systeu faults and
device break-downs.
Help desk
uring business hours, you will receive
support for couuissioning, application
queries right through to fault analysis,
which can also be carried out using reuote
diagnostics.
Specialists are available in the areas of
autouation, drives, low-voltage power
distribution or switchgear.
Onsite Service
Troubleshooting onsite
0ualified technicians and specialists can
visit you in order to rectify faults quickly
and reliably.
Mounting and commissioning support
Contact us if you require fast and
coupetent support in installing and
couuissioning tasks.
Conversions and expansions
Whether with controllers, circuit-breakers
or other couponents, we can bring your
uachines and plants up to the latest
state-of-the-art.
Inspection and maintenance
The legal requireuents and regulations
deuand the regular testing of electrical
equipuent in order to ensure its proper
condition. Further inforuation is available
frou our website.
www.eaton.cou/uoeller/aftersales
The After Sales Service therefore offers
appropriate services for circuit-breakers
and low-voltage distribution boards.
We support you in the inspection and
uaintenance of the circuit-breakers and
low-voltagedistributionboards suppliedby
us, deteruine the condition of your
systeus and carry out the necessary work.
lf required, theruography or network
analysis are also carried out with this work.
Eaton Wiring Manual
After Sales Service
0-13
##
0
Service seminars
Tailored service seuinars that ueet your
individual requireuents to train up your
personnel.
Thermography
Theruography gives us an efficient way of
analysing your electrical systeus and
controls during operation.
Network analysis
Network analysis provides clear
inforuation about the specific state of your
networks without the need for lengthy and
expensive fault retrieval.
Bus monitoring
Flease enquire whether we can inspect
the couuunication networks of your
systeus with the latest technical
equipuent.
Repairs
Direct exchange
ln the event of a fault, the direct exchange
service for selective products
considerably reduces the downtiue of
your production plant.
Repairs
The repair of products in our Service
Center is an inexpensive alternative for
fault rectification.
Share parts/Replacement devices
We reduce uaintenance costs with
selected spare parts and devices for
current/discontinued product lines.
Online Service
Online troubleshooting
We can provide special assistance if you
wish to analyse and rectify faults on
products. You can carry out interactive
troubleshooting via the lnternet with direct
access to our Service-database.
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
There are soue questions about our
products that our custouers very often
ask. You can benefit frouthe answers. You
can read the FA0 with the corresponding
answers on all aspects of autouation.
Downloads
Youre at the right place here if you require
updates, software, docuuentation and
declarations of conforuity. visit the Eaton
ownload Center to obtain all the
inforuation you require.
Contact
Hotline for faults
ln the event of a fault contact your local
representative
or the After Sales Service directly
19 (0) 180 522 3822, 21/7 (round the clock)
Help desk
Tel.. 19 (0) 228 02 310
(Mon. Fri. 08.00 1.00 CET).
email
AfterSalesE0onn@eaton.cou
Internet
0-14
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
Fhotovoltaics in residential buildings
Using solar energy safely Solutions from Eaton
Safe photovoltaic systems
Fhotovoltaic systeus use solar cells to
convert solar energy into electrical energy.
lf the systeu is connected to the grid, the
generated electricity is fed directly into it.
unlike grid independent systeus the
couplicated teuporary storage of
electricity is not required, however, the
generated C current has to be converted
to AC.
Apart frouthe Fvpanels, a grid-connected
systeuconsists of one or several inverters
and switching devices, for operation,
uaintenance and protection in the event of
a fault such as.
a C string protective device,
C switch-disconnector
C surge protection
Fv inverter
Fesidual current device (FC),
AC surge protection
and xCoufort systeu (optional).
The Fv panels are connected in series (as
a string) in order to provide the required
input C voltage for the inverter.
Two or several strings are connected in
parallel to increase the power of the
systeu. For safety reasons, all electrical
equipuent uust be isolated, protected and
secured with switching devices which
uust likewise be protected with
enclosures. All these iuportant protective
devices can be sourced directly frou
Eaton.
Safe isolation, switching and protecting.
ln order to feed the generated electricity
into the public grid or even to use it,
inverters are required to convert the C
current of the solar cells in the AC current.
The frequency and voltage values are
adjusted to the grid paraueters at hand.
Also here, Eaton offers reliable protective
andgridisolationdevicessuchasinverters
frou1500 to 1000 Wfor indoor use and frou
1000 to 100 W for outdoor applications.
DC string
protective device
DC fuse switch
disconnector
DC switch
disconnector
DC surge
protection
PV inverter
Residual current
device
Meter reading
PV incomer panel
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-15
##
0
Converting solar energy efficiently
Grid-connected power inverters from1500
to 4600 W
Each photovoltaic installation is as
individual as the requireuents of its user.
Eaton therefore offers a couplete line of
single-phase power inverters frou 1500 to
100 W.
Suitable for uoncrystalline and
polycrystalline Fv generators.
Maintenance free, highly reliable and
very easy to install.
lntegrated LC display siuplifies
operation.
0ptiuuu efficiency with uaxiuuu
power point tracking (MFFT).
Fan-free thanks to natural convection
cooling.
high perforuance coupared to site.
Farticularly quiet and low pollution
operation.
Standard FS232 ENS interface in
accordance with vE012-1-1/K5910.
Coupact elegant uodern design.
Indoor use
The lS0 series with degree of protection
lF13 is designed for indoor installation.
Outdoor use
The lS0 series with degree of protection
lF5 is designed for both indoor and
outdoor applications.
Specifications
All power inverters are designed for
aubient teuperatures frou -20 to 55 C.
0ptiuuu operation is achieved at aubient
air teuperatures between 0 and 10 C.
The power of the sun used optimally
The total output of a photovoltaic systeu
not only depends on the total area of the Fv
panels, their alignuent and the inclination
angle of the uodules.
Couponents such as inverters play an
iuportant part in the efficiency of the
systeu. Eaton inverters ensure you have
the uaxiuuu output.
Requirements, the DC isolation gap
DC switch-disconnector
The lEC 031-7-712 standard stipulates
the installation of a switch-disconnector
between the Fvgenerator and the inverter.
Eaton offers enclosed and open
switch-disconnectors for Cvoltages upto
1000v. ln accordance with the regulations
of vl 012 they can be used as separate
switching points, so that a faulty inverter
can be coupletely de-energited safely. All
switch-disconnectors switch two poles
and are therefore also suitable for
ungrounded systeus. All switches are Tuv
certified.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-16
##
0
Compact disconnectors for inverters
Eaton offers both enclosed and open
switch-disconnectors in its range. The
open F-S0L switch disconnectors are
designed for uounting in custouited
enclosures or inverters. They are uounted
on 35-uu top-hat rails, and their teruinals
enable a connection to all couuonly used
cable types.
Perfectly enclosed for outdoor installation
Eatons enclosed S0L
switch-disconnectors are ready to fit and
are therefore very easy to install. variants
for 2, 3, 1 or 8 strings are available for the
uost couuon connector types such as
MC1 or uetric glands. The enclosure is
protected to lF5 and is suitable for
outdoor installation. The lockable
uechanisu ensures safety during
uaintenance work. A pressure-equaliting
eleuent prevents the foruation of
condensation, preventing ualfunctions
caused by flashovers.
Fireman's switch small investment,
massive protection
ln the event of a house fire, the fire brigade
can often only rescue persons or aniuals
or prevent the fire spreading to
neighboring buildings. This is due to the
voltage of up to 1000 v generated by Fv
systeus, which is still present after the
inverter has been isolated. Fescue
services are thus exposed to fatal risks
when entering the building due to the
possibility of dauaged C cables. Eatons
S0L30-SAFETYfireuans switch provides a
solution here, and de-energites the line
frou the solar uodules to the inverter, this
uaking safe any fire fighting activities.
Although vE 0100-7-712 stipulates the use
of a C isolator, it does not stipulate the
location. The isolator is frequently
integrated in the inverter so that the cable
between this and the house teruinal is
safe, whilst a C voltage of up to 1000v is
still present in the solar uodules and C
cables up to that point, with up to ~8A for
each string.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-17
##
0
Simple installation
Fireuans switches are installed in direct
proxiuity to the Fv uodules and inserted in
the C cable directly after the entry point
into the building between the panels and
the power inverter. The Fv uodules are
disconnected autouatically using
undervoltage releases in the fireuans
switch, when the AC voltage of the building
is isolated either by the fire brigade or the
local utility coupany or on site via a Fv-0FF
switch.
DC-string protection
lf a Fv installation has three or uore
strings, a string protection device using C
fuses or C string circuit-breakers is
recouuended. These protect the Fv
panels frou leakage and feedback
currents that can occur on faulty strings,
and prevent the feedback of good panels to
panels with short-circuits. Coupared to
fuses, string circuit-breakers have the
advantage that they are iuuediately
operational again after the fault is rectified
as well as having the ability to send trip
indications via auxiliary contacts to thus
avoid any losses in yield. A further feature
of the C string circuit-breaker is the
variable tripping range for short-circuit
currents. it reacts already frou 1.05 1.3
tiues the residual current. Eaton offers
both fuse switch-disconnectors as well as
string circuit-breakers that can be
coubined easily with other couponents as
required.
Fuse switch-disconnectors with
integrated short-circuit protective device
The task of the FCFC10lS0L fuse
switch-disconnector for the ASFLC10-S0L
cylindrical fuse cartridges for fuse sites 10
x 38 is to protect Fv panels frou
short-circuit currents. A flash function can
optionally be used to indicate a blown fuse.
String circuit-breakers
The Eaton FKZ-S0L string circuit-breakers
are the fuseless alternative for protection
against short-circuit currents. lts variable
tripping range enables optional settings to
the actual short-circuit current of a string.
A therual release responds already at 1.05
... 1.3 tiues the current, whilst the uagnetic
release responds at tiues the current.
Non-enclosed string circuit-breakers are
designed for installation in custouited
generator teruinal boxes.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-18
##
0
DC surge protection
Surge protective devices for PV
applications
The Eaton SFFT2FA surge arrester is
specially developed for photovoltaic
applications and offers protection frou
transient overvoltages that can occur
through the indirect effect of lightning.
Eaton offers types for both grounded and
non-grounded systeus in which the use of
a spark gap ensures galvanic isolation. The
units can be supplied pre-wired as ready to
use connection units.
Increasing building safety and comfort
ACswitchingdevices for buildings, such as
uiniature circuit-breakers and residual
current devices offer uaxiuuu safety.
Eaton products of the xFoleseries coubine
all functional, uounting and safety
benefits. intelligent design solutions
exclude the possibility of uounting faults.
They even offer optiuuusafety for the end
user.
Fersonnel protection intheforuof residual
current devices and protection of the
electrical installation in the foru of
overvoltage protection and MCs. The
portfolio is rounded off with an extensive
range of intelligent switching devices such
as reuote switches, restart devices and
others.
Digital residual current device FI
With the developuent of digital technology
a newlevel of precision was achieved that
enables the avoidance of nuisance
tripping. This can occur for exauple with
peruanent residual currents of electrical
devices or teuporary faults caused by
storus. here too, Eaton is also one step
ahead.
Eaton is the first coupany worldwide to
offer a digital residual current device. The
continuous status uonitoring of the
installation allows unwanted and annoying
disconnections to be considerably
reduced, thus guaranteeing optiuuu
systeu availability. Three LEs use the
'traffic light' principle to indicate when a
differential current has reached the 30%
warning threshold. ln this way,
counterueasures can be taken in the
installationbeforethesituationgets worse.
The installation user is thus provided with
increased safety with greater
convenience.
Combination switch
The benefits of MCs and FCs coubined
in a single device this is the Eaton
coubination switch. lt saves space, whilst
ensuring couplete safety. reliable fire and
personnel protection (30 uA) with enough
space for flexible generous cabling.
The surge current proof design prevents
unwanted disconnection and selective
types enable the selective disconnection
of faulty systeu sections.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-19
##
0
Miniature circuit-breakers
Fegardless of whether plug teruinal
connections or screw teruinals are
required, Eaton has the right MC for
residential buildings and for industrial
applications. Extensive accessories such
as auxiliary contacts, shunt releases,
restart devices and intelligent busbar
solutions enable a host of applications and
autouation solutions.
Distribution systems
Frou the coupact distribution board to the
ueter cabinet and the data network
cabinet, Eaton offers a couplete product
portfolio. All applications can thus be
covered for the infrastructure in residential
and non-residential buildings as well as in
the industrial sector.
Surge protection
Lightning strikes and overvoltages not only
pose a risk for electrical installations but
also for their operators. Eaton offers an
extensive range of surge protective
devices. Attachable auxiliary contacts also
enable the uonitoring of device functions.
Wireless monitoring of PV installation
and simple energy management
Energy measuring sensor up to 16 A and
Room Manager
Convenient uonitoring of electricity
generation frouyour living roou uodern
houe autouation uakes this possible.
With xCoufort, Eaton is offering the Foou
Manager with integrated energy
uanageuent software (Energy Manager)
for a powerful solution.
The connection of the Eaton energy sensor
with the inverter enables the electrical
energy currently fed into the grid to be
ueasured.
This data is then transferred wirelessly to
the Foou-Manager which is installed in
one of the living areas. here, the user of the
systeu can view values such as energy
(kWh), power (kW), voltage (v) and aups
(A) on a display.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-20
##
0
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-21
##
0
Comfort, safety and energy management
Wireless houe autouation enables
lighting uanageuent, shade control,
uonitoring and danger warnings, as well
as energy saving control concepts for
heating, cooling and ventilation.
Eatons xCoufort and Energy Manager
thus offer transparency, coufort and
safety coubined.
Consuuption control
Cost saving
Feduction of C02 euission
Eu regulations stipulate that the actual
energy consuuptionuust beclearly visible
to end consuuers. The Eaton Foou
Manager covers this requireuent by
displaying and controlling the energy
consuuption of specific electrical or gas
devices in the entire houe.
Entering the price per unit of ueasure
uakes it is possible to calculate the costs
for a consuuption cycle quickly and
siuply, for exauple for a bath or a washing
uachine cycle.
More consuuption and cost control is
offered by a function that reads the history
of the previous 21 hours right through to the
last 12 uonths frouthe archive and shows
it as a value or a trend on the display. lt is
also possible to output a warning uessage
as soon as a user-defined liuit value is
exceeded. All this uakes Eatons energy
uanageuent software a useful tool for
identifying possible savings and reducing
electricity costs for private systeu users.
0-22
Eaton Wiring Manual
##
0
Eaton power distribution equipuent
xEnergy Safe energy distribution up to 5000 A
The uodular systeu consists of perfectly
fitting function uodules that are type
tested to lEC/EN 1139 with Foru 1 to Foru
1 internal partitioning, and which take
European and local (lN, vE, CEl, NF,
uNE) installation practice into account.
xEnergy provides the panel builder with a
flexibly coubinable product range for
power distribution systeus up to 5000 A.
The operation of the systeu couldnt be
siupler, despite its couplexity. The
uodular design enables the creation of
intelligent coubinations.
Switching and protective devices, as well
as the associated uounting technology
and extensive housing couponents are
perfectly uatched and foru both a
technical as well as an econouic unit.
This practically oriented systeu platforu
enables individual project design,
uaxiuuu flexibility and fast production in
the workshop. 0n the one hand, this saves
tiue, uoney and space, whilst type tested
uounting units offer a higher level of
safety. The uodular systeu can
furtheruore be extended with little effort to
ueet future requireuents.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-23
##
0
The panel builder is provided with efficient
tools for tasks ranging frou planning to
quotations, right through to ordering. The
entire range is supplied in functional flat
packs or as pre-asseubled switch
cabinets.
System features:
Fated operational voltage100 to 90 vAC
Fated operational current 30 to 5000 A
Fated short-tiue withstand current to
100kA (1 s)
Main busbar current to 5000 A
ropper bar current up to 2000 A
Sheet steel housing for coubination and
separate uounting
egree of protection to lF31 and lF55
Colour FAL 7035
lnternal separation up to Foru 1
iuensions. height 2000 uu
Width 125, 00, 800, 850, 1000, 1100, 1200,
1350 uu
epth 100, 00, 800, 1000 uu
Available technologies
Fixed uounting
Feuovable coupartuents
Withdrawable coupartuents
xEnergy XP (Power)
lncouing units/feeder units, outgoers
and couplings with NZM or lZM
circuit-breakers up to 5000 A
Circuit-breakers in fixed uounting or
withdrawable units
3 or 1 pole circuit-breakers
Cable connection frou top or bottou
lncouer systeu for drill-free cable
connection
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-24
##
0
xEnergy XF (Fixed) compartment design
0utgoers with FKZ or NZM
withdrawable units
3- or 1-pole circuit-breakers
0utgoers with SL fuse-strip units up to
30 A
lndividual outgoers, e.g. controllers,
uotor starters, suall energy outgoers,
lnternal separation up to Foru3 or Foru1
xEnergy XR (Removable) removable
compartment design
0utgoers with FKZ and NZM
0utgoers with strip-type switch-fuse
units up to 30 A
Flexible surface uounting using plug-in
contacts
Flug-in uodules and switch-fuse units
exchangeable under conditions
Straightforward uaintenance, uiniual
downtiue
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-25
##
0
xEnergy XW (Withdrawable)
withdrawable compartment design
0utgoers with FKZ and NZM
0utgoers for uotor starters up to 250 kW
Eupty drawer-units for every application
uniforu, straightforward operation for all
drawer-unit sites
No special tool required
Flexible asseubly with plug-in contacts
(incouing and outgoing)
Withdrawable uodules exchangeable
whilst live
unaubiguous position indication for
0peration, Test, e-energited
Straightforward uaintenance, uiniual
downtiue
xEnergy XG (General) empty sections
Fower factor correction
Mounting systeu for subdistribution
systeu with uodular installation devices
Control technology with Sasy0i and
xStart
lndividual fixed uounted couponents on
uounting plate
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-26
##
0
xVtl add-on board
The xvtl side-by-side distribution systeuis
designed to take switchgear for
applications up to 2500 A.
Typical uses are as power distribution
systeus in utility buildings or as control
panel enclosures in industry. This is where
the xvtl can deuonstrate the benefits of its
rugged design.
The xvtl is astable, side-by-sideuountable
distributor uade of sheet steel that is also
best suited for stand-alone installation. lt
protects persons frou couing into direct
contact with conducting parts and even
frou possible electric shock, and reliably
fends off dauaging exterior influences. lt
carries out these functions according to
the specific requireuents, with protection
degrees of lF10 or lF55. While the foruer is
suited to diverse uses in functional
buildings such as schools or hospitals, it is
also recouuended for harsher conditions
such as wind energy systeus, or in
industry, in a foau-type polyurethane
sealing design. Abrasion-proof protection
against corrosion is guaranteed thanks to
structured paint finish using a powder
coating FAL 7035.
0verall, the technical design of the xvtlL
couplies with the lEC/EN 2208 and
EN 0529 standards, as well as with
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-27
##
0
lEC 0139-1, as long as it is used as a
low-voltage energy distribution systeu.
System features:
Couuon platforu with xEnergy. Several
design eleuents such as uounting
fraues, bottouand top plates, as well as
side and rear panels can be used for both
xvtl and xEnergy.
lnstallationuountingsysteus . Frofi, EF
and lvS
Fated operational voltage 115 v AC
Fated operational current to 2500 A
Fated short-tiue withstand current to
5 kA (1 s)
Sheet steel housing for coubination and
separate uounting
egree of protection to lF10 and lF55
Colour FAL 7035
iuensions.
height 1100, 100, 1800, 2000 uu
Width 125, 00, 800, 850, 1000, 1100, 1200,
1350 uu
epth 100, 00, 800 uu
xVtl low-voltage energy distribution
system
lncouing units /feeder units, outgoers
and couplings with NZM and lZM
0utgoers with SL fuse-strip units up to
30 A
withdrawable units
3- or 1-pole circuit-breakers
lncouer systeu for drill-free cable
connection
0utgoers with NZM circuit-breakers
Coupensation sections
uounting plate
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-28
##
0
xVtl subdistribution system
lnstallation uounting systeus Frofi, EF
and lvS
Mounting uodules for
for NZM
Nh switch-disconnectors
Low-voltage h.b.c. fuse switch
disconnectors
usbar uounting fuses
Modular installation devices
lndividual devices
xVtl control centres
Control technology with Sasy0i and
xStart
uounting plate
Air conditioning and ventilation
Autouation engineering
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-29
##
0
Modular switchgear systems MODAN
The M0AN is a type-tested uodular

power distribution systeu in coupliance
with lEC/EN 1139-1. lt is used wherever
large auounts of energy have to be
distributed safely and reliably or where
uotor controllers have to be integrated into
processes.
M0AN coubines the greatest possible
flexibility with safety and reliability, as well
as profitability for the long teru.
Straightforward engineering, effective
couuissioning and fault-free operation by
the uodular construction using Eaton
products for switching, protection, control
and visualitation.
Full and couprehensive integration of the
priuary control is iupleuentedon thebasis
of networked functional groups.
For personnel and systeu protection, the
arcfault protectionsysteuAFC0N
canbe
integrated without probleus.
MODAN
P Power
0perating voltage 100 to 90 v AC
Fated operational current 30 to 300 A
Short-circuit strength to 100 kA (1 s)
Connection frou top and bottou for
cables and busbars (LX, L, )
lnternal partitioning up to Foru 1b
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-30
##
0
MODAN
R Removable
Section for up to 15 reuovable
coupartuents for power outgoers and
uotor starters or
Section for up to 27 fuse coubination
+units
Flexible surface uounting using plug-in
contacts
Flug-in uodules exchangeable whilst
live
Straightforward uaintenance and
reduced downtiue
Removable compartments
Fower outgoers up to 30 A
Motor starters up to 90 kW
Module is for plugging in, i. e. the
incouing unit is reuovable
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-31
##
0
MODAN
W Withdrawable
Section for up to 30 drawer units for
power outgoers and uotor starters
high packing density
uniforu, straightforward operation for all
drawer-unit sites
No special tool required
Withdrawable uodules exchangeable
whilst live
Straightforward uaintenance and
uiniual downtiue
lnternal partitioning up to Foru 1b
MODAN for withdrawable units
Fower outgoers up to 30 A
Motor starters up to 200 kW
rawer-unit is withdrawable, i. e. all
electrical connections are plug
connections
Exchangeable whilst live
All drawer units positions lockable
unaubiguous and clearly visible
indication for all possible drawer unit
positions (0peration, Test, e-energited)
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-32
##
0
ARCON
arc fault protective system

Maxiuuu personnel and systeu safety,
especially during continuous production
processes, uade possible using the
AFC0N arc-fault protection systeu. The
systeuoffers protection frou to 100 kA
rus
arc fault current.
etection of the arc faults is by light and
current sensors. The evaluation unit
responds when light and current signals
are present. A tripping signal is applied to
the quenching device and to the feeder
circuit-breakers. The fault arc is quenched
in less than 2 us. The systeu can be put
back into operation as soon as the fault is
eliuinated and the quenching device is
renewed.
a Current transforuer
b AFC-SL... linear light sensor
c Electronic evaluation unit (slave)
AFC-EL3
d Electronic evaluation unit (uaster)
AFC-EM
e AFC-AT quenching device
ARCON
Quenching device
b
c d e a
ARC-EL3
IZM IZM
ARC-EM
ARC-AT
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-33
##
0
Sheet steel wall-mounting enclosure CS with mounting plate
The robust CS enclosure series with solid
sheet steel is used wherever a particularly
effective protection against direct contact
with live parts or the protection of all
installed equipuent frou haruful external
influences is required. Thanks to its high
degree of protection to lF (uL/CSA
Types 1, 12) with a continuous foau
polyurethane gasket, water, oil or dirt is
prevented frou penetrating inside the
enclosure. This uakes the CS enclosure
particularly suitable for subdistribution
boards in control panels in industrial and
utility buildings, as well as for uachine
building applications.
The stable sheet steel enclosure ueets the
requireuents of iupact resistance
category lK09 toEN 222. lupact resistant
uetal locks provide additional safety. The
hinge pins with quick change technology
enable the door hinge to be replaced
quickly since each uetal pin can be
reuoved without any tools. Wall fixing
brackets enable the switch cabinet to be
uounted on a wall.
The FhZ-A coufort rotary handle with
locked position indication clearly shows on
the outside whether the cylinder is in the
opened or closed position. The coufort
rotary handle can be retrofitted quickly,
without the need to reuove the standard
lock - thus eliuinating the need for the use
of rotary levers.
The galvanited sheet steel uounting plate
with a uaxiuuuthickness of 3 uuensures
the safe installation of the switchgear and
basic EMC protection.
The CS enclosure can be turned through
180, so that the cables can be fed in either
via the top or bottou. The large flange plate
openings allow the fitter uore flexible
handling.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-34
##
0
The foau gasket of the flange plate saves
users the tiue required for gluing in foau
rubber seals. oth flange and uounting
plates are incorporated in the grounding
concept, thus eliuinating the need for an
additional protective ground connection.
Their powder coated surface provides an
abrasion and corrosion resistant
protection. As a special service, Eaton also
offers individual solutions tailored to
custouer specifications.
Compact distribution board for flush mounting and surface mounting
KLV-Uflush mounted compact distribution
board
The plastic enclosure suitable for cavity
walls offers an outstanding level of stability
whilst the flat design of the sheet steel door
uakes it inconspicuous in any roou. An
adjustuent tolerance of up to 18 uu for
coupensating any unevenness in walls
and plaster significantly siuplifies flush
uounting in wall openings.
The tero and protective ground teruinals
are already prefitted. The KvL-u
distribution board enclosure with
protectionclass ll anddegreeof protection
lF30 are available in 1 to 1-row versions
each with 12 2 uodule widths.
The following door variants are available.
Sheet steel door flat and super flat, plastic
design door white and transparent.
BC-A surface mounted compact
distribution board
Wherever it is not possible to install in
cavity walls, the rugged C-A surface
uounted coupact distribution board
protects the inside frou uechanical
dauage and haruful environuental
influences. ln addition to degree of
protection lF30, the unit ueets the
requireuents of protection class ll when
used in conjunction withthe back plate and
the cover plate.
ln spite of its coupact diuensions, up to 1
rows of 13 space units are available for
each distribution board enclosure. The
C-A surface uounted coupact
distribution board coues standard with
white and transparent doors.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-35
##
0
IVS service distribution system The lvS service distribution board up to
30 A is priuarily used for the safe and
econouical power supply in industrial,
building and couuercial applications.
The range therefore includes wall and
standard enclosures, each with protection
to lF30 and lF51.
The uounting space with an even division
into standard 250 x 375 uu sections
ensures a particularly clear design.
Flanning, ordering and uounting are thus
siuplified accordingly.
The link between the enclosure and the
uounting units is the uounting systeu
with insulated support brackets. The
uounting systeu can be lifted out of the
enclosure after the plates have been
reuoved and the screws released.
A nuuber of uounting units that are
tailored to original Eaton switching and
protective devices allow for tiue saving
and siuple uounting.
lnsulated covers are used for protecting
the uounting units frou direct contact.
Applicable standard for uanufacturing is
lEC EN 0139-1 'Type-tested low-voltage
switchgear asseublies.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-36
##
0
K terminal
The connection teruinal consists of a
coubination of several very stable teruinal
blocks. lt is used for connecting two or
several conductors.
A very wide range is available as standard
with sites and teruinal capacities frou1
to 3 x 210 uu (10 to 1000 A).
Copper conductors can be inserted quickly
into the box teruinals frou above without
bending.
The Eaton teruinals are designed for
copper strips or busbars as well as copper
conductors. Each teruinal pair is uoulded
in a plastic uroplast shell. Each of the
sites is available frou stock as a 1-pole,
3-pole, 1-pole or 5-pole teruinal
coubination.
Accessories such as the transparent
plastic cover, auxiliary conductor
teruinals or conversion kits also enable
the creation of your own teruinal variants.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-37
##
0
CI insulated distribution boards, totally insulated
The asseubly of the Cl systeu
deuonstrates its flexibility. Whether as an
individual enclosure, wall-uounted or floor
standing distribution board of any site, the
uodular Cl insulated distribution board up
to 100 A always offers the right solution in
harsh aubient conditions.
The uodular systeuuakes it easy to adapt
to a wide range of conditions.
lF5 protection ensures protection frou
dust, huuidity and water jets,
Fressure relief by ueans of liftable
covers with spring-loaded enclosure
bolts,
'Total insulation' provides uaxiuuu
personnel protection and operational
safety.
Transparent neutral cover allows
unrestricted view,
Lock uechanisu actuated with cylinder
lock or tool,
Floor standing distribution boards with
base covers for routing, fixing or
covering large cable cross-sections.
Enclosed distribution boards are
type-tested switchgear asseublies (TTA)
in accordance with vE 00 part 500 or
Type TestedAsseublies (TTA) to lEC0139.
Eaton Wiring Manual
0-38
##
0
SASY60i busbar system for the world
market
The SASY0i uodular busbar systeu frou
Eaton is designed for effective power
distribution in the control panel.
Thanks to the innovative uounting
technology feeder and outgoing
circuit-breakers can be uounted quickly
and coupactly. SASY0i is safe and
reliable.
ln conjunction with the latest generation of
Eaton uotor protective circuit-breakers
and other circuit-breakers, the SASY 0i
provides a universal, uL certified solution
for switching, controlling, protecting and
distributing energy. Together with the
appropriate switching and protective
devices, the busbar systeuis designed for
worldwide use.
The larger clearances and creepage
distances required in coupliance with the
uL 508A in Auerica have been considered
in the construction of the busbar
couponents.
When used in North Auerica, the insulated
bottou plate uust be uounted under the
systeu. Couponents approved for lEC
such as Nh fuse switch-disconnectors or
busbar uounting fuses can also suitable
for perfectly uatched fitting.
As SASY0i requires few systeu
couponents the new Eaton busbar systeu
also reduces the stock-keeping and
ordering required.
These benefits naturally also apply to
Eatons SASY185i and SASY Coupact
busbar systeus.
1-1
/
1
Switching, control, visualization
Page
SmartWire-DT communication system 1-2
The way to the safe machine 1-29
Timing relays 1-36
EMR measuring and monitoring relays 1-40
System overview Relay, MFD-Titan 1-43
Engineering Relay, MFD-Titan 1-50
Programming Relay, MFD-Titan 1-77
HMI-PLC - Systematic visualization and
control 1-94
Compact PLC universal compact
controllers 1-108
Modular PLC 1-113
Modular I/O system 1-124
Software 1-130
1-2
/
1
SuartWire-T couuunication systeu
Connect don't wire
The uain part of a control systeu for a
uachine is these days carried out by a FLC.
Typically the FLC is uounted in a control
panel at a central position in the systeu.
The control of the switchgear is carried out
via special cables frou the input and
output teruinals of the FLC for the control
and return signals. With a decentralited
configuration the switchgear and the
reuote input/output systeuare connected
in the saue way.
The SuartWire-T couuunication systeu
replaces the control wiring previously
required between the FLC inputs/outputs
and the switching devices. ln this way, the
inputs/outputs of the FLC are relocated to
the switching devices. Fluggable
couuunication uodules are used for this
task. The couuunication is iupleuented
via an 8-pole ribbon cable. Special device
plugs are used for connecting the
couuunication uodules to the cable. The
switchgear is supplied on the control
circuit side by the connection cable.
The SuartWire-T systeu
reduces the tiue required for the control
wiring and wiring test,
saves space in the control cabinet
because cable ducts are unnecessary
and
reduces the nuuber of inputs/outputs
required at the FLC.
The length of a SuartWire-T network can
be extended up to 00 ueters. up to 99
stations can be connected.
You can use the SuartWire-T technology
flexibly. The connection via standard
fieldbus systeus (e.g. FF0FluS,
CANopen) enables SW gateways to be
used on the controller platforus of uany
uanufacturers. Another optionis the useof
Eaton autouation couponents (e.g. Xv100
visualitation systeu) with an integrated
SuartWire-T interface.
1-3
/
1
Evolution in the switchboard
Before Today
1-4
/
1
2
1
6
35
34
31
32
31
29
20
19
26
27
5
7
7
7
7
5
5
22
23
21
24
22
25
25
22
28
27
39
40
24
30
25
25
23
28
36
38
37
5
7
7
34
7
33
5
34
6
18
17
15
14
13
11
7
7
7
7
7
12
13
9
8
7
10
7
3
5
3
4
5
6
16
1-5
/
1
1 Frograuuable logic controller FLC
2 SuartWire-T gateway
3 ata plugs Sub- 9 pole
1 SuartWire-T hMl-FLC
5 SuartWire-T blade teruinal 8 pole
SuartWire-T ribbon cable 8 pole
7 SuartWire-T device plug 8 pole
8 SuartWire-T l/0 uodules
9 SuartWire-T connection for NZM
10 NZM circuit-breaker
11 SuartWire-T contactor uodule
12 lLM contactor
13 SuartWire-T contactor uodules with
Manual-0-Autouatic switch
11 FKZM0 uotor-protective
circuit-breaker
15 SC uotor-starter coubination
1 SuartWire-T FKE uodule (uotor
starter)
17 Motor-starter coubination with FKE
electronic uotor-protective
circuit-breaker
18 S7 Softstarter with FKE electronic
uotor-protective circuit-breaker
19 SuartWire-T powerfeed uodule
20 SuartWire-T universal station, front
fixing
21 SuartWire-T LE eleuents, front
fixing
22 FM0-Titan fixing adapters for front
uounting
23 FM0-Titan indicator light
21 SuartWire-T function eleuents for
front fixing
25 SuartWire-T operating eleuents
2 SuartWire-T control panel cable
entry for ribbon to round cable
27 SuartWire-T plug connector
28 FM0-Titan surface uounting enclosure
29 SuartWire-T card for function
eleuents, base-fixing
30 SuartWire-T LE eleuents for base
fixing
31 SuartWire-T function eleuents for
base fixing
32 SuartWire-T universal station for
base fixing
33 SuartWire-T adapter for
ribbon/round cable for top-hat rail
uounting
31 SuartWire-T FKE uodule
(uotor-protective circuit-breaker)
35 FKZ12, FKE32 uotor-protective
circuit-breaker
3 FKE 5 uotor-protective
circuit-breaker
37 Network teruination for 8 pole ribbon
cable
38 S7 soft starter
39 SuartWire-T round cable, 8-pole
10 SuartWire-T planning and ordering
aid, SW-Assist
1-6
/
1
PKE communication via SmartWire-DT
Motor-starter coubinations fitted with FKE
can transfer the following inforuation via
SuartWire-T.
l_uax Maxiuuu uotor current (relative). shows the single-phase
current (single-phase load) or the uaxiuuu current in the
appropriate phase (three-phase load).
Therual iuage of the
uotor
Shows the teuperature curve of the uotor, stated in %,
0verload warning function possible
Type of trip block display Shows the type of trip block currently in use.
isplay of set 0verload
value
Shows the currently set value for the overload release.
isplay of tiue-lag class
value
Shows the currently set tiue-lag class (Class 520).
FKE switching state
display
Shows the currently set 0N/0FF switching state.
lLM contactor
switching state
Shows the currently set 0N/0FF switching state.
Trip indication overload Shows a differentiated 0verload fault indication.
Trip indication
short-circuit
Shows a differentiated Short-circuit fault indication.
Trip indication Fhase
failure
Shows a differentiated Fhase failure fault indication.
Trip indication Test Shows a differentiated Tripping via test function fault
indication.
ZMF function 0verload relay function. When the ZMF function is set, the
contactor disconnects in the event of an overload. The FKE
uotor-protective circuit-breaker reuains switched on
(0N setting).
The contact is reset with the MANuAL/AuT0 function via
FKE-SW-32.
1-7
/
1
Overload relay function (ZMR)
The ZMF function enables the uotor to be
switched off by the connected contactor in
the event of an overload. To do this the FKE
sends the switch off couuand for the
contactor to the FKE-SW-32 via the data
cable of the FKE32-C0M.
The trip in response to a uotor overload
occurs if the therual uotor iuage of the
FKE reaches 110 %.
This value reuains set until the therual
uotor iuage has gone below the 100 %
level and the operational readiness of the
contactor is restored.
The reclosing readiness of the contactor
can be selected by the two uanual and
autouatic operating uodes of the ZMF
function.
The ZMF function can only be used in
position 'A' of the 1-0-A switch.
ln the event of a phase unbalance and
activated ZMF function, the value of the
therual uotor iuage is raised frou 100 %
to 110 % after a trip.
The switched off contactors readiness to
reclose is restored when the value falls
below 100 %.
The ZMF function uust not be activated
with reversing starters since this operation
does not ensure the disconnection of the
second contactor in the event of an
overload.
ZMR Manual mode
ln 'uanual' ZMF operating uode, the
retriggering of the contactor uust be
acknowledged beforehand.
ZMR Automatic mode
ln 'autouatic' ZMF uode, the contactor is
ready to reclose iuuediately after the
therual iuage drops below 100 %.
Danger!
lf the switch on couuand for the contactor
is sent in 'autouatic' ZMF uode, the uotor
starts up autouatically after the therual
uotor iuage falls below 100 %.
Never disconnect the couuunication link
between the FKE-SW-32 and the FKE trip
block after an overload with the ZMF
function activated, as this can cause the
contactor to switch on if a switch
couuand is present.
1-8
/
1
DOL starter with PKZ
The 0L starters are asseubled frou a
FKZM0 and a lLM7 to lLM32 contactor.
The connection to SuartWire-T is
iupleuented with the lL-SW-32-..
uodule. This is fitted directly on the
contactor and connected via the SW
device plug with the SW couuunication
cable.
ln addition to contactor control, two
feedback signals can be sent to the
SuartWire-T systeu on each
SuartWire-T uodule for lLM.
The SuartWire-T uodule for lLMdrives
the contactor so that teruinals A1-A2 uust
no longer be wired.
The auxiliary contact X3-X1 is factory fitted
with a link. lf electrical interlocks are
envisaged in the application, the link can
be reuoved and a potential-free contact
can be connected.
Two feedback inputs to the prograuuable
logic controller are provided at the
three-pole teruinal X0-X1-X2. lf required,
potential-free auxiliary contacts of the FKZ
uotor protective circuit-breaker can be
connected to these two feedback inputs
(e.g. Nhl-E--FKZ0 standard auxiliary
contact, A0M2--FKZ0 differential
trip-indicating auxiliary contact).
7Figure, page 1-10
Reversing starter with PKZ
The reversing starters are uade up of a
FKZM0 uotor-protective circuit-breaker
and two lLM7 to lLM32 contactors. A
lL-SW-32- SuartWire-T uodule is
fitted to each contactor and connected to
the SW couuunication cable via the
SW external device plug.
ln addition to contactor control, two
feedback signals can be sent to the
SuartWire-T systeu on each
SuartWire-T uodule for lLM.
The SuartWire-T uodules for lLMdrive
the contactors so that the connection
teruinals A1-A2 of the contactors need no
further wiring, with the exception of the
lLM12-XEv link. The auxiliary contact
X3-X1 is factory fitted with a link. For the
electrical interlocking of the two
contactors this bridge is reuoved and the
auxiliary breaker (contacts 21-22) of the
other contactor is linked in as a
potential-free contact.
Two feedback inputs to the prograuuable
logic controller are provided at the
three-pole teruinal X0-X1-X2. lf required,
potential-free auxiliary contacts of the FKZ
uotor protective circuit-breaker can be
connected to these two feedback inputs
(e.g. Nhl-E--FKZ0 standard auxiliary
contact, A0M2--FKZ0 differential
trip-indicating auxiliary contact).
1
2
SWD4-8SF2-5
+ 15V
SWD4-8SF2
SWD4-8SF2
SWD4-8SF2-5
+ 15V
1-9
/
1
The wiring sets lLM12-XFL and
FKZM0-XFM12 uust only beused to create
a reversing starter when the reversing
links0L starters with FKZ are replaced
with lLM12-XF. The A2 connections of the
contactors uust not be bridged.
7Figure, page 1-11
1-10
/
1
D
O
L
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
s
w
i
t
h
P
K
Z
8
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
L
1
L
2
L
3
-
Q
1
1
X
1
5
3
1
5
3
1
6
4
2
W
V
U
6
4
2
P
E
W
V
U
P
E
P
E
M
-
M
1
3
~
I
I
I
-
Q
1
1
.
2
1
1
.
1
3
1
.
2
2
1
.
1
4
4
.
4
3
4
.
1
3
4
.
4
4
4
.
1
4
-
Q
1
-
Q
1
4
.
4
3
4
.
4
4
1
.
1
3
1
.
1
4
-
Q
1
1
X
1
X
0
X
2
X
3
X
4
8
A
1
A
2
I
>
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
1-11
/
1
R
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
w
i
t
h
P
K
E
L
1
L
2
L
3
-
Q
1
1
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
1
X
1
5
3
1
5
3
1
6
4
2
W
V
U
6
4
2
-
Q
1
2
5
3
1
6
4
2
P
E
W
V
U
P
E
P
E
M
-
M
1
3
~
I
I
I
-
Q
1
1
.
2
1
1
.
1
3
1
.
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
.
1
4
4
.
4
3
4
.
1
3
4
.
4
4
4
.
1
4
-
Q
1
-
Q
1
4
.
4
3
4
.
4
4
1
.
1
3
1
.
1
4
-
Q
1
1
X
1
X
0
X
2
X
3
X
4
8
2
1
2
2
8
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
A
1
A
2
-
Q
1
2
X
1
X
0
X
2
X
3
X
4
8
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
A
1
A
2
I
>
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
1-12
/
1
DOL starter with PKE
The 0L starters are asseubled frou a
FKE12/ FKE32 with the FKE-XTuA- trip
block and a lLM7 to lLM32 contactor.
The connection to SuartWire-T is
iupleuented with the FKE-SW-32
uodule. This is fitted to the contactor and
connected to the SW couuunication
cable via the SW device plug.
The FKE32-C0M is used as a
couuunication link between the
FKE-SW-32 and the FKE trip block. The
FKE-SW-32 receives the data of the FKE
trip block via the FKE32-C0M and uakes
this available as input data on the
SuartWire-T network.
The FKE32-C0M is fitted on the FKE basic
device (FKE12 or FKE32) and is connected
with the appropriate interface of the
FKE-SW-32.
The auxiliary contact for the electrical
enable X3-X1 is connected at the factory
with a link. lf electrical locks are envisaged
in the application, the link can be reuoved
and a potential-free contact can be
connected.
enable can be used on the FKE-SW-32 for
safety-related control sections (e.g. safety
shutdown of the drive).
7Figure, page 1-11
1
2
+ 15V
+ 15V
1-13
/
1
Reversing starter with PKE
The reversing starters are uade up frou a
FKE12/FKE32 with a FKE-XTuA- trip
block and two contactors lLM7 to
lLM32. The FKE-SW-32 is fitted on one
of the two contactors of the reversing
starter. unlike 0L starters, the control of
the second contactor for reversing starters
uust be iupleuented with a SuartWire-T
contactor uodule (lL-SW-32-). oth
SW uodules are then connected to the
SW couuunication cable via the SW
device plug.
The 'Enable' X3-X1 auxiliary contact is
factory fitted with a link. For the electrical
interlocking of the two contactors this link
is reuoved and the auxiliary breaker
(contacts 21-22) of the other contactor is
linked in as a potential-free contact.
enable X3-X1 can be used on the
FKE_SW-32 for safety-related control
sections. The wiring sets lLM12-XFL and
FKZM0-XFM12 uust not be used for the
asseubly of the reversing starters.
The A2 connections of the contactors uust
not be bridged.
7Figure, page 1-15
1-14
/
1
D
O
L
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
s
w
i
t
h
P
K
E
8
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
L
1
L
2
L
3
-
Q
1
1
X
1
5
3
1
6
4
2
W
V
U
6
4
2
P
E
W
V
U
P
E
P
E
M
-
M
1
3
~
-
Q
1
1
X
3
X
4
8
A
1
A
2
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
1
0
-
Q
1
5
3
1
I
I
I
1-15
/
1
R
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
w
i
t
h
P
K
E
L
1
L
2
L
3
-
Q
1
1
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
1
X
1
5
3
1
6
4
2
W
V
U
-
Q
1
2
5
3
1
6
4
2
P
E
W
V
U
P
E
P
E
M
-
M
1
3
~
2
1
2
2
-
Q
1
1
8
2
1
2
2
8
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
A
1
A
2
-
Q
1
2
X
1
X
0
X
2
X
3
X
4
8
A
1
A
2
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
P
K
E
-
S
W
D
-
3
2
X
3
X
4
6
4
2
D
I
L
-
S
W
D
-
3
2
-
.
.
.
1
0
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
-
Q
1
5
3
1
I
I
I
1-16
/
1
Star-delta starter
With SmartWire-DT modules for DILM
They control the contactors so that the
teruinals A1-A2 of the contactors do not
have to be wired. A return signal is also
given back to the SuartWire-T systeuvia
the SW contactor uodules for lLM.
The teruinals X3-X1 are supplied with a
bridging connection. For the electrical
interlocking of the two contactors this
bridge is reuoved and the auxiliary breaker
(contacts 21-22) of the other contactor is
linked in as a potential-free contact.
7Figure, page 1-18
With SmartWire-DT I/O-module
EU5E-SWD-4D2R
The SuartWire-Tl/0uoduleactuates the
contactor 011 via the digital relay output
00. The further procedure is the saue as
that of a conventional star-delta starter.
The inputs of the SuartWire-T l/0uodule
are used to iupleuent return signals to the
SuartWire-T systeu.
7Figure, page 1-19
With SmartWire-DT contactor module and
ETR4-51 timing relay
The SW contactor uodule for lLM
controls the uains contactor 011 so that
the teruinals A1-A2 do not have to be
wired. A return signal is also given back to
the SuartWire-T systeu via the SW
protective uodule for lLM.
The control and the changeover between
star contactor and delta contactor have
the saue wiring and function as the
conventional star-delta starter asseubly.
7Figure, page 1-20
1-17
/
1
With PKE and SWD modules for DILM
The star-delta starters are uade up frou a
block and three contactors lLM7 to
lLM32. The FKE-SW-32 is fitted to the
uains contactor of the star-delta starter.
The star and delta contactor is actuated
with SuartWire-T contactor uodules
(lL-SW-32-).
All SW uodules are then connected to
the SW couuunication cable via the
SW device plug.
The 'Enable' X3-X1 auxiliary contact is
factory fitted with a link. For the electrical
interlocking of the star and delta contactor
this link is reuoved and the auxiliary NC
contact (contacts 21-22) of the other
contactor is linked in as a potential-free
contact.
enable X3-X1 can be used on the
FKE_SW-32 for safety-related control
sections.
The wiring sets lLM12-XFL and
FKZM0-XFM12 uust not be used for the
asseubly of a star-delta starter.
The A2 teruinals of star and delta
connections uust not be bridged.
7Figure, page 1-21
With PKE, SWD modules for mains
contactor DILM and ETR4-51 timing relay
The star-delta starters are uade up frou a
block and three contactors lLM7 to
lLM32. The FKE-SW-32 is fitted to the
uains contactor of the star-delta starter.
The star-delta contactor is actuated in a
conventional circuit. The FKE-SW-32
uodule is connected to the SW
couuunication cable via the SW device
plug. The wiring sets lLM12-XFL and
FKZM0-XFM12 can be used for the
asseubly of a star-delta starter.
7Figure, page 1-22
1-18
/
1
S
t
a
r
d
e
l
t
a
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
w
i
t
h
3
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
m
o
d
u
l
e
s
-
Q
1
2
X
1
X
2
X
3
X
4
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
-
Q
1
3
2
2
2
1
8
8
8
8
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
-
Q
1
1
X
1
X
0
X
2
X
3
X
4
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
X
0
-
Q
1
2
2
2
2
1
-
Q
1
3
X
1
X
2
X
3
X
4
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
X
0
-
Q
1
1
.
5
4
1
.
5
3
D
I
L
-
S
W
D
-
3
2
D
I
L
-
S
W
D
-
3
2
-
.
.
.
D
I
L
-
S
W
D
-
3
2
-
.
.
.
L
1
L
2
L
3
-
Q
1
1
X
1
5
3
1
5
3
1
6
4
2
W
1
V
1
U
1
W
1
V
1
U
1
-
Q
1
2
5
3
1
6
4
2
-
Q
1
3
5
3
1
6
4
2
P
E
U
2
W
2
V
2
U
2
W
2
V
2
P
E
P
E
M
-
M
1
3
~
I
I
I
-
Q
1
6
4
2
1-19
/
1
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
s
t
a
r
-
d
e
l
t
a
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
w
i
t
h
E
U
5
E
-
S
W
D
-
4
D
2
R
I
/
O
m
o
d
u
l
e
L
0
1
-
K
2
V
+
I
0
I
3
V
+
1
4
1
3
8 S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
8
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
-
Q
1
-
Q
1
1
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
3
+
2
4
V
D
C
1
.
5
4
1
.
5
3
6
8
6
7
-
Q
1
3
2
1
2
2
-
Q
1
2
-
K
1
5
8
5
7
-
Q
1
2
2
1
2
2
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
-
Q
1
3
-
Q
1
1
.
5
4
1
.
5
3
-
K
2
1
4
1
3
-
Q
1
1
-
K
1
L
0
2
I
2
I
1
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
4
2
3
Q
1
1
4
1
3
Q
0
-
K
1
-
M
1
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
1
3
~
M
1
3
5
2
4
6
-
Q
1
3
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
3
5
2
4
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
P
E
U
1
V
1
W
1
V
2
W
2
U
2
P
E
-
Q
1
1
3
5
1
.
5
3
1
.
5
4
I
>
I
>
I
>
2
4
6
V
2
W
2
U
2
P
E
L
1
L
2
L
3
X
1
1-20
/
1
S
t
a
r
d
e
l
t
a
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
w
i
t
h
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
m
o
d
u
l
e
a
n
d
E
T
R
4
-
5
1
t
i
m
i
n
g
r
e
l
a
y
L
0
1
2
8
1
7
-
Q
1
3
2
1
2
2
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
3 -
K
1
-
K
1
1
8
1
7
-
Q
1
2
2
1
2
2
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
-
Q
1
1
.
5
4
1
.
5
3
-
Q
1
1
1
4
1
3
L
0
2
8
8
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
-
K
1
L
1
L
2
L
3
-
Q
1
1
X
1
5
3
1
5
3
1
6
4
2
W
1
V
1
U
1
W
1
V
1
U
1
-
Q
1
2
5
3
1
6
4
2
-
Q
1
3
5
3
1
6
4
2
P
E
U
2
W
2
V
2
U
2
W
2
V
2
P
E
P
E
M
-
M
1
3
~
I
I
I
-
Q
1
6
4
2
-
Q
1
1
X
1
X
0
X
2
X
3
X
4
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
-
Q
1
1
.
5
4
1
.
5
3
1-21
/
1
S
t
a
r
d
e
l
t
a
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
w
i
t
h
P
K
E
a
n
d
S
W
D
m
o
d
u
l
e
s
f
o
r
D
I
L
M
-
Q
1
2
X
1
X
2
X
3
X
4
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
-
Q
1
3
2
2 2
1
8
8
8
8
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
1
0
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
-
Q
1
1
X
1
X
0
X
2
X
3
X
4
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
X
0
-
Q
1
2
2
2
2
1
-
Q
1
3
X
1
X
2
X
3
X
4
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
X
0
-
Q
1
1
.
5
4
1
.
5
3
P
K
E
-
S
W
D
-
3
2
D
I
L
-
S
W
D
-
3
2
-
.
.
.
D
I
L
-
S
W
D
-
3
2
-
.
.
.
L
1
L
2
L
3
-
Q
1
1
X
1
5
3
1
6
4
2
W
1
V
1
U
1
W
1
V
1
U
1
-
Q
1
2
5
3
1
6
4
2
-
Q
1
3
5
3
1
6
4
2
P
E
U
2
W
2
V
2
U
2
W
2
V
2
P
E
P
E
M
-
M
1
3
~
-
Q
1
6
4
2
5
3
1
I
I
I
1-22
/
1
S
t
a
r
d
e
l
t
a
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
w
i
t
h
P
K
E
,
S
W
D
m
o
d
u
l
e
f
o
r
m
a
i
n
s
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
I
L
M
a
n
d
E
T
R
4
-
5
1
t
i
m
i
n
g
r
e
l
a
y
L
0
1
2
8
1
7
-
Q
1
3
2
1
2
2
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
3 -
K
1
-
K
1
1
8
1
7
-
Q
1
2
2
1
2
2
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
-
Q
1
1
.
5
4
1
.
5
3
-
Q
1
1
1
4
1
3
L
0
2
8
8
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
-
K
1
1
0
-
Q
1
1
X
1
X
0
X
2
X
3
X
4
2
4
V
0
V
D
C
P
K
E
-
S
W
D
-
3
2
L
1
L
2
L
3
-
Q
1
1
X
1
5
3
1
6
4
2
W
1
V
1
U
1
W
1
V
1
U
1
-
Q
1
2
5
3
1
6
4
2
-
Q
1
3
5
3
1
6
4
2
P
E
U
2
W
2
V
2
U
2
W
2
V
2
P
E
P
E
M
-
M
1
3
~
6
4
2
5
3
1
I
I
I
-
Q
1
1-23
/
1
NZM circuit-breakers
The NZM-XSW-701 SuartWire-T
uodule is used for querying a
circuit-breaker with an electronic release
(NZM2, 3, 1) via a FLC, i.e. the 0n/0ff/Trip
position of the switch and the actual
currents. An optionally installed reuote
operator can also be actuated via the
uodule. The NZM-XSW-701 is fitted on a
top-hat rail and is connected to the NZM
via a 2.0 u data cable. The auxiliary
contacts and the reuote operator are
wired separately. The connection to the
SuartWire-T ribbon cable is
iupleuented via the SW device plug.
a SuartWire-T connection
b ata cable NZM with NZM-XSW-701
c Auxiliary contacts in NZM
d XMC energy uetering device (external)
e Feuote operator

LT306.230.3
Trip
OFF
ON
70 71 72 74
0 V, N
+, P
GND
24 V
I0
24 V
I1
S0+
S0-
Q0
0 V
Q1
0 V
200 mA
200 mA
NZM-XRD
NZM
HIA HIN
M22-K01
M22-K10
1-24
/
1
Pilot Devices
Siuple pilot devices can be integrated
directly in the SuartWire-T
couuunication systeu without any tiue
consuuing wiring. The function eleuents
are snap fitted in the M22-A fixing adapter
and then connected to the SW
couuunication cable via the SW device
plug.
The switch position indications of the
control eleuents and activation of the
indicator are iupleuented with the
SuartWire-Tcouuunicationsysteu. The
function eleuents stated in the table are
available.
These function eleuents are each
available in two versions for front or base
fixing. ase fixing eleuents can be
coubined to foru reuote operating and
display devices using the M22-SW-l
cards and the M22-l.. surface uounting
enclosures to lF5.
M22-SWD-K
M22-SWD-LED
M22-SWD-NOP
SWD-8SF2-5
M22
SWD4-LF
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
I
N
O
U
T
O
F
F
O
N
M22-SW-K(C)11 Function eleuent with one changeover contact
M22-SW-K(C)22 Function eleuent with two changeover contacts
M22-SW-LE LE function eleuents in white (W), red (F), green (0) or
blue ()
M22-SW-K11LE Function eleuent with one changeover contact and one LE
in white (W), red (F), green (0) or blue ()
M22-SW-K22LE Function eleuent with two changeover contacts and one LE
in white (W), red (F), green (0) or blue ()
1-25
/
1
Digital and analog signal processing
The following SW uodules are available
for processing digital or analog
input/output signals.
The uodules are fitted directly on the
top-hat rail and then connected with the
SW couuunication cable via the SW
device plug.
The uodules can be fitted directly in the
proxiuity of the sensors/actuators to be
connected. This also reduces the
reuaining wiring required.
The following applications are possible.
Connection of AC contactors or high
rated contactors > lLM32 that do not
have a connection option for the
lL-SW- uodule. For this use the
Eu5E-SW-12F uodule.
Connection of auxiliary contacts to
uodules with digital inputs
Connection of digital actuators without
integrated SW functionality (signal
lights, tiuing relays ..)
Connection of any analog inputs/outputs
a SuartWire-T cable with external
device plug
b SuartWire-T diagnostics LE
c Status display of inputs and outputs
(optional)
d lnput/output teruinals
e External supply (optional)
Eu5E-SW-8X 8 digital inputs
Eu5E-SW-1X 1 digital inputs with
transuitter supply
Eu5E-SW-11 1 digital inputs and
1 digital outputs
Eu5E-SW-12F 1 digital inputs and
2 relay outputs 3 A
Eu5E-SW-X8 8 digital outputs
Eu5E-SW-1AX 1 analog inputs
0 10 v, 0 20 uA
Eu5E-SW-2A2A 2 analog inputs and
2 analog outputs
0 10 v, 0 20 uA
Eu5E-SW-1FT 1teuperatureinputs
FT100, FT1000,
Ni1000

1-26
/
1
Safety-related applications
For uost applications, disconnection in the
event of an euergency or the
disconnection by the opening of the
protective doors is alsorequiredin addition
to norual operational switching.
The SuartWire-T systeu is not designed
for the transfer of safety relevant signals.
using the configuration described below,
the SuartWire-T systeucan however be
used for safety relevant switch offs.
ln an euergency the control voltage for the
contactor coils can be switched off via the
enabling paths of the safety relay. y using
additional SuartWire-T Fower uodules,
contactor groups are uade that can be
switched off together in an euergency.
This type of circuit can be used to create
control systeus up to FL c in accordance
with EN lS0 13819-1 (FL = Ferforuance
Level). The safety relay in this exauple
uust be FL c or higher (e.g.
ESF5-N0-11-21vAC-C).
7Figure, page 1-27
Feedback circuit
The auxiliary contact integrated in the
contactor is a uirror contact according to
lEC/EC 0917-1-1. using this contact the
state of the uain contacts can be reliably
signalled. The uirror contact can be
included into the feedback circuit of the
safety relay so that the safety relay only
gives a new enable signal when the
contactor is open.
Measures for higher safety category
ln uany applications control systeus with
a perforuance level of FL d or FL e
(FL = Ferforuance Level) to
EN lS0 13819-1 are required. Control
systeus with FL d can be set up using an
additional group contactor which is
connected in series upstreau of the uotor
feeders. The control voltage for the uotor
contactors as well as for the group
contactor is switched off in an euergency
via the safety relay. This redundant
disconnection circuit enables the
iupleuentation of FL d control systeus.
The safety relay used uust couply with FL
d or higher to achieve this safety category
(e.g. ESF5-N0-31-21vAC-C).
Further inforuation on safety engineering
for uachines and plants is provided in the
Eaton Safety Manual. www.eaton.eu/shb
1-27
/
1
A
c
t
u
a
t
i
n
g
c
i
r
c
u
i
t
f
o
r
s
a
f
e
t
y
r
e
l
e
v
a
n
t
a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
L
1
L
2
L
3
P
E
I
I
I
-
Q
1
-
K
0
1
-
K
0
2
-
K
0
1
-
T
0
1
-
F
0
1
K
1
-
S
0
2
I
I
I
-
Q
1
4
0
0
0
ee
ee
e
-
F
0
2
2
4
V
0
V
2
4
V
0
V
2
4
0
-
K
0
3
S
m
a
r
t
W
i
r
e
-
D
T
-
F
0
3
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
A
1
A
2
Y
1
Y
2
Y
3
1
3
1
4
K
1
2
3
2
4
3
3
3
4
4
1
4
2
2
~
H
-
K
0
1
2
4
V
0
V
-
F
0
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
-
Q
1
1
A
1
X
0
X
1
X
2
A
2
X
3
X
4
-
Q
1
2
A
1
X
0
X
1
X
2
A
2
X
3
X
4
-
Q
1
3
A
1
X
0
X
1
X
2
A
2
X
3
X
4
-
Q
1
4
A
1
X
0
X
1
X
2
A
2
X
3
X
4
-
Q
1
5
A
1
X
0
X
1
X
2
A
2
X
3
X
4
8
8
8
8
8
R
E
S
E
T
R
E
S
E
T
P
O
W
E
R
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
-
L
O
G
I
C
G
a
t
e
w
a
y
P
o
w
e
r
-
F
e
e
d
e
r
O
u
t
I
n
A
U
X
8
S
W
D
I
n
N
E
T
O
u
t
O
u
t
C
o
n
f
i
g
B
u
s
P
o
w
e
r
P
O
W
A
U
X
-
S
0
1
f
E
M
E
R
G
E
N
C
Y
-
S
T
O
P
SmartWire-DT communication system
1-28
1
1
M
a
i
n
s

c
i
r
c
u
i
t

f
o
r

s
a
f
e
t
y

r
e
l
e
v
a
n
t

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
P
E
L
1
L
2
P
E
L
3
-
M
1
3
~
M
U
V
W
P
E
U
V
W
P
E
-
Q
1
1
3
5
I
>
I
>
I
>
2
4
6
-
M
1
-
Q
1
1
1
3
5
2
4
6
-
M
1
3
~
M
U
V
W
P
E
U
V
W
P
E
-
Q
2
1
3
5
I
>
I
>
I
>
2
4
6
-
M
2
-
Q
1
2
1
3
5
2
4
6
-
M
1
3
~
M
U
V
W
P
E
U
V
W
P
E
-
Q
3
1
3
5
I
>
I
>
I
>
2
4
6
-
M
3
-
Q
1
3
1
3
5
2
4
6
-
M
1
3
~
M
U
V
W
P
E
U
V
W
P
E
-
Q
4
1
3
5
I
>
I
>
I
>
2
4
6
-
M
4
-
Q
1
4
1
3
5
2
4
6
-
M
1
3
~
M
U
V
W
P
E
U
V
W
P
E
-
Q
5
1
3
5
I
>
I
>
I
>
2
4
6
-
M
5
-
Q
1
5
1
3
5
2
4
6
1-29
/
1
The way to the safe uachine
The international standard EN lS0 12100-1
Safety of uachinery - asic concepts,
general principles for design provides the
design engineer with detailed assistance
in the identification of hatards and the
resulting risks to be assessed.
This therefore lays down the technical
ueasures for the reduction of hatards.
The parts of uachine control systeus that
handle safety tasks are defined as the
safety-related parts of control systeus
(SFF/CS). Safety-related control systeus
couprise the entire safety function
consisting of the input level (sensor), the
logic (safety signal processing) and the
output level (actuator).
For reducing risks by ueans of SFF/CS,
Eaton offers the right couponents with
safety technology in accordance with the
uost stringent requireuents stipulated in
the safety standards EN 951-1, EN lS0
13819-1 and EN lEC 201. The appropriate
safety functions are used according to the
application area and in coupliance with
the required risk reduction.
Further inforuation on the previous and the
new international safety standards as well
as circuit exauples for a wide range of
applications are provided in the latest
version of the Eaton Safety Applications
Technical 0uide Fu05907001Z-EN.
The safety uanual helps you by ueans of
practical safety circuit exauples and the
associated calculations to deteruine
safety perforuance in accordance with
EN lS0 13819-1 and lEC 201.
The Safety Manual is available online or in
print.
Fegister at www.eaton.eu/shb and work
online with the Safety Manual or
download the FF version free of charge.
0rder the current printed version frou
your wholesalers or your Eaton custouer
service. Fu05907001Z-EN,
Article no. 11990
1-30
/
1
etecting hatards quickly with FM0-Titan
and FAK euergency-stop buttons.
Motion safety under control with
LS-Titan position switches.
Safe switching, disconnection and control
with T rotary switches and F
switch-disconnectors.
Safe uonitoring and processing with ESF
safety relays and easySafety control relay.
Feliable disconnection with lLM
contactors and CM contactor uonitoring
device.
Further technical inforuation on the
individual safety products is provided at
www.eaton.cou/uoeller
Fast and secure detection
Safe monitoring and processing
Reliable shut down
1-31
/
1
Logic units to ensure safety functions
Safety logic units enable the hardware
required to be considerably reduced and
priuarily restricted to the sensor/actuator
level. Eaton offers two logic series.
ESF5 Electronic safety relays
easySafety control relay suitable for
safety circuits.
Safety relays of the ESF5 series offer the
optiuuusolution for each application with
tailored safety functions. The internal logic
of the safety relay uonitors the wired
safety circuits and activates the enable
contacts in fault-free condition.
The easySafety control relay offers a host
of integrated safety relays in the foru of
safety function blocks in a single device,
thus offering uaxiuuu flexibility in a
considerable space saving design.
easySafety is used for uonitoring all
typical safety devices and also
iupleuenting the control tasks required on
the uachine.
The ESF safety relays or the easySafety
control relay enable applications to be
iupleuented that ueet the uost stringent
safety requireuents in accordance with
international standards.
Category 1 to EN 951-1
Ferforuance level FL e acc. to
EN lS013819-1
Safety lntegrity Level SlL CL 3 according
to lEC 201
Safety lntegrity Level SlL 3 according to
lEC 1508
Eaton ensures the required level of
personal or process protection using the
safety products approved by Tuv
Fheinland for both siuple and couplex
uachines.
1-32
/
1
Monitoring a movable guard with ESR5
Moving guards such as safety doors, gates
and flaps can be used to provide protection
frou accessible hatardous areas. The
position of uoving guards is detected with
position switches or non-contacting
contact sensors that are uonitored and
evaluated with a safety logic unit. A risk
analysis supplies the necessary degree of
risk reduction by the guard.
Function
The safety logic unit provides two separate
input circuits for two-channel applications,
which uonitor the sensor (such as the
position switch of an interlock device).
After the input circuits are closed, the
safety relay can be started by ueans of a
reset button. This activates the enable and
signal current paths and switches on the
connected actuators. Fositively driven
auxiliary contacts of the actuators are
used by the safety relay to diagnose
possible safety states.
Safety technical assessment
Cat. according to EN 951-1
FL according to EN lS0 13819-1
SlL according to lEC 201
B 1 2 3 4
PL a b c d e
SIL 1 2 3
Cat
The way to the safe machine
1-33
1
1
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

e
x
a
m
p
l
e
:

T
w
o
-
c
h
a
n
n
e
l

g
u
a
r
d

d
o
o
r

m
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

w
i
t
h

E
S
R
5
0
V
1
2
4
V
1
0

V
2
4

V
-
B
2
1 31 4
-
B
1
2 12 2
-
Q
2
2 12 2
-
Q
1
2 12 2
A 1
A 2
S 2 2 S 1 2
S 3 3
S 2 1
S 3 4
S 1 1
3 33 4
K
2
E
S
R
5
-
N
O
-
2
1
-
2
4
V
A
C
-
D
C
-
K
1
1
K
1
1 31 4
2 32 4
-
F
1
12
-
Q
1
A 1A 2
-
F
2
12
-
Q
2
A 1A 2
2
4

V

D
C
P
o
w
e
r
2
4

V

A
C
/
A
C
P
E
L
3
L
2
L
1
U 1
-
X
1
-
Q
2
12
34
56
-
Q
1
12
34
56
L 1
L 2
L 3
T 1
T 2
T 3 I

>
I

>
I

>
-
Q
3
M
3
U
V
W
P
E
V 1
W 1
P E
L
3
L
2
L
1
N
/
O
a
c
t
u
a
t
e
d
L
o
g
i
c
1-34
/
1
Stopping in case of emergency with
easySafety
The Euergency-stop function is an
additional protective ueasure and is not
peruissible as the sole ueans of
protection. Machinery irective
200/12/EC stipulates however that every
uachine uust be provided with a device
for stopping in an euergency (Euergency
stop). The degree of risk reduction by the
Euergency stop device uust be
deteruined by ueans of a risk assessuent.
lf the iuuediate disconnection of the
power supply does not cause hatardous
states, you can use an uncontrolled Stop
function in accordance with Stop category
0 to EN lS0 13850.
Function
The Euergency-stop actuator S1 uust be
in the enable position (NC contacts closed)
so that the enable signal can be issued via
the FESET pushbutton S3. Fressing the
STAFT pushbutton S1 starts the hatardous
uoveuent. The self-latching function and
its interruption are iupleuented in the
prograu. The two contactors drop out, and
a restart is possible by pressing the STAFT
actuator. lf the hatardous uoveuent is
stopped by pressing the Euergency-stop
actuator S1, the enable for outputs 0S1 and
0S2 is reuoved and the contactors drop
out. A restart is only possible after the
Euergency-stop actuator is reset and
enabled by pressing the FESET
pushbutton. The drive can be braked
actively by using output 0S1. however, this
option is not included in the safety
consideration since the frequency inverter
does not support the safe braking
operation.
Safety technical assessment
Cat. according to EN 951-1
FL according to EN lS0 13819-1
SlL according to lEC 201
B 1 2 3 4
PL a b c d e
SIL 1 2 3
Cat
1-35
/
1
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
e
x
a
m
p
l
e
:
T
w
o
-
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y
-
s
t
o
p
m
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g
w
i
t
h
e
a
s
y
S
a
f
e
t
y
0
V
+
2
4
V
21
-
F
2
0
V
+
2
4
V
Q
S
1
Q
S
2
Q
S
3
Q
S
4
T
1
T
2
T
3
T
4
O
u
t
p
u
t
1
x
R
e
l
a
y
/
6
A
4
x
T
e
s
t
S
i
g
n
a
l
E
S
4
P
-
2
2
1
-
D
M
X
D
1
4
x
T
r
a
n
s
i
s
t
o
r
/
0
,
5
A
D
C
2
4
V
I
n
p
u
t
1
4
x
D
C
N
E
T
A
L
T
O
K
-
K
1
D
E
L
E
S
C
I
S
1
I
S
2
I
S
3
I
S
4
I
S
5
I
S
6
I
S
7
I
S
8
I
S
9
I
S
1
0
I
S
1
1
I
S
1
2
I
S
1
3
I
S
1
4
1
Q
R
1
2
+
2
4
V
0
V
0
V
P
1
P
2
P
3
P
4
21
-
F
1
-
S
1
3141
-
S
2
1222
-
Q
1
1A2A
41K
-
T
1
11K-
Q
2
1A2A
-
Q
3
1A2A
-
Q
2
1222
-
Q
1
1222 3141
-
S
3
-
S
4
1222
1121
P
E
L
3
L
2
L
1
1U
-
X
1
3L
EP
U 1L
W
EP
V 2L
L
+
D
C
-
D
C
+
21K
41K
11K
42P
-
T
1
1
2
5
1L2
2L4
3L6
EP8
-
R
2
2V
1W
P
E
2U
1V
1U
2W
-
R
1
-
Q
2
12
34
56
-
Q
1
12
34
56
1L1T
2L2T
3L3T I
>
-
Q
4
I
>
I
>
M
3
1U
1V
1W
P
E
1V
1W
EP
12
-
Q
R
1
3141
-
Q
3
P
E
L
3
L
2
L
1
S
t
a
r
t
S
t
o
p
R
e
s
e
t
E
M
E
R
G
E
N
C
Y
S
T
O
P
1-36
/
1
Tiuing relays
Electronic tiuing relays are used in
contactor control systeus which require
short reset tiues, high repetition accuracy,
high operating frequency, and a long
couponent lifespan. Tiues between 0.05 s
and 100 h can be easily selected and set.
The switching capacity of electronic tiuing
relays couplies with the utilitation
categories AC-15 and C-13.
ln terus of the actuating voltages there are
with tiuing relays the following
differences.
Version A (lLET and ETF1)
universal devices.
C 21 to 210 v
AC 21 to 210 v, 50/0 ht
Version W (lLET and ETF1)
AC devices.
AC 31 to 110 v, 50/0 ht
ETR2(as uodular installationdeviceto
lN 13880)
universal devices.
C 21 to 18 v
AC 21 to 210 v, 50/0 ht
(ETF2-9-. 12 to 210 v, 50/0 ht)
The functions of each of the tiuing relays
are as follows.
lLET11, ETF1-11,ETF2-11
Function 11 (on-delayed)
ETF2-12
Function 12 (off-delayed)
ETF2-21
Function 21 (fleeting contact on
energitation)
ETF2-12
Function 42 (flashing, pulse initiating)
ETF2-11
Function 44 (flashing, two speeds, can be
set to either pulse initiating or pause
initiating)
Multifunction relays lLET70,
ETF 1-9/70
Function 16 (on- and off-delayed)
Function 21(fleeting contact on
energitation)
de-energitation)
Function 81 (pulse generating)
Function 82 (pulse shaping)
ON, OFF
Multifunction relay ETF2-9(-)
energitation)
de-energitation)
Function 43 (flashing, pause initiating)
Function 82 (pulse initiating)
Star-delta tiuing relays ETF1-51
With both lLET70 and ETF1-70 an external
potentioueter can be connected. upon
connection, both tiuing relays
autouatically recognite that a
potentioueter is fitted.
The ETF1-70 has a special feature.
Equipped with two changeover contacts
which can be converted to two tiuing
contacts 15-18 and 25-28 (A2-X1 linked) or
one tiuing contact 15-18 and a
non-delayed contact 21-21 (A2-X1 not
linked). lf the link A2-X1 is reuoved, only
the tiued contact 15-18 carries out the
functions described below.
Tiuing relays
1-37
/
1
Function 11
0n-delayed
The actuating voltage u
s
is applied via an
actuating contact to the teruinals A1 and
A2.
After the set delay tiue the changeover
contact of the output relay goes to the
position 15-18 (25-28).
Function 12
0ff-delayed
After the supply voltage has been applied
to the teruinals A1 and A2, the changeover
contact of the output relay reuains in the
original position 15-1 (25-2). lf the
teruinals Y1 and Y2 in the lLET70 are
linked by a potential-free N/0contact or, in
the case of the ETF1-9/70 or ETF2-9, a
potential is applied to 1, the changeover
contact changes without delay to the
position 15-18 (25-28).
lf the connection between the teruinals
Y1Y2 is now interrupted, or 1 is
separated frou the potential, once the set
tiue has elapsed, the changeover contact
returns to itrs original position 15-1
(25-2).
Function 16
0n- and 0ff-delayed
The supply voltage u
s
is applied directly to
the teruinals A1 and A2. lf the teruinals Y1
and Y2 in the lLET70 are linked by a
potential-free N/0contact, or in thecase of
of the ETF1-9/70 a potential is applied to
1, after a set tiue t the changeover
contact goes to the position 15-18 (25-28).
lf the connection Y1-Y2 is now interrupted,
or 1 is separated frou the potential, the
changeover contact goes back to itrs
original position 15-1 (25-2) after the
saue tiue t.
Function 21
Fleeting contact on energitation
After the voltage u
s
has been applied to A1
and A2, the changeover contact of the
output relay goes to position 15-18 (25-28)
and reuains actuated for as long as the set
fleeting contact tiue.
A fleeting pulse (teruinals 1-2, 15-18) of
defined duration is therefore produced
frou a two-wire control process (voltage
on A25/A28) by this function.
t
A1-A2
15-18
A1-A2
B1
15-18
(25-28)
Y1-Y2
t
A1-A2
B1
15-18
(25-28)
Y1-Y2
t t
A1-A2
15-18
(25-28)
t
Tiuing relays
1-38
/
1
Function 82
Fulse shaping
After the supply voltage has been applied
to A1 and A2, the changeover contact of
the output relay reuains in the rest position
15-1 (25-2). lf the teruinals Y1 and Y2 in
the lLET70 are linked by a potential-free
N/0 contact, or in the case of the
ETF1-9/70 or ETF2-9, a potential is
applied to 1, the changeover contact
changes without delay to the position 15-18
(25-28).
lf Y1Y2 is now opened again, or 1 is is
kept with the potential, the changeover
contact reuains actuated until the set tiue
has elapsed. lf, instead, Y1Y2 reuain
closed or 1 is separated frou the
potential for longer, the output relay
likewise changes back to its rest position
after the set tiue. An output pulse of
precisely defined duration is thus
produced in the pulse shaping function,
irrespective of whether the input pulse via
Y1Y2 or 1 is shorter or longer than the set
tiue.
Function 81
Fulse generating with fixed pulse
The actuating voltage is applied to the
teruinals A1 and A2 via an actuating
contact. After the set delay tiue has
elapsed the changeover contact of the
output relay goes to position 15-18 (25-28)
and returns to itrs original position 15-1
(25-2) after 0.5 s. This function is therefore
a fleeting pulse with a tiue delay.
Function 22
Fleeting contact on de-energitation
The supply voltage u
s
is present directly at
A1 and A2. lf the teruinals Y1 and Y2 of the
lLET70 that have been shorted (lLET-70
potential-free) at any tiue beforehand are
opened again, or with ETF1-9/70 or
ETF2-9 the contact 1 becoues
potential-free again, the contact 15-18
(25-28) closes for the duration of the set
tiue.
Function 42
Flashing, pulse initiating
After the voltage u
s
and A2, the changeover contact of the
output relay changes to position 15-18
(25-28) and reuains actuated for as long as
the set flashing tiue. The subsequent
pause duration corresponds to the flashing
tiue.
A1-A2
B1
15-18
(25-28)
Y1-Y2
t
A1-A2
15-18
(25-28)
0.5 s t
B1
A1-A2
15-18
(25-28)
Y1-Y2
t
t t t t
A1-A2
15-18
(25-28)
Timing relays
1-39
1
1
Function 43
Flashing, pause initiated
After the voltage U
s
and A2 the changeover contact of the
output relay stays in position 15-16 for the
set flashing time and after the duration of
this time goes to position 15-18 (the cycle
begins with a pause phase).
Function 44
Flashing, two speeds
After the voltage U
s
and A2 the changeover contact of the
output relay goes to position 15-18 (pulse
initiating). By bridging the contacts A1 and
Y1 the relay can be switched to pause
initiating. The times t
1
and t
2
can be set to
different times.
Function 51 Star-delta
On-delayed
If the actuating voltage U
s
is applied to A1
and A2, the instantaneous contact
switches to position 17-18. After the set
time duration the instantaneous contact
opens; the timing contact 17-28 closes
after a changeover time t
u
of 50 ms.
On-Off Function
The On-Off function allows the operation of
a control system to be tested and is an aid
for example for commissioning. The Off
function allows the output relay to be
de-energized and it no longer reacts to the
function sequence. The On function
energizes the output relay. This function is
dependent on the supply voltage being
applied to the terminals A1/A2. The LED
indicates the operating state.
Further information sources
Instructional leaflets
www.eaton.com/moeller/support
(AWA / IL Installation Instructions)
Search terms: DILET, ETR4, ETR2
Main Catalogue Industrial Control
Systems (HPL) Section "Timing relays"
LED
t t t t
A1-A2
15-18
(25-28)
t
A1-B1
A1-A2
Rel LED
A1-B1
Rel LED
t t t t
15-18
t t
1 2 1 2 1 2
15-18
t t t t t t
1 2 1 2 1 2
t
u
A1-A2
17-18
17-28
t
A1-A2
15-18
(25-28)
LED
OFF OFF ON
1-40
/
1
EMF ueasuring and uonitoring relays
Measureuent and uonitoring relays are
required for a wide range of applications.
With the new EMF range Eaton covers a
large nuuber of requireuents.
general use, EMF...-l current uonitoring
relay
space saving uonitoring of the rotation
field, EMF...-F phase sequence relay
Frotection against destruction or
dauage of single systeu parts,
EMF-(A)W(N) phase uonitoring relay
safe recognition of phase failure,
EMF...-A phase iubalance uonitoring
relay
enhanced safety by open-circuit
principle, EMF...-N liquid level
uonitoring relay
increase of the operational safety,
EMF...-F insulation uonitoring relay
EMR...-I Current monitoring relay
The EMF-l current uonitoring relay is
suitable for the uonitoring of AC as well as
C current. Fuups and drill uachines can
be uonitored for underload or overload.
This is possible due to the selectable lower
or upper threshold liuit.
There are two versions each with three
ueasuring ranges (30/100/1000 uA,
1.5/5/15 A). The uulti-voltage coil allows
universal use of the relay. The two auxiliary
changeover contacts allow for a direct
feedback.
Selected bridging of short current peaks
y using the selectable response delay of
between 0.05 and 30 s short current peaks
can be bridged.
Phase monitoring relay EMR...-W
TheEMF...-W phase uonitoring relay
uonitors the voltage as well as the rotation
field rotation. This provides protection frou
the destruction or dauage of individual
systeu parts. The uiniuuu undervoltage
and also the uaxiuuu overvoltage can be
set here easily, within a defined range to
the required voltage.
An on-delayed or off-delayed function can
also be set. ln the on-delayed position
short voltage drops can be bridged. The
off-delayed position allows for a fault
storage for the set tiue.
The delay tiue can be set between 0.1 und
10 s.
The relay activates with the correct
rotation field and voltage. After a drop-out
the device does not reactive until the
voltage exceeds a 5 % hysteresis.
EMF ueasuring and uonitoring relays
1-41
/
1
EMR...-F phase sequence relay
With the only 22.5 uu wide phase
sequence relay, portable uotors, with
which the rotation direction is iuportant
(e. g. puups, saws, drills), can be
uonitored for correct rotation. This
provides space in the switchboard thanks
to the narrowwidth and protection against
dauage due to the uonitoring of the
rotating field.
With correct rotating field the changeover
contact releases the control voltage of the
uotor switching device. The EMF...-F500-2
covers the total voltage range frou 200 to
500 v AC.
EMR...-A phase imbalance relay
The 22.5 uu wide EMF...-A phase
iubalance relay is the correct protection
device against phase failure. The uotor is
then protected against destruction.
As the phase failure is uonitored on the
basis of phase displaceuent, this can be
detected even with a higher uotor
feedback and an overload of the uotor can
be prevented.
EMR...-N liquid level monitoring relay
The EMF...-N liquid level uonitoring relay
is used uostly as dry running protection for
puups or for the level regulation of liquids.
lt operates with sensors that ueasure
conductivity. 0ne sensor is required for the
uaxiuuu level and one sensor for the
uiniuuu level. A third sensor is used for
earth potential.
The 22.5 uu wide EMF...-N100 device is
suitable for conductive liquids. lt can be
switched frou level regulation to dry
running protection. Safety is increased as
in both cases the open-circuit principle is
used.
The EMF...-N500 liquid level uonitoring
relay has an increased sensitivity and is
suitable for less conductive liquids. ue to
an integrated pickup and drop-out delay of
between 0.1 and 10 s uoving liquids can
also be uonitored.
EMR measuring and monitoring relays
1-42
1
1
EMR...-R Insulation monitoring relay
EN 60204 Safety of machines provides
increased operational safety by the
monitoring of the auxiliary circuit for
earth-fault using an insulation monitoring
relay. This is the main application for the
EMR...-R. There are similar requirements in
medically used areas.
An earth-fault is signalled via a
changeover contact so that a fault can be
cleared without expensive down time.
The device has a selectable fault memory
so that the fault must be acknowledged
after its removal. The use of a Test button
enables the device to be checked for
correct operation at any time.
AC or DC control voltage
There is a device for AC and also DC.
Therefore the total control voltage range is
covered. Both devices have a multi-voltage
source. This means that both AC and DC
supplies are possible.
EMR...-AW(N) multifunctional
three-phase monitors
The multifunctional three-phase monitors
provide the space saving monitoring of the
rotation field with different functions..
These measure the phase parameters of
phase sequence, phase failure, phase
imbalance as well as undervoltage and
overvoltage.
Depending on device type, the threshold
value for phase imbalance can be set
between 2 to 15 %. The threshold values for
undervoltage and overvoltage are
adjustable or permanently set.
The different options and set values are
explained in the relevant instructional
leaflet.
Further information sources
Instructional leaflets
www.eaton.com/moeller/support
(AWA / IL Installation Instructions)
Search terms: EMR4, EMR5
Main catalog industrial switchgear
(HPL),
chapter EMR measuring relays,
EMR monitoring relays
1-43
/
1
Systeu overview &Felay, MF-Titan
500/700 control relays
POW
BUS
POWER
COM-ERR
ADR
ERR
MS
NS
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
5
6
7
8
12
11
11
9
10
10
1 asic devices easy500, stand alone
2 asic devices easy700, expandable.
digital inputs/outputs
us systeus
3 Feuote text display
1 Ethernet-0ateway
5 FF0FluS-F us uodule
AS-lnterface bus uodule
7 CANopen bus uodule
8 eviceNet bus uodule
9 0utput expansion
10, 11 l/0 expansions
12 Coupling uodule for the reuote
connection of a digital
input/output expansion
1-44
/
1
800 control relay
POW
BUS
MS
NS
DEL
OK
A
LT
E
S
C
3
2
2
15
1
1
4
15
5
6
7
11
10
10
8
14
13
9,
12
12
1-45
/
1
1 easy800 basic devices, expandable.
igital inputs/outputs and
us systeus, easyNet onboard
2 Feuote text display
3 Ethernet gateway
1 FF0FluS-F bus uodule
5 AS-lnterface bus uodule
CANopen bus uodule
7 eviceNet bus uodule
8 0utput expansion
9, 10 l/0 expansions
12 l/0 expansion
13 easyControl coupact FLC
11 easySafety control relay
15 MF-Titan uulti-function display
1-46
/
1
MFD-Titan multi-function display
POW
BUS
MS
NS
2
1
3
1
4
5
6
11
9
9
7
8, 10
10
13
13
14
1-47
/
1
1 MF-Titan, consisting of.
isplay/operating unit
Fower supply unit/CFu uodule,
l/0 uodule
2 Ethernet gateway
3 FF0FluS-F bus uodule
1 AS-lnterface bus uodule
5 CANopen bus uodule
eviceNet bus uodule
7 0utput expansion
8, 9, 10 l/0 expansions
12 Coupact FLC &Control
13 easySafety
easycontrol relays
11 easy 800 control relays
1-48
/
1
Functions
500 and 700
easy500 and easy700 have the saue
functions. easy700 offers uore inputs and
outputs, is expandable and can be
connected to a standard bus systeu. The
contacts and coils are connected in series
and in parallel in up to 128 current paths.
uax. three contacts and a coil in series.
The display of 1 operating and uessage
texts isiupleuented via an internal or
external display.
The uain functions are.
Multi-function tiuing relays
Current iupulse relays,
Counters
up and down,
high-speed counter,
frequency counters,
operating hours counter,
Analog value couparators
Week and year tiue switches,
Autouatic ST switch
Fetentive actual values of uarkers,
counters and tiuing relays.
Custouited inscription of easy500 and
easy700 is possible.
MFD(-AC)-CP8 and 800
MF(-AC)-CF8 and easy800 have the
saue functions. With lF5 MF-80 can be
used in harsh environuents. Eight easy800
or MF-Titan devices can also be
networked via easyNet for expansions or
connection to standard bus systeus.
Contacts and coils are linked in series or in
parallel up to 25 rungs consisting of four
contacts and a coil in series. The display of
32 operating and report uessage is
iupleuented via an internal or external
display.
The easy800 and MF-Titan offer the
following functions in addition to those of
the easy700.
Fl controllers,
Arithuetic uodules,
value scaling,
and uuch uore.
Custouited inscription on the MF-80 and
the easy800 is possible.
1-49
/
1
Remote display, text display for easy relay
The plug &work functionality allows you to
connect the MF-80.. display to the
easyFelays via the MF-CF1.. power
supply and couuunication uodule. The
MF-CF1... coues with a 5 u connection
cable that can be cut to the required
length. Another advantage is that no
software or drivers are required for
connection. The MF-CF1.. offers genuine
plug & work capabilities. The input and
output wiring is connected to the
easyFelay. The processing of the circuit
diagrau is also run in the easyFelay. The
MF-80.. is uounted using two 22.5 uu
fixing holes. The lF5 display is backlit and
offers an easy to read display. The display
can be labeled to individual requireuents.
1-50
/
1
Engineering &Felay, MF-Titan
Power supply connection
for AC devices for DC devices
Basic devices Basic devices
EASY512-A-
EASY719-A-
EASY512-AC-
EASY719-AC-
EASY819-AC-
21 v AC
21 v AC
100 210 v AC
100 210 v AC
100 210 v AC
EASY512-A-
EASY719-A-
EASY512-C-
EASY7-C-
EASY819-C-
EASY82.-C-
12 v C
12 v C
21 v C
21 v C
21 v C
21 v C
MF-AC-CF8- 100 210 v AC MF-CF8-
MF-CF10
21 v C
21 v C
Expansion units Expansion units
EASY18-AC 100 210 v AC EASY110-C
EASY18-C
EASY20-C
EASY10-C-ME
EASY111-C-ME
21 v C
21 v C
21 v C
21 v C
21 v C
L
L.1
N
L N N
> 1A
+
+.1
+...V 0 0
> 1A
1-51
/
1
Digital input connection of the AC devices
a lnput signal via relay contact e.g. lLEF
b lnput signal via FM0-Titan pushbutton
c lnput signal via position switch e.g.
LS-Titan
d Additional circuit with diode
(7Notes)
e lncreased input current
f Liuiting the input current
g lncreasing the input current with
EASY25-hCl
h EASY25-hCl upstreau device with
internal additional circuit (7Notes)
Notes
ue to the additional circuit the drop out
delay of the input is increased.
Length of input conductor without
additional circuit # 10 u, with additional
circuit # 100 u.
lnputs l7, l8 already have an internal
additional circuit.
1 k
N
L1
1 N
1N4007
100 nF
/275 V
100 nF
/275 V

1-52
/
1
Digital input connection of the DC devices
a lnput signal via relay contact e.g. lLEF
b lnput signal via FM0-Titan pushbutton
c lnput signal via position switch
e.g. LS-Titan
d Froxiuity switch, three wire
e Froxiuity switch, four wire
Notes
With conductor length consider also the
voltage drop.
ue to the high residual current do not
use two-wire proxiuity switches.
+

1-53
/
1
Analog inputs
epending upon the device two or four 0 to
10 v analog inputs are available.
The resolution is 10-bit = 0 to 1023.
The following applies.
Warning!
lncorrect connection uay lead to
unwanted switching states. Analog signals
are uore sensitive to interference than
digital signals, therefore the signal cables
should be carefully routed and connected.
use shielded twisted pair cables to
prevent interference with the analog
signals.
For short cable lengths, ground the
shielding at both ends using a large
contact area. lf the cable length is uore
than around 30 u, grounding at both ends
can result in equalitation currents
between the two grounding points and
thus intheinterferenceof analogsignals.
ln this case, only ground the cable at one
end.
o not lay signal lines parallel to power
cables.
Supplyingloads suchas uotors, solenoid
valves or contactors and easy frou the
saue supply voltage uay cause
interference of the analog input signals
when switching. Connect therefore
inductive loads to be switched via the
easy outputs to a separate supply
voltage, or use a suppressor circuit for
uotors and valves.
l7 = lA01
l8 = lA02
l11 = lA03
EASY512-A/A/C
EASY719-A/A/C
EASY721-C
EASY819/820/821/822-C
MF-F1, MF-F17,
MF-T1, MF-TA17
l12 = lA01
1-54
/
1
Connecting power supply and analog inputs for easyAB device
Notes
With easy.... A devices that process
analog signals, the device uust be fed via a
transforuer so that the device is
galvanically isolated frou the uains
supply. The neutral conductor and the
reference potential of the C power feed
for analog sensors uust be electrically
connected.
Ensure that the couuon reference
potential is earthed or uonitored by a
ground fault uonitoring device. 0bserve
the applicable standards.
I7 L N I1 N
L
N
~
0 V
+12 V
L01h
N01 h
I8
F1
EASY200-POW
1-55
/
1
Analog input connections to easy...DA/DC ... or MFD-R.../T...
a Setpoint potentioueter via separate
power supply and potentioueter #1 k?,
e.g. 1 k?, 0.25 W
b Setpoint potentioueter with upstreau
resistor 1.3 k?, 0.25 W, potentioueter
1 k?, 0.25 W (values for 21 v C)
c Teuperature uonitoring via
teuperature sensor and transducer
d Sensor 1 to 20 uA with resistor 500 ?
Notes
Fay attention to the differing nuuber and
designation of the analog inputs of each
device type.
Connect the 0 v of the or the MF-Titan
with the 0 v of the power supply of the
analog transuitter.
A 1(0) to 20 uA sensor and a resistor of
500 ? give the following approx. values.
1 uA 6 1.9 v,
10 uA 6 1.8 v,
20 uA 6 9.5 v.
Analog input 0 to 10 v,
resolution 10 bit, 0 to 1023.
+

+...V 0 V
+12 V 0 V
4...20 mA
(0...20 mA)
0 V
+..V
-0 V
Out
0...10 V -35...55 C
500
1-56
/
1
Connecting Pt100/Ni1000 with MFD-T(A)P
Notes
Cable length, shielded 10 u.
a b
a Three wire connection b Two wire connection
MF-TAF13-FT-A
MF-TF12-FT-A
-10 C ... 90 C
0 C ... 250 C
0 C ... 100 C
MF-TAF13-Nl-A
MF-TF12-Nl-A
0 C ... 250 C
-10 C ... 90 C
MF-TAF13-FT-
MF-TF12-FT-
0 C ... 850 C
-200 C ... 200 C
1-57
/
1
Connection options for the High-speed counter inputs on easyDA/DC devices or
MFD-R/-T
a high-speed counter, square wave
signal via proxiuity switch,
uark-to-space ratio should be 1.1
easy500/700 uax. 1 kht
easy800 uax. 5 kht
MF-F/T uax. 3 kht
b Square wave signal via frequency
generator, pulse pause relationship
should be 1.1
easy500/700 uax. 1 kht
easy800 uax. 5 kht
MF-F/T uax. 3 kht
c Square wave signals via 21 v C
increuental encoder
easy800-C uax. 5 kht and
MF-F/T uax. 3 kht
Notes
Fay attention to the different nuuber and
designation of the inputs of the
high-speed counter, frequency
generator and increuental encoder for
each device type.
+
A B

1-58
/
1
Connection of relay outputs for EASY...R MFD...R.
Protective element main pole L..
# 8 A/1
Possible AC voltage range:
21 to 250 v, 50/0 ht
e.g. L1, L2, L3 phase to tero conductor
Possible DC voltage range:
12 to 300 v C
a Filauent laup, uax. 1000 W at
230/210 v AC
b Fluorescent tube, uax. 10 x 28 W with
electronic upstreau device,
1 x 58 W with conventional upstreau
device at 230/210 v AC
c AC uotor
d valve
e Coil
1
M
2
L L L L L
a b c d e
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1-59
/
1
Connection of transistor outputs for EASY...T MFD T...
Notes
Flease note the following when switching
off inductive loads. Suppressed
inductances cause less interference in the
entire electrical systeu. lt is generally
recouuended that to the suppressor is
connected as close as possible to the
inductance.
lf inductances are not suppressed, the
following applies.
Several inductances should not be
switched off siuultaneously to avoid
overheating the driver blocks in the worst
possible case. lf in the event of an
euergency stop the 21 vCpower supply
is to be switched off by ueans of a contact,
and if this would uean switching off uore
than one controlled output with an
inductance, these inductances uust be
provided with a suppressor circuit.
a b c d
f2.5 A
F10.0 A
24 V DC
+ 24 V 0 V
a
Contactor coil with tener diode
as suppressor circuit,
0.5 A at 21 v C
b
valve with diode as suppressor
circuit,
0.5 A at 21 v C
c
Fesistor,
0.5 A at 21 v C
d
lndicator light 3 or 5 Wat 21 v C,
0utput dependent on device
types and outputs
1-60
/
1
Parallel connection
a Fesistor
Notes
The outputs uay only be connected in
parallel within a group (01 to 01 or 05 to
08, S1 to S1 or S5 to S8), 01 and 03 or 05,
07 and 08. Farallel outputs uust be
activated siuultaneously.
a
0 V
if 1 outputs in parallel,
uax. 2 A at 21 v C
if 1 outputs in parallel,
uax. 2 A at 21 v C
lnductances without suppression
circuit uax. 1 uh
12 or 20 W at 21 v C
0utput dependent on device types
and outputs
1-61
/
1
Connection of analog outputs for EASY820-DC-RC, EASY822-DC-TC, MFD-RA,
MFD-TA
a Solenoid valve control
b Set value selection for drive control
Notes
Analog signals are uore sensitive to
interference than digital signals,
therefore the signal conductors should
becarefully routed. lncorrect connection
uay lead to unwanted switching states.
Analog output 0 to 10 v, resolution 10 bit,
0-1023.
+

+...V 0 V 0 V 0 V Q A1 0 V Q A1
0 V I A
1-62
/
1
I/O expansion
Central expansion, up to 40 I/O
easy700, easy800, MF(-AC)-CF8can be
expanded via easy202, easy110, easy18 or
easy20. up to 21 inputs and 1 outputs are
provided. An expansion is possible with
each basic unit, 7Section easy central
and reuote expansion uodule, page 1-3.
Remote expansion, up to 40 I/O
easy700, easy800 and MF-Titan can be
expanded via the coupling uodule
easy200-EASY with easy110, easy18 or
easy20. The expansion unit can be
operated up to 30 u frou the basic device.
There are a uaxiuuu of 21 inputs and 1
outputs available. 0ne expansion unit per
basic device is possible, 7Section easy
central and reuote expansion uodule,
page 1-3.
Networking via easyNet, up to 320 I/O
up to eight stations can be interconnected
by expanding the inputs and outputs via
easyNet. An expansion device can be
addedtoeach easy800 or MF(-AC)-CF8
A network length of up to 1000 u is
possible. There are two types of operation.
Auaster (position 1, user address 1) and
up to 7 other uodules. The prograu is
contained in the uaster.
A uaster (position 1, user address 1) and
up to 7 other intelligent or duub
uodules. Each intelligent uodulehas a
prograu.
7Section easyNet, loop through the
device network connection, page 1-1
1-63
/
1
easy central and remote expansion module
Central expansion
easy700
easy800
easy202
easy110
easy18, easy20
Remote expansion
easy700
easy800
easy200 easy110
easy18, easy20
Central expansion
MF-AC-CF8
MF-CF8
MF-CF10
easy202
easy110
easy18, easy20
Remote expansion
MF-AC-CF8
MF-CF8
MF-CF10
easy200 easy110
easy18
easy20
I 1 - I...
1 2
Q 1 - Q...
R 1 - R...
S 1 - S...
1 2
I 1 - I...
Q 1 - Q...
R 1 - R...
E+ E-
E+ E-
S 1 - S...
3
0
m
R 1 - R...
S 1 - S...
MFD
R 1 - R...
E+ E-
E+ E-
S 1 - S...
3
0
m
MFD
EASY-LlNK-S
1-64
/
1
easyNet, loop through the device network connection
Geographic
location,
position
1)
Stations
Example 1 Example 2
1)
The geographic location/position 1 always has
the station address 1.
Addressing the stations.
Autouatic addressing frou station 1 or via
easySoft frou the FC,
physical location = station,
Single addressing on the corresponding
station or via easySoft on each station,
geographic location and station can be
different.
The uaxiuuu length of easyNet is 1000 u.
ShouldeasyNet beinterruptedor astationis not
operational, the network is no longer active
frou the interrupted point.
1 core cable unshielded, each two cores
twisted. Characteristic iupedance of the cable
uust be 120 ?.
easyNet EASY-NT-R
(124
PIN1+2)
easy800
easy800 easy800
easy18
easy20
easy800
easy18
easy20
easy200
MF-AC-CF8
MF-CF8
MF-CF10
easy202 easy800
1 1 1
2 2 3
3
3 8
8 8 2
EASY-LlNK-S
1-65
/
1
easyNet, network connection T connector with stub line
Geographic
location,
position
1)
Stations
Example 1 Example 2
1)
The geographic location/position 1 always has
the station address 1.
Addressing the stations.
Single addressing on corresponding station
or via easySoft on every station.
The uax. total length, including stub lines, with
easyNet is 1000 u.
The uax. stub lines length of the T connector to
easy800 or to MF-Titan is 0.30 u.
lf easyNet is interrupted between the T
connector and the station, or a station is not
operational, the network is still active for the
reuaining stations.
1 core cable unshielded, each two cores
twisted. Three cores are required.
Characteristic iupedance of the cable uust be
120 ?.
easyNet
EASY-NT-R
(124
PIN1+2)
0.3 m
0.3 m
easy800
easy800 easy800
easy18
easy20
easy800
easy18
easy20
easy200
MF-AC-CF8
MF-CF8
MF-CF10
easy202 easy800
1 1 1
2 2 3
3 3 8
8
8 2
EASY-LlNK-S
1-66
/
1
easyNet network connection
RJ45 sockets and plugs
Fin assignuent of FJ15 socket on easy and
MF.
Fin assignuent of the FJ15 plug on the
easy, MF(-AC)-CF8/CF10....
a Cable entry side
8-pole FJ15, EASY-NT-FJ15
Assignment with easyNET
FlN 1. ECAN_h, ata cable,
conductor pair A
FlN 2. ECAN_L, ata cable,
conductor pair A
FlN 3. 0N, ground conductor,
conductor pair
FlN 1. SEL_lN, Select conductor,
conductor pair
Creating the network cable for Net
The characteristic iupedance of the cable
uust be 120 ?.
The network cable does not require any
shielding braid.
however, if a shielding braid is used, it
should be connected to FE.
Notes
Cable lengths and cross-sections
7Table, page 1-8.
The uiniuuu operation with &Net
functions with cables ECAN_h, ECAN_L,
0N. The SEL_lN cable is only used for
autouatic addressing.
Bus terminating resistor
Abus teruinal resistinguust be connected
to the geographical first and last station in
the network.
value of the bus teruinal resisting 121 ?,
Connect to FlN 1 and FlN 2 of the FJ15
plug,
Teruinating connector . EASY-NT-F.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
a
A 1 ECAN_h
A 2 ECAN_L
3 0N (0round)
1 SEL_lN
1-67
/
1
Prefabricated cables, RJ45 plug at both
ends
User prepared cables
100 u, 1 x 0.11 uu
2
, twisted pair.
EASY-NT-CA
FJ15 plug.
EASY-NT-FJ15
Criuping tool for FJ15 plug.
EASY-FJ15-T00L.
Calculating cross-section with known
cable lengths
The uiniuuu cross-section is deteruined
for the known uaxiuuu expansion of the
network.
Notes
lf the result of the calculation does not
yield a standard cross-section, the next
larger cross-section is used.
Calculating length with known cable
cross-section
For a known conductor cross section the
uaxiuuu conductor length is calculated.
Cable length [cm] Part no.
30 EASY-NT-30
80 EASY-NT-80
150 EASY-NT-150
l = Length of cable in u
S
uin
= Miniuuu cross-section in uu
2
;
cu
= Fesistivity of copper, if not
otherwise stated 0.018 ?uu
2
/u
S
uin
=
l ;
cu
12.1
l
uax
= Length of cable in u
S = Cable cross-section in uu
2
;
cu
= Fesistivity of copper, if not
otherwise stated 0.018 ?uu
2
/u
l
uax
=
S 12.1
;
cu
1-68
/
1
Permissible network lengths with
easyNet
Total length of
easyNet cable
Transmission
speed
Cable cross-section,
standardized
Bus cable, minimum
cable cross-section
EN AWG
m Kbit/s mm
2
mm
2
# # 1000 0.11 2 0.10
# 25 # 500 0.11 2 0.10
# 10 # 250 0.11 2 0.10
# 125 # 125
1)
0.25 21 0.18
# 175 # 50 0.25 23 0.25
# 250 # 50 0.38 21 0.3
# 300 # 50 0.50 20 0.11
# 100 # 20 0.75 19 0.58
# 00 # 20 1.0 17 0.87
# 700 # 20 1.5 17 1.02
# 1 000 = 10 1.5 15 1.15
1) efault setting
1-69
/
1
Network connection on cable
cross-sections > 0.14 mm
2
, AWG26
Network connect through the
device
Exauple A, with teruinals
a Fecouuendation # 0.3 u
Exauple , with interface eleuent
b Fecouuendation # 0.3 u (EASY-NT-30)
Network connection T connector with
stub line
Exauple A, with teruinals
c # 0.3 u (3-core)
Exauple , with interface eleuent
d # 0.3 u (EASY-NT-30)
RJ45
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RJ45
IN
OUT
easy800
MF-CF8
IN
OUT
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
easy800
MF-CF8
1
2
3
4
RJ45
IN
OUT
easy800
MF-CF8
IN
OUT
RJ45
RJ45
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
easy800
MF-CF8
1-70
/
1
Expansion units for networking
An expansion unit for networking can be
connected with easy700, easy800 or
MF(-AC)-CF8- The expansion unit for
networking is integrated as slave in the
configuration.
The inputs and output points can be
expanded via easyNet
(7Section easyNet, network
connection T connector with stub line,
page 1-5 and 7Section easyNet,
network connection T connector with
stub line, page 1-5).
Further inforuation can be found in the
uanuals.
MN05013003Z-EN
easy500, easy700, control relays
MN01902001Z-EN
easy800, control relays
MN05002001Z-EN
MF-Titan uulti-function display
MN05013005Z-EN
EASY201-F
MN05013008Z-EN
EASY221-C0
MN05013007Z-EN
EASY222-N
EASY201-F EASY221-C0 EASY222-N EASY205-AS-
lnterface
easy700, easy800
MFCF8
MFCF10
1-71
/
1
Remote display in IP65
The display of the easyFelay is shown on
the MF-80... reuote display.
The easyFelay can also be operated with
the MF-80-.
No extra software or prograuuing is
necessary to operate the reuote display.
The connection cable MF-CF1--CA5
can be shortened.
L L.1
N
L N
115/230 V
50/60 Hz
> 1 A
+ L.1
+ 24 V 0 V
> 1 A
MFD-CP4-500-CAB5
5 m
MFD-CP4-800-CAB5
easy800
easy700
ESC
OK
DEL
ALT
easy500
ESC
OK
DEL
ALT
5
m
MFD...CP4...
MFD-80...
1-72
/
1
easy communication connections
easy800 MFD...CP8/CP10...
easy700
ESC
OK
DEL
ALT
easy500
ESC
OK
DEL
ALT
EASY-SOFT-BASIC
EASY-SOFT-PRO
OPC
EASY-PC-CAB
EASY209-SE
EASY-USB-CAB
EASY800-MO-CAB
EASY800-PC-CAB
EASY800-USB-CAB
XT-CAT5-X...
MFD-CP4-500-CAB5
MFD-CP4-800-CAB5

1-73
/
1
EASY209-SE standard connection
a Ethernet connection (FJ15 socket)
b Status LE (F0W/FuN)
c C0Mconnection, spring-cage teruinal
5-pole
d FESET pushbutton
e Fower supply device 21 v C v
f evice label
g Strain relief
24 V connection
Ethernet connection
COM connection
press insert reuove
1 = grey
2 = brown
3 = yellow
1 = white
5 = green
g
f
e
c
d
a
b
+24 V
> 1 A
0 V
+24 V 0 V
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
TX+
TX
RX+
RX 6
7
8
2
3
1
1
2
3
4
5
1 2 3
1-74
/
1
COM-LINK connection
The C0M-LlNK is a point-to-point
connection using the serial interface. via
this interface the status of the inputs and
outputs are read as well as uarker ranges
read and written Twenty uarker double
words read or written are possible. Fead
and write operations can be defined as
required. This data can be used for setpoint
entry or for display functions.
The stations of the C0M-LlNK have
different functions. The active station is
always a MFCF8/CF10 and controls
the couplete interface.
Feuote stations can be an easy800 or an
MFCF8/CF10. The reuote station
responds to the requests of the active
station. lt does not recognite the
difference whether C0M-LlNK is active or
a FC with easySoft-FF0 is using the
interface.
The stations of the C0M-LlNK can be
expanded locally or reuotely with easy
expansion units.
The reuote station can also be a station in
the easyNet.
POW-Side
MFD-80 easy800 MFDCP8/CP10
MFD..T../R..
MFDCP8/CP10
MFD..T../R..
1-75
/
1
Connecting and operating the 800 on the serial log printer
An SF (SF = serial protocol) uodule can be
used to directly send data to the log printer
via the serial FC interface on the front of
the device. More inforuation on this is
provided in the easySoft-FF0 help.
Fin assignuent of EASY800-M0-CA.
Serially
controlled
printer
EASY800-MO-CAB
easy800
2 white T x
3 brown F x
5 green 0N
lnforuation on EASY800-M0-CA, see also lL05013021Z instructional leaflet.
1
6 7 8 9
2 3 4 5 1
6 7 8 9
2 3 4 5
1-76
/
1
Connection and modem operation with easy or MFD
lnforuationonEASY800-M0-CA, seealso
lL05013021Z instructional leaflet.
easy800
MFD...CP8...
easy700
ESC
OK
DEL
ALT
OPC
easy500
ESC
OK
DEL
ALT
EASY-PC-CAB
EASY800-MO-CAB
EASY800-PC-CAB
SMS
Modem 1 Modem 2
PC Fax e-mail Pager
1-77
/
1
Frograuuing &Felay, MF-Titan
Programming instead of wiring
Circuit diagraus are the basis of all
electrotechnical applications. ln practice
this involves the wiring together of
electrical switchgear. With the easy
control relay this can be carried out siuply
at the push of a button or by using the
convenient easySoft prograuuing
software on a FC. Siuple uenu navigation
in uany languages siuplify the input. This
saves tiue and therefore costs. easy and
MF-Titan are the professionals for the
world uarket.
Contacts, coils, function blocks, operands
S1 K1
K1 K2 K3
S4
K3 K3
S5
S6
Operand Description easy500,
easy700
easy800 MFD(-AC)-CP8
MFD(-AC)-CP10
A
it input, basic device x x x
nA
it input, basic device via easyNet x x
AJ
Analog input x x x
9
it input, expansion device
1)
x x x
n9
it input, expansion unit via easyNet x x
:
it output, basic device x x x
n:
it output, basic device via easyNet x x
:J
Analog output x
8
it output, expansion unit x x x
n8
it output, expansion unit via easyNet x x
AG
iagnostic alaru x x
AG +
C0M-Link diagnostic alaru x
?F
it output display backlight Front plate
LEs
x
>
Marker x x x
+>
Marker C0M-Link x
>I
Marker byte x x
>G
Marker double word x x
>4
Marker word x x
+>I*+>4
*+>G
Marker operand C0M-Link x
=
Marker x
;
F pushbuttons x x x
1-78
/
1
K
Juup x x x
n9=
it input via easyNet x x
n8=
it output via easyNET easyNet x x
J
Analog value couparator x x x
J9
Arithuetic functions x x
IH
lock couparison x x
I7
lock transfer x x
I5
oolean sequence x x
H
Counter relay x x
HE
Frequency counter x
2)
x x
HB
high-speed counter x
2)
x x
HA
lncreuental counter x x
H;
Couparator x x
G
Text display x x
GI
ata function block x x
GH
Fl controller x x
E7
FT1 signal suoothing filter x x
C7
0et value frou easyNet x x
B*B4
(hour)/7-day tiue switch x x x
2*B2
Year tiue switch x x x
@H
Conditional juup x x
?I
Juup label x x
?8
value scaling x x
1*>9
Master reset x x x
>3
ata uultiplexer x
=H
Nuuerical converter x x
<*<7
0perating hours counter x x x
;<
Fulse output x
;4
Fulse width uodulation x x
8H
Synchronite clock via network x x
87
Set cycle tiue x x
8;
Serial protocol x
89
Shift register x x
7
Tiuing relays x x x
7I
Table function x x
5H
value liuitation x x
1) With easy700, easy800 and MFCF8/CF10...
2) With easy500 and easy700 paraueteritable as
operating uode
n = NET station 18
Operand Description easy500,
easy700
easy800 MFD(-AC)-CP8
MFD(-AC)-CP10
1-79
/
1
Coil functions
The switching behaviour of the relay coil is
deteruined by the selected coil function.
The specified function should for each
relay coil only be used once in the wiring
diagrau.
unused outputs 0 and S can also be used
as uarkers like M and N.
Circuit diagram symbol easy display Coil function Example
\
Contactor function
\:+, \G$,
\8D, \K+,
\>%
Contactor function with

negated result
:+, G$,
8D
Cycle pulse on falling

edge
:", >D,
G/, 8%
:
Cycle pulse with rising
edge
::D, :>!,
:G%, :8"
I
Surge function
I:", I>D,
IG/, I8%
8
Latch (set)
8:/, 8>$,
8G", 88D
9
Feset (unlatching)
9:D, 9>!,
9G%, 98"
1-80
/
1
Parameter sets for times
Fossible coil functions.
Trigger = TT..
Feset = FT..
halt = hT..
Example based on EASY512
epending up on the prograuthe following
paraueters can be set.
Switch function,
Tiue range,
Faraueter display,
Tiue 1 and
Tiue 2.
T1 Felay no.
l1 Tiue setpoint 1
l2 Tiue setpoint 2
* 0utput switch status.
* N/0 contact open,
H N/C contact closed
Switch function
S Tiue range
Faraueter display
30,000 constant as value, e.g. 30 s
l7 variable, e.g. analog value l7
T.00.00 actual tiue
Parameters Switch function
3
0n-delayed switching
(3
0n-delayed switching with randou tiue range
H
0ff-delayed switching
(H
0ff-delayed switching with randou tiue range
3H
Switching with on- and off-delayed
(3H
Switching with on- and off-delayed with randou tiue
Fulse shaping switching
Switching with flashing

7+ 8 &
A+ ".#...
A$ A%
* 7K..-..
1-81
/
1
Basic circuits
The easy circuit diagrau is entered in
ladder diagrau. This chapter includes a
fewcircuit exauples which are intended to
deuonstrate the possibilities for your own
circuit diagraus.
The values in the logic table have the
following ueanings for switching contacts
0 = N/0 contact open,
N/C contact closed
1 = N/0 contact closed,
N/C contact open
For relay coils 0x
0 = Coil not energited
1 = Coil energited
Note
Theexauples shown arebasedoneasy500
and easy700. easy800 and
MFCF8/CF10 provide four contacts
and one coil per rung.
Negation
Negation ueans that the contact opens
rather than closes when it is actuated(N0T
connection).
ln the easy
circuit diagrau,
press the ALT
button to toggle
betweenN/Cand
N/0 contact.
Logic table
Parameter Time range and setpoint time Resolution
8 ..-..
Seconds. 0.000 to 99,999 easy500, easy700 10 us
easy800, MFCF8/CF10 5 us
>K8 ..K..
Minutes.Seconds 00.00 to 99.59 1 s
BK> ..K..
hours.Minutes 00.00 to 99.59 1 uin
Parameter set Displaying the parameter set via menu item Parameter
&
Call enabled
0
Access disabled
I1 Q1
1 0
0 1
)+0000000\:+
1-82
/
1
Series connection
01 is controlled
by a series
connection
consisting of
three N/0
contacts (AN
connection).
02 is actuated via three N/C contacts
connected in series (NAN connection).
ln the easy circuit diagrau, you can
connect up to three N/0or N/Ccontacts for
easy500 and easy700 in series within a
rung. use M uarker relays if you need to
connect uore than three N/0 contacts in
series.
Logic table
Parallel switching
01 is actuated
via a parallel
connection of
several N/0
contacts
(0F connection).
A parallel
connection of
closed N/Cs 02
(N0F circuit).
Logic table
I1 I2 I3 Q1 Q2
0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 0 0
0 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 0
A+0A$0A"0\:+
)+0)$0)"0\:$
I1 I2 I3 Q1 Q2
0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 1 1
0 0 1 1 1
1 0 1 1 1
0 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 0
A+!000000\:+
A$"
A"#
)+!000000\:$
)$"
)"#
1-83
/
1
Two way switch
A two way
switchis uadein
easy using two
series
connections that
are coubined to
foru a parallel
circuit (X0F).
X0F is the abbreviation of exclusive Or
circuit. The coil is energited if only one
contact is activated.
Logic table
Self-latching
Acoubination of
a series and
parallel
connection is
used to wire a
latching circuit.
Latching is
established by
contact 01
which is connected in parallel to l1. When
l1 is actuated and reopened, the current
flows via contact 01 until l2 is actuated.
Logic table
The latching (self-uaintaining) circuit is
used to switch uachines on and off. The
uachine is switched on at the input
teruinals via N/0 contact S1 and is
switched off via N/C contact S2.
S2 breaks the connection to the control
voltage in order to switch off the uachine.
This ensures that the uachine can be
switched off, even in the event of a wire
breakage. l2 is always closed when not
actuated.
A self-
uaintaining
circuit with
open-circuit
uonitoring can
alternatively be
wired using the
Set and Feset
coil functions.
I1 I2 Q1
0 0 0
1 0 1
0 1 1
1 1 0
A+0)$!000\:+
)+0A$#
S1 N/0 contact on l1
S2 N/C contact on l2
A+!A$0000\:+
:+#
I1 I2 Contact
Q1
Coil Q1
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
S1 N/0 contact on l1
S2 N/C contact on l2
A+00000008:+
)$00000009:+
1-84
/
1
Coil 01 latches if l1 is activated. l2 inverts
the break contact signal of S2 and only
switches if S2 is activated in order to
disconnect the uachine or in the event of a
wire breakage.
Make sure that both coils are wired up in
the correct order in the easy circuit
diagrau. first wire the S coil and then the F
coil. This will ensure that the uachine will
be switched off when l2 is actuated, even if
l1 is switched on.
Impulse relays
An iupulse relay
is often used for
controlling
lighting such as
for stairwell
lighting.
Logic table
On-delayed timing relay
The on-delay
can be used to
override short
pulses or with a
uachine, tostart
a further
operationafter a
tiue delay.
Permanent contact
To energite a
relay coil
continuously,
uake a
connection of all
contact fields
frou the coil to
the leftuost position.
Logic table
I1 Status Q1 Q1
0 0 0
1 0 1
0 1 1
1 1 0
S1 N/0 contact at l1
A+0000000I:+
--- Q1
1 1
S1 N/0 contact at l1
A+000000077+
7+0000000\>+
000000000\:+
1-85
/
1
Wiring of contacts and relays
Star-delta starting
You can iupleuent two star-delta circuits
with easy. The advantage of easy is that it
is possible to select the changeover tiue
between star and delta contactors, and
also the tiue delay between switching off
the star contactor and switching on the
delta contactor.
hardwired Wiring with easy
P1
S1
S2
K1
K1
P1
S1 S2
K1
N
Q11
Q11
Q11
K1
K1
Q12
Q12
Q13
Q13
L
S1
S2
Q12
1-86
/
1
.
Function of the circuit diagram:
Start/Stop the
connection with
the external
pushbuttons S1
and S2. The
uains contactor
starts the tiuing
relay in easy.
l1. Mains contactor switched on
01. Star contactor 0N
02. elta contactor 0N
T1. Changeover tiue star-delta (10 to 30 s)
T2. Wait tiue between star off, delta on
(30, 10, 50, 0 us)
lf your easy has an integral tiue switch,
you can coubine star-delta starting with
the tiue switch function. ln this case, use
easy to also switch the uains contactor.
1 1 2 2
Q1
I1 L N
Q2
Q12 Q13 Q11
N
Q11
L
N
S1
S2
K1
A+!00000077+
%&+0000\:+
%7+000077$
$7$0000\:$
1-87
/
1
Stairway lighting
For a conventional connection a uiniuuu
of five space units are required in the
distribution board, i.e. one iupulse relay,
two tiuing relays, two auxiliary relays.
easy requires only four space units. With
five connections and the easy circuit the
stairway lighting is operational.
Important Note
Four such stairway circuits can be
iupleuented with one easy device.
N
L
S1
S2
S3
K3 K1 K2
Q11
Q11
Q12
Q12
K3 K1
K2
Q12
5 s 6 min
E1
E2
E3
K3
1-88
/
1
N
L
S1
S2
S3
E1
E2
E3
1 2
Q1
I1 L N
K1
Fushbutton pressed briefly Light 0N or 0FF. The iupulse relay function will even
switch off with continuous lighting.
Light off after uin Switched off autouatically. With continuous light this
function is not active.
Fushbutton pressed for uore
than 5 s
Continuous light
1-89
/
1
The easy circuit configuration for the
described function below looks like this.
The expanded easy circuit diagrau. after
four hours, the continuous lighting is also
switched off.
Meaning of the contacts and relays used
l1. 0N/0FF pushbutton
01. 0utput relay for light 0N/0FF
M1.Marker relay.This is used to block the
switch off autouatically after
uinutes function for continuous
lighting.
T1. Cyclical iupulse for switching 01
0N/0FF, ( , pulse shaping with value
00.00 s)
T2. Scan to deteruine how long the
pushbutton was pressed. When
pressed for longer than 5 s, it changes
to continuous light. ( , on-delayed,
value 5 s)
T3. Switchoff after thelight has been on for
von uin. ( , on-delayed, value .00
uin.)
T1. Switch off after 1 hours continuously
on. ( , on-delayed, value 1.00 h)
A+000000077$
7$00000008>+
A+!000000I:+
7"#
:+0(+000077"
'+00000009>+
A+000000!77+
$77$
7$00000008>+
7+!000000I:+
7""
7D#
:+!(+000077"
$00000077D
'+00000009>+
3
3
3
1-90
/
1
4-way shift register
A shift register can be used for storing an
iteu of inforuation e.g. sorting of iteus
into good or bad two, three or four
transport steps further on.
A shift pulse and the value (0 or 1) to be
shifted are required for the shift register.
values which are no longer required are
deleted via the reset input of the shift
register. The values in the shift register
pass through the register in the following
order.
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 1th storage position.
lock diagrau of the 1-way shift register
a Fulse
b value
c FESET
d Storage position
Function
Allocate the value 0 with the inforuation
content bad. Should the shift register be
accidently deleted, no bad parts will be
reused.
l1. Shift pulse (FuLSE)
l2. lnforuation (good/bad) to be shifted
(vALuE)
l3. elete contents of the shift register
(FESET)
M1. 1st storage location
M2. 2nd storage location
M3. 3rd storage location
M1. 1th storage location
M7. Marker relay for cycle pulse
M8. Cyclical pulse for shift pulse
1 2 3 4
a b c
d
Pulse Value Storage position
1 2 3 4
1 1 1 0 0 0
2 0 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 0 0 1
5 0 0 1 0 0
Feset = 1 0 0 0 0
1-91
/
1
0enerate shift pulse
1th storage location, set
1th storage location, delete
3rd storage location, set
3rd storage location, delete
2nd storage location, set
2nd storage location, delete
1st storage location, set
1st storage location, delete
elete all storage locations
A+!(%0000\>/
$000000\>%
>/!>"00008>D
%("00009>D
%>$00008>"
%($00009>"
%>+00008>$
%(+00009>$
%A$00008>+
$)$00009>+
A"000000!9>+
%9>$
%9>"
$9>D
1-92
/
1
Display text and actual values , display and edit setpoint values
easy500 and easy700 can display 1 freely
editable texts, easy800 can display 32.
These texts can be triggered by the actual
values of function relays such as tiuing
relays, counters, operatinghours counters,
analog value couparators, date, tiue or
scaled analog values. Setpoint values of
tiuing relays, counters, opertaing hours
counters and analog value couparators
can be altered on the device during the
display of the texts.
Exauple of a text display.
The text display can display the following.
The setpoint values can be edited.
easy500 and easy700, two values
easy800, four values
The text output function block ( =
isplay, text display) functions in the
circuit diagrau like a norual uarker M.
Should a text be attached to a uarker this
would be shown at condition in the easy
display when the coil is set to 1. For this
easy uust be in FuN uode and before the
texts are displayed the Status display uust
be active.
1 is defined as an alaru text and has
therefore priority over text displays.
2 to 1/32 are displayed when
activated. When several displays are
activated they are shown in succession
every 1 secs. When a setpoint value is
edited the corresponding display stays
active until the value is transferred.
84A7HBA=C)
H<=79<?)
GA8;?J2)
J?? FJ82,
Line 1, 12 characters
Line 2, 12 characters, a setpoint value or an actual value
Line 3, 12 characters, a setpoint value or actual value
Line 1, 12 characters
96=7A>F >K8
7+ K.+$KD'
H+ K."!! 87
;9<G6HFG
1-93
/
1
Visualization with MFD-Titan
The visualitation with MF-Titan is
iupleuented with screen, on which the
display is shown.
Exauple of a screen.
The following screen eleuents can be
coubined.
0raphic eleuents
it display
ituap
argraph
Message bituap
utton eleuents
Latching pushbutton
utton field
Text eleuents
Static text
Message text
Screen uenu
Funning text
Folling text
value display eleuents
ate and tiue display
Nuuerical value
Tiuing relay value display
value entry eleuents
value entry
Tiuing relay value entry
ate and tiue entry
7-day tiue switch entry
Year tiue switch entry
M
3 h
S1 S2
S3
1-94
/
1
hMl-FLC - Systeuatic visualitation and control
System overview
4
4
6
10
8
11
6
1
2
5
1
7
5
9
3
180
180
1-95
/
1
1 Xv100 hMl/FLC with touch display.
Fully graphical 3.5', 5.7' or 7' wide
screen devices
2 S ueuory card
3 Xv license product certificates.
Expansion of device functionality
through assignuent of license points.
1 Xv200 hMl/FLC with touch display,
Fully graphical 5.7' devices
5 CoupactFlash ueuory card
Xv100 hMl/FLC with touch display.
5.7', 8.1', 10.1', 12.1', 15' devices with
infra-red or resistive touch
7 Xv license product certificates.
Expansion of device functionality
through assignuent of license points
8 0S upgrade license
9 Couuunication uodule for Xv100
10 Fixing kit
11 Software
1-96
/
1
General information
Whether in uachine or systeu building or
in individual applications, an hMl (huuan
Machine lnterface) or hMl-FLC (hMl with
FLC functionality) siuplifies operation and
reduces the workload for the operator.
Touch panels provide a clear, flexible
uenu navigation in any required language
and enables the uanufacturer to sell
uachinery worldwide with only one
hardware and software solution.
Touch panels with resistive and infra-red
technology are priuarily used. Eaton offers
devices with both technologies.
0n the resistive touch panel, a conductive
foil is stretchedover the conductive screen
surface. The foil is separated frou the
screen using several insulating pads. 0nly
when a slight pressure is applied, does the
foil touch the screen surface at this point
and a current flows. A different current or
resistance value is produced, based on the
voltage divider principle according to
where on the screen contact with the foil
was uade. The contact point is thus
located unaubiguously.
The infra-red touch panels uses a light
uatrix in the infra-red range.
Each transuitter is assigned a receiver on
the other side. The beaus are directed
slightly over the front panel. The
siuultaneous interruption of several
infra-red channels on the X and Y axis is
used to indicate where the panel was
touched in order to trigger the appropriate
switch function.
1-97
/
1
evices with display sites frou 3.5 to 19
are used in autouation applications. Eaton
offers device versions in plastic and uetal.
The front on the uetal devices is either in
aluuiniuu or stainless steel.
Front degree of protection. lF5
Most touch panels can also be used in
portrait foruat (upright).
Touch-technology Infra-red Resistive
Light perueability 100 % 70 85 %
0perable with Fingers, gloves Fingers, gloves,
touch pen
Triggering of the function Without pressure
(interruption of the light
uatrix)
With slight pressure
isplay front 0lass Flastic filu
evice front Level deteruined by the
infra-red fraue
Fully flat
Sensitivity to scratches No Yes
Fesistance to cleaning agent
and cheuicals
high Average
use in huuid atuospheres Yes Yes
1-98
/
1
Engineering
a S ueuory card (Secure igital
ueuory card)
b uS device, page 1-98
c uS host, page 1-98
d Ethernet interface, page 1-99
e 21 v C power supply F0W and AuX
(for SuartWire-T slaves, page 1-99
f SuartWire-T interface (only specific
devices) page 1-100
g 0nboard interfaces, depending upon
the device.
FS232, page 1-100
FS185, page 1-101
CAN, page 1-102
FF0FluS-F, page 1-101
h 21 v C device supply, page 1-10
USB device
The uS device interface supports
uS 2.0.
Cable
0nly use standard uS cables with a
shield.
Maxiuuu cable length. 5 u
USB-Host
The uS host interface supports uS 2.0.
Cable
0nly use standard uS cables with a
shield.
Maxiuuu cable length. 5 u
Fear view of a 7
resistive panel of the
Xv102 series with plastic
housing

1-99
/
1
Ethernet interface
Cable
use shielded twisted pair (STF) cable
for networking
For device to device connection.
cross over cable
For connection to hub/switch. 1.1
patch cord
Maxiual cable length. 100 u
Ethernet interface according to ElA/TlA
58 TS-3.
POW and AUX 24 V DC power supply
(for SmartWire-DT slaves)
The F0W/AuX interface is not galvanically
isolated. The following power supplies are
required for a SuartWire-T network.
Supply voltage F0W.
The device supply voltage for the
electronics of all SW slaves (15 v C) is
generated frou the 21 v C supply voltage
that you apply to the F0W teruinal
connection.
Supply voltage AuX.
lf there are any contactors or uotor
starters in the SW topology, a 21 v C
voltage AuX uust be additionally supplied
as a control voltage for the contactor coils.
Wiring
WA00 plug connector, Art no. 731-101 is
supplied with the device.
0bserve the following when preparing the
wiring of the plug connector.
LED Signal Meaning
ACT
(yellow)
flashes Ethernet is
active (data
traffic)
LlNK
(green)
0n Active network
is connected
and detected
ACT LINK
Connection Assignment
21 v C F0W u
Fow
21 v C
0 v F0W u
Fow
0 v
21 v C AuX u
Aux
21 v C
0 v AuX u
Aux
0 v
Teruinal type. Spring-loaded
teruinals
Connectable
conductor, solid.
0.2 - 1.5 uu
2
(AW021 - 1)
Stripping length. - 7 uu
0 V AUX
+24 VDC AUX
0 V POW
+24 VDC POW
1-100
/
1
External protection using a 21 v C
uiniature circuit-breaker is required for
u
Aux
.
SmartWire-DT interface (only specific
device types)
The SW interface is not galvanically
isolated.
Cabling
0nly use the following cables to connect
the SuartWire-T network.
SW-1-100LF8-21 with the
SW-1-8MF2 blade teruinals or
SW-1-(3/5/10)F8-21-25
(prefabricated cable)
etailed instructions for fitting the
SW-1-8MF2 blade teruinal is provided in
the uanual MN0500002Z-EN, chapter
Fitting the SW1-8MF2 blade teruinal.
The project configuration (SuartWire-T
configuration in XSoft-CoeSys-2 project)
is described in the uanual
MN01802091Z-EN, XSoft-CoeSys-2. FLC
prograuuing Xv100, chapter
SuartWire-T Configuration.
RS232
The FS232 interface is not galvanically
isolated. The device uay be dauaged by
potential differences. The 0Nteruinals of
all bus stations uust therefore be
connected.
Wiring
Shielded cables uust be used.
The uaxiuuu baud rate depends on
the cable length.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
6 7 8 9
2 3 4 5
Pin Signal Assignment
1 C ata Carrier
etected
2 Fx Feceive ata
3 Tx Transuit ata
1 TF ata Teruinal
Feady
5 0N 0round
SF ata Set Feady
7 FTS Fequest to Send
8 CTS Clear To Send
9 Fl Fing lndicator
Cable length Max. baud rate
2.5 u 115200 bit/s
5 u 5700 bit/s
10 u 38100 bit/s
15 u 19200 bit/s
30 u 900 bit/s
1-101
/
1
RS485
The FS185 interface is not galvanically
connected.
Wiring
Screened twisted-pair cables uust be
used.
When preparing connections, ensure that
the cable shield has a low iupedance
connection with the connector housing.
FS185-topology
A bus seguent can interconnect up to
32 slaves.
Several bus seguents can be
connected via repeaters (bidirectional
auplifiers). Fefer to the docuuentation
of the repeater uanufacturer for uore
specific details.
The use of repeaters enables the
uaxiuuucablelengthtobeincreased.
Fefer to the docuuentation of the
repeater uanufacturer for uore
specific details.
A bus seguent uust be provided with
cable teruination (120 ?) at both ends.
These teruinals uust be connected in
the connector directly between pin 3
and 7.
The bus seguent uust be teruinated
at both ends.
No uore than two teruinations uust
be provided for each bus seguent.
0peration without correct cable
teruination can cause transfer errors.
1 - nc
2 - nc
3 Line
1 - nc
5 0N 0round
- nc
7 A Line A
8 - nc
9 - nc
nc. Fin 1, 2, 1, , 8 and 9 uust not be
connected.
Cable specification
Fated cable iupedance 120 ?
Feruissible iupedance 108-132 ?
1
6 7 8 9
2 3 4 5
Max. cable length 1200 u
Fossible baud rates 900 bit/s
19200 bit/s
38100 bit/s
5700 bit/s
115200 bit/s
Cable specification
1-102
/
1
CAN
The CAN interface is not galvanically
connected.
The power supply of the CANbus drivers is
iupleuented internally.
A power supply for third party devices is
not provided on the CAN connector.
Wiring
Shielded twisted pair cables uust be used.
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
120
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
120
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
GND
A
B
GND
A
B
GND
A
B
GND
A
B
GND
A
B
GND
A
B
1 - nc
2 CAN-L us line
(douinant low)
3 CAN-
0N
CAN ground
1 - nc
5 - nc
0N 0ptional CAN ground
7 CAN-h us line
(douinant high)
8 - nc
9 - nc
Fin 3 (CAN-0N) and (0N) are
internally interconnected
nc. Fin 1, 1, 5, 8 and 9 uust not be
connected.
1
6 7 8 9
2 3 4 5
Cable specification
Fated cable
iupedance
120 ?
Feruissible
iupedance
108-132 ?
Capacitance per
unit length
0 pF/u
Conductor
cross-section
Max. cable length
* 0.25 uu
2
/100 u
* 0.31 uu
2
/250 u
* 0.75 uu
2
/500 u
1-103
/
1
The uaxiual baud rate depends on the
cable length
The use of repeaters is recouuended
for cable lengths over 1000 u.
Fepeaters can also be used for
galvanic isolation. Fefer to the
docuuentation of the repeater
uanufacturer for uore specific details.
0bserve the recouuendations of CiA
(CAN in Autouation).
When preparing connections, ensure
that the cable shield has a low
iupedance connection with the
connector housing.
CAN-us-topology
32 slaves.
specific details.
cable teruination (120 ?) at both ends.
These teruinals uust be connected in
the connector directly between pin 2
and 7.
at both ends.
0peration without correct cable
teruination can cause transfer errors.
25 u 1000 kbit/s
50 u 800 kbit/s
100 u 500 kbit/s
250 u 250 kbit/s
500 u 125 kbit/s
500 u 100 kbit/s
1000 u 50 kbit/s
2500 u 20 kbit/s
5000 u 10 kbit/s
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
120
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
120
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
GND
CAN-L
CAN-H
CAN-CND
CAN-L
CAN-H
CAN-CND
1-104
/
1
PROFIBUS-DP
The FF0FluSinterface is not galvanically
connected.
Wiring
Screenedtwisted-pair cables, cabletypeA
(acc. to the FF0FluS standard EN 50170)
uust be used.
The uaxiual baud rate depends on the
cable length
When preparing connections, ensure that
the cable shield has a low iupedance
connection with the connector housing.
1 - nc
2 - nc
3 ElA FS185 cable
1 FTSAS 0utput for controlling
a repeater
5 M5EXT 0utput 0 v for
external teruination
F5EXT 0utput 5 v for
external teruination
7 - nc
8 A ElA FS185 cable A
9 - nc
Fin (5 v) uust not be used as a power
supply for external devices.
3 4 1 2 5
8 9 6 7
Cable specification
Fated cable iupedance 150 ?
Feruissible iupedance 135-15 ?
Capacitance per unit
length
30 pF/u
Loop resistance 110 ?/ku
Core cross section * 0.31 uu
2
(AW022)
200 u 1500 kbit/s
100 u 500 kbit/s
1000 u 187.5 kbit/s
1200 u 4 93.75 kbit/s
1-105
/
1
FF0FluS-topology
Shielded twisted-pair cables uust be
used.opology
32 slaves.
specific details.
Notes:
The use of repeaters enables the uaxiuuu
cable length to be increased. Fefer to the
docuuentation of the repeater
uanufacturer for uore specific details.
0nly use bus connector plugs that are
specified for use in the FF0FluS
network. These coubine both bus
cables on a bus station and ensure that
the cable shield is a low iupedance
connection and fed through to the
shield reference potential of the bus
station. The bus connector plug
contains the FF0FluS-specific cable
teruination that can be activated if
required.
cable teruination at both ends. The
teruination is passive but is fed frou
the bus station. lt ensures a defined
quiescent signal on the bus if no bus
station is sending. These bus teruinals
are priuarily iupleuented externally in
the connector housing in accordance
with the FF0FluS standard.
Notes:
at both ends.
At least one of the two teruinations
uust be fed by the bus station.
0peration without correct teruination
of the FF0FluS network can cause
transfer errors.
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
390
390
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
1
2
3
6
7
5
4
8
9
M5EXT
(GND)
A
B
M5EXT
(GND)
A
B
M5EXT
(GND)
A
B
M5EXT
(GND)
A
B
M5EXT
(GND)
A
B
M5EXT
(GND)
A
B
220
220
390
390
1-106
/
1
24 V DC device supply
The device has an internal fuse and
protection against polarity reversal. The
functional earth uust only be connected
with the connector panel not the 0 v. The
housing is plastic and is potential free. The
power supply of the device is not
galvanically isolated.
The device requires a power supply of 21 v
C frou an AC/C transforuer with safe
isolation (SELv).
SELv (safety extra lowvoltage), circuit
in which no dangerous voltage occurs
even in the event of a single fault.
Wiring
Flug connector Fhoenix Contact
MST 2.5/3-ST-5.08, Fhoenix Art no.
1757022 is supplied with the device.
0bserve the following when preparing the
wiring of the plug connector.
0 V +24 VDC
Connection Assignment
21 v C Supply voltage
21 v C
E Functional earth with
connector panel. oes
not have to be
connected.
0 v Supply voltage 0 v
Teruinal type. Screw teruinal
plug-in
Cross-section. uin. 0.75 uu
2
/
uax. 2.5 uu
2
(lead or wire)
uin. AW018 /
uax. AW012
Stripping
length.
7 uu
Max. tightening
torque.
0.-0.8 Nu /
5-7 lb in
1-107
/
1
Preparing the cables with the SUB-D connector
The design of the bus cabling is an
essential factor for reliable operation and
electrouagnetic coupatibility (EMC).
Wiring requirements
The cables uust be shielded.
Thecableshielduust consist of acopper
braid.
The cable shield uust have a large area
and low-iupedance connection to the
connector housing. This is achieved by.
using uetal or uetallited connector
housings with a strap for strain relief.
The strap uust be screwfastened with
the connector.
Connecting the cable shield
a lnsulate the cable end so that approx. 3
cu of shield braid is exposed.
b Fold back the shield braid over the
cable sheath.
c Attach heat-shrink tubing approx.
3 cu in length over the folded shield
braid or use a rubber grouuet.
5 - 8 uu shield braid uust be exposed
at the cable end.
The folded shield braid end uust be
covered by the heat-shrink tubing or
rubber grouuet.
d Fit the Su- connector to the cable
end.
The exposed screen braid uust be
connected to the connector housing
with the cable clip.
A Cable with cable sheath
heat-shrink tubing or rubber grouuet
C 0land plate
Shield braid
E Su- plug
F Fixing screw uNC
30 mm
58 mm
1
2
3
A B C D E F
1-108
/
1
Coupact FLC universal coupact controllers
System overview
E
S
C
DEL
OK
E
S
C
A
LT
A
LT
OK
3
2
4
2
1
1
9
9
8
7
7
5
6
6
1 EC1F Coupact FLC
2 MF-80 - display/operating unit
3 MF-CF1-C0 CANopen connection
1 Fower supply unit/couuunication
uodule, including connection cable for
EC1F
5 EASY202-FE output expansion
EASY110... l/0 expansion, digital
7 EASY... l/0 expansion, digital
8 EASY200-EASY Coupling uodule
9 EC1E-221-... CANopen expansion
1-109
/
1
General information
Coupact controllers offer in a single
device several functions that cover the
autouation of suall and uediuu-sited
applications.
For this sector Eaton offers the EC1F
series. The controllers provide the
functionality of a FLC in the housing of an
easy800 control relay. Frograuuing is
carried out using CoeSys software.
The controllers vary according to the
nuuber and type of inputs/outputs.
Moreover, there are variants with and
without display, as well as with and without
an Ethernet interface. Ethernet allows
reuote prograuuing via the network and
couuunication via uF and M0uS.
All EC1F controllers are provided with a
CAN/easyNet interface.
Flexible networking options.
Feuotely expandable via CANopen or
easyNet
Locally expandable via easyLink
interface
Feuote prograuuing via network
Connection of one or several MF-80-
via CANopen
Connection of an MF-80- via FS232
Fluggable ueuory uodules for data
archiving
12I/8O
24I/16O
18I/14O
Remote
I/O EC4E
Drive
DF51
CAN
Textdisplay
MFD-80-B +
MFD-CP4-CO
1-110
/
1
Engineering
Cable connections
Cable type/ Memory card Device Function
Eu1A-FJ15-CA1 FC, teruinal/
printer
Frograuuing via serial
interface C0M1,
transparent uode
Eu1A-FJ15-uS-CA1 FC Frograuuing via uS
interface
Eu1A-FJ15-CA2 MF-CF1-C0
MF-80-
EC1E
CAN connection
XT-CAT5-X-2 FC Frograuuing via
Ethernet
MF-CF1-800-CA5 MF-CF1 isplay extension, serial
1-111
/
1
easy800-uS-CA FC For prograuuing via the
uS interface
easy800-M0-CA FC, teruinal/
printer
Frograuuing via serial
interface C0M1,
transparent uode
Eu1A-MEM-CAF1 EC1F Meuory card
Eu1A-MEM-CAF2 EC1F Meuory card with
battery for backing up
the tiue
Cable type/ Memory card Device Function
1-112
/
1
Device arrangement
lnstall the FLC in a control cabinet, a
service distribution board or in an
enclosure so that the supply voltage
teruinals and the teruinal capacities are
protected against direct contact during
operation.
The FLC can be installed vertically or
horitontally on a top-hat rail in coupliance
with lEC/EN 0715 or on a uounting plate
using fixing brackets. Ensure that the
teruinal side has a clearance of at least
3 cu frou the wall and frou neighbouring
devices in order to siuplify wiring.
Connection examples
The connection exauples listed here frou
the chapter Engineering easyFelay,
MF-Titan are also relevant for the EC1F
coupact controller.
Connecting the power supply,
7page 1-50
Connecting the digital inputs,
7page 1-51
Connecting analog inputs,
7page 1-55
Connecting the increuental encoder,
7page 1-57
Connecting relay outputs,
7page 1-58
Connecting transistor outputs,
7page 1-59
Connecting analog outputs,
7page 1-1
Further inforuation 7Manual
MN05003003Z-EN
(1.18)
30 mm

1-113
/
1
Modular FLC
System overview
1 Facks
2 attery
3 XC100/XC200 controllers
1 Xl/0C l/0-uodules, Couuunication
uodules
5 Meuory card
Xl/0C teruinal block (screw or
spring-cage teruinal)
7 XC121 controller
8 Xl0-EXT121-1 l/0-expansion for XC121
controller
DC INPUT EH-XD16
0
4
8
12
1
5
9
13
2
6
10
14
3
7
11
15
DC INPUT EH-XD16
0
4
8
12
1
5
9
13
2
6
10
14
3
7
11
15
XC-CPU201
0
4
0
4
1
5
1
5
2
6
2
14
3
7
3
15
3
8
2
5
1
1
1
6
6
6
6
5
7
4
Modular FLC
1-114
/
1
General information
Modular FLCs offer an outstanding level of
scalability. This ensures a high level of
flexibility for designing individual
autouation systeus. ifferent CFu
perforuance classes and a wide range of
expansion uodules are available.
The data exchange via an Ethernet
interface to 0FC clients or integrated WE
servers enables the creation of innovative
solutions.
ln this class Eaton offers the two XC100 and
XC200 series.
XC100 modular PLCs
The controllers of the XC100 series are
universal autouation devices for suall and
uediuu-sited applications. They differ
according to the site of the available
prograu ueuory. 0ne variant is provided
with an optical CAN interface.
Expandable by up to 15 Xl/0C uodules
ata storage on S card
CAN interface for couuunication
FS232 interface
MN05003001Z-EN
XC200 modular PLCs
The controllers of the XC200 series offer a
high CFuperforuance and a wide range of
couuunication options. These devices
differ according to the site of the prograu
ueuory, the cycle tiue and the integrated
WE server.
Expandable by up to 15 Xl0C uodules
ata storage on S card or uS stick
Ethernet interface for prograuuing and
couuunication
CAN interface for couuunication
FS232 interface
lntegrated web server
MN05003001Z-EN
XIOC signal modules
The Xl0C signal uodules can be
connected to XC100 as well as to XC200
controllers (exception. Xl0C-TC1
telecontrol uodule only to XC200). A wide
range of different uodules are available.
igital input/output uodules
Analog input/output uodules
Teuperature ueasuring uodules
Counter uodules
Serial interface uodule (FS232, FS185,
FS122, operating uodes. Transparent
uode, Modbus uaster/slave, Sucou-A,
Suconet K slave)
Telecontrol uodule
Couuunication uodules FF0FluS-F
uaster, FF0FluS-F slave, Suconet-K
uaster)
MN05002002Z-EN
Modular FLC
1-115
/
1
Engineering
Device arrangement
uild the uodule racks and the controls
into the switchgear cabinet in a horitontal
position.
Power supply a Main switches
b Circuit protection device
c 21 v C supply voltage
d Earthed operation
e ln floating (i.e. unearthed) operation, an
isolation uonitor uust be used
(lEC 201-1, EN 0201-1, lN EN 0201-1)
f 21 v C line filter, ensures that a
current of up to 2.2 A (uaxiuuu) is
available at a rated operatingvoltage of
21 v C. use of the filter ensures that
the EMC stipulations for devices.
1)
lnternally bridged
2)
Additional FE connection via contact
spring on rear
a Clearance > 50 uu
b Clearance > 75 uuto active
eleuents
c Cable duct
c
b a
b a
b
a
b
a
~
=
~
=
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
24 V
0 V DC 24 V
Q
0 V
Q
DC
XC-CPU200
1*)
1*) 1*)
XT-FIL-1
2*)
(CPU power supply) (power supply of
local digital I/O)
Ferrite ring
Modular FLC
1-116
/
1
Terminal assignment on the CPU
The connections for the power supply and
the local inputs/outputs have the following
assignuent.
Connecting inputs/outputs to the central
processing unit
The 0v0/21v0 voltage teruinal is intended
exclusively for the power supply to the
local inputs (8) and outputs (), and is
electrically isolated frou the bus.
At a duty factor (F) of 100 % and a
utilitation factor of 1, outputs 0 to 3 can
each carry a load of 500 uA, and outputs
1 and 5 a load of 1 A.
The exauple shows the wiring with a
separate power supply for controller and
l/0 teruinals. lf only one power supply is
used, the following teruinals uust be
connected.
21 v to
21v0
and 0 v to
0v0
.
%IX 0.0
%IX 0.1
%IX 0.2
%IX 0.3
%IX 0.4
%IX 0.5
%IX 0.6
%IX 0.7
%QX 0.0
%QX 0.1
%QX 0.2
%QX 0.3
%QX 0.4
%QX 0.5
24 V
Q
0 V
Q
0 V
24 V
+ 24 V
0 V
0
2
4
6
0
2
4
24 V
Q
24 V
1
3
5
7
1
3
5
0 V
Q
0 V
Modular FLC
1-117
/
1
Ethernet/RS2232
Froua purely physical/uechanical point of
view the prograuing devices interface is
an FJ15 interface (socket). This ueans that
norual couuercial FJ15 connectors or
Ethernet patch cables can be used.
irect connection FC XC200.
The XC200 can be connected directly to the
(prograuuing) FCvia a crossover Ethernet
cable.
Crossover cables have the following
design features.
Connection set-up of 8-pole crossover
cable
Connection set-up of a 1-pole
crossover cable
The following cross-over cables are
available.
XT-CAT5-X-2 (2 u long)
XT-CAT5-X-5 (5 u long)
FC XC200 via hub/Switch connection.
lf you use a hub or a Switch between the
FC XC200 connection, you uust use a
standard Ethernet cable which is
connected 1.1 for the connection between
FC hub/Switch and hub/Switch XC200.
The cable Eu1A-FJ15-uS-CA1 is
provided for prograuuing via the uS
interface of a FC.
(XC-CFu101,
XC-CFu201) (XC-CFu202)
RS232 ETH
(XC-CFu201, XC-CFu202)
8 Fx
7 0N
Fx
5 Tx
1 0N
3 Fx
2 Tx
1 Tx
1
2
3
1
5
7
8
8
7
5
1
3
2
1
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
1 1
2 2
3 3
6 6
Modular FLC
1-118
/
1
Note!
Flease note that when there is a double
assignuent of the FJ15 interface with the
FS232 and Ethernet, the connections 1 and
7 are connected to 0N potential
because of the FS232 interface. For this
reason, we recouuend the use of 1-core
cables for the connection of the XC200 to
the Ethernet.
CANopen interface
Configuration of the -pole Coubicon plug.
Connector type. -pole, pluggable
spring-loaded teruinal block
Connector teruinals. up to 0.5 uu
2
Teruinals 1 and 1 , 2 and 5 as well as 3 and
are internally connected.
The CAN interface is electrically isolated.
us teruination resistors uust be installed
at the first or last station on the line (->Fig.
below).
The bus teruinating resistor on the
XC-CFu202 can be switched. The switch is
located above the battery.
0nly use a cable that is peruissible for
CANopen with the following properties.
Characteristic iupedance 100 to 120 ?
Capacitance per unit length 0 pF/u
Terminal Signal
0N
5 CAN_L
1 CAN_h
3 0N
2 CAN_L
1 CAN_h
6
5
4
3
2
1
B
a
u
d
r
a
t
e
[
K
b
i
t
/
s
]
L
e
n
g
t
h
[
m
]
C
o
r
e
c
r
o
s
s
-
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
[
m
m
2
]
L
o
o
p
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
[
O
/
k
m
]
20 1000 0.75 0.80 1
125 500 0.50 0.0 10
250 250 0.50 0.0 10
500 100 0.31 0.0 0
1000 10 0.25 0.31 70
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CAN_L
CAN_H
120 O 120 O
Modular FLC
1-119
/
1
Connection examples
Teruinal blocks with either screw
teruinals or spring-loaded teruinals can
be optionally used for the wiring.
Notes:
Cable lugs uust not exceed uu in
diaueter.
o not attach uore than 2 cable lugs to
one teruinal.
use a cable with a uaxiuuu conductor
cross-section of 0.75 uu
2
, or 0.5 uu
2
if
two cable lugs aregoing to be fixed to the
saue teruinal.
Conductor Screw connection Spring clamp connection
Solid 0.5-2.5 uu
2
0.11-1.0 uu
2
Flexible with ferrule 0.5-1.5 uu
2
The cables are to be inserted into the
teruinals with out the use of ferrules
or cable lugs.
Flexible 0.31-1.0 uu
2
Modular FLC
1-120
/
1
Wiring: digital input modules
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 V
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0 V
XIOC-16DI XIOC-8DI
XIOC-16DI
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0 V
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
0 V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 V
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
0 V
+24 V
0 V
XIOC-32DI
Modular FLC
1-121
/
1
Wiring digital output modules
When using inductive loads, connect a
free-wheel diode in parallel.
Wiring digital output modules (relays)
24 V
0 V
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
C
S
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
C
S
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C
S
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
C
S
XIOC-32DO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
24 V
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0 V
XIOC-16DO XIOC-8DO
XIOC-16DO
24 V
0 V
+24 V
0 V
+24 V , 100/240 V
0 V, N
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
24 V
6
7
8
9
10
11
C
0 V
XIOC-12DO-R
Modular FLC
1-122
/
1
Wiring analog input modules
Terminal assignment Module wiring U/I diagram for the
modules
+24 V
0 V
I/V
0+
1+
2+
3+
4+
5+
6+
7+
I/V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 V
24 V
XIOC-8AI-I2
XIOC-8AI-U1/-U2
I0 +
I0
I7 +
I7
V7 +
V0 +
V0
V7
XIOC-8AI-I2
XIOC-8AI-U1
XIOC-8AI-U2
0000
hex
07FF
hex
0FFF
hex
4 12 20
I
0
[mA]
0 5 10
0FFF
hex
07FF
hex
0000
hex
U
0
[V]
0
0800
hex
10
10
0000
hex
07FF
hex
U
0
[V]
XIOC-8AI-I2
XIOC-8AI-U1
XIOC-8AI-U2
Modular FLC
1-123
/
1
Wiring analog output modules
Terminal assignment Module wiring U/I diagram for the
modules
+24 V
0 V
V0+
V1+
*V2+
*V3+
V0
V1
V2*
V3*
24 V
0 V
+24 V
0 V
V0+
V1+
I2+
I3+
V0
V1
I2
I3
24 V
XIOC-2AO-U2
XIOC-4AO-U1/U2
XIOC-2AO-U1-2AO-I1
V0 +
V0
V3 +
V3
*
V0 +
V0
I2 +
I2
XIOC-2AO-U2
XIOC-4AO-U1/U2
XIOC-2AO-U1-2AO-I1
4
12
20
0FFF
hex
07FF
hex
0000
hex
I
1
[mA]
0
5
10
0FFF
hex
07FF
hex
0000
hex
U
1
[V]
0
10
07FF
hex
0800
hex
0FFF
hex
10
U
1
[V]
XIOC-2AO-U2
XIOC-4AO-U1/U2
XIOC-2AO-U2
XIOC-4AO-U1
XIOC-2AO-U1-2AO-I1
1-124
/
1
Modular l/0 systeu
System overview
I
/
O
N
X
5
6
14
1 2
5
9
10
11
12
13
3
4
4
7
8
8
1 0ateways
2 igital input uodules
3 Felais uodules
1 Coding eleuent
5 ase uodules
Felay juupers
7 Cover plate
8 End bracket
9 Supply uodules
10 Analog input uodules
11 igital output uodules
12 Analog output uodules
13 Technology uodules
11 Marker
Modular l/0 systeu
1-125
/
1
General information
Whether controlling uoveuents,
ueasuring teuperature or speeds, logging
currents and voltages the application
ranges for reuote l/0s are varied. Feuote
l/0s can be found wherever reuote signal
processing is the key eleuent of the
autouation concept.
The Xl/0N l/0 systeu has the following
essential features.
high uodularity
Field busses. CANopen, FF0FluS-F,
eviceNet and Ethernet
us-independent, plug-in uodules
Low wiring requireuent
Effective diagnostics
Space and cost savings with EC0
uodules
Frograuuable CANopen coupling unit
Standard and EC0uodules can be uixed
The Xl/0N l/0 systeu provides an
extensive range of digital and analog l/0s
as well as technology uodules.
Xl/0N EC0 gateways and EC0 uodules
Xl/0N EC0 adds cost and space-optiuited
l/0uodules and gateways to the Xl/0Nl/0
systeu. The EC0 gateways support the
CANopen, FF0FluS-F and Ethernet bus
systeus.
EC0 gateways with built-in bus
teruination resistors
Full coupatibility with the standard
Xl/0N systeu
No base uodules required
high channel density. (up to 1 l/0
over 12.5 uu width)
Fush-in spring-cage teruinals
Multi-functional slices
Mini uS diagnostics interface
Xl/0N efault gateways and standard
uodules
The standard gateways support the
CANopen, FF0FluS-F, eviceNet and
Ethernet bus systeus.
use of the pluggable l/0 uodules is
possible regardless of the fieldbus
used
Wiring iupleuented on base uodules,
fixed wiring
hot-swapping of uodules
0eneration of diagnostics inforuation
for the higher-level controller
up to 71 slice uodules can be
connected per gateway
Modules uechanical coding
Frograuuable CANopen coupling unit
With the prograuuable CANopen
gateway, FLC perforuance is nowbrought
directly to the fieldbus teruinal. The device
is ideal for uanaging reuote autouation
tasks and thus relieving the work load of a
higher-level FLC. The serial onboard
interface is used for prograuuing onsite
and as an interface for the l/0assistant
configuration and diagnostics tool.
Alternatively this interface can also be
Modular l/0 systeu
1-126
/
1
used as a free user interface. The gateway
is prograuued with XS0FT-C0ESYS-2.
ase uodules for every requireuent
The base uodules are used for connecting
the fieldbus wiring for the standard Xl/0N
uodules. They are available for 2-, 3- and
1-cable connections, as block or slice
uodules, either with spring-cage or screw
teruinals.
Engineering
I/Oassistant configurationanddiagnostics
tool
The l/0assistant is integrated in the
XS0FT-C0ESYS-2 software and offers
interactive support in the entire planning
and iupleuentation of an Xl/0N systeu.
You choose the gateways, electronics and
basic uodules, as well as the appropriate
accessories. The individual stations are
then either configured online or offline.
When everything is set to your
requireuents, you put the systeu into
operation. l/0assistant autouatically
generates a full parts list for your order.
The l/0assistant checks the station, reads
process data, outputs values and
visualites the diagnostics data of the
channels. ln this way, you can also
couuission your station without the need
for a higher-level controller and ensure
that one section of the installation is
functioning correctly.
Safety due to coding
The pluggable uodules also allow hot
swapping for the fast and toolless
exchange of uodules. The uechanical
coding of the uodules prevents incorrect
fitting.
Modular l/0 systeu
1-127
/
1
Connection examples
Power supply module (Bus Refreshing
Module)
Module for feeding the 21 v C systeu
power supply and the 21 v C field
voltage supply
XN-F4-3L wit| ateway supply
XN-F4-3L- wit|cut ateway
supply
Feeder module (Power Feeding modules)
Field power supply uodule 21 v
XN-F4-3L fcr XN-F|-24VL-
Field power supply uodule 120/230 v AC
XN-F4...-3 fcr XN-F|-120/230VAL-
24 V
24 V
+
PE
+
11 21
12 22
13 23
14 24
Module bus supply
Fieldbus
supply
11 21
12 22
13 23
14 24
24 V
PE
11 21
12 22
13 23
14 24
N
L
PE
Modular l/0 systeu
1-128
/
1
Digital input modules
Fositive switching
XN-34-3L fcr XN-2I-24VL-F
Negative switching
XN-34-3L fcr XN-2I-24VL-N
Digital output module
Fositive switching
XN-34-3L3 fcr
XN-2-24VL-0.bA-F
XN-2-24VL-2A-F
Negative switching
XN-34-3L3 fcr
XN-2-24VL-0.bA-N
11 21
12 22
13 23
14 24
S S
PE PE
11 21
12 22
13 23
14 24
S S
PE PE
11 21
12 22
13 23
14 24
PE PE
S S
11
+ +
21
12 22
13 23
14 24
S S
PE PE
Modular I/O system
1-129
1
1
Analog input modules
XN-S4-SBBS for XN-1AI-I(0/4...20MA)
XN-S4-SBBS for
XN-1AI-U(-10/0...+10VDC)
Analog transmitter with non-isolated
transmitter supply

Analog output module
XN-S3...-SBB for XN-2AO-I(0/4...20MA)
Further connection examples can be found
in the manuals:
XI/ON digital I/O modules, power supply
modules, MN05002010Z-EN
(previously: M001735-02)
XI/ON analog I/O modules,
MN05002011Z-EN (previously: M001756-04)
These manuals can be downloaded as PDF
files at www.eaton.com/moellerproducts
in the Products & Solutions area.
11 21
12 22
13 23
14 24
Sh
U
h
U
h
+
11 21
12 22
13 23
Sh Sh
Channel 1
Channel 2
1-130
/
1
Software
users of autouation couponents such as
uachine and systeu builders are
increasingly no longer satisfied with single
solutions. This is why standards such as
lEC 1131-3 have becoue established as
uanufacturer-independent standards for
FLC prograuuing. CoeSys supports all
prograuuing languages described in the
lEC-1131 standard.
CoeSys is based on a standard of 3S.
Froven technical features, siuple handling
and a wide distribution of this software for
prograuuing autouation couponents of
different uanufacturers guarantee its
success.
All Eaton controllers are prograuued with
the CoeSys software. Frograuuing can
be carried out in different prograuuing
languages. These are divided into
text-based or graphic-based languages.
Text-oriented languages
Instruction List (IL)
An instruction list (lL) consists of a
sequence of instructions. Each instruction
starts on a new line and contains an
operator and one or several couua
separated operands depending on the
type of operation.
An identifier label followed by a colon (.)
uay be placed in front of an instruction.
This is used for labelling the instruction
which can then be used as a juup target.
A couuent uust always be the last
eleuent of a line.
Exauple.
L 17
3T lirt / ccrrert )
L b
JMFL rext
L iJwcrJ
L istruct.sJwcrJ
3TN test
rext:
Structured Text (ST)
Structured Text (ST) consists of a series of
instructions that are arranged as in high
level languages (lF...ThEN...ELSE) or in
loops (WhlLE0).
Exauple.
I| value < 7 TFLN
WFILL value < 8
value := value + 1;
LN_WFILL;
LN_I|
Software
1-131
/
1
Graphic-oriented languages
Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
Sequential function chart (SFC) is a
graphical language. lt enables the tiuing of
different actions within a prograu to be
defined. ifferent step eleuents are used
for this which are assigned to specific
actions and which are controlled by
so-called transition eleuents.
Exauple of a network in a sequential
function chart.
Software
1-132
/
1
Ladder Diagram (LD)
Ladder diagrau is a graphical
prograuuing language which closely
follows the principle of an electrical
circuit.
0n the one hand, ladder diagrauis suitable
for designing logical switch systeus, on
the other hand, it is also possible to create
networks as in F. L is therefore very
good for controlling the calling of other
blocks. Ladder diagrau consists of a
sequence of networks. A network is
bordered on the left and right by a left and
right vertical current path. A circuit
diagrau consisting of contacts, coils and
connection lines is located in between.
Exauple of a network in ladder diagrau
consisting of contacts and coils.
Function Block Diagram (FBD)
Function block diagrau is a graphical
prograuuing language. lt operates with a
list of networks, in which each network
contains a structure that uay represent a
logic and arithuetic expression, the calling
of a function block, a juup or a return
instruction.
Exauple of a network in a function block
diagrau.
Software
1-133
/
1
Continuous function chart (CFC)
The freely graphical function chart is
based on function block diagrau(F) but
does not work like this with networks but
withfreely placableeleuents. This enables
for exauple the iupleuentation of
feedback paths.
lupleuentation exauple in freely
graphical function block diagrau editor.
Integrated visualization
The CoeSys prograuuing systeu also
contains a visualitation editor as well as
the prograuuing tool. This offers a clear
advantage.
0nly one additional software package is
required to visualite (i.e. for uonitoring and
operation) the data of a controller
prograuued in CoeSys. Whilst the
application is being developed, the user
can already create visualitation screens in
the saue user interface. The visualitation
integrated in CoeSys can access the
variables frou the controller directly.
lf the controller has a display (hMl-FLC),
this visualitation can be displayed directly
on the panel (target visualitation).
Many controllers are now equipped with a
web server. lf required CoeSys
generates frou the visualitation data an
XML description which is stored on the
controller together with a Java applet and
which can be shown on a browser using
TCF/lF (WE visualitation).
GALILEO interactive visualization tool
For its hMl and hMl-FLCs Eaton offers an
easy to learn project design environuent
that is nevertheless powerful and
couprehensive ideal for use in all
uachine and process-relevant
applications in systeu and uachine
building. 0alileo has a sector neutral
design and offers seauless project design
for all of Eatons graphical hMl devices.
Notes
1-134
/
1
2-1
$$
2
Electronic motor starters and drives
Page
Drives engineering basic information 2-2
Soft starter basic information 2-9
Connection example DS7 2-26
DM4 connection example 2-44
Frequency inverter basic information 2-66
Connection example for M-Max 2-85
Rapid Link System 4.0 2-98
2-2
$$
2
rives engineering basic inforuation
Drives egineering selection criteria
Each drive task requires a drive uotor. The
speed, torque and controllability of each
uotor uust fulfill the requireuents of the
task. As a general rule, the application
deteruines the drive.
The drive uotor uost frequently used
worldwide in industrial plants and large
buildings is the three-phase asynchronous
uotor. lts robust and siuple construction
as well as its high degrees of protection
and standard types are the uain features
of this inexpensive electric uotor.
Three-phase asynchronous motor
Motor starting variants
Direct-on-line start "
ln the siuplest case the uotor is
connected directly with a contactor. The
coubination of uotor protection and
cable protection (fuse) is called a uotor
starter (MSC = Motor Starter
Coubination).
y applying the full uains voltage to the
uotor windings, 0L starting uay
produce large starting currents which
uay result in troublesoue voltage
changes. irect-on-line starting
three-phase uotors uust not cause
interference voltage changes in the
public utility grid. This requireuent is
generally fulfilled if the apparent power
of a three-phase asynchronous uotor
does not exceed 5.2 kvA or its startup
current does not exceed 0 A.
With a uains voltage of 100 v and 8 tiues
the starting current, this corresponds to
a rated uotor current of around 7.5 Aand
thus a uotor rating of 1 kW.
The uotor rating denotes the uechanical
output of the uotor at the shaft.
Star-delta starter !
This is the uost popular and couuonly
used starting uethod for uotor ratings
> 1 kW (100 v).
Electronic motor starter (EMS) and soft
starter G
These enable the soft and low-noise
starting of the uotor. This eliuinates
interference producing current peaks
and jerks during switching. The startup
and deceleration phase of the uotor can
also be tiue-controlled depending on the
load.
Frequency inverter E
This enables tiue-controlled uotor
starting, uotor braking and operation
with infinitely variable uotor speeds.
epending on the application, different
types of frequency inverters are used.
with the voltage/frequency control
(u/f) or vector control for
frequency-controlled uotor operation,
with vector control or servo control for
high speed accuracy and additional
torque adjustuent.
Associated circuit diagraus 7page 2-3
2-3
$$
2
1. Speed ueasuring (pulse generator)
F1. Fuse protection
(short-circuit and cable protection)
F2. Motor protection
(protection frou therual overload,
overload relay)
M1. Three-phase asynchronous uotor
01. Switching
(contactor, uotor contactor)
02. Soft starter, electronic uotorstarter
T1. Frequency inverter
Motor connection
When connecting a three-phase uotor to
the uains supply, the data on the rating
plate of the uotor uust correspond to the
uains voltage and frequency.
The standard connection is iupleuented
via six screwteruinals in the teruinal box
of the uotor and with two types of circuit,
the star connection and the delta
connection, depending on the uains
voltage.
M
F1
3 / N / PE / AC 50/60 Hz
Q1
F2
M1
3~
M
B1
T1 Q2
3~
M
3~
M

3~

U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2
2-4
$$
2
The rotation direction of a uotor is always
deteruined by directly looking at the drive
shaft of the uotor (frou the drive end). 0n
uotors with two shaft ends, the driving end
is denoted with (= rive), the non-driving
end with N (= No drive).
Fegardless of the circuit type and the type
of three-phase asynchronous uotor, the
connections uust be labeled, so that their
alphabetical sequence (e.g. u1, v1, W1)
corresponds with the order of the uains
voltage sequence (L1, L2, L3) and causes
the uotor to rotate clockwise.
0n the three-phase asynchronous uotor,
three windings are arranged offset frou
each other by 120/p (p = nuuber of pole
pairs). When a three-phase AC voltage
with a 120 phase sequence is applied, this
produces a rotation field in the uotor.
The effect of inductance causes the
rotation field and torque to be forued in the
rotor winding. The speed of the uotor thus
depends on the nuuber of pole pairs and
the frequency of the supply voltage. The
rotation direction can be reversed by
swapping over two of the supply phases.
Information on the rating plate
The electrical and uechanical rating data
of the uotor uust be stated on its rating
plate (lEC 31-1, vE 0530). The data on the
rating plate describes the stationary
operation of the uotor in the area of its
operating point (M
N
, e.g. at 100 v and
50 ht). The operating data is unstablein the
uotor start phase.
The following exauples show the rating
plates for two uotors with a uotor shaft
output of 1 kW and the respective
connection circuits on a three-phase AC
network with 100 v and 50 ht.
90
0
L
1
L
2
L
3
360
L
1
120 120 120
180
270
Clockwise (FW) Anticlockwise
operation (FEv)
FW = forward run (clockwise rotation
field)
FEv = reverse run (anticlockwise rotation
field active)
L1 L2 L3
U1 V2 W3
L1 L2 L3
U1 V2 W3
2-5
$$
2
Star circuit Delta circuit
, ,
With the specified 230/100 v voltage,
this uotor uust be connected to the
three-phase supply (u
LN
= 100 v) in a
star configuration.
With the specified 100/90 v voltage,
this uotor uust be connected to the
three-phase supply (u
LN
= 100 v) in a
delta configuration.
The voltage of each uotor winding is
designed for 230 v. The windings uust
therefore be connected in sequence to
the phase voltage (100 v).
Each uotor windingis designedherefor
the uaxiuuu phase voltage of 100 v
and can be connected directly.
The three winding phases (W2-u2-v2)
are configured in the teruinal box to the
so-called star point. The voltage of the
individual phases to the star point is
230 v (= u
W
).
The three winding phases (u1 W2,
v1 u2, W1 v2) are coubined in the
teruinal box and connected directly to
the individual phases.
1410 min
-1
230 / 400 V 14.5 / 8.5 A
50 Hz
IP 54 Iso. KI F
4.0 KW S1 cos 0.82
/
1410 min
-1
400 / 690 V 8.5 / 4.9 A
50 Hz
IP 54 Iso. KI F
4.0 KW S1 cos 0.82
/
L1 L3 L2
V1
V2
U1 W1 W2
U2
U
LN I
LN
L1 L3 L2
U1
W1
V1
V2
W2
U2
U
LN I
LN
u
LN
3 u
W
( & l
LN
l
W
& u
LN
u
W
& l
LN
3 l
W
( &
U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2
2-6
$$
2
Startup characteristics
The following figure shows the
characteristic startup curves of a
three-phase asynchronous uotor.
l
A
. Starting current
l
N
. Fated operational current at the
operating point
M
A
. Starting torque
M
. Accelerating torque (M
M
> M
L
)
M
K
. reakdown torque
M
L
. Load torque
M
M
. Motor torque
M
N
. Fated load torque, (stable operating
point, intersection point of the three-
phase speed torque characteristic
with the load characteristic)
M
S
. Full-up torque
n. Speed (actual value)
n
N
. Fated speed at the operating point
n
S
. Synchronous speed
(n
S
- n
N
= slip speed s)
Synchronous speed.
Slip speed in %.
Three-phase asynchronous uotor speed.
f
Frequency of voltage in ht (= s
-1
)
n Speed in r.p.u.
p Nuuber of pole pairs
s. Slip speed in r.p.u.
Electric power.
F
1
. Electrical power in W
u. Fated operating voltage in v
l. Fated operational current in A
cos '. Fower factor
Motor output (power equation).
F
2
. Mechanical shaft output power in kW
M
N
. Fated torque in Nu
n. Speed in r.p.u.
Efficiency.
Comparison of startup variants
The features of the startup variants "to
E described on page 2-2 are shown on
the following pages 2- and 2-7.
The graphs show the typical
characteristics.
M
N
n
N
n
n
S
M
A
M
M
M
B
M
K
M
L
M
S
I
A
I
N
M, I
0
n
s
f
p
** * &
s
n
s
n C
n
s
************** 100% # &
n
f
p
** * 1 s C ' & # &
F
1
u l 3 - .-, ( ( ( &
F
2
M
N
n (
9550
***************** &
!
F
2
F
1
***** &
2-7
$$
2
Direct Motor start
Voltage curve
Mains load high
Current curve
Felative startup current
1 to 8 x l
e
(depending on uotor)
Torque behaviour
Felative startup torque
1.5 to 3 x M
N
(depending on the uotor)
Features.
Strong acceleration with large starting
current
high uechanical load
Scope of application.
rives on powerful supply networks that
allow high starting currents (torques)
Star-delta starter
Voltage curve
Mediuu uains load
Current curve
Felative starting current
1.3 to 3 x l
e
(~ . coupared to 0L start)
Torque behaviour
Felative starting torque
0.5 to 1 x M
N
(~ . coupared to 0L start)
Features.
Startup with reduced current and
torque
Current, torque peak on switching
Application range.
rives that are only subject to loads after
the startup
100 %
t
U
2
4
6
I / I
e
n/n
N
I
N
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
2
3
n/n
N
M
N
1
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
M
L
M/M
N
100 %
58 %
t
U

2
4
6
I / I
e
n/n
N
I
N
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
2
3
M/M
N
n/n
N
M
N
M
L
1
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
2-8
$$
2
Soft starters
Voltage curve
Low to uediuu uains load
Current curve
2 to x l
e
(reduced by voltage control)
Torque behaviour
0.1 to 1 x M
N
(M ~ u
2
, quadratically
adjustable by voltage control)
Features.
adjustable starting characteristics
controlled deceleration possible
Application range
rives with starting behavior adjusted to
working uachine.
Frequency inverter
Voltage curve
Low uains load
Current curve
# 1 to 2 x l
e
(adjustable)
Torque behaviour
~ 0.1 to 2 x M
N
(M ~ u/f, adjustable
torque)
Features.
high torque at low current
adjustable starting characteristics
Application range.
rives requiring a controlled and
infinitely variable speed adjustuent.
t
100 %
30 %
U
U
Start
t
Start
2
4
6
I / I
e
n/n
N
I
N
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
2
3
n/n
N
M
N
M/M
N
1
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
M
L
t
100 %
U
U
Boost
t-acc
2
3
4
5
6
I / I
e
n/n
N
I
N
1
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
2
3
n/n
N
M
N
M/M
N
1
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
M
L
2-9
$$
2
Soft starter basic inforuation
Soft starters
Soft starters are electronic devices for the
soft starting of three-phase uotors. Soft
starters uust couply with the product
standard lEC/EN 0917-1-2.
uring the startup phase of a uotor, a soft
starter controls the power supply suoothly
and continuously up to the rated value
(u
LN
) by controlling the phase angle. This
voltage control liuits the starting current
since the uotor current behaves
proportionally to the uotor voltage. The
resulting suooth torque increase enables
the uotor to be adapted to the load
behavior of the uotor.
The uechanical couponents of this type of
drive unit are therefore accelerated very
suoothly. This has a positive effect on the
lifespan, operating behavior and operating
processes, and prevents any adverse
effects such as.
lupacting of cog edges in the gearbox
Feduction of the water hauuers in pipe
systeus
Slipping of v belts
Jitter with conveyor systeus
After a tiue controlled voltage change has
elapsed (T0F = Top-of-Faup), so-called
bypass contacts can be used to bridge the
phase angle control for the static
continuous operation. The considerably
lower transition resistance of the
uechanical switch contacts coupared to
power seuiconductors enables heat
dissipation in the soft starter to be reduced
and the lifespan of the power
seuiconductors to be extended.
2
3
4
5
6
I / I
e
n/n
N
I
N
1
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
2
3
n/n
N
M
N
M/M
N
1
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
M
L
2-10
$$
2
Note
The acceleration tiue of a drive with a soft
starter always depends on the load and the
breakaway torques. When couuissioning
this type of drive systeu, the required
breakaway torque should be set first of all
by ueans of the start voltage (u-Start) and
then the shortest possible raup tiue
(t-Start) shouldbedeteruinedfor the linear
voltage change.
As well as the tiue-controlled startup of a
uotor, the soft starter also enables a
tiue-controlled reduction of the uotor
voltage and thus a controlled stopping of
the uotor. This type of stop function is
priuarily used for puups in order to
prevent pressure waves (water hauuer).
Jerky uoveuents and therefore the wear
on drive chains and drive belts as well as
bearings and gears can be reduced.
Note
The set raup tiue for the deceleration
(t-Stop) uust be greater than the
load-dependent uncontrolled deceleration
tiue of the uachine.
TOR
U
LN
t
U-Start
t-Start
u
LN
= Mains voltage
u-Start = Start voltage
t-Start = Faup tiue of the
voltage change
T0F = Top-of-Faup (end point
of the voltage control. u = u
LN
)
2-11
$$
2
Control of the motor voltage
The ratio of the overload current to the
rated operational current, the total of the
tiues for the controlled overload current,
as well as the duty factor and start cycle
foru the overload current profile of a soft
starter, this data is stated on the rating
plate in accordance with lEC/EN 0917-1-2.
Example
55A. AC-53a. 3-5 . 75-10
55A = Fated operational current of the
soft starter
AC-53a = Load cycle in accordance with
lEC/EN 0917-1-2
3 = 3-fold overcurrent at start
(3 55 A = 15 A)
5 = 0vercurrent duration in seconds
75 = uty factor within the load cycle in %
10 = Nuuber of peruissible starts per hour
0ther overload cycles and operating
frequencies can be calculated.
Further inforuation on this is provided in
the relevant soft starter uanual.
Note
The controlled deceleration presents a
siuilar load on the power seuiconductors
in the soft starter as the start phase. lf
therefore the deceleration raup is
activated on a soft starter with a uaxiuuu
of 10 peruissible starts per hour, the
nuuber of peruissible starts is reduced to
5 per hour (plus 5 stops within the saue
hour).
U-Start
U
t-Start t-Stop
t
2-12
$$
2
Types
Soft starters are usually divided into two
types.
Two-phase controlled, electronic soft
starters for siuple tasks.
use is liuited to suall and uediuu
rated uotor ( 250 kW).
Siuple handling with liuited setting
options and tiue controlled voltage
raups.
For siuple applications where
iuportance is placed on jerk-free
operation in the starting phase.
They are an inexpensive alternative to
the star-delta starter.
They can only be used in so-called
ln-Line configurations.
Three-phase controlled, electronic soft
starters for couplex tasks.
For uediuu to high uotor ratings up to
800 kW as coupact devices
The devices are provided with an
adjustable current liuitation and
integrated uotor protection functions.
They have preset application
characteristics and can be
paraueterited for optiuiting the
uachine start functions.
Control inputs, signal contacts and
optional fieldbus interfaces enable a
wide range of couuunication options
to be iupleuented.
They can be used in both ln-Line and
ln-elta configurations.
Exauple. see M1 7page 2-57
L1 L2 L3
M
3 ~
L1 L2 L3
M
3 ~
2-13
$$
2
230 / 400 V /
4.0 / 2.3
0,75 0.67
kW
min
-1
1410 50 Hz
A
U, I, f
cos
Selection criteria
The soft starter Gis selected on the
basis of the supply voltage u
LN
of the
supply network "and the rated
operational current of the assigned
uotor !. The circuit type (-/ 8) of
the uotor uust be selected according
to the supply voltage ". The rated
output current l
e
of the soft starter
uust be greater than/equal to the
rated uotor current.
2-14
$$
2
Selection criteria
When selecting the drive, the following
criteria uust be known.
Type of uotor
(three-phase asynchronous uotor)
Mains voltage = rated operating voltage
of the uotor (e.g. 3 AC ~ 100 v)
Fated uotor current (recouuended
value, dependent on the circuit type and
the power supply)
Load torque (quadratic, linear)
Starting torque
Aubient teuperature
(rated value 10 C).
The switching and protective devices
(electrouechanical couponents) in the
uain circuit of the uotor feeder are
designed on the basis of the rated
operational current (l
e
) of theuotor andthe
utilitation category AC-3 (standard
lEC 0917-1-1).
The utilitation category here is AC-53a
(lEC/EN 0917-1-2 standard).
AC-3 = squirrel-cage uotors. startup,
switch off during operation.
AC-53a = control of a squirrel-cage
uotor. eight-hour duty with starting
currents for start processes, settings,
operation
L1
L2
L3
V1 W1 U1
PE
I > I > I >
M
3 ~
Motor feeder with S7
soft starter coubined
with FKZM0 in ln-Line
circuit
2-15
$$
2
Permissible connection circuits of the motor
Three-phase asynchronous uotors can be
connected to a soft starter, depending on
the uains voltage in a star or delta
connection.
Example
2 phase controlled soft starter (S7)
Star circuit
Delta circuit
L1 L3
L1 L3
L2
L2
T1 T2 T3
U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2
2-16
$$
2
Note
Three-phase uotors with a neutral point
(star circuit) uust not be connected to a
two-phase controlled soft starter as one
phase is connected here directly to the
uains voltage and causes iuperuissible
overheating in the uotor.
Danger!
Dangerous voltage.
Risk of death or serious injury.
The power section of soft
starters is forued with seui-conductors
(thyristors). When a supply voltage (u
LN
) is
present, there is also a dangerous voltage
present at the output to the uotor in the
0FF/ST0F state.
This warning applies to all soft starter
types.
Example
2 phase controlled soft starter
Caution!
Not peruissible
L1 L3
L1 L3
L2
L2
T1 T2 T3
M
3 ~
1L1 3L2 5L3 PE
PE 2T1 4T2 6T3
2-17
$$
2
Soft starters and coordination types to
IEC/EN 60947-4-3
The following coordination types are
defined in lEC/EN 0917-1-3, 8.2.5.1.
Type 1 coordination
ln type 1 coordination, the device uust not
endanger persons or the installation in the
event of a short-circuit and does not have
to be capable of continued operation
without repairs or parts replaceuents.
Type 2 coordination
ln type 2 coordination, the device uust not
endanger persons or the installation in the
event of a short-circuit and uust be capable
of continued use without repairs or parts
replaceuents. For hybrid control devices
and contactors, there is a risk of contact
welding, for which the uanufacturer uust
give uaintenance instructions.
The assigned short-circuit protective
device (SCF) uust trip in the event of a
short-circuit. lf a fuse is used, this has to be
replaced. This is part of the norual
operation of the fuse, also for type 2
coordination.
Note
Superfast seuiconductor fuses uust
always be arranged directly in front of the
power seuiconductors (short cable
lengths).
M
3
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
M1
Q21
I > I > I >
Type 1 coordination
M
M1
3
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1
F3
Q21
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
I > I > I >
F3. Superfast
seui-conductor fuses,
in addition to the
short-circuit and cable
protection 01
hybrid control devices =
Soft starter with bypass
contacts
hybrid contactors =
Electronic uotor starters
(EMS)
Type 2 coordination
2-18
$$
2
Residual current devices
Fesidual current devices (FCs) protect
persons and aniuals frou the presence
(not the creation!) of iuperuissibly high
contact voltages. They prevent dangerous
and fatal injuries caused by electrical
accidents and also serve as fire
prevention.
Standard residual current devices (FC
type A) with up to 30 uA and higher can be
used with a soft starter.
F1. Fesidual current device (FC)
F3. 0ptional seuiconductor fuses
for type 2 coordination
M1. Motor
01. Cable protection uotor protection
021. Soft starter
M
3 ~
1
L
1
2
L
3
3
L
5
1
T
2
2
T
4
3
T
6
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1
RCD
Q21
F1
F3
M1
I > I > I >
2-19
$$
2
Motor protection
The uotor protection protects the
three-phase asynchronous uotor frou
therual overload caused by a uechanical
overload or the failure of one or two
connection cables.
There are two basic ways of protecting the
three-phase uotor frou overload during
operation.
Monitoring of current consuuption
(uotor protection, overload relay or
biuetal relay)
irect teuperature uonitoring in the
uotor winding (FTC, theruistor)
a Motor-protective circuit-breaker (FKZ,
FKE, NZM), disconnection with uanual
release
b 0verload relay (Z, ZE) here in
coubination with a contactor
c 0verload relay (Z, ZE) for indication
of the therual overload
d Theruistor, FTCor positiveteuperature
coefficient protection in the uotor
winding with external indication relay
(EMT)
Note
The coubination of the current uonitoring
uotor protection variants ", !or Gwith
the teuperature uonitoring variants Eis
also called full uotor protection.
Note
After a uotor protective device has tripped,
the soft starter and the protective device
cannot be switched on again until it has
cooled down. The reset depends on the
teuperature.
M
3 ~
1
L
1
2
L
3
3
L
5
1
T
2
2
T
4
3
T
6
L1
L2
L3
PE
M1
I > I > I >

2-20
$$
2
Parallel connectionof several motors toa
single soft starter
You can also use soft starters to start
several uotors connected in parallel. This
does not, however, allow the startup
behavior of the individual uotors to be
controlled.
Notes
The current consuuption of all
connected uotors uust not exceed the
rated operational current l
e
of the soft
starter.
Each uotor uust be protected frou
therual overload individually, e.g. with
theruistors and/or overload relays (F11,
F12) . Alternatively, uotor-protective
circuit-breakers (011, 012) can also be
used.
lt is advisable to use this circuit type only
with uotors of a siuilar rating (uaxiuuu
deviation. one rating site). Frobleus uay
arise during starting if uotors with
significant rating differences (for
exauple 1.5 kW and 11 kW) are
connected to the output of a soft starter.
The lower-rated uotors uay not be able
to reach the required torque due to the
relatively high ohuic resistance of their
stators. uring the startup these require
a higher voltage.
The last uotor uust not be switched off
in operation since the resulting voltage
peaks uay cause dauage to the
electronic couponents in the soft starter
and thus to its failure.
2-21
$$
2
F11, F12. Motor protection (overload
relay) or uotor-protective
circuit-breaker (011, 012)
F3. Superfast seui-conductor
fuses (optional, additionally to
01 and F1)
01 or F1. Short-circuit and cable
protection
F1
F3
M
M1 M2
3
Q11
Q21
L1
L2
L3
Q1
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
F12 F11
M
3
Q11
Q12
I > I > I >
2-22
$$
2
Using soft starters with three-phase slipring motors
When upgrading or uoderniting older
installations, contactors androtor resistors
of uultistage three-phase stator autouatic
starters can be replaced with soft starters.
This is done by reuoving the rotor resistors
and assigned contactors and
short-circuiting the slip rings of the uotors
rotor. The soft starter is then connected
into the feeder. The suooth starting of the
uotor can then be iupleuented.
7Figure, page 2-23
Notes
Slip ring uotors develop a high starting
torque with low starting current. They
can thus be started at the rated load and
this uust be taken into account when
selecting a soft starter. The soft starter
cannot replace the rotor resistors in
every application.
epending on the type of uotor, it uay be
necessary to keep the last resistor group
peruanently connected to the slipring
rotor teruinal (K-L-M).
01. Cable and uotor overload protection
or
F1. Cable protection and
F2. 0verload protection required
(theruistor, biuetal relay) if the soft
starter (021) does not include this
function. Exauple. overload relay F2 in
coubination with contactor 011.
M1.Slip-ring uotor
2-23
$$
2
L
1
L
2
L
3
Q
1
1
3
5
1
3
1
4
F
1
2
6
4
2
4
6
P
E
U
V
W
M
3M
1
1
3
5
Q
1
1
Q
4
3
Q
4
2
Q
4
1
2
4
6
1
3
5
1
5
3
2
4
6
2
4
6
1
3
5
KLM
U
3
V
3
W
3
U
2
V
2
W
2
R
3
R
2
U
1
V
1
W
2
R
1
I
>
I
>
I
>
L
1
L
2
L
3
4
1
5
3
2
4
6
U
V
W
KLM
M3
I
>
I
>
I
>
F
1
2
6
1
5
3
Q
1
1
3
1
4
F
2
Q
1
1
Q
2
1
M
1
L
1
L
2
L
3
T
1
T
2
T
3
2-24
$$
2
Motors with compensation capacitors
As resistive-inductive loads, three-phase
uotors draw reactive power frou the
network. This reactive power can be
coupensated by ueans of capacitors (C
x
)
"(iuproved power factor cos ').
WARNING
The output of a soft starter uust not be
connected to any capacitive loads
(capacitors) !. This would dauage the
soft starter.
lf capacitors are to be used for reactive
power coupensation and thus to iuprove
the power factor, they uust be connected
to the uains side of the soft starter G.
lf the soft starter is used together with an
isolating or uain contactor (011), the
capacitors uust be disconnected frou the
soft starter (012) when the contactor
contacts are open.
The following figure Gshows a safe
arrangeuent. The coupensation
capacitors are switched via a capacitor
contactor (012). The capacitor contactor is
controlled via the T0F (Top-of-Faup)
signal of the soft starter. The capacitors
are disconnected frou the uains during
the critical start and stop tiues.
Note
ln networks with electronically controlled
loads (e.g. soft starters), the coupensation
devices uust always be connected with a
series inductance.
C
x
. Capacitors for reactive power
coupensation
01. Motor-protective circuit-breaker
011. Mains contactor
012. Contactor for capacitors
021. Soft starter
M1. Three-phase asynchronous uotor
2-25
$$
2
M
3
L
1
L
2
L
3
Q
1
M
1
Q
1
1
C
x
M
M
1
3
Q
1
1
Q
2
1
L
1
L
2
L
3
Q
1
L
1
L
2
L
3
T
1
T
2
T
3
C
x
C
a
u
t
i
o
n
!
N
o
t
p
e
r
u
i
s
s
i
b
l
e
M
M
1
3
Q
1
1
Q
2
1
L
1
L
2
L
3
Q
1
2
T
O
R
Q
1
L
1
L
2
L
3
T
1
T
2
T
3
C
x
2-26
$$
2
Connection exauple S7
DS7 product features
Two-phase controlled soft starter, ueets
the requireuents of the lEC/EN0917-1-2
product standard
Fower section and control section are
galvanically isolated
Fower section.
Fated operational voltage. 200 180 v,
-15 % /10 %
Mains frequency. 50/0 ht 10 %
0verload cycle. AC53a. 3 5. 75 10
Control voltage/regulator supply voltage.
S7-310. 21 v AC/C, -15 %/10 %
S7-312. 120 - 230 v AC,
-15 %/10 %
AC. 50/0 ht 10 %
Control voltage and controller power
supply always have the saue potential
and voltage level.
Felay contacts (potential-free)
T0F (Top-of-Faup). 230 v AC, 1 A,
AC-11
ln site 1 (to 12 A) with potential
connection to the control section
FuN (operational signal). 230 v AC,
1 A, AC-11
ln site 1 (to 12 A) this relay contact is
not present.
Aubient teuperature during operation.
-5 to 10 C, uax. 0 C with derating
and device fan
Load cycle. 10 starts per hour, uax. 10
starts per hour, with derating and
integrated device fan (optional)
Status display (LEs)
FuN = 0perating signal (green)
Error = Error uessage (red)
Faraueteritation/setting via three
paraueters accessible on the front
S7 with device fan S7-FAN-032
t-Start = Faup tiue (1 - 30 s) for the voltage
increase frouthe valueu-Start up to uains
voltage (u
LN
)
u-Start = The start voltage (30 - 100 %),
deteruines the torque of the uotor
t-Stop= Faup tiue (0/1 - 30 s) for the
voltage reduction frou the uains voltage
(u
LN
) to the value u-Start
30
1
30 0
t-Start (s)
U-Start (%)
t-Stop (s)
20 10
20 10
100 30
2-27
$$
2
Sizes DS7
Size 1 (4 to 12 A)
S7-31SX001
S7-31SX007
S7-31SX009
S7-31SX012
Size 2 (16 to 32 A)
S7-31SX01
S7-31SX021
S7-31SX032
Size 3 + 4 (41 to 200 A)
S7-31SX011
S7-31SX055
S7-31SX070
S7-31SX081
S7-31SX100
S7-31SX135
S7-31SX10
S7-31SX200
Documentation
Manual. MN03901001Z-EN
lnstructional leaflet.
lL03902003Z (for site 1)
lL03902001Z (for site 2)
lL03902005Z (for site 3 und 1)
2-28
$$
2
The nuuber and arrangeuent of the
control teruinals, as well as the structure
in the power section of the individual sites
vary according to the power section.
Size 1 (4 to 12 A)
Size 2 (16 to 32 A)
Size 3 and 4 (41 to 200 A)
TOR
1L1
2T1 13
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2 +A1 -A2 +U
S
TOR RUN
1L1
2T1 +A1 -A2 13 14 23 24
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2 +U
S
-U
S
TOR RUN
1L1 5L3
2T1 6T3
PE
PE +U
S
-U
S
+A1 -A2 13 14 23 24 EN
3L2
4T2
2-29
$$
2
Standard connection with upstream mains contactor and soft stop ramp
Standard connection with mains contactor, size 1 (4 to 12 A)
M
3 ~
1
L
1
3
L
2
5
L
3
+ U
s
TOR
- A2 + A1 13
2
T
1
4
T
2
6
T
3
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q11
Q21
F3
F2
M1
Q11
Q1
I > I > I >
K3
F1
(+) U
s
24 V AC/DC, 120/230 V AC
() U
s
2-30
$$
2
Control section with mains contactor 01, F1. Short-circuit- and cable protection
F2. Motor protection
F3. 0ptional seuiconductor fuse for
type 2 coordination, in addition to
01 and F1
K3. Start/Stop
" 0ptional if a stop is required without a
SoftStop
Setting. t-Stop > 0
Q11
S2
L01/L+
L00/L-
Q1
F2
S1 Soft-Stop
Soft-Start
Q11
K3
Q11
K3

2-31
$$
2
Rotation direction reversal with soft stop ramp
Size 1 (4 to 12 A)
M
3 ~
1
L
1
3
L
2
5
L
3
2
T
1
4
T
2
6
T
3
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1
Q21
M1
Q11
F3
Q12
I > I > I >
- A2 + U
s
(+) U
s
24 V AC/DC,
120/230 V AC
() U
s
2-32
$$
2
Control section for bidirectional operation
FW = Clockwise rotation field
(Forward Fun)
FEv = Counterclockwise rotation field
(Feverse Fun)
011 = Mains contactor FW
012 = Mains contactor FEv
a Asseubled control station
b Feversing starter
c Standard auxiliary contact
A2
A2
B1 A1
-A2
+U
S
53
15
1.53
1.54
16
25
13
22
21
14
26
53
54
63
64
63
64
54
+A1
Q11
Q12
N (-)
L (+)
Q12
Q11
K2T
K2T Q21
FWDI
REV II
0
Q12
Q11 Q12
Q11
t > t-Stop
2-33
$$
2
Control section for bidirectional operation
Note
The control voltages (u
S
) of the S7 soft
starter and the contactor control uust
have the saue potential.
21 v C/AC or 120/230 v AC
01, 011, 012 = MSC-F uotor-starter
coubination !is a coupact device with
electrical and uechanical interlocking.
The Nhl-E-10-FKZ0 auxiliary contact Gis
added to 01 for cable and uotor protection.
M22-l3-M1
a Contact sequence of asseubled
control station
22 21
14 13
22 21
14 13
22 21
14 13
MSC-F-
b Feversing starter
Nhl-E-10-FKZ0
c Standard auxiliary contact (grey)
2-34
$$
2
Two lLA-Xhl20 auxiliary contact uodules
are added to the two reversing contactors
011 and 012.
The N0 contact 53/51 is used for the
self-uaintaining of reversing contactors
011 and 012, N0 contact 3/1 activates
the tiuing relay K2T and the soft starter
021.
The pushbutton actuators 0, l, ll as a
couplete device (M22-l3-M1) for surface
uounting "enable the rotation direction
change via the stop button.
K2T is an off-delayed tiuing relay (type
ETF2) and siuulates here the FuN signal.
The drop-out tiue uust be greater than the
stop tiue (t-Stop) set on the S7 soft
starter. Switching to the other direction is
only possible after the value set here has
elapsed.
lL-Xhl20
ETF2-11
Relais LED (yellow)
A1-A2
B1 t > t-Stop
15-16 / 25-26
t
Power LED (green)
2-35
$$
2
Compact motor starter with maintenance switch
Soft starter S7, circuit-breaker NZM1 and
uaintenance switch F3,
site 3 1 (11 to 200 A)
F3. Superfast seuiconductor fuse
(optional for type 2 coordination,
additional to 01)
01. Cable and uotor protection
021. S7 soft starters
032. Maintenance switch (local)
M1. Three-phase uotor
M
3 ~
1
L
1
3
L
2
5
L
3
P
E
P
E
+24
RUN
EN 13 14 24 23
2
T
1
4
T
2
6
T
3
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1
NZM1
DS7
P3
Q21
F3
M1
I > I > I >
Q32
1 3 5 7
2 4 6
U V W
8
Start/Stop
TOR
+ 24 V
0 V
0 V -A2 +A1
Trip
ON
OFF
2-36
$$
2
NZMcircuit-breaker with emergency-off function to IEC/EN 60204 and VDE 0113 Part 1,
size 3 + 4 (41 to 200 A)
= Euergency switching off
additional to 01)
(NZM1, NZM2)
021. S7 soft starters
M1. Motor
a Control circuit teruinal
b undervoltage release with early-uake
auxiliary contact
M
3 ~
1
L
1
3
L
2
5
L
3
P
E
P
E
0 V
3.14
+24 -
2
T
1
4
T
2
6
T
3
Q1
Q21
F3
M1
I > I > I >
2-37
$$
2
Bypass circuit
Note
The devices of the S7-31 series are
already provided with integrated bypass
contacts. An external bypass for
continuous operation with a S7 soft
starter is therefore not required.
Bypass circuit for emergency operation
ln puup applications the bypass contactor
is often required to provide euergency
operation capability. A service switch is
used to select between soft starter
operation and 0L starter operation via a
bypass contactor (022). This is used to
fully isolate the soft starter. ln this case, it
is iuportant that the output circuit is not
opened during operation. The interlocks
ensure that a switchover is only possible
after a stop. An electrical and/or
uechanical interlocking of contactors 022
and 031 ensures a safe operating state.
Note
unlike siuple bypass operation, the bypass
contactor uust be designed here in
accordance with utilitation category AC-3.
(optional) for type 2 coordination
(additional to 01)
011. Mains contactor (optional) for
disconnection in euergency
operation
021. Soft starters
022. ypass contactor
031. Motor contactor
M1. Motor
2-38
$$
2
DS7 power section 41 A with bypass emergency operation (example: pump)
M
M1
F3
3 ~
L1
L2
L3
PE
3
L
2
Q1
Q11
Q22
Q31
1
L
1
3
L
5
P
E
P
E
1
T
2
Q21
4
T
2
6
T
3
2-39
$$
2
A
c
t
u
a
t
i
o
n
w
i
t
h
b
y
p
a
s
s
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
(
p
u
m
p
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
)
"
E
n
a
b
l
e
!
A
u
t
o
u
a
t
i
c
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
(
s
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
)
G
M
a
n
u
a
l
/
b
y
p
a
s
s
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
E
S
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
/
S
o
f
t
s
t
o
p
D
y
p
a
s
s
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
1
.
0
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
u
o
d
e
s
w
i
t
c
h
S
2
.
0
f
f
S
3
.
0
n
S
1
.
S
t
o
p
(
s
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
)
S
5
.
S
t
a
r
t
(
s
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
)
N
o
t
e
T
h
e
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
y
s
t
e
u
s
h
o
w
n
h
e
r
e
c
a
n
a
l
s
o
b
e
u
s
e
d
f
o
r
t
h
e
S
7
s
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
i
n
s
i
t
e
2
(
1
t
o
3
2
A
)
.
A
1
A
2
Q
2
1
K
5
S
5
K
5
K
5
S
4
1
3
1
4
K
4
Q
2
2
T
O
R
K
2
Q
3
1
Q
1
1
K
3
K
4
K
3
E
N
A
2
K
1
S
3
K
1
K
1
K
2
S
2
K
2
K
1
K
4
K
3
S
1
K
2
Q
2
2
Q
3
1
2
3
2
4
Q
2
R
U
N
Q
2
1
2-40
$$
2
Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter (cascaded control)
When starting several uotors one after the
other using a soft starter, keep to the
following changeover sequence.
1. Start using soft starter
2. Switch on bypass contactor 0n2 via
T0F (Top-of-Faup)
3. lock soft starter
1. Switch soft starter output with 0n1 to
the next uotor
5. Festart
Notes
When starting several uotors with one
soft starter the therual load of the soft
starter (starting frequency, current load)
uust be taken into account. lf the starts
are to occur in close succession, the soft
starter uust be diuensioned larger (i.e. the
soft starter uust be designed with an
accordingly higher load cycle).
ue to the therual design of the S7
soft starters, we recouuend the use of an
(optional) fan when using a S7 series
device for starting several uotors.
additional to 01)
01. Cable protection
02. Soft starter S7
0n1. Contactor (1, 2, n)
0n2. Mains bypass contactor for
uotor (1, 2, n)
0n3. Motor protection (uotor-protective
circuit-breaker or biuetal relay
Mn. Motor (1, 2, n)
Notes
The control systeu shown here can also
be used for the S7 soft starter in site 2
(1 to 32 A), however without an enable
signal ".
iuetal relays can also be used as an
alternative to the overload relays 013,
023, , 0n3 (see page 2-21).
2-41
$$
2
C
a
s
c
a
d
e
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
P
o
w
e
r
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
f
o
r
m
o
t
o
r
c
a
s
c
a
d
e
(
e
x
a
m
p
l
e
f
o
r
s
i
z
e
3
a
n
d
4
)
Q
2
L
1
L
2
L
3
1 L 1
2 L 2
3 L 3
2 T 1
4 T 2
6 T 3
N
P
E
P
E
Q
1
Q
1
1
F
3
Q
1
3
M
1
M
3
~
Q
1
2
Q
2
1
Q
2
3
M
2
M
3
~
Q
2
2
Q
n
1
Q
n
3
M
n
M3
~
Q
n
2
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
2-42
$$
2
A
c
t
u
a
t
i
o
n
,
m
o
t
o
r
c
a
s
c
a
d
e
,
p
a
r
t
1
a
E
n
a
b
l
e
b
S
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
/
S
o
f
t
s
t
o
p
c
S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g
f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
u
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g
.
T
h
e
t
i
u
i
n
g
r
e
l
a
y
u
u
s
t
b
e
s
e
t
s
o
t
h
a
t
t
h
e
s
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
d
o
e
s
n
o
t
h
a
v
e
a
t
e
u
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
o
v
e
r
l
o
a
d
.
T
h
e
c
o
r
r
e
c
t
t
i
u
e
i
s
b
a
s
e
d
o
n
t
h
e
p
e
r
u
i
s
s
i
b
l
e
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
o
f
t
h
e
s
e
l
e
c
t
e
d
s
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
.
l
f
n
e
c
e
s
s
a
r
y
,
u
s
e
s
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
s
w
i
t
h
a
h
i
g
h
e
r
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
d
S
e
t
t
h
e
t
i
u
i
n
g
r
e
l
a
y
s
t
o
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
2
s
o
f
f
-
d
e
l
a
y
.
T
h
i
s
e
n
s
u
r
e
s
t
h
a
t
t
h
e
n
e
x
t
u
o
t
o
r
b
r
a
n
c
h
c
a
n
n
o
t
b
e
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
a
s
l
o
n
g
a
s
t
h
e
s
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
i
s
r
u
n
n
i
n
g
.
N
/
C
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
S
1
s
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
a
l
l
u
o
t
o
r
s
o
f
f
a
t
t
h
e
s
a
u
e
t
i
u
e
.
A
1
A
2
Q
2
K
2
2
3
2
4
K
4
R
U
N
K
1
T
K
4
T
K
4
1
3
1
4
K
3
Q
2
T
O
R
E
N
A
2
Q
2
K
1
S
2
K
1
K
1
S
1
Q
1
1
Q
2
1
K
2
K
1
T
K
4
K
1
K
4
Q
1
K
1
2
K
2
2
Q
3
1
K
3
2
Q
n
1
K
n
2
K
4
2-43
$$
2
A
c
t
u
a
t
i
o
n
,
m
o
t
o
r
c
a
s
c
a
d
e
,
p
a
r
t
2
a
M
o
t
o
r
1
b
M
o
t
o
r
2
c
M
o
t
o
r
n
T
h
e
N
/
C
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
S
3
i
s
r
e
q
u
i
r
e
d
i
f
u
o
t
o
r
s
a
l
s
o
h
a
v
e
t
o
b
e
s
w
i
t
c
h
e
d
o
f
f
i
n
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
l
y
.
Q
1
1
Q
1
2
Q
1
2
K
1
2
Q
1
2
K
3
Q
1
Q
1
1
K
1
2
Q
2
1
Q
2
2
Q
2
2
K
2
2
Q
2
2
K
3
K
1
2
Q
2
1
Q
1
1
Q
2
1
K
2
2
K
4
T
Q
n
1
Q
n
2
Q
n
2
K
n
2
Q
n
2
K
3
K
(
n
-
1
)
2
Q
n
1
Q
(
n
-
1
)
1
K
n
2
Q
n
1
K
4
T
S
3
S
3
S
3
2-44
$$
2
M1 connection exauple
DM4 product features
Three-phase controlled soft starter,
ueets the requireuents of the lEC/EN
0917-1-2 product standard
Configurable and
couuunication-enabled with pluggable
control signal teruinals and interface for
options.
0perator control and prograuuing unit
Serial interface
Fieldbus connection
Application selector switch with
user-prograuuable paraueter sets for
10 standard applications
l
2
t controller
Current liuitation
0verload protection
ldle/undercurrent detection (e.g. belt
breakage)
Kickstarting and heavy starting
Autouatic control voltage detection
3 relays, e.g. fault signal, T0F
(Top-of-Faup)
Fower section.
Fated operational voltage 230 - 180 v,
-15 % / 10 %
Mains frequency. 50/0 ht 10 %
Control voltage/regulator supply voltage.
21 v C
120 - 210 v AC, -15 % / 10 %, 50/0 ht
Aubient teuperature during operation.
0 to 10 C
Load cycle. 10 starts per hour with
3.5 x l
e
for uax. 35 s
Fre-prograuued paraueter sets for ten
typical applications can be siuply called
up with a selector switch (see page 2-18).
Additional plant-specific settings can be
defined with an optional keypad. This
includes, for exauple, the three-phase AC
power controller uode. ln this uode
three-phase resistive and inductive loads
(heaters, lighting systeus, transforuers)
can be controlled with the M1. oth
open-loop and with ueasured value
feedback closed-loop control are
possible.
lnsteadof thekeypad, intelligent interfaces
can also be used.
FS232/FS185 serial interface
(configuration with FC software)
FF0FluS-F fieldbus connection
The M1 soft starter provides the uost
convenient uethod of iupleuenting soft
starting. ln addition to phase failure and
uotor current uonitoring, the uotor
winding teuperature is evaluated through
the built-in theruistor input, so that the soft
starters do not require additional external
couponents, such as uotor protective
relays.
Note
The optional superfast seuiconductor
fuses (F3) for type 2 coordination can be
used frou site 2 (frou 85 A) in the housing
of the M1 soft starter.
2-45
$$
2
Sizes DM4
Site 1
1 - 72 A
Assigned uotor power at 100 v
7.5/11 - 37 kW
Site 2
85 - 11 A
15/75 - 75/132 kW
Site 3
171 - 370 A
90/10 - 200/315 kW
Site 1
500 - 900 A
250/100 - 500/900 kW
2-46
$$
2
Documentation
Manuals.
AW8250-1310
(Soft Starter esign)
AW8250-13110 (M1 Soft Starter)
AW8210-1398 (E8210-NET-F2
interface uodule for FF0FluS F)
AW823-1279
(E1-C0M-2X interface uodule)
AW8210-13110
(E1-KEY-2 Keypad)
lnstallation instructions.
AWA8250-1701 (up to 37 kW)
AWA8250-1751 (15 to 75 kW)
AWA8250-1752 (90 to 200 kW)
AWA8250-1783 (250 to 500 kW)
Notes
2-47
$$
2
2-48
$$
2
The application selector switch enables
direct assignuent without paraueter
entry.
0 - standard
1 - high torque
2 - pump
3 - pump kickstart
4 - light conveyor
5 - heavy conveyor
6 - low inertia fan
7 - high inertia fan
8 - recip compressor
9 - screw compressor
f
a
u
l
t
c
/
l
r
u
n
s
u
p
p
l
y
flash
on
0 - standard
1 - high torque
2 - pump
3 - pump kickstart 4 - light conveyor 5 - heavy conveyor 6 - low inertia fan 7 - high inertia fan 8 - recip compressor 9 - screw compressor
a
b
2-49
$$
2
Standard applications (selector switch)
Labelling on
device
Indication on
keypad
Meaning Notes
Standard Standard Standard efault settings, suitable without
adaptation for uost applications
high
torque
1)
high Torque high breakaway
torque
rives with higher breakaway torque
Fuup Suall puup Suall puup Fuup drives up to 15 kW
Fuup
Kickstart
Large puup Large puup Fuup drives over 15 kW
Longer deceleration tiues
Light
conveyor
Light conveyor Light conveyor
heavy
conveyor
heavyConvey heavy-duty
conveyor
Low inertia
fan
Lowlnert.fan Low-inertia fan Fan drive with relatively suall uass
inertia uouent of up to 15 tiues the
uotors inertia uouent
high inertia
fan
highlnertfan high-inertia fan Fan drive with relatively large uass
inertia uouent of over 15 tiues the
uotors inertia uouent.
Longer raup-up tiues
Fecip
coupressor
FecipCoupres Feciprocal
coupressor
higher start voltage
p.f. optiuitation uatched
Screw
coupressor
ScrewCoupres Screw coupressor lncreased current consuuption
No current liuitation
1) For the high Torque setting, the soft starter uust be able to supply 1.5 tiues the uotors rated
current.
2-50
$$
2
Enable/immediate stop without ramp function (e.g. for Emergency-Stop)
The digital input E2 is factory set to switch
the enable function. The soft starter is
enabled only when a high signal is present
at the teruinal. The soft starter cannot be
operated without the enable signal.
ln the event of wire breakage or
interruption of the signal by an
Euergency-Stop circuit, the regulator in
the soft starter is iuuediately blocked and
the power circuit disconnected, and after
that the Fun relay drops out.
Norually the drive is always stopped via a
raup function.
When the operating conditions require an
iuuediate de-energitation, this is effected
via the enabling signal.
Warning!
You uust in all operating conditions always
first stop the soft starter (Fun relay
scanning), before you uechanically
interrupt the power conductors. 0therwise
a flowing current is interrupted thus
resulting in voltage peaks, which in rare
cases uay destroy the thyristors of the soft
starter.
E2. igital input
021. Soft starter (E2 = 1 enabled)
S1. 0ff
S2. 0n
S1
S2
K1
E2
39
K1
K1
Q21
2-51
$$
2
Linking the overload relay into the control system
We recouuend using an external overload
relay instead of a uotor-protective
circuit-breaker with built-in overload relay.
This allows controlled rauping down of the
soft starter through the control section in
the event of an overload.
Warning!
The direct opening of the power lines uay
cause overvoltage and destruction of the
soft starters seui-conductors.
There are two ways of incorporating a
uotor-protective relay in the control
systeuas shown in the diagrauon the left.
a The signalling contacts of the overload
relay are incorporated in the on/off
circuit. ln the event of a fault, the soft
starter decelerates accordingtotheset
raup tiue and stops.
b The signalling contacts of the overload
relay are incorporated in the enable
circuit. ln the event of a fault, the soft
starters output is iuuediately
de-energited. Thesoft starter switches
off but the uains contactor reuains on.
ln order to switch off the uains
contactor, a second contact of the
overload relay uust be incorporated in
the on/off circuit.
S1. 0ff
S2. 0n
021. Soft starter (E2 = 1 7enabled)
E2
39
Q21 K1
S2 K1
K1
F1
a b
S1
2-52
$$
2
With separate contactor and overload
relay
Standard connection
For isolation frouthe uains, either a uains
contactor upstreau of the soft starter or a
central switching device (contactor or
uain switch) is necessary.
Actuation
Q21
L 1
L
1
2
L
2
3
L
3
2
T
1
4
T
2
6
T
3
N
Q11
Q1
F2
F3
T1
T2
~
=
M
3~
L2
N
L3
PE
L1
I> I> I>
M1
+
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
F2. 0verload relays
F3. Superfast seuiconductor fuses
(optional)
M1. Motor
021. Soft starter
S1. Soft-Start
S2. Soft-Stop
a Enable
b Softstart/soft stop
b a
E1
39
Q21
E2
39
Q21 K1
S2
K1
K1
S1
2-53
$$
2
Without mains contactor
F3. Superfast seuiconductor fuses
(optional)
021. Soft starter
M1. Motor
a Control voltage through 01 and F11 or
separately via 02
b See Actuation
c Motor current indication
~
=
~
=
7
M
M1
mot
Q21
F3
3~
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
L N E1 E2 39
13
K1;RUN K2;TOR K3 K4
14 23 24 33 34 43
1
L
1
3
L
2
5
L
3
2
T
1
4
T
2
6
T
3
+12 8 1 7
62 63
PE
0
V
(
E
1
;
E
2
)
+
1
2
V
D
C
R
E
F
1
:
0
1
0
V
R
E
F
2
:
4
2
0
m
A
T1 T2
F1
Q1 Q2
I
I> I> I> I> I> I>
-
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
+
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
0
V
A
n
a
l
o
g
A
n
a
l
o
g
O
u
t
1
A
n
a
l
o
g
O
u
t
2
0
V
A
n
a
l
o
g
S
t
a
r
t
/
S
t
o
p
E
n
a
b
l
e
2-54
$$
2
Soft starters with separate mains contactor
Actuation
M1. Motor with teuperature sensor
(theruistor)
021. Soft starter
S1. 0ff (uncontrolled deceleration)
S2. 0n
S3. Soft start
S1. Soft stop (deceleration raup)
a Enable
b Softstart/soft stop
a b
S1
S2
K1
E1
39
E2
39
S4
S3
K1
K1
K2 K1
Q11
K1 Q21 RUN K2
Q21 K2 Q21 Q11
13
14
33
34
Q1
Q21 OK
(no error)
2-55
$$
2
Soft starters with separate mains contactor
E1. Start/stop
E2. Enable
T1. Theruistor
T2. Theruistor
a See Actuation
b Control voltage through 01 and F11 or
through 02
~
=
~
=
7
mot
Q21
F3
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
L N E1 E2 39
13
K1;RUN K2;TOR K3 K4
14 23 24 33 34 43
1
L
1
3
L
2
5
L
3
2
T
1
4
T
2
6
T
3
+12 8 1 7
62 63
PE
0
V
(
E
1
;
E
2
)
+
1
2
V
D
C
R
E
F
1
:
0
1
0
V
R
E
F
2
:
4
2
0
m
A
T1 T2
F11
Q11
I > I > I >
Q1
I > I > I >
Q2
I
-
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
+
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
0
V
A
n
a
l
o
g
A
n
a
l
o
g
O
u
t
1
A
n
a
l
o
g
O
u
t
2
0
V
A
n
a
l
o
g
S
t
a
r
t
/
S
t
o
p
E
n
a
b
l
e
M
3 ~
M1
2-56
$$
2
In-delta connection
Soft starters are norually connected
directly in series with the uotor (so-called
in-line connection). The M1 soft starter
also allows operation in an in-delta
connection.
The antiparallel thyristors are connected
directly in series to the individual uotor
windings.
Advantages (coupared with in-line
connection).
lnexpensive since the soft starter only
has to be designed for approx. 58 %
(1/53) of the rated current particularly
with uotor ratings > 30 kW and when
replacing star-delta starters.
For the saue uotor rating the required
soft starter rating is reduced.
isadvantages (coupared with in-line
connection).
As in a star-delta circuit, the uotor uust
be connected with six conductors.
The M1 soft starter overload protection
is activeonly inoneline sothat additional
uotor protection uust be fitted in the
parallel phase or in the supply cable. The
uotor can be protected for exauple via
theruistors.
Notes
The voltage of the uotor winding uust
uatch the rated voltage. For a 100 v
uains voltage the uotor uust therefore
be uarked with 100 v/90 v.
The soft starter canalso be bridged inthe
in-delta connection for continuous
operation with a bypass contactor (see
page 2-0). This is actuated via T0F
(Top-of-Faup).
2-57
$$
2
I
n
l
i
n
e
/
d
e
l
t
a
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
M
3
~
5
5
k
W
4
0
0
V
5
5
k
W
4
0
0
V
M
3
~
1
0
0
A
D
M
4
-
3
4
0
-
5
5
K
(
1
0
5
A
)
D
I
L
M
1
1
5
N
Z
M
7
-
1
2
5
N
-
O
B
I
D
I
L
M
1
1
5
N
Z
M
7
-
1
2
5
N
U
1
V
1
W
1
W
2
U
2
V
2
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
1
0
0
/
5
9
5
5
S
1
0
.
8
6
j
c
o
s
k
W
r
p
m
1
4
1
0
5
0
H
z
A
U
1
V
1
W
1
W
2
U
2
V
2
1
0
0
A
3
D
M
4
-
3
4
0
-
3
0
K
(
5
9
A
)
U
L
N
4
0
0
V
I
n
-
L
i
n
e
I
n
-
D
e
l
t
a
2-58
$$
2
In-delta connection
a Control voltage through 01 and F11 or
through 02
b See Actuation (7page 2-1)
d Theruistor connection
~
=
~
=
7
M
M1
mot
Q21
F3
3~
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
L N E1 E2 39
13
K1;RUN K2;TOR K3 K4
14 23 24 33 34 43
1
L
1
3
L
2
5
L
3
2
T
1
4
T
2
6
T
3
+12 8
PE
1 7
62 63
0
V
(
E
1
;
E
2
)
+
1
2
V
D
C
R
E
F
1
:
0
1
0
V
R
E
F
2
:
4
2
0
m
A
T1 T2
F11
Q11
I > I > I >
Q1
I > I > I >
Q2
b
c
a
W
1
V
1
U
1
W
2
V
2
U
2
I
d
+0
V
A
n
a
l
o
g
A
n
a
l
o
g
O
u
t
1
A
n
a
l
o
g
O
u
t
2
0
V
A
n
a
l
o
g
S
t
a
r
t
/
S
t
o
p
E
n
a
b
l
e
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
2-59
$$
2
Actuation
E2. Enable
S1. 0FF, uncontrolled deceleration of the
uotor
S2. 0N/Start
S3. Soft stop
a Enable
b Soft start/soft stop
a b
S1
S2
K1
E1
39
E2
39
S4
K1
K1
K2 K1 K2
Q21 K2 Q21 Q11
Q21 RUN
13
14
33
34
Q1
S3
Q21 OK
(no error)
2-60
$$
2
Bypass circuit
E1. Start/stop
E2. Enable
T1. Theruistor
T2. Theruistor
a See Actuation (7page 2-1)
b Control voltage through 01 and F11 or
through 02
~
=
~
=
7
M
M1
mot
Q21
F3
3~
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
L N E1 E2 39
13
K1;RUN K2;TOR K3 K4
14 23 24 33 34 43
1
L
1
3
L
2
5
L
3
2
T
1
4
T
2
6
T
3
+12 8
PE
1 7
62 63
0
V
(
E
1
;
E
2
)
+
1
2
V
D
C
R
E
F
1
:
0
1
0
V
R
E
F
2
:
4
2
0
m
A
T1 T2
F11
Q11

Q1 Q1
a
b
c
Q22
I> I> I> I> I> I>
I
-
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
+
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
0
V
A
n
a
l
o
g
A
n
a
l
o
g
O
u
t
1
A
n
a
l
o
g
O
u
t
2
0
V
A
n
a
l
o
g
S
t
a
r
t
/
S
t
o
p
E
n
a
b
l
e
2-61
$$
2
Bypass circuit
After coupletion of the acceleration phase
(full uains voltage reached), the soft
starter M1 actuates the bypass contactor.
Thus, the uotor is directly connected with
the uains.
Advantage.
The soft starters heat dissipation is
reduced to the no-load dissipation.
The liuit values of radio interference
class are adhered to.
The bypass contactor is nowswitched to a
de-energited state and can therefore be
designed to utilitation category AC-1.
lf an iuuediate voltage switch-off is
required in the event of an euergency stop,
the bypass contactor uust also switch the
uotor load. ln this case a design to
utilitation category AC-3 is required.
Actuation
S1. 0ff (uncontrolled deceleration)
S2. 0n
a Enable
b Soft start/soft stop
c ypass contactor

S2
K1
E2
39
E1
39
S4 Q22
K1
K1 K1 K2
K1
Q21 Q21
K2
K2
Q21 RUN
Q11
13
14
23
24
Q21 TOR
Q22
33
34
S1
S3
Q21 OK
(no error)
2-62
$$
2
Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter (cascaded control)
When using a soft starter to start several
uotors in succession, keep to the following
changeover sequence.
1. Start using soft starter
2. Switch on bypass contactor
3. lock soft starter
1. Switch soft starter output to the next
uotor
5. Festart
7Section Actuation part 1, page 2-1
(optional) for type 2 coordination
01. Main switch /
cable protection (NZM)
02/F11. 0ptional control voltage
supply
0n3. Motor-protective circuit-breakers
0n1. Motor protection Soft starter
0n5. Motor contactors bypass
S1. 011 0ff
S2. 011 0n
a Soft start/soft stop
b FuN
c 0ff-tiue uonitoring
Set the tiuing relay K1T so that the soft
starter is not therually overloaded.
Calculate the tiue frou the soft
starters peruissible operating
frequency or select a soft starter that
allows the required tiue to be reached.
d Changeover uonitoring
Set the tiuing relay to a return tiue of
about 2 s. This ensures that the next
uotor branch can not be connected as
long as the soft starter is running.
7Section Actuation, part 2, page 2-5
" Motor 1
! Motor 2
G Motor n
B Switching off individual uotors
The 0ff switch results in all uotors being
switched off at the saue tiue. To switch off
individual uotors, you need to uake use of
N/C contact B.
0bserve the therual load on the soft starter
(starting frequency, current load). lf uotors
are to be started at short intervals, you uay
have to select a soft starter with a higher
load cycle.
2-63
$$
2
C
a
s
c
a
d
e
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
~
Q
2
1
L
1
L
2
L
3
L
1 L 1
2 L 2
3 L 3
2 T 1
4 T 2
6 T 3
N
N
P
E
P
E
Q
1
Q
1
4
F
3
T
1
T
2
=
F
1
1
Q
2
Q
1
3
M
1
M
3
~
Q
1
5
Q
2
4
Q
2
3
M
2
M
3
~
Q
2
5
Q
n
4
Q
n
3
M
n
M3
~
Q
n
5
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
I
>
+ T h e r m i s t o r
T h e r m i s t o r
2-64
$$
2
A
c
t
u
a
t
i
o
n
p
a
r
t
1
7
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g
s
e
v
e
r
a
l
u
o
t
o
r
s
s
e
q
u
e
n
t
i
a
l
l
y
w
i
t
h
a
s
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
(
c
a
s
c
a
d
e
d
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
)
,
p
a
g
e
2
-
2
a
d
c
A
1
A
2
Q
2
1
K
2
1
3
1
4
K
4
K
2
T
K
1
T
K
4
T
K
4
K
3
Q
2
1
T
O
R
K
1
S
2
K
1
S
1
Q
1
4
Q
2
4
K
2
K
1
T
K
4
K
1
K
4
K
1
2
K
2
2
Q
n
1
K
n
2
K
4
b
K
2
T
e
Q
1
1
Q
1
2-65
$$
2
A
c
t
u
a
t
i
o
n
,
p
a
r
t
2
7
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g
s
e
v
e
r
a
l
u
o
t
o
r
s
s
e
q
u
e
n
t
i
a
l
l
y
w
i
t
h
a
s
o
f
t
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
(
c
a
s
c
a
d
e
d
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
)
,
p
a
g
e
2
-
2
Q
1
4
Q
1
5
Q
1
5
Q
1
5
K
1
2
K
3
Q
1
1
Q
1
4
a
b
K
1
2
Q
2
4
Q
2
5
Q
2
5
Q
2
5
K
2
2
K
3
K
1
2
Q
2
4
Q
4
1
Q
1
4
K
2
2
K
4
T
c
Q
n
Q
m
Q
m
Q
m
K
n
2
K
3
K
(
n
-
1
)
2
Q
n
Q
(
n
-
1
)
1
K
n
2
Q
n
K
4
T
i
i
i
2-66
$$
2
Frequency inverter basic inforuation
Design and mode of operation of frequency inverters
Frequency inverters provide variable and
stepless speed control of three-phase
uotors.
Frequency inverters convert the constant
uains voltage and frequency into a C
voltage, frou which they generate a new
three-phase supply with variable voltage
and frequency for the three-phase uotor.
The frequency inverter draws aluost only
active power (p.f. ~ 1) frou the uains
supply.
The reactive power needed for uotor
operation is supplied by the C link. This
eliuinates the need for p.f. correction on
the uains side.
Frequency inverters uust couply with the
product standard lEC/EN 0917-1-2.
u = Fated operating voltage [v|
f = Frequency [ht|
l = Fated operational current [A|
M = Torque [Nu|
n = Speed [r.p.u.|
F = Force [N|
v = Speed [u/s|
J = Mouent of inertia [kg u
2
|
F
el
= Electric power [kW|
F
L
= Mechanical shaft output power
[kW|
cos '= power factor (F/S)
with
F = Active power = F
el
= F
1
[kW| and
S = Apparent power [kvA|
( = F
L
/F
el
= F
2
/F
1
= Efficiency
M, n
U, f, I
U, f, (I)
F
v
m
J
M
3~
~ I M
~ f n
P
el
= U x I x 3 x cos
M x n
P
L
=
9550
Energy ow
Variable
Constant
Mains
Electronic actuator
Motor Load
Driving Braking
2-67
$$
2
Block diagram with main components of a frequency inverter
lnternal open and closed-loop control
circuits (central processing unit) uonitor
all variable values in the frequency inverter
and autouatically switch the process off if
a value reaches a dangerous level.
The power section of a static coupact
frequency inverter consists of three
subgroups.
Fectifier (A)
lnternal C link ()
lnverter uodule (C)
u
LN
. Line supply
frou uains
AC power supply
u
C
. C link circuit voltage
u
C
= 1.11 x u
LN
(single-phase line voltage)
u
C
= 1.35 x u
LN
(three-phase line voltage)
0utput voltage = switched C
link voltage with sinusoidal
pulse width uodulation (FWM)
CPU
A B C
BUS
M
3
KEYPAD
I/O
2-68
$$
2
a Fower section.
A = Fectifier
= C link
C = lnverter uodule
b Control section with.
l/0 = analog and binary inputs and
outputs
KEYFA = keypad with display
uS = serial interfaces
(FS185, fieldbus, FC interface)
I
OK
BACK
RESET LOC
REM
a
b
2-69
$$
2
Drive system (PDS) to EN 61800-3
BDM (basic drive module)
Electronic power converter with
associated control which is connected
between the electrical power supply and a
uotor. The uodule controls speed, torque,
force, position, current, frequency and
voltage individually or jointly or all
paraueters together. The M can
transfer the power frou the electrical
supply to the uotor and also the power
frou the uotor to the electrical supply.
CDM (complete drive module)
rive uodule which consists of but is not
restricted to the M and additional
devices such as protective equipuent,
transforuers, and auxiliary devices.
This, however, does not include the uotor
and the sensors that are uechanically
connected to the uotor shaft.
System or part of a system
(Drive system) PDS
CDM (complete drive module)
Systeu control and sequence control
BDM (basic drive module)
Closed and open-loop control unit
Converter
Frotective device
lncouing section
Field supply
Fesistance braking
Auxiliary equipuent
other equipuent
Motor and sensor
Driven equipment
2-70
$$
2
The frequency-controlled three-phase
uotor is a standard couponent for
infinitely variable speed and torque
regulation - providing efficient,
energy-saving power either as an
individual drive or as part of an autouated
installation.
This not only refers to the frequency
inverter as a couponent but also considers
a couplete drive systeu (FS = Fower
rives Systeu) with uotor, cables, EMC
etc.(7page 2-9).
2
3
4
5
6
7
I
I
e
I/I
e
: 0...1.8
n/n
N
1
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
I
I
N
1
2
M
L
M
M
N
M
M
N
M/M
N
: 0.1...1.5
n/n
N
0.25 0.5 0.75 1
2-71
$$
2
Electrical mains connection
Frequency inverters can be connected and
operated without restriction on
star-point-grounded AC uains (according
to lEC 031).
Connection and operation on
asyuuetrically grounded networks such
as phase grounded delta networks (uSA)
or non-grounded or resistively grounded
(> 30 )) lT networks are only peruissible
with restrictions and require additional
engineering ueasures.
The standardited rated operating voltages
of the utility coupanies fulfil the following
conditions at the point of transfer to the
consuuer.
Maxiuuu deviation frou the rated
voltage (u
LN
). 10 %
Maxiuuu deviation in the voltage
syuuetry. 3 %
Maxiuuu deviation frou the rated
frequency. 1 %
A further voltage drop of 1 % in the
consuuer networks is peruissible in
relation to the lower voltage value (u
LN
-10 %) of the supplying uains voltage. The
power supply voltage at the consuuer can
therefore have a value of uLN -11 %.
ln ring ueshed networks (as used in the
Eu) the consuuer voltages (230 v / 100 v /
90 v) are identical to the power supply
voltages of the utility coupanies. ln star
networks (for exauple in North
Auerica/uSA), the stated consuuer
voltages take the voltage drop frou the
utility coupanys infeed point to the last
consuuer into account.
Mains voltages in North America
L2
PEN
L1
L3
L2
N
L1
L3
PE
Supply voltage U
LN
of the utility company
Motor voltage
according to
UL 508 C
Consumer voltage (rated
value for the motors)
120 v 110 - 120 v 115 v
210 v 220 - 210 v 230 v
180 v 110 - 180 v 10 v
00 v 550 - 00 v 575 v
2-72
$$
2
EMC compliance in PDS
The electrical couponents of a systeu
(uachine) are subject to reciprocal
interference. Each device not only exerts
interference on other devices but is also
adversely affected by it. This occurs as a
result of galvanic, capacitive and/or
inductive coupling or through
electrouagnetic radiation. The border
between line-conducted interference and
radiated interference is around 30 Mht.
Above 30 Mht the lines and cables act like
antennas and radiate the electrouagnetic
waves.
The electrouagnetic coupatibility (EMC)
for variable speed drives is iupleuented in
accordance with product standard
lEC/EN 1800-3.
This covers the entire drive systeu (FS =
Fower rives Systeu) frou the uains end
supply to the uotor, including all
couponents and cables. This type of drive
systeu can also consist of several
individual drives.
The generic standards of the individual
couponents in a FS coupliant with
lEC/EN 1800-3 do not apply. These
couponent uanufacturers, however, uust
offer solutions that ensure
standards-coupliant use.
ln Europe, uaintaining the EMCirective is
uandatory.
A declaration of conforuity (CE) refers
always to a typical power drives systeu
(FS). The responsibility to couply withthe
legally stipulated liuit values and thus the
provision of electrouagnetic coupatibility
is ultiuately the responsibility of the end
user or systeu operator.
Measures uust be taken to reuove or
uiniuite euission in the associated
environuent. lt uust also be ensured that
the iuuunity of the devices or systeus is
increased.
EMC environuent and categories
Public medium-voltage supply grid
Public
low-voltage supply grid
Industry
grid 1
Industry
grid 2
Measuring
point
Category C1
Category C1/C2 Category C3/C4 Category C3/C4
1st enviroment 2nd enviroment
2-73
$$
2
PDS categories
rive systeus (FS) are divided into the
following four categories.
PDS category C1
FS for use in the first environuent
Fated operating voltage 1000 v
PDS category C2
FS for use in the first environuent
Not connected via plug-in devices
No plug or uovable equipuent
Connection and couuissioning uust be
carried out by persons with suitable
technical knowledge
hatard warning required
(This product uay cause ualfunctions
in a douestic environuent, in this case
additional ueasures uay be
necessary.)
PDS category C3
FS for use in the second environuent
Not intended for use in the first
environuent
hatard warning required
(This FSis not intended for connection
to the public utility grid. Connection to
these networks uay cause
electrouagnetic interference.)
PDS category C4
FS for use in the second environuent
which fulfills at least one of the following
criteria.
Fated operating voltage > 1000 v
Fated operational current > 100 A
Connection to lT networks
The required dynauic properties are not
achieved due to EMC filter ueasures.
EMC plan required
2-74
$$
2
Equipuent code
F. Fuses and circuit-breakers
(cable protection)
0. Controlled switching in power flow
(contactor, circuit-breaker)
F. Liuitation (choke, resistor)
K. Fadio interference suppression filter
T. Frequency inverter
M. Motor
M
3~
3~
F
Q
R
R
K
T
M
3
I
OK
BACK
RESET LOC
REM
R
3
2-75
$$
2
Fuses (circuit-breakers) allow the protection of lines and electrical apparatus. For the
protection of persons, AC/C-sensitive residual current devices (FC Type ) are
required in addition.
Contactors are used for the on/off switching of the uains voltage.
Mains chokes suppress any current haruonics and peaks and liuit the inrush current
(link circuit capacitors).
RFI suppression filters attenuate high frequency electrouagnetic euissions frou
devices. They ensure that the EMCliuit values for conducted interference specified in the
applicable product standards are observed (frequency inverters).
Frequency inverters enable the infinitely variable speed control of three-phase uotors.
A braking resistor converts the frequency inverters regenerative braking energy into
heat.
The frequency inverter uust be equipped with a brake chopper, which connects the
braking resistor parallel to the internal C link.
Motor reactors
Coupensate the capacitive capacitive currents,
Feduce current ripple and the uotors current change noise,
Attenuate the retroaction on parallel connection of several uotors.
Sinusoidal filter
Suoothen the output voltage sinusoidally,
Feduce uotor noise through du/dt reduction, and thereby increase the uotor
insulations lifespan,
Feduce the leakage currents to allow better uotor perforuance at iuproved EMC
values.
Shielded motor cables attenuate euitted and conducted high-frequency euissions within
the liuit values specified in the applicable product standard (EMC).
Three-phase asynchronous motor (standard motor)
2-76
$$
2
Notes about correct installation of frequency inverters
For an EMC-coupliant installation, observe
the following instructions. These enable
electrical and uagnetic interference fields
to be liuited to the required levels. The
necessary ueasures work only in
coubination and should be taken into
consideration at the engineering stage. To
subsequently uodify aninstallationtoueet
EMC requireuents is possible only at
considerable additional cost.
Measures for EMC-coupliant installation
are.
Earthing ueasures,
Shielding ueasures,
Filtering ueasures,
Chokes
They are described in uore detail below.
Earthing measures
These uust be iupleuented to couply with
the legal standards and are a prerequisite
for the effective use of further ueasures
such as filters and shielding. All
conducting uetallic enclosure sections
uust be electrically connected to the earth
potential. For EMC coupliance, the
iuportant factor is not the cables
cross-section, but its surface, since this is
where high frequency current flows to
earth. All earth points uust have a low
iupedance, be highly conductive and
routed directly to the central earth point
(potential equalitation bar or star earth).
The contact points uust be free frou paint
and rust. use galvanited uounting plates
and uaterials.
K1 = Fadiointerference
suppression filter
T1 = Frequency
inverter
e
PE
K1 T1 Tn Kn
PE
PE
M1
PE PE
M
3h
Mn
M
3h
2-77
$$
2
Shielding measures
L1
L2
L3
PE
b a
e d c
F300 mm
M
3
Four-core shielded uotor supply cable.
a Copper shield braid, earth at both
ends with large-area connections
b FvC outer casing
c rain wire (copper, u, v, W, FE)
d FvC core insulation,
3 x black, 1 x greenyellow
e Textile and FvC fillers
2-78
$$
2
Shielding reduces euitted interference
(noise iuuunity of neighboring systeus
and devices against external influences).
Cables between frequency inverters and
uotor uust be shielded. however, the
shield uust not be considered a
replaceuent for the FE cable. Four-wire
uotor cables are recouuended (three
phases plus FE). The shield uust be
connected to earth (FES) at both ends with
a large-area connection. o not connect
the shield with pigtails. lnterruptions in the
shield, such as teruinals, contactors,
chokes, etc., uust have a low iupedance
and be bridged with a large contact area.
To do this, sever the shield near the uodule
and establish a large-area contact with
earth potential (FES, shield teruinal). Free,
unshielded cables should not be longer
than about 100 uu.
Exauple. Shield attachuent for
uaintenance switch
a Metal plate (e.g. MS-l2)
b Earthing teruinal
c Maintenance switch
Note
Maintenance switches at of frequency
inverter outputs uust be operated only at
tero current.
Control and signal lines uust be twisted
and uay be double-shielded, the inner
shield being connected to the voltage
source at one end and the outer shield at
both ends.
PES
PES
4.2 x 8.2
4.1
MBS-I2
3.5
2-79
$$
2
a Fower cables. network, uotor, C link
circuit, braking resistor
b Signal cables. analog and digital
control signals
The uotor cable uust be laid separately
frou the control and signal lines (> 30 cu)
and uust not run parallel to any power
cables.
Note
lnside control panels also cables should be
shielded if they are uore than 30 cu long.
300 mm
( 11.81)

Example of shielding control and signal cables:
Standard connection of a frequency inverter with setpoint potentioueter F11 (M22-1K7),
control signals for clockwise and anticlockwise rotation (FW, FEv) and Z1-102-KS1
uounting accessory
REV FWD +24 V +10 V AI 0 V
ZB4-102-KS1
1
5
M4
PE
2
Cu 2.5 mm
PES
PES
1
2
3
M
R11 REV FWD
4K7
M
2
0
m
2-80
$$
2
Filtering measures
Fadio interference filters and line filters
(coubinations of radio interference filter
and uains choke) protect against
conducted high-frequency interference
(noise iuuunity) and reduce the frequency
inverters high-frequency interference
which is transuitted through or euitted
frou the uains cable, and which uust be
liuited to a prescribed and legal level
(euitted interference).
Nowadays, filters are frequently integrated
in the frequency inverter or should be
installed in close proxiuity of the
frequency inverter. When using externally
installed FFl filters, the connection cable
between the frequency inverter and filter
uust be kept short (# 30 cu).
Note
The uounting surfaces of frequency
inverters and radio interference filters
uust be free frou paint and uust have
good hF conductivity.
I
OK
BACK
RESET LOC
REM
2-81
$$
2
EMC-compliant mounting and connection
a Metal plate with FE connection
b Earthing teruinal (connection of FE
conductor and earthing of the plate ")
c Maintenance switch
PE
1
5
PES
PES
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
PE
PES
PES
PES
2-82
$$
2
Residual-current device (RCD)
Fadio interference filters produce leakage
currents which, in the event of a fault
(phase failure, load unbalance), can be
considerably larger than the rated values.
To prevent dangerous voltages, all
couponents (frequency inverter, FFl filter,
uotor, shielded uotor cables) in the FS
uust be earthed. As the leakage currents
are high-frequency interference sources,
the earthing connections and cables uust
have a low iupedance and large contact
surfaces.
The residual current device on the
frequency inverter uust be of type
as sinusoidal AC and pulsed C residual
currents uay occur.
With leakage currents , 3.5 uA, EN 0335
states that one of the following conditions
uust be fulfilled.
The protective conductor uust have a
cross-section , 10 uu
2
,
The protective conductor uust be
open-circuit uonitored, or
An additional protective conductor uust
be fitted.
M
3
L1
L2
L3
U
V
W
R2
S2
T2
L1 RCD
L2
L3
L1
K T
M
F F
L2
L3
PE

N
2-83
$$
2
Three-phase chokes
Mains chokes
Fitted on the frequency inverters input
side, chokes reduce the
current-dependent uains feedback and
iuprove the power factor. This reduces the
current haruonics and iuproves the uains
quality. The use of uains chokes is
especially recouuended when several
frequency inverters are connected to a
single uains supply point and when other
electronic devices are also connected on
the network.
A reduction of the uains current
interference is also achieved by installing
C chokes in the frequency inverters C
link. This eliuinates the need for uains
chokes.
Single-phase
chokes
Q11
F1
M1
Q12
F2
M2
Q13
F3
M3
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
M
3
M
3
M
3
Motor chokes
With long uotor cables or the parallel
connection of several uotors, uotor
chokes "are used at the output of the
frequency inverter.
They also enhance the protection of the
power seuiconductors in the event of an
earth fault or short-circuit, and protect the
uotors frouexcessive rates of voltage rise
(> 500 v/>s) resulting frou high pulse
frequencies.
2-84
$$
2
Sinusoidal filter
SF100/
Sinusoidal filters are a coubination of
choke and capacitor (low pass filter).
They iuprove the sinusoidal shape of the
frequency inverter output voltage, thus
reducing the noise and the teuperature
rise of the uotor.
Advantages of the sinusoidal filter.
Long shielded uotor supply cables
possible
uax. 100 u on supply voltages up to
210 v 10 %
uax. 200 u on supply voltages up to
180 v 10 %
Extended lifespan like that of a
uains-operated uotor
Low noise generation of the uotor
Low uotor teuperature rise
Feduced du/dt values ( 500 v/>s)
isadvantages of a sinusoidal filter.
up to 30 v voltage drop
0peration only with fixed pulse
frequency possible
"
!
2-85
$$
2
Connection exauple for M-Max
M-Max product features
esignations on M-Max
a Fixing holes
(screw fastening)
b Felease (disuantling frou uounting
rail)
c Cutout for uounting on uounting rail
(lN EN 50022-35)
d lnterface for fieldbus connection
uodules (optional, MMX-NET-XA)
e EMC installation accessories
f Fower section teruinals
g Cover flap of control signal teruinals
and uicroswitches
h lnterface for FC connection uodule
MMX-C0M-FC (0ption)
i Keypad with 9 control buttons
j isplay unit (LC)

I
OK
BACK
RESET
HOA
2-86
$$
2
Functions
A couprehensive range of protection
functions allow safe operation and the
protection of frequency inverter, uotor and
application. They offer protection against.
0vercurrent, earth fault
0verload (electronic uotor protection)
0verteuperature
0vervoltage, undervoltage
Further functions:
Festart inhibit
u/f control or sensorless vector control
2-fold starting current and 1.5 fold
overcurrent
Fl controller
Sequence control
raking control (C braking)
8 fixed frequencies
Electronic uotor potentioueter
Logic function (AN, 0F, X0F)
upper and lower frequency and current
liuits
Frequency hopping (frequency uasking)
C braking before start and up to uotor
standstill
2 paraueter sets
Documentation
lnstructional leaflet. lL01020001E
2-87
$$
2
M-Max sizes
Site 1 (FS1)
MMX12. 1.7 - 2.8 A
MMX32. 1.7 - 2.8 A
MMX31. 1.1 - 2.1 A
Site 2 (FS2)
MMX12. 3.7 - 7 A
MMX32. 3.7 - 7 A
MMX31. 3.3 - 5. A
Site 3 (FS3)
MMX12. 9. A
MMX32. 9. A
MMX31. 7. - 11 A
FS = Fraue Site
MMX12. Single-phase uains
connection, rated operating voltage
MMX230 v
MMX32. Three-phase power supply,
rated operating voltage 230 v
MMX31. Three-phase power supply,
rated operating voltage 100 v
I
OK
I
OK
I
OK
2-88
$$
2
Application
M-Max frequency inverters allow the
continuously variable speed control of
three-phase asynchronous uotors. They
are especially suitable for applications
where siuple operation and profitability
are iuportant.
The characteristics-controlled
voltage/frequency (u/f) control already
allows a wide range of applications even
with the default settings. frousiuple puup
and fan drives, standard packaging
applications right through to the operation
of uultiple uotors in horitontal
transportation and conveying. With
sensorless vector control, an individual
drive can also be used in deuanding
applications, in which a high torque and
concentricity in the lower speed range are
vital, for exauple in the plastics and uetal
industries, the textile, paper and printing
industries or in crane and elevator
systeus.
Fated operating currents frou 1.1 to 11 A
allow the operation of standard 1 pole
asynchronous uotors in an assigned
perforuance range of .
0.25 to 2.2 kW at 230 v (single-phase
uains connection),
0.25 to 2.2 kW at 230 v (three-phase
uains connection),
0.37 to 5.5 kW at 100 v (three-phase
uains connection).
Instructions
For uL-coupliant installation and
operation, the uains side switching
devices uust allow for a 1.25 tiues
higher input current.
Mains contactors shown here take into
account the rated operating current l
LN
of the frequency inverter at the input
without a uains choke. Their selection is
based on the therual current (AC-1).
With frequency inverters, the inching
range is not peruitted via the uains
contactor (pause tiue , 0 s between
switching off and on).
2-89
$$
2
B
l
o
c
k
d
i
a
g
r
a
m
f
o
r
M
M
X
1
2
E r r o r
R u n
R e a d y
L
2
/
N
2
3
2
2
P
E
P
E
W
V
U
M
3
~
X
1
AB
e
2
4
2
6
2
5
1
2
3
5
4
A O
0 ( 4 ) . . . 2 0 m A
0 . . . + 1 0 V < 1 0 m A
7
8
9
1
8
D I 1
D I 2
A I 1
D I 3
D I 4
D I 5
D I 6
G N D
D I _ C O M
< 1 0 m A
+ 1 0 V O u t
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
0
R 1 3
R 1 4
R 2 1
R 2 2
R 2 4
S
4
S
3
S
2
S
1
F W D
R E V
F F 1
F F 2
2 4 V6
< 5 0 m A
+ 2 4 V O u t
G N D
< 5 0 m A
D O -
D O +
1
3
2
0
+
0 . . . + 1 0 V
L
1
2
0
0
k
2
0
0
A I 2
f - O u t
P I - I s t
E
M
C
R e s e t
P I - O f
f - S o l l
3
A
C
2
3
0
V
1
A
C
2
3
0
V
1
A
C
2
4
0
V
2
0
0
k
2
0
0
1
2
0

2-90
$$
2
B
l
o
c
k
d
i
a
g
r
a
m
f
o
r
M
M
X
3
2
a
n
d
M
M
X
3
4
P
E
R
+
R
-
E r r o r
R u n
R e a d y
3
A
C
3
A
C
2
3
2
2
P
E
P
E
W
V
U
M
3
~
X
1
AB
2
4
2
6
2
5
1
2
3
5
4
A O
0 ( 4 ) . . . 2 0 m A
0 . . . + 1 0 V < 1 0 m A
7
8
9
1
8
D I 1
D I 2
A I 1
D I 3
D I 4
D I 5
D I 6
G N D
D I _ C O M
< 1 0 m A
+ 1 0 V O u t
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
0
R 1 3
R 1 4
R 2 1
R 2 2
R 2 4
S
4
S
3
S
2
S
1
F W D
R E V
F F 1
F F 2
2 4 V6
< 5 0 m A
+ 2 4 V O u t
G N D
1
2
0
< 5 0 m A
D O -
D O +
1
3
2
0
+
0 . . . + 1 0 V
L
1
L
3
2
0
0
k
2
0
0
k
2
0
0
2
0
0
A I 2
f - O u t
P I - I s t
E
M
C
R e s e t
P I - O
f - S o l l
L
2
/
N
2-91
$$
2
Configuration of the control signal terminals
The control signal teruinals are factory set
as follows.
2. Al1. f-Set = Frequency setpoint
(0 - 10v)
1. Al2. Fl-Act = Actual value for Fl
controller (process variable, 1 - 20 uA)
8. l1. FW = Clockwise rotation field
enable (Forward)
9. l2. FEv = Anticlockwise rotation field
enable (Feverse)
10. l3. FF1 = Fixed frequency 1
13. 0-. Feady = Feady to start (transistor
output with the voltage of teruinal 20)
11. l1. FF2 = Fixed frequency 2
15. l5. Feset = Acknowledge fault
uessage
1. l. Fl-0ff = Fl controller deactivated
18. A0. f-0ut = 0utput frequency to uotor
(0 - 10 v)
20. 0. lnput voltage for transistor output
(21 v C)
22/23. F13/F11 (N0 contact).
FuN = 0perating signal (relay)
21/25/2. F21/F22/F21
(changeover contact).
Error =Fault signal (relay)
a Connection teruinals F and F- for
external brakingresistor (optional) for
site 2 (FS2) and site 3 (FS3)
2-92
$$
2
Basic control
Example 1
Feference input through potentioueter
F11. Enable (STAFT/ST0F) and direction
control through teruinals 1 and 2 with
internal control voltage
= Euergency switching off circuit
F1. Cable protection
FES. Cable shield FE connection
M1. 230 v 3-phase uotor
S1. 0FF
S2. 0N
Notes
For EMC-coupliant uains connection,
suitable radio interference
suppression ueasures uust be
iupleuented according to product
standard lEC/EN 1800-3.
With frequency inverters with a
single-phase uains connection, the
use of parallel links is recouuended
for equaliting the load on the contacts.
lLM12-XF1
(1th pole can be broken off)
lLM
Q11
S2
S1
Q11
2
3 5
4 6
A1
A2
1 13
14
2-93
$$
2
Wiring (MMX12)
MMX12Single-phase frequency
inverter
irectional control through teruinals
8 and 9
External reference value input via F11
FW. Clockwise rotation field enable
FEv. Anticlockwise rotation field enable
T1
U V W PE 2 3 1 9 8 6
PES
PES
PE
PES
PES
M
M1
X1
3 ~
R11
4K7
PE
L
N
PE
1 230 V, 50/60 Hz
L1
Q11
PE
F1
M
REV
PES
M
FWD
R
E
V
F
W
D
+
1
0
V
A
I
0
V
+
2
4
V
L2/N
FWD
f
REV
M
M
t
2-94
$$
2
Frequency inverters MMX34 with external RFI filter
Note
0nly for MMXN0-0 (without internal FFl
filter)
Actuation
Example 2
Setpoint entry via potentioueter F11 (f
s
)
and fixed frequency (f
1
, f
2
, f
3
) via teruinal
10 and 11 with internal control voltage
Enable (STAFT/ST0F) and rotation
direction selection via teruinal 8 (FW)
= Euergency switching off circuit
FF1. Fixed frequency f
1
FF2. Fixed frequency f
2
FF1 FF2. Fixed frequency f
3
FW. Enable clockwise rotation field,
analog setpoint value
frequency f
S
K1. Fadio interference suppression
filter MMX-LZ
M1. 100 v 3-phase uotor
FES. Cable screen FE connection
F1. Main choke
S1. 0FF
S2. 0N
Q11
S2
Q1
S1
Q11
2-95
$$
2
Wiring (MMX34)
3 400 V, 50/60 Hz
T1
W2
L1
L2/N
L3 PE
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q11
Q1
V2 U2
L1 L2 L3
W1 V1 U1
R1
K1
PE
PE
U V W PE 2 3 1 14 10 8 6
PES
PES
PE
PES
PES
M
M1
X1
3 ~
PE
I I I
F
F
2
F
F
1
F
W
D
R11
+
1
0
V
A
I
0
V
+
2
4
V
Note
K1. The external MMX-LZ FFl
filter can only be used for
MMXN0-0.
FF1
FF2
FWD
f
1
f
2
f
3
f
s
= f
max
f
2-96
$$
2
Terminal Models
Version A:
Motor in delta circuit (MMX12...)
The 0.75 kWuotor described belowcan be
delta-connected to a single-phase 230 v
uains (version A) or star-connected to a
3-phase 100 v uains.
Motor. F = 0.75 kW
Mains. 1/N/FE 230 v 50/0 ht
PE
L
N
PE
2
1
R1
PE
1 230 V, 50/60 Hz
L1
T1
Q11
U V W PE
PES
PES
PES
PES
M
M1
X1
3 ~
F1 FAZ-B10/1N
DEX-LN1-009
MMX12AA3D7F0-0
230 V
3.2 A
0.75 kW
DILEM
+P1DILEM
U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2
L2/N
/ 400 V 230 3,2 / 1,9 A
S1 0.97
cos
rpm 1410 50 Hz
0,75 kW
2-97
$$
2
Version B:
Motor in star circuit (MMX 34...)
Motor. F = 0.75 kW
Mains. 3/FE 100 v 50/0 ht
3 400 V, 50/60 Hz
W2
L1 L2/N L3
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q11
Q1
V2 U2
W1 V1 U1
R1
PE
PE
I I I
U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2
T1
U V W PE
PES
PES
PES
PES
M
M1
X1
3 ~
PKM0-6.3
DEX-LN3-004
400 V
1.9 A
0.75 kW
DILEM
MMX34AA2D4F0-0
2-98
$$
2
Fapid Link Systeu 1.0
System overview of Rapid Link RA 4.0 modules
Fapid Link is a reuote switching and
installation systeu.
Thanks to its coupact design and its high
degree of protection to lF5 these uotor
starters can be installed in the direct
vicinity of the uotor.
Fluggable connection cables with
standard teruinals reduce the wiring
requireuent and provide the preferred
installation technology for conveying
systeu.
3 400 V, N, PE
50/60 Hz

400 V
M
3
400 V
M
3

2-99
$$
2
Function uodules.
a FAM0 uotor starter (Motor Control
unit) 4three-phase, electronic 0L
starter or reversing starter, with
electronic uotor protection for the
assigned ratings of 90 W to 3 kW
(at 100 v).
b FASF speed control unit 4
three-phase, frequency controlled
uotor starter (fixed speeds, two
rotation directions, soft starting), infour
ratings (2.1 A/3.3 A/1.3 A/ 5. A) with
electronic uotor protection for
assignedratings frou0.18 kWto2.2 kW
(at 100 v).
Fower bus.
c lncouing supply (3 AC 100 v) via
circuit-breaker for overload and
short-circuit protection
d lncouing supply for ribbon cable
e Fibbon cable fr 100 v AC
f End-piece for flat cable
g Flexible busbar junction
h Fower adapter cable to flexible busbar
junction
i Found cable for 100 v AC
j Flug-in link for round cable
k Fower adapter cable to round cable
junction
l Link for round cable
m Fower adapter cable (round cable) to
power box
n AS-lnterface
Supply via uain cable

ata bus.
o AS-lnterface
ribbon cable
p Link for M12 connector cables
q Extension M12
Motor connection.
r unshielded uotor cable
s Shielded uotor cable (EMC)
Product features
The systeu is installed with a power bus
and data bus that are plugged into all
uodules of the Fapid Link systeu.
Custouer and sector-specific
requireuents for uaterial handling
applications are the uain focus of systeu
design.
Fapid Link version 1.0 provides uodules
with the following features.
egree of protection lF5
Aubient teuperature during operation
frou -10 C to 55 C
Max. cable length 10 u
AS-lnterface
Frofi 7.1 for

couuunication and diagnostics
Fluggable teruinal design to lS0 23570
Local operation/hand operation
Maintenance and uanual override
switches (optional)
FAM0- electronic 0L starter
FAM0-W electronic reversing starter
FASF frequency controlled speed
control
Documentation
lnstallation instructions.
lL00310019Z
lL00310020Z
2-100
$$
2
Block diagram RAMO-D
Electronic DOL starter
0ptional variant.
a Fepair switch
b Actuation of external brake (230 v)
c Actuator output
1
2
3
P
E
L
1
L
2
L
3
P
E
1
2
3
4
A
S
i
+
A
S
i
-
5
4
N
1
U
V
W
T
1
T
2
3
7
P
E
P
E
1
2
+
2
4
V
<
1
6
0
m
A
I
3
I
4
O
3
0
V
0
V
+
2
4
V
3
6
4
L
N
5
8
1
2
3
4
4
M
3
1
2
3
4
3
14
1
4
6
3
5
8
P
E
7
1
3
1
23
4
+
2
4
V
<
1
A
2
4
5
3 1
i
2-101
$$
2
Block diagram RAMO-W
Electronic reversing starter
0ptional variant.
a Fepair switch
c Actuator output
1
2
3
P
E
L
1
L
2
L
3
P
E
1
2
3
4
A
S
i
+
A
S
i
-
5
4
N
1
U
V
W
T
1
T
2
3
7
P
E
P
E
1
2
+
2
4
V
<
1
6
0
m
A
I
3
I
4
O
3
0
V
0
V
+
2
4
V
3
6
4
L
N
5
8
1
2
3
4
4
M
3
1
2
3
4
3
14
1
4
6
3
5
8
P
E
7
1
3
1
23
4
+
2
4
V
<
1
A
2
4
5
3 1
i
2-102
$$
2
Block diagram RASP-
Frequency inverter
0ptional variant.
a Fepair switch
c evice fans
d lnternal braking resistor
+
2
4
V
R
J
4
5
0
V
M
1
2
3
P
E
L
1
L
2
L
3
P
E
1
2
3
4
A
S
i
+
A
S
i
-
5
4
N
1
U
V
W
T
1
T
2
3
7
P
E
P
E
1
2
+
2
4
V
<
1
6
0
m
A
I
3
a
I
3
(
b
)
I
4
a
I
4
(
b
)
F
0
V
3
6
4
L
N
5
8
1
2
3
4
4
M
3
h
i
1
2
3
4
3 2
(
b
)
1
(
4
)
(
2
)
4(
a
)
3
4
a
b
d
c
1
4
6
3
5
8
P
E
7
1
3
+
2
4
V
2
4
5
3 1
e
3-1
!!
3
Pilot devices
Page
RMQ System 3-2
RMQ Engineering 3-9
RMQ Inscription 3-13
Signal Towers SL 3-14
LS-Titan
position switches 3-16

LSE-Titan
electronic position switches 3-26

Analog electronic position switches 3-27
Sensors Functionality 3-30
Sensors Applications 3-37
3-2
Pilot devices
!!
3
FM0 Systeu
Couuands and signals are the
fundauental functions for controlling
uachines and processes. The required
control signals are produced either
uanually by pilot devices or uechanically
by position switches. The respective
application governs the protection type,
the shape and color.
Advanced technology has been used
consistently in control circuit devices
FM0-Titan
. The use of LE eleuents

and laser inscription throughout offer
uaxiuuu reliability, efficiency and
flexibility. ln detail, this ueans.
high-quality optics for a uniforu
appearance,
highest degree of protection up to lF7
and lF9K (suitable for steau-jet
cleaning),
Clear contrast using LE eleuent
lighting, even in daylight,
up to 100,000 h, i.e. uachine lifespan,
lupact and vibration resistant,
LE operating voltage frou 12 to 500 v,
Low power consuuption only 1/ of
filauent laups,
Expanded operating teuperature range
-25 to 70 C,
Light testing circuit,
uilt-in safety circuits for highest
operational reliability and accessibility,
wear-resistant and clearly contrasting
laser inscription,
Custouer-specific syubols and
inscriptions frou 1 off,
Text and syubols can be freely
coubined,
Teruinal type using screws and Cage
Claup
1)
throughout,
Spring-loaded Cage Claup connections
for reliable and uaintenance free
contact,
Switching contacts suitable for use with
electronic devices to EN 1131-2.
5 v/1 uA,
user-prograuuable switching
perforuance on all selector switch
actuators. uouentary/uaintained
All actuators in illuuinated and
non-illuuinated version,
Euergency switching off pushbuttons
with pull and turn-to-release function,
Euergency switching off pushbuttons
with lighting option for active safety,
Contacts switch differing potentials,
For use also in safety-related circuits
using positive operation and positive
opening contacts,
Couplying with industry Standard
lEC/EN0917.
1)
Cage Claup is a registered trade uark of
Messrs. WA00 Kontakttechnik 0ubh, Minden
RMQ16 system overview
Pilot devices
FM0 Systeu
3-3
!!
3
RMQ-Titan
system overview
Pilot devices
FM0 Systeu
3-4
!!
3
Four-way pushbutton
Eaton has added uore operator eleuents
to its highly successful range of pilot
devices FM0-Titan. lt has a uodular
surface uounting. Contact eleuents frou
the FM0-Titan range are used. The betels
and front fraues are of the fauiliar
FM0-Titan foruat and color.
Four-way pushbutton
The four-way pushbuttons enable users to
control uachines and systeus in four
directions of uoveuent. Each direction of
uoveuent is being assigned one contact
eleuent. The pushbutton has four
individual button plates. They can be
specifically selected for various
applications and can be laser-inscribed to
suit the custouers requireuents.
Joystick with double contact
The joystick allows the control of up to four
directions of uoveuent on uachines.
ifferent variants of the joystick have 2/1
positions and other variants have2 settings
for each position. This allows for exauple
two speed settings for each direction. For
this a standard N0 and an N0 early-uake
are fitted in series. Mouentary contact and
latching contact versions are possible.
Selector switch actuators
The selector switch actuators have four
positions. The actuator is available either
as a rotary head or as a thuub-grip. 0ne
contact eleuent is assigned to each 0n
and each 0ff position.
0
1
0
1
2
Pilot devices
FM0 Systeu
3-5
!!
3
Labels
Eaton offers various types of labels for all
operating eleuents. versions available
are.
lank,
With direction arrows,
With inscription 01020301.
Custouised inscriptions are also possible.
The software Labeleditor enables
custouited inscriptions tobedesignedand
these can be subsequently applied to the
labels by laser, peruanently and proof
against wiping off. 7Section
Labeleditor, page 3-13
Contact versions
Screw
terminals
Spring-
loaded
terminals
Front
fixing
Base fixing Contact Contact travel
diagram
1)
Contact elements
x x x x
M22-(C)K(C)10
x x x
M22-(C)K(C)01
x x x x
M22-(C)K01
2)
x x
M22-K10F
1) Stroke in connection with front eleuent.
2) N/C. Fositive opening safety function according to lEC/EN 0917-5-1.
.3
.4
0 2.8 5.5
.1
.2
0 1.2 5.5
.5
.6
0 3.5 5.5
.7
.8
0 1.8 5.5
Pilot devices
FM0 Systeu
3-6
!!
3
Screw
terminals
Spring-
loaded
terminals
Front
fixing
Base fixing Contact Contact travel
diagram
1)
Double contact elements
x x
M22-CK20
x x
M22-CK02
x x
M22-CK11
2)
Self-monitoring contact elements
x x x
M22-K(C)01SMC10
x x x
M22-K(C)02SMC10
1) Stroke in connection with front eleuent.
2) N/C. Fositive opening safety function according to lEC/EN 0917-5-1.
.3
.4
.3
.4
0 3.6 5.5
.1
.2
.1
.2
0 1.2 5.5
.3
.4
.1
.2
0 1.2 3.6 5.5
1
2
3
4
0 1.2 2.8 5.5
1
2
3
4
1
2
0 1.2 2.8 5.5
Pilot devices
FM0 Systeu
3-7
!!
3
Emergency-stop/off pushbuttons, system overview
38
45
60
M
u
s
h
r
o
o
m
-
s
h
a
p
e
d
P
a
l
m
-
t
r
e
e
s
h
a
p
e
E
M
E
R
G
EN
C
Y
-
S
T
O
P
Pilot devices
FM0 Systeu
3-8
!!
3
The neweuergency stop or euergency-off
pushbutton actuators for the FM0-Titan
range of pilot devices for global use have a
palu shaped design with a 15 or 0 uu
diaueter. They are available with or
without keys, turn-releasable,
non-illuuinated, illuuinated with standard
LEs or with uechanical switch position
indication (green/red) in the center of the
actuator eleuent. The self-uonitoring
contact eleuents ensure extensive
operational safety, even with a faulty
installation or after excessive force is used
for actuation. As well as the euergency-off
NC contact, the uodular contact eleuents
feature an integrated second contact for
querying the uechanical connection to the
euergency stop actuator eleuent. The
contact eleuents are available for front or
bottou fixing, for single or dual-channel
safety circuits up to SlL 3 in accordance
with lEC 201 or Ferforuance Level FL e
to EN lS0 13819-1.
An optional illuuinated ring enables
euergency-stop/off pushbutton actuators
on a uachine or a plant to be uade uore
conspicuous. Even in darkened
environuents, the position of these
pushbutton actuators is clearly indicated.
The illuuinated ring also clearly indicates
the operating state frou a considerable
distance. When tripped, for exauple, it is
possible to activate three separately
controllable LE rows as a running light.
3-9
Pilot devices
!!
3
FM0 Engineering
Assembly and function
M22SMC10
a The self-uonitoring contact uechanically uonitors the connection on the M22-Fv
b The self-uonitoring contact uechanically uonitors the interface on the
M22-KSMC10 safety contact above it, but N0T the connection on the M22-Fv
M22-K01SMC10
M22-KC01SMC10
M22-K02SMC10
M22-KC02SMC10
When the self-uonitoring contact is uounted correctly, the N/0 contact is closed.
The euergency switching off/Stop circuit is activated via series connection of N/C and
N/0s if
the euergency switching off/stop pushbutton is actuated or
the self-uonitoring contact is isolated uechanically frou the pushbutton
b
a
a
b
M22-K... SMC10
M22-PV...
M22-K... SMC10
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
Pilot devices
FM0 Engineering
3-10
!!
3
Terminal markings and function numbers (distinctive number/contact sequence),
EN 50013
Voltage variants with series elements
M22-XLED60
1)
u
"
#AC/C
1x 0 v
2x 90 v
3x 120 v
... ...
7x 210 v
M22-XLED220 u
"
#
1 x 220 v C
1) For increasing the voltage
AC/C.
M22-XLED230-T
1)
u
"
#
1x 100 v~
2x 500 v~
1) AC for increasing the voltage
50/0 ht.
13
14
13
14
23
24
13
14
23
24
33
34
30
20
10
13
14
13
14
33
34
21
11
21
22
21
22
13
14
12
21
22
31
32
21
22
03
11 21 31
12 22 32
21
22
01
02
11
12
12 30 V h/H
U
e
h/H
X2 X1 2 1
M22-XLED60/
M22-XLED220
M22-(C)LED(C)-...
2 1 2 1
X2 X1 2 1 1
M22-XLED230-T M22-(C)LED(C)230-...
2
85 264 V h,
50 60 Hz
U
e
h
Pilot devices
FM0 Engineering
3-11
!!
3
Connection for light test
The test button is used to check operation
of the indicator lights independently of the
respective control state. ecoupling
eleuents prevent voltage feedback.
M22-XLED-T
for u
"
= 12 to 210 v AC/C (also for light test
with signal towers SL)
a Test button
1) 0nly for eleuents 12 to 30 v.
a
14
13
X2
X1
14
13
14
13
2 1
4
3
X2
X1
X2
X1
2 1
2 1
M22-XLED-T
M22-(C)LED(C)-...
1)
1
2
2
4
0
V
h
/
H
2
1
M22-XLED60/
M22-XLED220
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
M22-XLED60/
M22-XLED220
M22-XLED60/
M22-XLED220
Pilot devices
FM0 Engineering
3-12
!!
3
M22-XLED230-T
for u
"
= 85 to 21 v AC/50 0 ht
a Test button
2) For eleuents 85 to 21 v.
a
L1
N
14
13
X2
X1
14
13
14
13
4
3
2
1
X2
X1
X2
X1
M22-XLED230-T
M22-(C)LED(C)230-...
2)
8
5
2
6
4
V
h
/
5
0
6
0
H
z
2 1
2 1
2 1
3-13
Pilot devices
!!
3
FM0 lnscription
Labeleditor
Customized inscription of devices using
the Labeleditor software
You can label your device to your individual
requireuents in four siuple steps.
ownload the inscription software.
keyword. Labeleditor
Creation of label teuplate (uenu-guided
in the software)
Send the label teuplate to the factory by
euail. The euail address is autouatically
set for the selected product by the
prograu. When your teuplateis sent, the
Labeleditor issues a file naue such as
FM0_Silver_12315.tip. This file naue
is part of the article to be ordered (see
0rdering exauples).
Send order to the Eaton sales office or
the electrical engineering wholesaling.
Ordering examples
M22-XST insert label for M22S-ST-X
legend label uount with special
inscription
asic type. M22-XST-
= File naue generated by Labelditor
Flease order.
1 x M22-XST-FM0_Titan_xxxxxx.tip
utton plate in green with special
inscription
asic type. M22-Xh-
1. = Colour (here 0 for green),
2. = File naue generated by Labeleditor
Flease order.
1 x M22-Xh-0-FM0_Titan_xxxxx.tip
ouble actuator pushbutton with white
pushbutton plates and special syubols
asic type. M22-L---
1. = Colour (here W for white),
2. and 3. = File naue assigned by
Labeleditor, uust be stated here 2 x
Flease order.
1 x M22-L-W-FM0_Titan_xx
xxx.tip-FM0_Titan_xxxxx.tip
Key-operated button, 2 positions,
individual lock uechanisu no. MS1,
individual syubol
asic type. M22-WFS-MS-
WFS. = Nuuber of positions,
MS. = Nuuber of individual lock
uechanisu,
-. = File naue assigned in Labeleditor
Flease order.
1 x
M22-WFS2-MS1-FM0_Titan_xxxxxx.tip
3-14
Pilot devices
!!
3
Signal Towers SL
Signal Towers SL everything under visual control at all times
Signal towers SL (lF5) indicate uachine
states using visible and acoustic signals.
Mounted on control panels or on
uachines, they can be reliably recognited
as continuous light, flashing light, strobe
light or acoustic device even frou a
distance, and dealt with as necessary.
Product features
Continuous light, flashing light, strobe
light and acoustic device can be
coubined as required.
Free prograuuability peruits the
actuation of five addresses.
Siuple asseubly without tools by
bayonet fitting.
Autouatic contacting by built-in contact
pins.
Excellent illuuination by specially
shaped lenses with Fresnel effect.
use of filauent laups or LEs as
required.
A large nuuber of couplete devices
siuplifies selection, ordering and
stockkeeping for standard applications.
The various colors of the light eleuents
indicate the operating state in each case to
lEC/EN 0201-1 an.
RED:
angerous state luuediate action
necessary
YELLOW:
Abnorual status uonitor or +action
GREEN:
Norual status no action necessary
BLUE:
iscontinuity action uandatory
WHITE:
0ther status can be used as required.
Pilot devices
Signal Towers SL
3-15
!!
3
Programmability
Five signal lines frou a teruinal strip in the
base uodule runthrougheachuodule. The
uodule is addressed via a wire link
(juuper) on each card. Five different
addresses can also be allocated several
tiues.
Thus, for exauple, a red strobe light and in
parallel with it an acoustic device can
indicate and announce the dangerous
status of a uachine. Flug both juupers into
the saue position on the pcb and its
done!
(7Section Connection for light test,
page 3-11.)
BA15d F7 W
N
1
2
3
4
0
5
0 5 4 3 2 1
5
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
1...5 U
e
= 24 230 Vh/H
3-16
Pilot devices
!!
3
LS-Titan
position switches
New combinations for your solutions with LS-Titan
Actuating devices RMQ-Titan
simply
snap fitting
Another unique feature is the possibility to
coubine actuators frou the FM0-Titan
range with the position switches LS-Titan.
Fushbuttons, selector switches or
euergency switching off pushbuttons can
all be directly snapped on to any position
switch as operating head. The couplete
unit then has at least the high protection
type lF at front and rear.
ln addition, all the operating heads and the
adapter for accepting the FM0-Titan
pushbuttons have a bayonet fitting that
enables quick and secure fitting. using the
bayonet fitting, the heads can be attached
in any of the four directions (1 x 90).
a 0perating heads in four positions, each
turned by 90, can be fitted
subsequently.
LS-Titan
RMQ-Titan
Pilot devices
LS-Titan
position switches
3-17
!!
3
Overview
LS, LSM LS1Z
LSF LSZ LSZZ
Pilot devices
LS-Titan
position switches
3-18
!!
3
Safety position switches LS4ZB, LSZB
Eaton safety position switches have been
specially designed for uonitoring the
position of protective guards such as
doors, hingedflaps, shrouds andprotective
guards. They ueet the requireuents of the
euployers liability insurance Association
for the testing of positive opening position
switches for safety functions (0S-ET-15).
These requireuents include.
Fosition switches for safety functions
uust be designed so that the safety
function cannot be bypassed uanually or
siuple tools. Siuple tools are. pliers,
screwdrivers, pins, nails, wire, scissors,
penknives etc.
ln addition to these requireuents, LS...Z
position switches offer additional
uanipulation safety by ueans of an
operating head which can rotate but
cannot be reuoved.
Positive opening
Mechanically operated position switches
in safety circuits uust have positive
opening contacts (see EN0917-5-1). here,
the teru positive opening is defined as
follows. The execution of a contact
separation as the direct result of a
predeteruined uotion of the keypad of the
switch via non-spring operated parts
(e.g. not dependent on a spring ).
Fositive opening is an opening uoveuent
by which it is ensured that the uain
contacts of a switch have attained the
open position at the saue tiue as the
keypad assuues the 0ff position. Eaton
position switches all ueet these
requireuents.
Certification
All Eaton safety position switches are
certified by the euployers liability
insurance Association or by the Technical
Monitoring Service (Tuv), Fheinland.
LS1Z LSZZ LSZ
LSF-Z
B
G
P
RFZ
E
R
T
Sicherheit geprft
tested safety
ET 06183
B
G
P
RFZ
E
R
T
Sicherheit geprft
tested safety
BGIA0603010
B
G
P
RFZ
E
R
T
Sicherheit geprft
tested safety
ET 07014
B
G
P
RFZ
E
R
T
Sicherheit geprft
tested safety
ET 06165
Pilot devices
LS-Titan
position switches
3-19
!!
3
Personnel protection by monitoring the protective device
LSZB
LSZ LS1Z
oor open
LS...Z
disconnects
power
No danger
STOP
closed 0pen
a Safety contact
b Signalling contact
21 22
13 14
21 22
13 14
a
b
oor closed 7 Safety contact (21 - 22) closed
Signalling contact (13 - 11) open
oor open 7Safety contact (21 - 22) open
Signalling contact (13 - 11) closed
Pilot devices
LS-Titan
position switches
3-20
!!
3
Enhanced personnel protection with separate signal for door position
LSFT-ZBZ, spring-powered interlock
(closed-circuit principle)
LSZZ
Stop couuand
Waiting tiue
Machine is stopped
Frotective uechanisu
open
No danger
STOP
LS-S02-FT-ZZ
a Safety contact
c lnterlocked
d Feleased
e 0pen
a
b
A1
A2
21 22
11 12
A1
A2
21 22
11 12
A1
A2
21 22
11 12
U
S
U
S
G E D
oor closed and
interlocked
7 Coil at (A1, A2) de-energited also with uains failure or wire breakage.
oor interlocked = safe state
Safety contact (21 - 22) closed
Feleasing of door 7 Apply voltage to coil (A1, A2)
e.g. via tero-speed uonitor
Safety contact (21 - 22) opens
Signalling contact (11-12) reuains closed
oor open 7 0nly possible once it is released
Signalling contact (11 - 12) opens.
oor open 7oth contacts in the open position
tauperproof against siuple tools
Close door 7 Signalling contact (11 - 12) closes
Lock door 7 Switch off the voltage frou coil (A1, A2)
1st actuator interlocked
2nd safety contact (21 - 22) closes
Pilot devices
LS-Titan
position switches
3-21
!!
3
LS-S11-FT-ZZ
a Safety contact
c lnterlocked
d Feleased
e 0pen
a
b
U
S
U
S
A1
A2
21 22
13 14
A1
A2
21 22
13 14
A1
A2
21 22
13 14
G E D
oor closed and
interlocked
7 Coil at (A1, A2) de-energited also with uains failure or wire breakage.
oor interlocked = safe state
Feleasing of door 7 Apply voltage to coil (A1, A2)
e.g. via tero-speed uonitor
Signalling contact (13 - 11) reuains open
Signalling contact (13 - 11) closes.
oor open 7Safety contact (21 - 22) open
Close door 7 Signalling contact (13 - 11) opens
Lock door 7 Switch off the voltage frou coil (A1, A2)
Pilot devices
LS-Titan
position switches
3-22
!!
3
Process protection and enhanced personnel protection with separate signal for door
position
LSMT-ZBZ, magnet-powered interlock
(open-circuit principle)
LSZZ
Stop couuand
Waiting tiue
Frocess sequence halted
Frotective uechanisu
open
Froduct 0K
STOP
LS-S02-MT-ZZ
a Safety contact
c lnterlocked
d Feleased
e 0pen
A1
A2
21 22
11 12
A1
A2
21 22
11 12
A1
A2
21 22
11 12
a
b
U
S
G E D
oor closed and
interlocked
7 voltage on coil (A1, A2)
Feleasing of door 7 Coil de-energited (A1, A2)
e.g. via tero-speed uonitor,
Signalling contact (11 - 12) reuains closed
Signalling contact (11 - 12) opens.
oor open 7 both contacts in the open position, even with taupering with siuple tools
Close door 7 Signalling contact (11 - 12) closes
Lock door 7 Apply voltage to coil (A1, A2)
Pilot devices
LS-Titan
position switches
3-23
!!
3
LS-S11-MT-ZZ
a Safety contact
c lnterlocked
d Feleased
e 0pen
a
b
A1
A2
U
S
A1
A2
A1
A2
21 22
13 14
21 22
13 14
21 22
13 14
G E D
oor closed and
interlocked
7 voltage on coil (A1, A2)
Feleasing of door 7 Coil de-energited (A1, A2)
e.g. via tero-speed uonitor,
Signalling contact (13 - 11) closes.
oor open 7 Safety contact (21 - 22) open
Close door 7 Signalling contact (13 - 11) opens
Lock door 7 Apply voltage to coil (A1, A2)
Pilot devices
LS-Titan
position switches
3-24
!!
3
Personnel protection by monitoring of the protective mechanism
LSRTKG, LSRTS
LSFl(A) /TK0 LSFl(A)/TS
hinged protective
cover open
LSF... disconnects
power
No danger
STOP
Closed 0pen
a Safety contact
21 22
13 14
21 22
13 14
a
b
hinged protective cover
closed
7 Safety contact (21 - 22) closed
Frotective flap open 7Safety contact (21 - 22) open
Pilot devices
LS-Titan
position switches
3-25
!!
3
LS, LSM LS4ZB LSZB LSZBZ
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
lEC 0917-5-1
7EN 50017
iuensions
Fixing
diuensions
0perating points
Miniuuu lF5
lEC 0917-5-1
7EN 50011
iuensions
Fixing
diuensions
0perating points
lF5
lEC 0917-5-1
lF5
lEC 0917-5-1
lF5
S
u
i
t
a
b
l
e
a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
Also for use in
safety circuits, by
positive
operation and
positive opening
contacts
Safety position
switches for
protection of
personnel
with separate
operating
eleuent for
protective covers
Fositive
operation and
positive opening
contacts
Approval of
euployers
liabilityinsurance
Association
Safety position
switches for
protection of
personnel
with separate
operating
eleuent for
protective covers
Fositive
operation and
positive opening
contacts
Approval of
euployers
liabilityinsurance
Association
Safety position
switches for
protection of
personnel
with separate
operating
eleuent for
protective covers
Fositive
operation and
positive opening
contacts
electrouagnetic
interlock
Approval of
euployers
liabilityinsurance
Association
r
i
v
e
Founded plunger
(centre fixing)
Foller plunger
(centre fixing)
Fotary lever
Angled roller
lever
Adjustable roller
lever
Actuating rod
Spring-rod
actuator
0perating heads
adjustable in 90
steps
Coded actuating
eleuent
0perating head.
Can be rotated
by 90
Can be
actuated frou
both sides
Actuating
eleuent
Convertible for
vertical and
horitontal
fixing
With triple coding
Coded actuating
eleuent
0perating head.
Can be rotated
by 90
Can be
actuated frou
four sides and
frou above
Coded actuating
eleuent
0perating head.
Can be rotated
by 90
Can be
actuated frou
four sides
3-26
Pilot devices
!!
3
LSE-Titan
electronic position switches

Operating point variably adjustable
The operating point on electronic position
switches LSE-Titan is adjustable and
variable. Two high-speed and bounce-free
FNF switching outputs enable high
switching frequencies.
The position switch is overload as well as
conditionally short-circuit proof and has
snap-action switching perforuance. This
ensures a defined and reproduceable
switching point. The operating point lies in
the range frou 0.5 to 5.5 uu
(as supplied = 3 uu).
Adjustuent to a new operating point is
carried out as follows.
Move the plunger frou the original to the
new switch position. For this purpose,
press the setting pushbutton for 1 s. The
LE now flashes with a high pulse
frequency and the new operating point is
retentively set.
The LSE-11 and LSE-02 couplete devices
can be used in safety-oriented
connections. They have the saue function
as electrouechanical position switches.
Note
This ueans that all the devices are also
suitable for safety applications designed
for personnel or process protection.
Contact travel diagram
1 s
f
max
F2 N
set
set
adjust
fix
LED
TV
Rheinland
Bauart geprft
Type approved
Functional
Safety
LSE-11 LSE-02
electron.
+U
e
Q1
0 V
Q2
Q1
Q2
0.5 5.5
default = 3.0
6.1 0
Q1
0 V
Q2
+U
e
electron.
Q1
Q2
0.5 5.5
default = 3.0
6.1 0
3-27
Pilot devices
!!
3
Analog electronic position switches
Two part no. are available.
LSE-Al with current output,
LSE-Au with voltage output.
Analog, mechanically actuated position
switches directly linked with the world of
automation
Analog position switches LSE-Al (1 to
20 uA) and LSE-Au (0 to 10 v) represent
another innovation in electronic position
switches. using theu, it is nowpossible for
the first tiue to uonitor the actual position
of a flue gas valve or an actuator
continuously. The actual position is
converted in analog fashion into voltage
(0 to 10 v) or current (1 to 20 uA) and then
continuously signalled to the electronics.
Even objects of varying sites or
thicknesses, such as brake shoes, can be
scanned and the results processed further.
Siuplerotational-speeddependent control
systeus of fan uotors or suoke-venting
blowers signal the opening angle of the air
dauper (e.g. 25, 50 or 75 %) and thus save
power and uaterial wear. The analog
position switches also have a diagnosis
output for further processing of data. This
ueans that the safe status can be
uonitored and analyted at all tiues. The
position switch also has a self-test
function. The outputs 01 and 02 are
constantly scanned for overload,
short-circuit against 0 v and short-circuit
against u
"
.
Contact travel diagram
LSE-Al
LSE-Au
100 0
4
20
S [%]
I [mA]
100 0
10
S [%]
U [V]
Pilot devices
3-28
!!
3
Connection diagram
LSE-AI
F200 mA
4 20 mA
0 V
QU
e
< 400 O
A
+24 V (15 / +20 %)
+Ue
+Q2
+Q1
0 V
diagnosis
analog
LSE-AU
F200 mA
F10 mA
0 V
0 V 10 V QU
e
V
+24 V (15 / +20 %)
+Ue
+Q2
+Q1
0 V
diagnosis
analog
Pilot devices
3-29
!!
3
Circuit symbol
Norual scenario
Fault scenario
LSE-AI LSE-AU
01 1 20 uA 0 10 v
02 6 u
"
6 u
"
LE
t
LED
t
LED
LSE-AI LSE-AU
01 0 uA 0 v
02 0 v 0 v
LE
Feset
t
LED
t
LED
+U
e
t
> 1 s
+U
e
t
> 1 s
3-30
Pilot devices
!!
3
Sensors Functionality
Inductive Sensors
lnductive sensors are used to detect uetal
objects. The objects are detected through
an electrouagnetic field.
With the ability to detect at close range,
inductive proxiuity sensors are very useful
for precision ueasureuent and inspection
applications.
How an inductive sensor works
lnductive sensors create an invisible high
frequency oscillation field. When uetal
objects are brought into this field, this
oscillating field is affected. Each sensor
has a specific sensing range switch point
so that uetal target detection is very
accurate and repeatable.
lf a uetal object is brought into the field
created by the sensor, this is interrupted
and causes a reduction in the current
flowing through the sensor coil (eddy
current dauping). The detector circuit
senses this change and sends a signal via
the sensor output.
Assembly parts
A uetal object, or target, enters the
sensing field.
The sensor coil is a coil of wire typically
wound around a ferrite core. lf you could
see the electrouagnetic field created by it,
it would be cone shape. The target will
pass through this field. The ferrite core
Pilot devices
3-31
!!
3
shapes the field and the site of the coil
deteruines the sensing range.
The resonance circuit creates a high
frequency oscillation of the
electrouagnetic field (between 100 ht and
1 Mht). lf a uetal object is located in the
field, this causes a change in the uagnetic
field oscillation.
This change creates an eddy current
which daupens the signal fed back to the
sensor coil.
The detector circuit senses the change
and switches 0N at a particular set point
(auplitude). This 0N signal generates a
signal to the solid-state output.
The output circuit reuains active until the
target leaves the sensing field. The
oscillator responds with an increase in
auplitude, and when it reaches the
setpoint value, the detector circuit
switches 0FF. The output returns to its
norual state.
Material wire of the target object
The sensing ranges stated by the sensor
uanufacturer are usually based upon
ferrite targets uade of carbon-rolled steel
(lE FE 235) defined by lS0 30.
Sensing ranges to targets uade of other
uaterials have to have a correction factor
applied as listed in the table below. To use
this table, uultiply the sensing distance of
the device by the factor given below.
Correction factors
Multiply the sensing distance by the factor
given below.
1)
Stainless steel 100 series to ASTM
A210, uartensitic or ferritic,
uagnetitable.
2)
Stainless steel 300 series to ASTM
A210, austenitic, non-uagnetitable.
The index of stainless steels is provided in
EN 10088-1.
Target
object
Sensor size
48
mm
12
mm
18
mm
30
mm
Stainless
Steel 100
1)
0.90 0.90 1.0 1.0
Stainless
Steel 300
2)
0.5 0.70 0.70 0.75
rass 0.35 0.15 0.15 0.15
Aluuiniuu 0.35 0.10 0.15 0.10
Copper 0.30 0.25 0.35 0.30
Pilot devices
3-32
!!
3
Capacitive sensors
Capacitive sensors are designed to detect
both uetallic and nonuetallic targets. They
are ideally suited for liquid level control
and for sensing powdered or granulated
uaterial.
Operation of the capacitive sensors
Capacitive sensors operate using a
capacitor. This consists of twouetal plates
that are separated by an insulating
dielectricuaterial. The functionof this type
of sensor is based on dielectric
capacitance, which is the ability of a
dielectric to store an electrical charge.
The distance between the plates
deteruines the ability of the capacitor to
store an electrical charge.
lf an object is put into the electrical field.
the capacitance of the capacitor changes.
This change is used to iupleuent the on/off
switch function.
Capacitor
a Flates
b Switch
c ielectric
When this principle is applied to the
capacitive sensor, one capacitive plate is
part of the switch, the enclosure (the
sensor face) is the insulator. The target is
the other plate. 0round is the couuon
path.
Capacitive proxiuity sensors can detect
any target that has a dielectric constant
greater than air. Liquids have high
dielectric constants. Metal also uakes a
good target.
"
!
#
Pilot devices
3-33
!!
3
Capacitive sensor
Capacitive sensors consist essentially of
four basic eleuents.
Sensor (ielectric)
Fesonance circuit
etector circuit
0utput circuit.
As an object approaches the sensor, the
dielectric constant of the capacitor
changes. The oscillator circuits vibration
begins when feedback capacitance is
detected. This is just the opposite in the
inductive proxiuity sensor, where the
vibration is dauped when the target is
present.
Effects
Capacitive sensors are activated both by
conductive as well as non-conductive
objects.
Metals achieve the greatest switching
distances due to their high conductivity.
erating factors for various uetals, such
as are necessary with inductive sensors,
need not be taken into account.
Actuation by objects uade of
non-conductive uaterials (insulators).
When an insulator is brought between the
electrodes of a capacitor, the capacitance
rises relative to the dielectric constant e of
the insulator. The dielectric constant for all
solid and liquid uaterials is greater than
that for air.
0bjects uade of non-conductive uaterials
affect the active surface of a capacitive
proxiuity switch in the saue way. The
coupling capacitance is increased.
Materials with a high dielectric constant
achieve great switching distances.
Notes
When scanning organic uaterials (wood,
grain, etc.) it uust be noted that the
attainable switching distance is greatly
dependent on their uoisture content.
(F
Water
= 80!)
Pilot devices
3-34
!!
3
Influence of environmental conditions
As can be seen frouthe following diagrau,
the switching distance S
!
is dependent on
the dielectric constant F
!
of the object to
be uonitored.
Metal objects produce the uaxiuuu
switching distance (100 %).
With other uaterials, it is reduced relative
to the dielectric constant of the object to be
uonitored.
The following table lists the dielectric
constants F
!
of soue iuportant uaterials.
ue to the high dielectric value of water,
the fluctuations with wood can be
significant. aup wood therefore is
registered uuch uore effectively by
capacitive sensors than dry wood.
60
80
30
10
10 20 40 60 80 100
1
e
r
s
r
[%]
Material
!
Air, vacuuu 1
Teflon 2
Wood 2 - 7
Faraffin 2.2
Kerosene 2.2
0il of terpentine 2.2
Transforuer oil 2.2
Faper 2.3
Folyethylene 2.3
Folypropylene 2.3
Cable insulation 2.5
Soft rubber 2.5
Silicone rubber 2.8
Folyvinyl chloride 2.9
Folystyrene 3
Celluloid 3
Ferspex 3.2
Araldite 3.
akelite 3.
Silica glass 3.7
hard rubber 1
0il-iupregnated paper 1
Chipboard 1
Forcelain 1.1
Lauinated paper 1.5
0uartt sand 1.5
0lass 5
Folyauide 5
Mica
Marble 8
Alcohol 25.8
water 80
Pilot devices
3-35
!!
3
Optical sensors
0ptical sensors use light to detect the
presence or absence of an object. The
uain advantages of optical sensors are
contactless sensing of objects and greatly
extended sensing ranges.
Operating principle of the optical sensor
A LE sends a beau of light, which is
picked up by a photodetector. An object is
detected when it passes between the LE
and photodetector, interrupting the light
beau.
Lets look at how an optical sensor works.
a Fower supply.
Feeds the sensor circuit with a
regulated C voltage.
b Modulator.
generates pulses to cycle auplifier and
LE at desired frequency.
c Source current auplifier
d LE
e Lens
f Target object or reflector
g Fhotodetector.
Either aphotodiodeor aphototransistor
device, selected for a uaxiuuu
sensitivity at the source LEs euitted
light wave-length. oth the source LE
and the detector have protective
lenses. When the sensor picks up the
light, it sends a suall auount of current
to the detector auplifier.
h etector Auplifier.
locks current generated by the
background light. lt also provides
auplification of the signal received to a
usable level, and sends it through to the
deuodulator.
i euodulator.
Sorts out the light thrown out by the
sensor frouall other light in the area. lf
the deuodulator decides the signals it
receive are okay, it signals the output.
j 0utput.
Ferforus switching routine when
directed to do so by the deuodulator.

Pilot devices
3-36
!!
3
Detection methods
Operating Mode Description Operating Mode Description
Light barriers A source unit in
one location
sends a light
beau to a
detector unit in
another
location. An
object is
detectedwhenit
passes between
the source unit
andthedetector
unit, interrupting
the light beau.
Feflected-light beau Light source and
receiver are
located in the
saue unit. lf a
target uoves in
front of the optical
sensor, it reflects
the light beau
directly back tothe
receiver.
Folarisation reflex sensor Light sourceand
receiver are
located in the
saue unit. lf a
target uoves in
front of the
optical sensor, a
reflector
reflects the light
beau directly
back to the
receiver.
ackground rejection
(Ferfect Frox)
This is a special
type of diffuse
reflective sensor
that includes two
detectors. This
sensor offers
reliable detection
of target objects in
a defined sensing
range and at the
saue tiue ignores
objects outside of
this range. unlikea
standard diffuse
reflective optical
sensor, color or
reflectivity has
uiniual effect on
the sensing range
of this sensor.
Detector
Source
Target
Target
Reex
Sensor
Target
Reex
Sensor
Retroreector
Fixed Focus
Perfect Prox
Sensor
Target
Background
3-37
Pilot devices
!!
3
Sensors Applications
Broken Tool Detection
This sensor is used to sense for the
presence of the bit on a uill. The high
sensing power and background
suppression of the Ferfect Frox allows
reliable detection through high levels of
cutting fluids, while ignoring objects just
beyond the bit. The rugged harsh duty
sensor survives constant exposure to
lubricants, cutting fluids and flying uetal
chips.
Broken Tool Detection
A tubular sensor is used to detect the
presence of a drill bit should the drill bit
be broken the sensor would signal a
controller.
Description Catalog Number
E58 Ferfect Frox Sensor E58-30F or E58-18F Sensor
Tubular inductive sensor E57 Froduct Fauily or iFrox
Pilot devices
3-38
!!
3
Machining process
A ferrous only sensor is used in a process
where aluuinuu is being uachined. The
ferrous only sensor ignores the aluuinuu
(non-ferrous) chips frou the uachining
process and only detects the ferrous
target.
Tool Position
position of a tool chuck.
Pilot devices
3-39
!!
3
Bottle Filling Detection
A clear object sensor is used to sense the
presence of bottles at a filling operation.
The sensor offers high reliability in sensing
clear bottles of different colors and
thicknesses.
Process control engineering
A capacitive sensor used to verify fill level
of bottled water on a filling process line.
E5 Clear 0bject Sensor E71-C0N or E71-C0F
Tubular capacitive Sensor E53 Froduct Fauily
Pilot devices
3-40
!!
3
Conveyor System Control
Atubular inductive sensor is used to detect
the presence of uetal carriers holding
parts to be uachined.
Stack Height Control
A set of thru-beausensors deteruines the
height of a scissor lift. For exauple, when
the control is set for dark-to-light
energite, the lift rises after a layer has
been reuoved and stops when the next
layer breaks the beau again.
Couet Series Thru-eau - source 11100A
Couet Series Thru-beau - detector 12100A
Pilot devices
3-41
!!
3
Carton Fill-Level Detection
Two sensors work together to inspect the
fill level in cartons on a conveyor. A reflex
sensor senses the position of the carton
and energites the sensors located over the
contents. lf the sensor does not see the
fill level, the carton does not pass
inspection.
Lid Detection
Two sensors are used to detect a can on a
conveyor belt and to check whether it has
a cover.
Couet visible reflex photoelectric sensor 11102A
Couet reflected-light beau with
background suppression (Ferfect Frox)
13103A
Fetro-reflector 200A-501
Pilot devices
3-42
!!
3
Tollbooth Control
The long range polarited reflex controls
are used for the tiue control of a toll
barrier. As soon as the car that has paid
passes, the barrier closes in order to
ensure that the next car stops. With the
initiator E7 Long Fange Ferfect Frox you
can uount the sensor on just one side
instead of both. lt detects cars with
different colors and finishes whilst reliably
ignoring all other background objects.
The rugged design uakes it also suitable
for continuous operation in extreue
weather conditions.
Liquid Level Detection
A pair of capacitive sensors are used to
sense high and low liquid levels in a tank
through a sight glass. This arrangeuent
starts a puup to fill the tank when the lower
sensor is energited and shuts the puup off
when the top sensor is energited.
E7 Ferfect Frox long range sensor E7-LFF
Pilot devices
3-43
!!
3
Bulk Material Detection
A capacitive sensor is used to control fill
level of solids such as plastic pellets in a
hopper or bin.
Parts Presence
A sensor configured as a liuit switch can
be used to detect whether a couponent is
present in an autouatic asseubly
uachine. The Couet detects all uaterials,
colors and services and uasks out the
background. TheiFrox canbeprograuued
to detect a particular uaterial and thus to
ignore all other uaterials.
Liuit switch, inductive sensor E57 Froduct Fauily
Couet Ferfect Frox 1310
lnductive sensor iFrox E59-M
Pilot devices
3-44
!!
3
Parts Presence
The sensor detects couponents with
different heights frou approx. 13 to 7 uu
in a channel and can uask out the channel.
lnstallation is siuple and does not require
any drilling or cutting of the channel.
Filter Paper Length Control
A focused diffuse reflective sensor
interfaces with a prograuuable controller
to ueasure a specific length of corrugated
autouotive filter paper. The controller
detects the presence or absence of a
corrugation. When a predeteruined
nuuber of corrugations has beendetected,
the prograuuable controller directs a
shear to cut the paper.
Couet reflected-light beau
(Ferfect Frox), 100 uu
13101A
A focused diffuse Couet reflective
sensor
13102A
Pilot devices
3-45
!!
3
Speed monitoring
presence of set screws on a shaft hub
providing a control device with signals for
speed regulation or detection of rotation.
Motion Control
A pair of tubular sensors is used to
deteruine full open and fully closed valve
position.
Pilot devices
3-46
!!
3
Clear Plastic Web Break Detection
The clear web is detected by an extreuely
sensitive diffuse reflective sensor. lts short
detection range uakes it iuuune to
reflective objects in the background. The
extreuely high excess gain helps it ignore
reflection caused by fluttering of the web.
Paper detection
Fight angle viewing and coupact site
allow the sensor to be uounted in the tight
confines of paper handling systeus. high
resolution and sharp optical cut-off ensure
that background uachinery will be ignored
while paper will be detected regardless of
color and texture.
a Couet sensors
b Faper
c Foller
Couet series 150 uu diffuse focus
reflective light sensor
13107A
Couet Ferfect Frox, 50 uu series,
right angled
13101F
c
a
b
Pilot devices
3-47
!!
3
Damage Warning
Source and detector are uounted at
opposite ends of a long warehouse storage
shelf with the beau situated a safe
distance below overhead obstacles
(lighting, cable ducts, gas lines, etc.). lf a
forklift operator interrupts the beau while
uoving a load, a siren or flashing light will
warn hiu to stop before any dauage
occurs.
Couet E58 series Thru-eau, Source E58-30TS
Thru-beau sensor E58 series, detector E58-30T
Notes
3-48
!!
3
4-1
''
4
Cam switches
Page
Overview 4-2
ON-OFF switches, main switches,
maintenance switches 4-3
Changeover switches, reversing switches 4-5
(Reversing) star-delta switches 4-6
Multi-Speed Switches 4-7
Interlock circuits 4-11
Single-phase approach circuits 4-12
Meter changeover Switches 4-13
Heater switches 4-14
Step switches 4-15
4-2
Cam switches
''
4
0verview
Use and designs
Eaton cau switches and
switch-disconnectors are used as.
a Main switches, uain switches used as
Euergency-Stop devices,
b 0N-0FF switches,
c Safety switches,
d Changeover switches,
e Feversing switches, star-delta
switches, uulti-speed switches,
f Step switches, control switches,
coding switches, ueter selector
switches.
The following designs are available.
g Flush uounting,
h Centre uounting,
i Surface uounting,
j Service distribution board uounting,
k Fear uounting.
Fefer to the latest issue of our uain catalog
for lndustrial Switchgear.
0ther contact arrangeuents are listed in
the K115 special catalog in addition to the
switches listed in the uain catalog.
(www.eaton.cou/uoeller/support
(Catalogs)).
Basic part
number
I
u
Use as Design
[A]
TM 10 x x x / / /
T0 20 x x x x x / / /
T3 32 x x x x / / /
T5 3 x x x x x /
T5 100 x x x /
T 10 x x
T8 315
1)
x x
F1-25 25 x x x / /
F1-32 32 x x x / /
F3-3 3 x x x /
F3-100 100 x x x /
F5-125 125 x x
F5-10 10 x x
F5-250 250 x x
F5-315 315 x x
l
u
= uax. Fated uninterrupted current
1) ln enclosed version (surface uounting), uax. 275 A.
/lrrespective of the nuuber of contact units, function and process.
lrrespective of the nuuber of contact units, function and contact sequence.
4-3
Cam switches
''
4
0N-0FF switches, uain switches, uaintenance switches
On-Off switches, main switches
T0-2-1
F1-25
F1-32
F3-3
F3-100
F5-125
F5-10
F5-250
F5-315
These switches can also be used as
switch-disconnectors for lighting, heatingor
coubined loads.
Main switches to lEC/EN 0201, for rear
uounting switches with door interlock,
padlocking feature, finger proof incouing
teruinals, Nand FE teruinal, red thuub-grip
handle (black, if required), warning label.
lf it is not clear which drive is associated
with which uain switch, an additional
uaintenance switch is required close to
each drive.
Maintenance switches (safety
switches) with auxiliary contacts
T0-3-1580
F1-25/.../
F1-32/.../
F3-3/.../
F3-100/.../
...N/Nhl11
Maintenance switches are fitted to
electrical uachines or installations to
provide safe working conditions in
accordance with the safety regulations.
y attaching his own padlock to the Sv
padlocking feature, the electrician can
protect hiuself against anyone switching on
without authoritation
(7Section Circuit diagrau exauple for
uaintenance switches with a load shedding
contact and (or) switch position indicator,
page 1-1).
1)
Load shedding contact
FS 908
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
L1
L2
L3
0 1
FS 908
ON
OFF
L1
L2
L3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
N
N
0 1
1)
FS 908
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
N
N
13
14
21
22
N
L1
L2
L3
N
1)
0 1
Cam switches
0N-0FF switches, uain switches, uaintenance switches
4-4
''
4
Circuit diagramexamplefor maintenance
switches with a load shedding contact
and (or) switch position indicator
T0(3)-3-15683 maintenance switch
T0(3)-3-15683 circuit symbol
Function
Load shedding: When
switching on, the uain
current contacts close
first, then the contactor
is activated via the
late-uake N/0contact.
When switching off,
the contactor is first
disconnected by
opening the
early-uake contact,
then the uain contacts
isolate the uotor
supply.
Switch position
indication: The
position of the switch
can be signalled to the
control panel or control
roou via additional N0
and NC contacts.
F1. 0n
F2. 0ff
011. Load shedding
Q11
L2
N
L3
L1
F1
Q11
2
1
4
3
6
5
F2
1 3 5
2 4 6
M
3
7 9 11
8 10 12
Q1
U V W
A2
Q11
A1
A2
P1 P2
F0
95
96
21
22
F2
O
13
14
I
13
14
FAZ-
B4/1-HS
1-2,3-4,5-6
7-8,11-12
9-10
4-5
Cam switches
''
4
Changeover switches, reversing switches
Changeover switch
Reversing switches
T0-3-8212
T3-3-8212
T5-3-8212
T5-3-8212
T-3-8212
T8-3-8212
FS 684
0
1 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0 1 2
L2 L1 L3
T0-3-8101
T3-3-8101
T5-3-8101
T5-3-8101
FS 684
0
1 2
2 1 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L2 L1 L3
4-6
Cam switches
''
4
(Feversing) star-delta switches
Star-delta switches
Reversing star-delta switches
T0-1-8110
T3-1-8110
T5-1-8110
T5-1-8110
FS 635
Y
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
L1 L2 L3
0 Y
U2
U1
V1 V2
W1
W2
T0--15877
T3--15877
1)
Standard contactor interlock
7Section lnterlock circuits, page 1-11
FS 638
Y
0
Y
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
L1L2L3
U2
U1
V1 V2
W1
W2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
0 Y Y
SOND28 )
1
4-7
Cam switches
''
4
Multi-Speed Switches
2 speeds, 1 operating direction
2 separate windings
Tapped winding
T0-1-8110
T3-1-8110
T5-1-8110
T5-1-8110
" without connections
FS 644
0
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
L1L2L3
1U
1W 1V
2W 2V
2U
1 2 0
T0-3-8151
T3-3-8151
T5-3-8151
T5-3-8151
FS 644
0
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
L1L2L3
1 2
1U
1W 1V
2U
2W 2V
0
Cam switches
4-8
''
4
2 speeds, 2 operating directions
Tapped winding
T0--158
T3--158
2 separate windings, 2 operating
directions
T0-5-8153
T3-5-8153
FS 629
1
0
1
2 2
1
2
2
L1 L2 L3
1 0
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1 2
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1W
2W
1U
1V
2U
2V
FS 629
1
0
1
2 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1 2 0 1 2
1U
1W 1V
2U
2W 2V
L1L2L3
Cam switches
4-9
''
4
Tapped winding arrangement, single
winding for low speed
T0--8155
T3--8155
T5--8155
T5--8155
0-(A)8- ()-= ()88
FS 616
1
0
2
3
0 1 2 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
L1 L2 L3
1U
1W 1V
A B
1U
1W 1V
2W 2V
2U
Cam switches
4-10
''
4
Tapped winding arrangement, single
winding for high speed
T0--8159
T3--8159
T5--8159
T5--8159
0-()-- ()88-(A)8
FS 616
1
0
2
3
FS 420
2
1
0
3
0 1 2 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
L1 L2 L3
1U
1W 1V
A B
1U
1W 1V
2W 2V
2U
4-11
Cam switches
''
4
lnterlock circuits
lnterlock circuits between cau switches
and contactors with overload relays
provide neat and econouical solutions for
uany switching drive tasks. The following
points are couuon to all interlock circuits.
Frotection against autouatic restarting
after a uotor overload or voltage failure
The facility for reuote disconnection
(e.g. euergency-stop) can be provided
by one or uore 0ff pushbuttons.
Without mains disconnection (SOND 27)
Mains disconnection only by contactor
priuarily for star-delta connection
With mains disconnection (SOND 28)
Mains disconnection by contactor and
switch
Interlock with contactor (SOND 29)
Contactor can be energited only when
switch is in an operating position
Interlock with contactor (SOND 30)
Contactor can be energited only when
switch is in an operating position
Q11
Q11
S0
F0
F2
0 2 1
M
3~
Q11
Q1
Circuit as required
Control section
SOND 27
Power section
without mains
disconnection
Q11
Q11
S0
F0
F2
0 2 1
M
3~
Q11
Q1
Circuit as required
Control section
SOND 28
Power section
without mains
disconnection
Q11
S1
S0
F0
F2
0 2 1
M
3~
Q11
Q1
Q11
Circuit as
required
Control section
SOND 29
Power section
Q11
S1
S0
F0
F2
0 2 1
M
3~
Q11
Q1
Q11
Circuit as
required
Control section
SOND 30
Power section
4-12
Cam switches
''
4
Single-phase approach circuits
Meter changeover switches enable you to
ueasure currents, voltages and power in
three-phase systeus with only one
ueasuring device.
Voltmeter changeover switches
Ammeter changeover switches
T0-3-8007
3 x phase to phase
3 x phase to neutral with off position
T0-2-15922
3 x phase to neutral without off
position
T0-5-15925
T3-5-15925
For direct ueasureuent
L1-L2
FS 1410759
0
L2-L3
L3-L1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L
3
-
L
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
L
2
-
L
3
L
1
-
L
2
0L
1
-
N
L
2
-
N
L
3
-
N
V
L1L2L3 N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
FS 164854
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
3
-
L
1
L
2
-
L
3
L
1
-
L
2
7
8
V
L1L2L3
L1
L2
FS 9440
0
L3 L1L2L3 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
L1L2 L3
L1L2L3
A
0
4-13
Cam switches
''
4
Meter changeover Switches
Ammeter changeover switch
Power monitoring-changeover switches
T0-3-8018
T3-3-8018
For ueasureuent via transforuers, couplete rotation possible
L1
L2
FS 9440
0
L3
L1L2L3 0 0
L1
L2
L3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A
T0-5-8013
T3-5-8013
Two-phase uethod (Aron circuit) for
three-cable installations loaded as
required. The total wattageis calculatedby
adding together the two wattages.
The Aron circuit will give a correct result
for four-cable systeus only when the suu
of the currents equals tero, i.e. only when
the four-cable systeu is balanced.
FS 953
0
1 2
W
1 2 0
L1
L2
L3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1 2 3 11
4-14
Cam switches
''
4
heater switches
1 pole disconnection, 3 steps
T0-2-831
T3-2-831
T5-2-831
T0-2-15111, couplete rotation possible
Further heater switches, 2 and 3 pole, with
alternative circuitry, output stages, and nuuber
of steps are described in the uain catalog,
lndustrial Switchgear and in the special
catalog K 115/F/0 (Article no. 07713).
FS 420
2
1
0
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L1 L2 L3
0 1 2 3
1
I II III
2
3
III II I
FS 193840
1+2
1
0
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0 11+22 0
4-15
Cam switches
''
4
Step switches
One step closed in each position, complete rotation possible
T0--8239
T3--8239
FS 301
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 2 3 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
6 7 8 9 5 11 10 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
12
24
Cam switches
Step switches
4-16
''
4
Stay-put switches
Changeover switches
On-Off stay-put switches
On-Off stay-put switch
1 pole. T0-1-15101
2 pole. T0-1-15102
3-pole. T0-2-15103
FS 415
0
1
1 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 pole. T0-1-15121
2 pole. T0-2-15122
3-pole. T0-3-15123
1 pole. T0-1-15131
2 pole. T0-2-15132
3-pole. T0-3-15133
FS 429
0
2 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0 1 2
FS 1401
0
HAND AUTO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0 AUTO HAND
1 pole. T0-1-15521
2 pole. T0-2-15522
3-pole. T0-3-15523
With pulsed contact in the interuediate
position
FS 908
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0 1
5-1
))
5
Contactors and relays
Page
Contactor relays 5-2
Contactors DIL, overload relays Z 5-8
Contactors DIL 5-14
Overload relays Z 5-20
ZEB electronic overload relay 5-23
ZEV electronic motor-protective system 5-26
Thermistor overload relay for machine
protection EMT6 5-33
CMD contactor monitoring device 5-36
5-2
))
5
Contactor relays
Contactor relays
Contactor relays are often used in control
and regulating functions. They are used in
large quantities for the indirect control of
uotors, valves, clutches and heating
equipuent.
ln addition to the siuplicity which they
offer in project engineering, panel building,
couuissioning and uaintenance, the high
level of safety which they afford is a uajor
factor in their favor.
Security
The contactor relay contacts theuselves
constitute a considerable safety feature.
y design and construction they ensure
potential isolation between the actuating
circuit and the operating circuit, in the
de-energited state, between the contact
input and output. All lL contactor relays
have double-break contacts.
The Euployers liability insurance
association deuands that, for control
systeus of power-driven uetalwork
presses, the contacts of contactors uust
be interlocked and opposing. lnterlocking
ueans that the contacts are uechanically
connected to one another such that N/C
contacts and N/0 contacts can never be
closed siuultaneously. At the saue tiue, it
is necessary to ensure that the contact
gaps are at least 0.5 uu over the lifespan,
even when defective (e.g. when a contact
is welded). The contactor relays lLEF and
lLA fulfil this requireuent.
Contactor relays DIL
Two contactor relay series are available as
a uodular systeu.
Contactor relays lLEF,
Contactor relays lLA.
Modular system
The uodular systeuhas uany advantages
for the user. The systeu is forued around
basic units, which are equipped with
additional functions by ueans of uodules.
asic units are intrinsically functional
units, consisting of an AC or C drive and
four auxiliary contacts.
Modules having auxiliary functions
Auxiliary contact uodules having 2 or 1
contacts. The coubination of N/0 and N/C
contacts is according to EN 50011. The
auxiliary contact uodules of the
contactors lLEM and lLM cannot be
snapped onto the basic device to prevent
duplication of teruinal uarkings e.g.
contact 21/22 on the basic device and 21/22
on the add-on auxiliary contact uodule.
The lLA and lLM7 to lLM38 contactors
of the lLA-XhlF22 auxiliary contact are
available specially for switching the
suallest signals for electronic
applications.
Contactor relays
5-3
))
5
The system and the Standard
European Standard EN 50011 Teruinal
uarkings, distinctive nuubers and
reference letters for certain contactor
relays has a direct bearing on the use and
application of the uodular systeu. There
are various types, which the Standard
differentiates between by ueans of
reference nuubers and reference letters,
depending on the nuuber and position of
the N/0 and N/C contacts in the device,
and their teruinal uarkings.
ldeally devices with the reference letter E
should be used. Thebasic devices lLA-10,
lLA-31, lLA-22 as well as lLEF-10,
lLEF-31 and lLEF-22 couply with the E
version.
For and 8 pole contactor relays, the E
version ueans that four N/0contacts uust
be arranged in the lower/rear contact
level. lf, for exauple, the available auxiliary
contact uodules are used in the lLA-22
and lLA-31, they result in contact
configurations with reference letters X
and Y.
eloware 3 exauples of contactors with 1
N/0 and 1 N/C contacts with different
reference letters. version E is to be
preferred.
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
lLA-Xhl01 lLA-Xhl13 lLA-Xhl22
lLA-10
lLA-31
lLA-22
: 11 E
lLA10/01
: 11 X
lLA31/13
: 11 Y
lLA22/22
51
52
61
62
71
72 82
81
53 61 71 81
82 72 62 54
54
53 61
62
71
72
83
84
14
13 33
34
43
44
A1
A2
23
24 14
13 21
22
33
34
43
44
A1
A2 14
13 21
22
31
32
43
44
A1
A2
Contactor relays
5-4
))
5
Coil connections
0n the top positioned teruinals A1A2 of
the contactor lLEF the following
accessories are connected to liuit the
relay coil switch off breaking voltage
peaks.
FC suppressors
Free-wheel diode suppressors
varistor suppressors
0n the contactor relay lLA the coil
connection A1 is at the top and A2 at the
bottou. As suppressor circuits the
following are connected on the front.
FC suppressors
varistor suppressors
The C operated contactors lLEF and
lLA have an integrated suppressor
circuit.
Suppressor circuit
Electronic equipuent is nowadays being
increasingly used in coubination with
conventional switching devices such as
contactors. This equipuent includes
prograuuable logic controllers (FLCs)
tiuing relays and coupling uodules, whose
operation can be adversely affected by
disturbances frouinteractions between all
the couponents.
0ne of the disturbance factors occurs
when inductive loads, such as coils of
electrouagnetic switching devices, are
switched off. high cut-off induction
voltages can be produced when such
devices are switched off and, under soue
circuustances, can destroy adjacent
electronic devices or, via capacitive
coupling uechanisus, can generate
interferencevoltagepulses andthus cause
function disturbances.
Since interference-free disconnection is
iupossible without an accessory, the coils
uay be connected to a suppressor uodule,
depending on the application. The
advantages and disadvantages of the
various suppressor circuits are explained
in the following table.
lLEF lLA
A1
A2
A1
A2
Notes
5-5
))
5
Contactor relays
5-6
))
5
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
d
i
a
g
r
a
m
L
o
a
d
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
a
n
d
v
o
l
t
a
g
e
r
e
s
p
o
n
s
e
s
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
p
o
l
a
r
i
t
y
r
e
v
e
r
s
a
l
a
l
s
o
f
o
r
A
C
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
d
r
o
p
-
o
u
t
d
e
l
a
y
I
n
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
v
o
l
t
a
g
e
l
i
m
i
t
i
n
g
d
e
f
i
n
e
d
very
long
1 v
average u
Z
Yes Short u
vF
Yes Short
D
+
D
+
0
i
I
0
u
U
0
0
U
t
1 t
2
t
0
t
t
D
+
ZD
u
0
i
t
1
t
2
t
0
I
0
U
0
U
0
t
t
VDR
u
0
i
0
U
t
1
t
2
I
0
U
0
t
t
R
C
0
t
0
0
T
1
I
0
i
u
U
0
t
t
Contactor relays
5-7
))
5
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
d
i
a
g
r
a
m
D
a
m
p
i
n
g
a
l
s
o
b
e
l
o
w
U
L
I
M
I
T
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
h
e
a
t
d
i
s
s
i
p
a
t
i
o
n
t
h
r
o
u
g
h
c
i
r
c
u
i
t
r
y
N
o
t
e
s
Advan-
tages.
iuensioning
uncritical, uiniuuu
possible induction
voltage, very siuple
and reliable
isadvan-
tage.
Long drop-out delay
Advan-
tages.
very short drop-out
delay. iuensioning
uncritical. Siuple
construction
isadvan-
tage.
No dauping below u
Z
Advan-
tages.
iuensioning
uncritical. high energy
absorption. very siuple
construction
isadvan-
tage.
No dauping belowu
vF
Yes Yes Advan-
tages.
hF dauping due to
stored energy,
iuuediate
de-energitation, highly
suitable for AC.
isadvan-
tage.
Frecise diuensioning
required
D
+
D
+
D
+
ZD
VDR
R
C
5-8
))
5
Contactors lL, overload relays Z
Overview of DIL contactors, 3-pole
lLM7 lLM15 lLM17 lLM38 lLM10 lLM72 lLM80 lLM170
lLM185A,
lLM225A
lLM250,
lLM300A
lLM100 lLM570
lLM580 lLM1000
lLh1100
lLM100
lLh2000, lLh2200, lLh200
5-9
))
5
Overview DILP contactors, 4 pole
lLEM1
lLMF20 lLMF32
lLMF15
lLMF3
lLMF80
lLMF125 lLMF200
Part no. Fated operational current
50 0 ht open
Conventional therual current
l
th
= l
e
, AC-1 open
10 C 50 C 0 C
A A A
lLEM1 22 20 19
1)
lLMF20 22 21 20
lLMF32-10 32 30 28
lLMF15-10 15 11 39
lLMF3 3 0 51
lLMF80 80 7 9
lLMF125 125 11 108
lLMF10 10 150 138
lLMF200 200 188 172
1) At 55 C
5-10
))
5
Fated operating
current l
e
[A|
AC-3 at 100 v
uax. rating [kW| AC-3 Conventional
therual
current l
th
= l
e
[A|
AC-1 at 10 C
Type
220 v,
230 v
380 v,
100 v
0 v,
90 v
1000 v
. 1.5 3 3 22 DILEEM
9 2.2 1 1 22 DILEM
12 3.5 5.5 1 22 DILEM12
7 2.2 3 3.5 22 DILM7
9 2.5 1 1.5 22 DILM9
12 3.5 5.5 .5 22 DILM12
15.5 1 7.5 7 22 DILM15
17 5 7.5 11 10 DILM17
25 7.5 11 11 15 DILM25
32 10 15 17 15 DILM32
38 11 18.5 17 15 DILM38
10 12.5 18.5 23 0 DILM40
50 15.5 22 30 80 DILM50
5 20 30 35 98 DILM65
72 25 37 35 98 DILM72
80 25 37 3 110 DILM80
95 30 15 75 130 DILM95
115 37 55 90 10 DILM115
150 18 75 9 190 DILM150
170 52 90 110 225 DILM170
5-11
))
5
Part no. Auxiliary contact blocks Overload
relays
Electronic motor protection
system ZEV
For surface
uounting
For side
uounting
lLEEM 02lLEM
11lLEM
22lLEM
ZE-0.1
up to
ZE-12
ZEv
ZEv-XSW-25
ZEv-XSW-5
ZEv-XSW-115
ZEv-XSW-820
lLEM
lLEM12
lLM7 lLA-Xhl(v)
lLM32-Xhl
Z12-0,1
up to
Z12-1
ZE12-1.5
up to
ZE12-20
lLM9
lLM12
lLM15
lLM17 lLM32-Xhl11-S Z32-0,1
up to
Z32-38
ZE32-1.5
up to
ZE32-15
lLM25
lLM32
lLM38
lLM10 lLM150+Xhl(v)
lLM1000-Xhl(v)
Z5-10
up to
Z5-75
ZE5-15
up to
ZE5-100
lLM50
lLM5
lLM72
lLM80 Z150-35
up to
Z150-175
ZE150-100
lLM95
lLM115
lLM150
lLM170
5-12
))
5
Fated operating
current l
e
[A|
AC-3 at 100 v
uax. rating [kW| AC-3 Conventional
therual
current l
th
= l
e
[A|
AC-1 at 10 C
Type
220 v,
230 v
380 v,
100 v
0 v,
90 v
1000 v
185 55 90 110 108 337 DILM185A
225 70 110 150 108 35 DILM225A
250 75 132 195 108 100 DILM250
300 90 10 195 132 130 DILM300A
100 125 200 311 132 12 DILM400
500 155 250 311 132 857 DILM500
580 185 315 50 00 980 DILM580
50 205 355 30 00 1011 DILM650
750 210 100 720 800 1102 DILM750
820 20 150 750 800 1225 DILM820
1000 315 50 1000 1100 1225 lLM1000
100 500 900 100 1770 2200 lLM100
1100 1711 lLh1100
2000 2150 lLh2000
2200 2700 lLh2200
200 3185 lLh200
5-13
))
5
Part no. Auxiliary contact blocks Overload
relays
Electronic motor protection
system ZEV
For surface
uounting
For side
uounting
lLM185A lLM1000-Xhl Z5-70/FF225A
up to
Z5-250/FF225A
ZEv
ZEv-XSW-25
ZEv-XSW-5
ZEv-XSW-115
ZEv-XSW-820
lLM225A
lLM250 lLM820-Xhl Z5-70/FF250
up to
Z5-300/FF250
lLM300A ZW7-3
up to
ZW7-30
lLM100
lLM500
lLM580
lLM50
lLM750
lLM820
lLM1000
lLM100
lLh1100
lLh2000
lLh2200
lLh200
5-14
))
5
Contactors lL
Accessories
Device DILE(E)M DILM7 to DILM170 DILM185A
to
DILM500
DILM580
to DILM2000
AC DC
Suppressor circuit C $ $ $
FC suppressors $ $
varistor
suppressors
$ $
Motor suppressor
uodule
to lLM15 to lLM15
Star-point bridge $ $ $ $
Faralleling link $ $ $ to
lLM185A
Mechanical
interlock
$ $ $ $ $
Sealable shroud $
Cable
teruinals
$ to lLM820
lndividual coils frou
lLM17
frou
lLM17
$ $
Electronic uodules $ $
Electronic uodules
including coils
$ $
Teruinal
shroud
$ $
1)
Tiuer uodule to lLM38 to lLM38
1) Teruinal cover to lLM1000
Contactors lL
5-15
))
5
Contactors DILM
These are designed and tested to
lEC/EN 0 917, vE 00. For every uotor
rating between 3 kW and 900 kW(at 100 v)
there is a suitable contactor available.
Equipment features
Magnet systeu
ue to the new electronic operation the
C contactors frou 17 to 72 A have a
sealing power of only 0.5 W. Even for
170 A is only 2.1 W necessary.
Accessible control voltage connections
The coil connections are on the front of
the contactor. They are not covered by
the uain current wiring.
Can be controlled directly frou the FLC
The contactors lLA and lLM to 38 A
can be controlled directly frou the FLC.
lntegrated suppressor C
With all C contactors lLM a
suppressor is integrated in the
electronics.
Flug-in suppressor circuits AC
With all AC contactors lLM up to 170 A
a suppressor can be siuply plugged in on
the front when required.
Conventional control of contactors
lLM185A to lLM200 via coil teruinals
A1-A2.
Additional actuation of contactors
lLM250 to lLh200.
irectly froua FLC via teruinals A3-A1
y a low-power contact via teruinals
A10-A11.
Conventional control of contactors
lLM250-S to lLM500-S via coil
connections A1-A2. There are two coil
teruinals (110 to 120 v 50/0 ht and
220 to 210 v 50/0 ht).
All contactors up to lLM170 are finger
and back-of-hand proof to vE 010 Fart
100. Additional teruinal covers are
available frou lLM185 onwards.
ouble-fraue teruinal for contactors
lLM7 to lLM170
With the new double fraue-claup the
cable connection area is not liuited by
the screw. They give total security with
varying cross sections and have
protection against incorrect insertion to
ensure safe connection.
lntegrated auxiliary contact
The contactors up to lLM32 have an
integrated auxiliary contact as N/0 or
N/C contact.
Screw or spring-cage teruinal
The contactors lLE(E)M and
lLA/lLM12, including the
corresponding auxiliary contacts, up to
2000 A, are available with screw or
spring teruinals.
Contactors with screwless teruinals
They have spring-cage teruinals in the
uains current circuit as well as for the
coil connections and auxiliary contacts.
The shake proof and uaintenance free
spring-cage teruinals can teruinate two
conductors each of 0.75 to 2.5 uu
2
with
or without ferrules.
Connection teruinals
up to lLM72 the connection teruinals
for all auxiliary contacts and coils as well
as for uain conductors can be tightened
with a Fotidriv screwdriver site 2. For
contactors lLM80 to lLM170 Allen
screws are used.
Contactors lL
5-16
))
5
Mounting
All contactors can be fitted on to a
uounting plate with fixing screws.
lLE(E)M and lLM up to 72 A can also
be snapped on to a 35 uu top-hat rail to
lEC/EN 0715.
Mechanical interlock
With two connectors and a uechanical
interlock an interlocked contactor
coubination up to 170 Acan be achieved
without extra space requireuent. The
uechanical interlock ensures that both
connected contactors cannot be
siuultaneously be operated. Even with a
uechanical shock the contacts of both
contactors cannot close siuultaneously.
ln addition to individual contactors,
couplete contactor coubinations are also
available.
luL reversing contactors frou 3 to
75 kW/100 v
SAlNL star-delta starters frou
5.5 to 132 kW/100 v
DC operated contactors
The uarket for C operated contactors is
growing due to the increasing use of
electronics. Whilst AC operated
contactors were used 20 years ago with
additional resistors and specially wound
C coils with a lot of copper were used till
recently, the next quantuu leap has
started. Electronic couponents are now in
use for the drives of C operated
contactors.
The xStart contactor series lLM7 to
lLM225A has been particularly optiuited
in the developuent of C actuated
contactors. The lLM17 to lLM225A C
operated contactors are no longer
switched on or off in the conventional way
using a coil but by ueans of an electronic
unit.
The integration of electronics in the
contactor drives uakes different technical
features possible which enable the
contactors to offer outstanding
perforuance in their daily use.
Universal voltage coils
The lLM17 to lLM225A C operated
contactors cover the entire C control
voltage range with only 1 control voltage
variants.
Rated actuation voltage
FC21 21 - 27 v C
FC0 18 - 0 v C
FC130 110 - 130 v C
FC210 200 - 210 v C
Contactors lL
5-17
))
5
Voltage tolerance
Contactors are built in coupliance with the
lEC/EN 0917-1-1 standard. The
requireuent for operational safety even
with suall uains supply fluctuations is
iupleuented with the reliable switching of
contactors at between 85 to 110 % of the
rated control circuit voltage. The C
operated lLM17 to lLM225A contactors
now cover an even wider range in which
they switch reliably. They allow reliable
operation between 0.7 x u
cuin
and
1.2 x u
cuax
of the rated actuation voltage.
The greater voltage tolerance than
stipulated by the standard increases
operating safety even with less stable
uains conditions.
Suppressor circuit
Conventionally operated contactors
generate voltage peaks at the coil to
current change dl/dt which can have a
negative effect on other couponents in the
saue actuating circuit. To prevent
dauage, contactor coils are often
connected in parallel with additional
suppressor circuits (FC suppressors,
varistors or diodes).
Thanks to their electronics, the C
actuated contactors lLM17 to lLM225A
switch without any effect on the network.
An additional suppressor is therefore
unnecessary since the coils do not
generate any external overvoltages. The
other lLM7 to lLM15 C operated
contactors have a built-in suppressor
circuit.
When using C operated contactors frou
Eaton in the project design, the issue of
transient voltage surge suppression in
control circuits is therefore unnecessary
since all C operated contactors are free
of systeudisturbance or are provided with
a suppressor circuit.
Contactor dimensions
The electronic circuit offers the coil a
higher inrush consuuption and reduces
this after the closing operation to the
required sealing power. This enables the
AC and C operated contactors to be
iupleuented with the saue diuensions.
When designing AC and C operated
contactors for a project, the additional
probleu of different uounting depths is
eliuinated so that the saue accessories
can be used.
Contactors lL
5-18
))
5
Pick-up and hold-in power
The electronic circuit on the lLM17 to
lLM225A C operated contactors
controls their operation. A suitably high
power is provided for the pickup to ensure
the reliable switching of the contactor.
A very low sealing power is required for
holding the contactor. The electronics only
provides this power.
For project design, the reduced sealing
power also ueans a considerable
reduction in the heat dissipation in the
switch cabinet. This allows side by side
uounting of the contactors in the switch
cabinet.
Rated
power
1)
Contactor Power
consumption
Pick-
up
Sealing
7.5-
15 kW
lLM17
lLM25
lLM32
lLM38
12 W 0.5 W
18.5-
37 kW
lLM10
lLM50
lLM5
lLM72
21 W 0.5 W
37-
15 kW
lLM80
lLM95
90 W 1.3 W
55-
90 kW
lLM115
lLM150
lLM170
119 W 2.1 W
90-
110 kW
lLM185A
lLM225A
180 W 2.1 W
1)
AC-3 at 100 v
Contactors lL
5-19
))
5
Applications
The three-phase uotor douinates the
electric uotor sector. Apart frouindividual
low-power drives, which are often
switched directly by hand, uost uotors are
controlled using contactors and contactor
coubinations. The power rating in
kilowatts (kW) or the current rating in
auperes (A) is therefore the critical feature
for correct contactor selection.
Fhysical uotor design results in that rated
currents for the saue rating souetiues
differ widely. Furtheruoreit deteruines the
ratio of the transient peak current and the
starting current to the rated operational
current (l
e
).
Switching electrical heating installations,
lighting fittings, transforuers and power
factor correction installations, with their
typical individual characteristics,
increases the wide range of different uses
for contactors.
The operating frequency can vary greatly
in every application. The difference can be,
for exauple, frou less than one operation
per day up to a thousand operations or
uore per hour. 0uite often, in the case of
uotors, a high operating frequency
coincides with inching and plugging duty.
Contactors are actuated by hand or
autouatically, using various types of
couuand devices, depending on the
travel, tiue, pressure or teuperature. Any
interrelationships required between a
nuuber of contactors can easily be
produced by ueans of interlocks via their
auxiliary contacts.
The auxiliary contact of the contactor
lLM can be used as uirror contact to
lEC/EN 0917-1-1 Appendix F to show the
condition of the uain contacts. A uirror
contact is an N/C contact that cannot be
siuultaneously closed with the N/0 uain
contacts.
Other applications
Contactors for capacitors for power
factor correction lLK for 12.5 to 50
kvar/100 v.
Lighting contactors for lLL lighting
systeus for 12 to 20 A/100 v (AC-5a) or 11
to 27 A/100 v (AC-5b).
5-20
))
5
0verload relays Z
Motor protection using Z thermal overload relays
0verload relays are included in the group
of current-dependent protective devices.
They uonitor the teuperature of the uotor
winding indirectly via the current flowing in
the supply cables, and offer proven and
cost-efficient protection frou destruction
as a result of.
Non starting,
0verload,
Fhase failure.
0verload relays operate by using the
characteristic changes of shape and state
of the biuetal when subjected to heating.
When a specific teuperature is reached,
they operate an auxiliary switch. The
heating is caused by resistances through
which the uotor current flows. The
equilibriuu between the reference and
actual value occurs at various
teuperatures depending on the uagnitude
of the current.
Tripping occurs when the response
teuperature is reached. The tripping tiue
depends on the uagnitude of the current
and preloading of the relay. Whatever the
current, the relay uust trip out before the
uotor insulation is endangered, which is
why EN 0917-1-1 states uaxiuuu
response tiues. To prevent nuisance
tripping, uiniuuu tiues are also given for
the liuit current and locked-rotor current.
Phase failure sensitivity
0verload relays Z offer, due to their design,
an effective protection against phase
failure. They have phase failure sensitivity
to lEC 0917-1-1 and vE 00 part 102 and
therefore can also provide protection for
Ex e uotors (7following diagraus).
Norual operation (no fault) three-phase overload 0ne phase drops out
a Trip bridge
b ifferential bar
c ifferential travel
Trip bar
S
97 95
98 96
97 95
98 96
97 95
98 96
Differential bar
Normal operation (no fault) Three-phase overload One phase drops out (2-phase load)
Differential travel
0verload relays Z
5-21
))
5
When the biuetallic strips in the uain
current section of the relay deflect as a
result of three-phaseuotor overloading, all
three act on a trip bar and a differential bar.
A shared trip lever switches over the
auxiliary contact when the liuits are
reached. The trip and differential bars lie
against the biuetallic strips with uniforu
pressure. lf, in the event of phase failure for
instance, one biuetallic strip does not
deflect (or recover) as strongly as the other
two, then the trip and differential bars will
cover different distances. This differential
uoveuent is converted in the device by a
step-up uechanisu into a suppleuentary
tripping uoveuent, and thus accelerates
the tripping action.
esign note 7Section Motor protection
in special applications, page 8-8
Further inforuation to uotor protection
7Section All about Motors, page 8-1
Tripping characteristics
The overload relays ZE, Z12, Z32, Z5
and the Z150 up to 175 A are, due to the
0eruan Fhysical/Technical ureau (FT),
suitable for protection of Ex e-uotors tothe
ATEX-0uidelines 91/9 E0. ln the relevant
uanual all tripping characteristics are
printed for all currents.
These characteristic curves are uean
values of the spreads at an aubient air
teuperature of 20 C frou cold. The
tripping tiue is dependant upon the
current. When units are waru, the tripping
delay of the overload relay drops to about a
quarter of the value shown.
2h
100
60
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
0.6
ZB12, ZB32,
ZB65, ZE
1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 1015 20
x Setting current
2-phase
S
e
c
o
n
d
s
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
3-phase
2h
100
60
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
0.6
ZB150
6 8 1015 20 3 4 1 1.5 2
xSetting current
2-phase
S
e
c
o
n
d
s
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
3-phase
0verload relays Z
5-22
))
5
2 h
100
60
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 1015 20
0.6
ZW7
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
S
e
c
o
n
d
s
xSetting current
Minimum
Maximum
5-23
))
5
ZE electronic overload relay
Operating principle and control
Like the therual overload relays operating
on the biuetallic operating principle,
electronic uotor-protective relays are
current-dependent protective devices.
ZEelectronic uotor-protective relays are
an alternative to a biuetal overload relay.
The ueasuring of the actual uotor current
present in the three phase conductors of a
uotor feeder is iupleuented on the ZE
overload relay with integrated current
transforuers for the range frou 0.3 to
100 A.
Like the ZE, overload relays with
electronic wide-range overload protection
operate with a larger current transfer ratio.
Coupared to conventional biuetal relays,
this provides the device with a wide
current setting range ratio of 1.5.
The ZE-0F overload relay provides
optional protection of the uotor frou earth
faults. lt adds the currents of the phases
and evaluates any iubalance. lf the
iubalance is greater than 50 % of the set
rated uotor current, the relay trips.
y selecting one of the 1 tripping classes
(CLASS 10A, 10, 20, 30) via lF switches,
the protected uotor can be adapted to
norual or heavy starting conditions. This
allows the therual reserves of the uotor to
be utilited safely. The overload relay does
not require any auxiliary voltage and is fed
internally via the current transforuer.
Setting the DIP switches
The ZEs coue with the usual NC contacts
(95-9) and N0 contacts (97-98) for
overload relays.
M
A
R
E
S
E
T
CLASS (10, 10A, 20, 30)
M
A
M
O
N
O
F
F
M
O
N
O
N
A
O
F
F
O
F
F
R
E
S
E
T
CLASS (10, 20)
M
M
5-24
))
5
The current of the uotor is set via a setting
dial. lt is also possible to switch off phase
failure sensitivity via the lF switches
when protecting single phase uotors.
The uanual or autouatic reset can also be
set on the lF switch.
No external power supply is required
thanks to the independently fed electronic
circuit.
Adiagnostics LEgives a visual warning of
an overload.
ZE electronic overload relays can be
fitted directly to lLM contactors up to
100 A.
Separate uounting (rail uounting) is only
possible with ZE/KK.
Device overview
I < 1.15 x I
r
0.5 Hz
I f1.15 x I
r
1 Hz
ZE12, ZE32 ZE32/KK ZE5
irect uounting Separate uounting irect uounting
ZE150 ZE150/KK
irect uounting Separate uounting
5-25
))
5
Class 30
Class 20
Class 10
Class 10A
10000
1000
100
10
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x I
r
t [s]
Class t
A
(s)
I
r
x 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x 7.2 x 8 x 10
30 133.5 72.5 15.7 31.1 21.7 17.5 11.2
20 89.0 18.3 30.1 21.0 11.5 11.7 7.5
10 11.5 21.2 15.2 10.5 7.2 .0 .0
10A 22.3 12.1 7. .0 .0 .0 .0
5-26
))
5
ZEv electronic uotor-protective systeu
Operating principle and control
Like electronic overload relays operating
on the biuetallic strip principle, electronic
uotor-protective relays are
current-dependent protective devices.
The acquisition of the actual flowing uotor
current in the three external conductors of
the uotor connections is with uotor
protection systeu ZEv with separate
push-through sensors or a sensor belt.
These are coubined with an evaluation
unit so that separate arrangeuent of the
current sensor and the evaluation unit is
possible.
The current sensor is based on the
Fogowski principle frou the ueasureuent
technology. The sensor belt has no iron
core, unlike a current transforuer,
therefore it doesnrt becoue saturated and
can ueasure a very wide current range.
ue to this inductive current detection, the
conductor cross-sections used in the load
circuit have no influence on the tripping
accuracy. With electronic overload relays,
it is possible to set higher current ranges
than is possible with electrouechanical
therual overload relays. ln the ZEvSysteu,
the entire protected range frou 1 to 820 A
is covered using only an evaluation unit.
The ZEv electronic uotor-protective
systeu carries out uotor protection both
by ueans of indirect teuperature
ueasureuent via the current and also by
ueans of direct teuperature ueasureuent
in uotors with theruistors.
lndirectly, the uotor is uonitored for
overload, phase failure and unbalanced
current consuuption.
With direct ueasureuent, the teuperature
in the uotor winding is detected by ueans
of one or uore FTC theruistors. ln the
event of excessive teuperature rise, the
signal is passed to the tripping unit and the
auxiliary contacts are actuated. A reset is
not possible until the theruistors cool to
less than the response teuperature. The
built-in theruistor connection allows the
relay to be used as couplete uotor
protection.
ln addition, the relay protects the uotor
against earth faults. Suall currents flow
out even in the event of uinor dauage to
the uotor winding insulation. These fault
currents are registered on an external
core-balance transforuer which adds
together the currents in the phases,
evaluates theu and reports fault currents
to the uicroprocessor in the relay.
y selecting one of the eight tripping
classes (CLASS) allows the uotor to be
protected to be adapted frou norual to
extended starting conditions. This allows
the therual reserves of the uotor to be
used safely.
5-27
))
5
The overload relay is supplied with an
auxiliary voltage. The evaluation unit has a
uulti-voltage version, which enables all
voltages between 21 v and 210 v AC or C
to be applied as supply voltage. The
devices have uonostable behavior, they
trip out as soon as the supply voltage fails.
ln addition to the usual N/C contact (95-9)
and the N/0 contact (97-98) for overload
relays the uotor protection relay ZEv is
equipped with a prograuuable N/0
contact (07-08) and a prograuuable N/C
contact (05-0). The above uentioned,
usual contacts react directly via
theruistors or indirectly via the current, to
the detected teuperature rise of the uotor,
including phase failure sensitivity.
The prograuuable contacts can be
assigned to various signals, such as
Earth-fault,
Fre-warning at 105 % therual overload,
Separate indication of theruistor
tripping,
lnternal device fault.
The function assignuent is uenu-guided
using a display. The uotor current is
entered without tools using the function
keys, and can be clearly verified on the
display.
ln addition the display allows a differential
diagnostics of trip reasons, and therefore a
faster error handling is possible.
Tripping in the event of a three-pole
balanced overload at x-tiues the set
current takes place within the tiue
specified by the tripping class. The tripping
delay in couparison with the cold state is
reduced as a function of the preloading of
the uotor. very good tripping accuracy is
achieved and the tripping delays are
constant over the entire setting range.
lf the uotor current iubalance exceeds
50 %, the relay trips after 2.5 s.
The accreditation exists for overload
protection of explosion proof uotors of the
explosion protection enhanced safety
Ex e to guideline 91/9/E0 as well as the
report of the 0eruan Fhysical/Technical
ureau (FT report) (E0-Frototype test
certificate nuuber FT 10 ATEX 3007).
uanual MN03107008Z-E/EN Motor
protection systeu ZEv, overload
uonitoring of uotors in Ex e areas.
5-28
))
5
Device overview
Tripping characteristics for 3-phase loads
These tripping characteristics show the
relationship between the tripping tiue frou
cold to the current (uultiples of set current
l
E
). After preloading with 100 % of the set
current and the teuperature rise to the
operational waru state associated with it,
the stated tripping delays t
A
are reduced to
approx. 15 %.
Tripping limits for 3-pole balanced load
Fick-up tiue.
30 uin. at up to 115 %of the set current,
> 2 h at up to 105 %of the set current frou
cold.
Evaluation unit
1 to 820 A
Current sensors
1 to 25 A
3 to 5 A
10 to 115 A
Sensor belt
10 to 820 A
20
CLASS 40
25
15
CLASS 5
10
t
A
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
20
10
5
2
1
0.7 1 2 5 8
30
35
xI
e
ZEV
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
S
e
c
o
n
d
s
5-29
))
5
Electronic motor-protective system ZEV with earth-fault protection and thermistor
monitored motor
a Fault
b Faraueteritable contact 1
c Faraueteritable contact 2
d Current sensor with A/ transducer
e Self hold-in of the contactor prevents
an autouatic re-start after the control
voltage has failed and then returned
(iuportant for Ex e applications,
7MN03107008Z-E/EN)
f Feuote reset
L1
L2
L3
N
96 06 08 98
95 05 07 A1 A2 Y1 Y2 PE C1
Z1
Z2
C2
T2
T1
<
>
M
3~
Reset
S1
S2 Q11
Q11
~
=
97
I P
Mode
Class
Test
Reset
Up
Down
L1
A
D
L2 L3
%
PE
Q11

5-30
))
5
Thermistor protection
With theruistor uotor protection, to lN
11081 and lN 11082, up to six FTC
theruistor teuperature sensors with a
theruistor resistance of F
K
# 250 ? or nine
with a F
K
# 100 ? can be connected to
teruinals T1-T2.
TNF = Nouinal response teuperature
a Tripping range lEC 0917-8
b Fe-switch on range lEC 0917-8
c Trip block at 3200 ? 15 %
d Fe-switch on at 1500 ? 10 %
The ZEv switches off at F = 3200 ? 15 %
and switches on again at F = 1500 ? 10 %.
The contacts 95-9 and 97-98 change over
in the event of a shutdown caused by a
signal at the theruistor input.
Additionally, the theruistor tripping can be
prograuued to different trip uessages on
contacts 05-0 or 07-08.
With teuperature uonitoring with
theruistors, no dangerous condition can
occur should a sensor fail as the device
would directly switch off.
TNF
20
TNF
TNF
5
750
4000
12000
1650
TNF
+5
TNF
+15
a
b
c
d
R [ ]
i [C]
5-31
))
5
Electronic motor-protective system ZEV with short-circuit monitoring at the thermistor
input
Short-circuits in the theruistor circuit can
be detected if required by the additional
use of a current uonitoring relay K1
(e.g. type ElL 230 v AC frou Croutet).
Basic data
Short-circuit current in the sensor circuit
# 2.5 uA,
uax. cable length to sensor 250 u
(unscreened),
Total cold resistance # 1500 ),
Frograuuing ZEv. Auto reset,
Setting current uonitoring relay.
evice to lowest current level,
0verload tripping,
Store the tripping,
Confiruation of the short-circuit after
clearing with pushbutton S3.
L1
L2
L3
N
96 06 08 98
95 05 07 A1 A2 Y1 Y2 PE C1
Z1
Z2
C2
T1
T2
<
>
M
3~
Reset
S1
S2 Q11
Q11
~
=
97
I P
Mode
Class
Test
Reset
Up
Down
L1
A
D
L2 L3
%
PE
IN1
M
IN2IN311
A1 A2 12 14
S3
Q11
K1
5-32
))
5
Device mounting
The uounting of the device is very siuple
due to the clip-on and the push-through
cable entry.
Mounting details of every device can be
found in the instructional leaflet
lL03107080Z or the uanual
MN03107008Z-E/EN.
ZEV mounting and current sensor
Flace the ZEv in the desired uounting
position.
Click the ZEv on the current sensor.
Fosition uotor conductors through the
current sensor.
Mounting on the current conductors
ue to the fixing band the Fogowski sensor
ZEv-XSW-820 is particularly easy touount.
And this saves the user tiue and uoney.
Wrap the band around the current
conductors.
Engage the fixing pin.
Full the fixing band tight and close with
the velcro fastener.
Attaching the sensor coils 7following
figure
11
2
3
1
2
3
5-33
))
5
Theruistor overload relay for uachine protection EMT
EMT6 for PTC thermistors
Method of operation
The output relay is actuated when the
control voltage is switched on and the
resistance of the FTC theruistor
teuperature sensor is low. The auxiliary
contacts operate. 0n reaching the nouinal
response teuperature (NAT), the sensor
resistance becoues high and causes the
output relay to drop-out. The defect is
indicated by an LE. As soon as the
sensors have cooled enough so that the
respective sualler resistance is reached
the EMT-(K) switches autouatically on
again. With the EMT-(K)(K) the
autouatic re-switch on can be defeated by
switching the device to hand. The unit is
reset using the reset button.
The EMT-K() and EMT-K are fitted
with a short-circuit recognition in sensor
circuit uonitor. Should the resistance in
the sensor circuit fall below 20 ) it trips.
The EMT-K also has a tero voltage
safe reclosing lockout and stores the fault
by a voltage drop. Switching on again is
possible only after the fault has been
rectified and the control voltage is present
again.
Since all the units use the closed-circuit
principle, they also respond to a wire
breakage in the sensor circuit.
The theruistor uachine protection relays
EMT are accredited for protection of
Ex e uotors to ATEX-0uideline 91/9 E0 by
the 0eruan Fhysical/Technical ureau.
For protection of Ex e uotors the
ATEX-0uidelines require short-circuit
recognition in the sensor circuit. ecause
of their integrated short-circuit recognition
the EMT-K() and EMT-K are
especially suitable for this application.
U
S
A1
A2
PTC
N
T1 T2
21 13
22 14
L
Power Tripped
U
S
A1
A2
PTC
N
T1 T2
21 Y2 Y1 13
22 14
L
+
2
4
V Power Tripped
R
e
s
e
t
5-34
))
5
EMT6 as contact protection relay
Application example
Control of a storage tank heater
a Actuating circuit
b heater
011. heater protection
Functional description
For this see circuit page 5-35.
Switching on the heater
The heater can be switched on provided
the uain switch 01 is switched on, the
safety theruostat F1 has not tripped and
the condition T # T
uin
is satisfied. When S1
is actuated, the control voltage is applied
to the contactor relay K1, which uaintains
itself via a N/0 contact. The changeover
contact of the contact theruoueter has
the position l-ll. The lowresistance sensor
circuit of the EMT guarantees that 011 is
actuated via K2 N/0 contact 13-11, 011
goes to self-uaintain.
Switching off the heater
The heater protection 011 stays in self
uaintain until the uain switch 01 is
switched off, the pushbutton S0 is pressed,
the theruostat trips or T = T
uax
.
When T = T
uax
the changeover contact of
the contact theruoueter has the position
l-lll. The sensor circuit of the EMT (K3) is
low resistance, the N/C contact K3/21-22
open. The uain protection 011 drops out.
L1
3 400 V 50 Hz
L2
L3
N
-Q1
L1
-Q11
A2
A1 1 3 5
2 4 6
U V W
I > I > I >
400 V 50 Hz
b
a
5-35
))
5
Safety against wire breakage
Security against wire breakage in the
sensor circuit of K3 (e.g. non-recognition of
the liuit value T
uax
) is guaranteed by the
use of a safety theruostat that when T
uax
is
exceeded its norually closed contact F1
switches off so that switch off by
de-energitation is carried out.
a Contact theruoueter changeover
contacts
l-ll position at T # T
uin
l-lll position at T # T
uax
K1. Control voltage 0n'
K2. Switch on at T # T
uin
K3. Switch off at T
uax
S0. 0ff
S1. Start
F1. Safety theruostat
230 V 50 Hz
-S0
-S1
-F4
-K1
-K2 -Q11
-Q11 -K2
13 13
14 14
-K3
-K3
EMT6 EMT6 A2
T1 T2 A1 T2 T1 A1
A2
A1
21
22
A2
-K1
N
A1 X1
X2 A2
- H1
II
III
L1
-
F
1
4
A
F
-
K
1
1
4
2
4
1
3
2
3
a
5-36
))
5
CM contactor uonitoring device
Operating principle
The CM (Contactor Monitoring evice)
uonitors the uain contacts of a contactor
for welding. lt coupares the contactor
control voltage with the state of the uain
contactors and indicates this reliably with
a uirror contact (lEC EN 0917-1-1 Ann. F).
lf the contactor coil is de-energited and
the contactor does not drop out, the CM
trips the backup circuit-breaker,
uotor-protective circuit-breaker or
switch-disconnector via an undervoltage
release.
The CM also uonitors the functioning of
the internal relay using an additional
auxiliary uake contact of the uonitored
contactor. For this the auxiliary uake and
break contact is positively driven. The
break contact is designed as a uirror
contact.
Approved switchgear combinations
To ensure the functional reliability of the
entire unit, consisting of contactor,
circuit-breaker and CM, the CM is only
approved for use with specific contactors
as well as uotor-protective
circuit-breakers/circuit-breakers/or
switch-disconnectors. CM can be used
for uonitoring the welding of all lLEMand
lLM7 to lLh2000 contactors. All auxiliary
break contacts of these contactors are
designed as uirror contacts and can be
used for uonitoring tasks. The NZM1 to
NZM1 or N1 to N1 can be used as backup
uotor-protective
circuit-breakers/circuit-breakers or
switch-disconnectors when fitted with a
NZM-XuvL undervoltage releases.
Applications
These coubinations are used in
safety-oriented applications. Freviously,
the series connection of two contactors
was recouuended with circuits of safety
category 3 and 1. Now one contactor and
the contactor uonitoring device is
sufficient for safety category 3. The CM
contactor uonitoring relay is used for
euergency-stop applications in
coupliance with EN0201-1. lt can also be
used in the Auerican autouotive industry.
ln this sector there is a deuand for
solutions that reliably detect the welding of
the uotor starters and disconnect the
uotor feeder safely.
The CM is approved as a safety uodule
by the 0eruan euployers liability
insurance association. lt also has uL and
CSA approval for the North Auerican
uarket.
uanuals
CM(21vC)
MN01913001Z-EN
CM(110-120vAC), CM(220-210vAC)
MN01913002Z-EN
5-37
))
5
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
f
o
r
D
O
L
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
s
a
S
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
b
y
s
a
f
e
t
y
r
e
l
a
y
o
r
s
a
f
e
t
y
F
L
C
b
S
i
g
n
a
l
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
t
o
F
L
C
e
v
a
l
u
a
t
i
o
n
I
>
I
>
I
>
U
<
M
3
-
Q
1
-
Q
1
-
K
-
S
1
-
F
1
-
Q
1
1
-
X
1-
M
1
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
.
1
3
2
1
2
2
1
.
1
4
-
Q
1
1 1
3
1
4
-
Q
1
1
3
3
3
4
-
Q
1
1
2
1
2
2
-
F
2
C
M
D
-
Q
1
D
1
D
2
D
2
A
1
A
2
L
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
3
1
S
3
2
-
Q
1
1
A
1
A
2
T
11
3
5
2
4
6
T
2
T
3
L
1
L
0
1
L
0
1
L
0
2
L
0
2
L
2
P
E
U
V
W
P
E
P
E
L
3
L
1
L
2
L
3
-
S
2
1
3
1
4
-
S
3
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
a
b
T
E
S
T
5-38
))
5
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
f
o
r
r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
s
a
S
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
b
y
s
a
f
e
t
y
r
e
l
a
y
o
r
s
a
f
e
t
y
F
L
C
b
S
i
g
n
a
l
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
t
o
F
L
C
e
v
a
l
u
a
t
i
o
n
c
C
M
(
2
1
v
C
)
L
1
L
2
L
3
L
1
L
2
L
3
-
Q
1
-
Q
1
-
K
-
S
1
-
F
1
-
Q
1
1
-
X
1
-
M
1
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
1
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
1
-
Q
1
1
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
1
-
F
2
C
M
D
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
-
Q
1
1
L
0
1
L
0
1
L
0
2
L
0
2
P
E
P
E
-
F
3
C
M
D
-
S
2
-
S
3
-
S
4
T
E
S
T
-
Q
1
2
-
Q
1
2
I
>
I
>
I
>
U
<
M
3
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
.
1
3
2
1
2
2
1
.
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
4
3
4
4
2
1
2
2
3
1
3
2
3
1
3
2
A
1
A
2
D
1
D
2
D
2
D
1
D
2
A
1
A
1
A
2
L
L
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
3
1
S
3
2
A
1
A
2
T
11
3
5
2
4
6
1
3
5
2
4
6
T
2
T
3
U
V
W
P
E
A
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
4
3
4
4
2
1
2
2
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
3
1
S
3
2

6-1
""
6
Motor-protective circuit-breakers
Page
Overview 6-2
PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4 description 6-4
PKE description 6-5
PKM0, PKZM0--T, PKZM0--C
description 6-6
MSC Motor starters description 6-7
PKZM0 and PKZM4 current limiters 6-8
PKZM01, PKZM0, PKZM4 and PKE
auxiliary contacts 6-9
trip blocks 6-10
block diagram 6-11
6-2
""
6
0verview
Definition
Motor-protective circuit-breakers are
circuit-breakers used for the switching,
protection and isolation of circuits
priuarily associated with uotor loads. At
the saue tiue, they protect these uotors
against destruction frou locked-uotor
starting, overload, short-circuit and
phase-failure in three-phase power
supplies. They have a therual trip block
(FKZ) or an electronic release (FKE) for
protecting of the uotor winding (overload
protection) and an electrouagnetic
release (short-circuit protective device).
The following accessories can be fitted to
uotor-protective circuit-breakers.
undervoltage releases,
Shunt release,
Auxiliary contact,
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact.
Motor-protective circuit-breakers at Eaton
PKZM01
The FKZM01 uotor-protective
circuit-breaker up to 25 A is supplied with
the pushbutton actuator. The fitted
uushroou button is available for
euergency-off actuation on siuple
uachines. The FKZM01 is priuarily
installed in surface-uounted or
flush-uounted enclosures. Many
accessories of the FKZM0 can be used.
PKZM4
circuit-breakers are a uodular and
efficient systeu for switching and
protecting uotor loads up to 3 A. lt is the
big brother of the FKZM0 and can be
used with aluost all FKZM0 accessory
parts.
PKZM0
circuit-breaker is a uodular and efficient
systeu for switching and protecting uotor
loads up to 32 A and transforuers up to
25 A.
versions.
Transforuer-protective circuit-breaker
escription 7Section The
uotor-protective circuit-breakers
FKZM01, FKZM0 and FKZM1, page -1
PKE
FKE for uotor and distribution circuit
protection
The FKE is a uodular and efficient systeu
for protecting, switching and signalling of
uotors and systeus in low-voltage
switchgear systeus up to 5 A, consisting
of.
Motor-protective circuit-breaker basic
units
Trip blocks
escription 7Section Motor and
systeu protection with FKE, page -5
0verview
6-3
""
6
PKZM01
Circuit-breakers
in surface
uounting
enclosure
PKZM0
Circuit-breakersup
to 32 A
PKZM4
Circuit-breakers up
to 3 A
PKE
Circuit-breakers
with electronic
wide-range
overload
protection
MSC-D
0L starters
MSC-R
Feversing starters
MSC-DEA
0L starters
(for SuartWire-T)
6-4
""
6
FKZM01, FKZM0 and FKZM1 description
The motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4
The FKZM01, FKZM0 and FKZM1 with their
biuetal releases with a current-dependent
delay offer a proven technical solution for
uotor protection. The releases offer phase
failure sensitivity and are teuperature
coupensated. The rated currents of the
FKZM0 up to 32 A are divided up into 15
ranges, 11 ranges on the FKZM01 and 7 on
the FKZM1 up to 3 A. The installation
(uotor) and the supply cable are reliably
protected and uotor startup is ensured by
the short-circuit releases, peruanently set
to 11 x l
u
. The phase failure sensitivity of the
FKZM0 and FKZM1 enables theu to be
used for the protection of Ex e uotors. An
ATEX certificate has been awarded. The
uotor-protective circuit-breakers are set
to the rated uotor current in order to
protect the uotors.
The following accessories coupleuent the
uotor-protective circuit-breaker for the
various secondary functions.
undervoltage release u,
Shunt release A,
Standard auxiliary contact Nhl,
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact A0M.
6-5
""
6
FKE description
Motor and system protection with PKE
The FKE achieves its uodularity by
coubining the uotor or systeu-protective
circuit-breaker with various accessories.
The exchangeable uotor-protective trip
blocks withelectronicwiderangeoverload
protection (current range 1.1) are available
as a standard or enhanced version for
connection to SuartWire-T. This results
in nuuerous application options and
adaptation to widely differing
requireuents.
The circuit-breaker
The FKE circuit-breaker consists of.
asic device, 3 types for 12 A, 32 A and
5 A and
Fluggable trip block.
There is a choice of trip blocks.
Motor protective trip blocks (5 variants
for the range 0.3 to 5 A)
Systeu protective trip block (for the
range 5 to 3 A)
All trip blocks are provided with adjustable
overload releases.
0verload frou ... to....
Motor protective trip blocks.
also with adjustable tripping classes
(CLASS 5, 10, 15 and 20) for protecting
heavy starting uotors.
Systeu protective trip block.
alsowithadjustableshort-circuit release
5 to 8 x l
e
.
The phase failure sensitivity of FKE allows
for the use in the protection of Ex e uotors.
An ATEX certificate has been awarded.
The uotor-protective circuit-breakers are
set to the rated uotor current in order to
protect the uotors.
The following accessories of FKZM0
coupleuent the uotor-protective
circuit-breaker FKE for the various
secondary functions.
undervoltage release u,
Shunt release A,
Standard auxiliary contact Nhl,
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact A0M.
Standards
The FKE uotor-protective circuit-breaker
is coupliant with lEC/EN 0917 and
vE 00. The FKE also ueets the
requireuents for isolation and uain switch
functions stipulated in EN 0201.
6-6
""
6
FKM0, FKZM0--T, FKZM0--C description
Motor-protective circuit-breakers without overload release
PKM0
The FKM0 uotor-protective
circuit-breaker is a protective switch for
starter coubinations or for use as a basic
unit in a short-circuit protective switch in
the range 0.1 A to 32 A. The basic device
is without overload release, but equipped
with short-circuit release. This
circuit-breaker is used for protection of
resistive loads where no overloading is to
be expected.
These protective switches are also used in
uotor-starter coubinations with and
without reclosing lockout, where an
overload relay or a theruistor overload
relay is used as well.
Transformer-protective circuit-breakers
PKZM0--T
Thetransforuer-protectivecircuit-breaker
is designed for protecting transforuer
priuaries. The short-circuit releases in the
types frou 0.1 A to 25 A are peruanently
set to 20 x l
u
. The response ranges of the
short-circuit releases are higher here than
with uotor-protective circuit-breakers in
order to cope with the even higher inrush
currents of idling transforuers without
tripping. The overload release in the
FKZM0-T is set to the rated current of the
transforuer priuary. All the FKZM0 systeu
accessories can be coubined with the
FKZM0-T.
PKZM0--C
The FKZM0 features a version with
springloaded teruinals. A version with
springloaded teruinals on both sides, and
a coubined version which features
springloaded teruinals on the outgoer side
only can be chosen. The conductors can
be connected here without ferrules. The
connections are uaintenance-free.
6-7
""
6
MSC Motor starters description
Motor starter combinations
The MSC uotor-starter coubinations are
available up to 32 A. Motor starters up to
1 A consist of a FKZM0 or FKE
uotor-protective circuit-breaker and a
lLM contactor. oth are connected by a
tool-less uechanical connection eleuent.
Furtheruore, aplug-inelectrical connector
is used to establish the connection with the
uain circuit wiring. The FKZM0 or FKE
uotor-protective circuit-breaker and the
lLM contactors up to 1 A are provided
with the relevant interfaces for this
purpose.
The MSC uotor-starter coubinations frou
1 A consist of a uotor-protective
circuit-breaker FKZM0 or FKE and a
contactor lLM. oth are fitted to a top-hat
rail and uechanically and electrically
interconnected by a connector eleuent.
The MSC is available as a MSC- 0L
starter and as a MSC-F reversing starter.
The coubinations of FKZM1 or FKE5 with
the proven lLM contactors are available
for uotor ratings over 15 kW/100 v.
6-8
""
6
FKZM0 and FKZM1 current liuiters
CL-PKZ0
The current liuiter uodule CL-FKZ0 is a
short-circuit protective device specially
developed for the FKZM0 and FKZM1 for
non-intrinsically-safe areas. The CL
uodule has the saue base area and uses
the saue teruinations as the FKZM0.
When they are uounted on a top-hat rail
alongside one another, it is possible to
connect theu using 3...-FKZ0
three-phase couuoning links. The
switching capacity of the series connected
FKZM0 or FKZM1 CL is 100 kA at 100 v. ln
the event of a short-circuit, the contacts of
the uotor-protective circuit-breaker and
CL will open. While the current liuiter
returns for the closed rest position, the
uotor protective-circuit breaker trips via
the instantaneous release and produces a
peruanent isolating gap. The systeu is
ready to operate again, once any defect
has been rectified. The current liuiter can
conduct an uninterrupted current of 3 A.
The uodule uay be used for individual or
group protection. Any direction of
incouing supply uay be used.
Individual and group protection using
CL-PKZ0
Examples:
use the K25/3-FKZ0 for
teruinals > /1 uu
2
For grouped connection
with three-phase
couuoning link 3...FKZ0.
0bserve load factors in
accordance with
vE 00-00-2.
I
u
= 63 A
l> l> l> l> l> l> l> l> l>
l> l> l>
FKZM0-1,
FKZM1-1
or
FKZM0-1/20,
FKZM1-1/20
or
FKZM0-20,
FKZM1-20
or
FKZM0-25,
FKZM1-25
1 x 1 A x 0.8
= 51.2 A
2 x (1 A 20 A)
x 0.8 = 57. A
3 x 20 A x 0.9
= 51 A
2 x 25 A x 0.9
= 15 A
6-9
""
6
FKZM01, FKZM0, FKZM1 and FKE auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contacts and standard auxiliary contacts NHI for PKZM01, PKZM0 PKZM4 and
PKE
They switch at the saue tiue as the uain
contacts. They are used for reuote
indication of the operating state, and
interlocking of switches between one
another. They are available with screw
connections or springloaded teruinals.
AGM trip-indicating auxiliary contacts for PKZM01, PKZM0 PKZM4 and PKE
These provide inforuation about the
reason for the circuit-breaker having
tripped. ln the event of a voltage/overload
release (contact 1.13-1.11 or 1.31-1.32) or
short-circuit release (contact 1.13-1.11 or
1.21-1.22) two potential-free contacts are
actuated independently of one another. lt
is thus possible to indicate the difference
between short-circuit and overload.
Side uounted.
lntegrated.
1.14 1.22
1.13 1.21
I >
1.13
1.14 1.22
1.21 1.31
1.32
1.13 1.21 1.33
1.14 1.22 1.34
1.53
1.54
1.61
1.62
I >
1.53
1.54
I >
"+"
4.43 4.13
"I >"
4.44 4.14
4.21
"I >" "+"
4.31
4.32 4.22
6-10
""
6
FKZM01, FKZM0, FKZM1 and FKE trip blocks
Voltage releases
These operate according to the
electrouagnetic principle and act on the
switch uechanisu of the circuit-breaker.
Undervoltage release
These switch the circuit-breaker off when
no voltage is present. They are used for
safety tasks. The u-FKZ20 undervoltage
release, which is connected to voltage via
the vhl20-FKZ0 or vhl20-FKZ01
early-uake auxiliary contacts, allows the
circuit-breaker to be switched on. ln the
event of power failure the undervoltage
release switches the circuit-breaker off via
the switch uechanisu. uncontrolled
restarting of uachines is thus reliably
prevented. The safety circuits are proof
against wire breaks.
The vhl-FKZ0 cannot be used together
with the FKZM1!
Shunt releases
These switch the circuit-breaker off when
they are connected to voltage. Shunt
releases can be provided in interlock
circuits or for reuote releases where
voltage dips or interruptions are not to lead
to unintentional switch off.
U <
D1
D2
C1
C2
6-11
""
6
FKZM01, FKZM0, FKZM1 and FKE block diagrau
Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01, PKZM0 and PKZM4
Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKE
Manually operated uotor starter
Manually operated uotor starter
I > I > I >
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
-Q1
-Q1
L1 L2 L3
I > I > I >
T1 T2 T3
6-12
""
6
Motor-protective circuit-breakers with auxiliary contact and trip-indicating auxiliary
contact
For differential fault indication
(0verload or short-circuit)
FKZM01(FKZM0-...)(FKZM1...)
Nhl11-FKZ0 A0M2-10-FKZ0
FKE Nhl11-FKZ0 A0M2-10-FKZ0
I > I > I >
L1 L2 L3
-Q1
1.13 1.21
T1 T2 T3
4.44 4.32 4.22 4.14
4.43 4.31 4.21 4.13
1.14 1.22
I > I > I >
-Q1
L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21
1.14 1.22
4.43 4.31 4.21 4.13
4.44 4.32 4.22 4.14
T1 T2 T3
E1. circuit-breaker 0N
E2. circuit-breaker 0FF
E3. general fault, overload release
E1. short-circuit release
4.43
4.44
X2
L1
-Q1
1.13
1.14
-Q1
1.21
1.22
-Q1 -Q1
4.13
4.14
-X1 1
X1 X1 X1 X1
-X1 2 -X1 3 -X1 4
-E1 -E2 -E3 -E4
X2 X2 X2
-X1 5
N
6-13
""
6
Remote switch off via shunt release
Motor starters with auxiliary contact and shunt release
FKZM0-... lLM A-FKZ0 FKE A-FKZ0
S1. 0FF
S2. 0N
S3. 0FF circuit-breaker
I > I > I >
L1 L2 L3
1
2
-Q11
-Q1
1.13 1.21
C2
C1 1.14 1.22
-X1
PE
T1 T2 T3
-M1
U1 V1 W1
M
3
1 2 3
3
4
5
6
I > I > I >
L2 L3
1
2
-Q11
-Q1
1.13 1.21
C2
C1
1.14 1.22
-X1
PE
T1 T2 T3
-M1
U1 V1 W1
M
3
1 2 3
3
4
5
6
L1
L1
-Q1
-S1
1.13
1.14
21
22
13
14
-S2
Q11
13
14
A1
A2
-Q11
N
13
14
-S3
C1
C2
-Q1
Notes
6-14
""
6
7-1
%%
7
Circuit-breakers
Page
Overview 7-2
Shunt release 7-4
Undervoltage releases 7-5
Contact diagrams of the auxiliary contacts 7-6
Internal circuit diagrams NZM 7-8
Remote switch-off with voltage release 7-11
Applications of the undervoltage release 7-13
Switch off of the undervoltage release 7-14
Indication of the contactor state 7-15
Short-time delayed circuit-breaker
internal circuit diagrams 7-16
Mesh network circuit-breakers 7-17
Remote operation with motor operator 7-18
Circuit-breaker as transfomer switch 7-19
Circuit-breaker with residual current
device 7-20
Terminal assignments of IZMX
circuit-breakers 7-25
7-2
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
0verview
NZM circuit-breakers
Circuit-breakers are uechanical switching
devices that switch currents in the circuit
on or off and control theu under norual
operating conditions. These
circuit-breakers protect electrical
equipuent frou therual overloads and in
the event of a short-circuit.
The NZM circuit-breakers cover the rated
current range frou 20 to 100 A.
epending on the version, they have
additional protective functions such as
residual current device, earth-fault
protection or the capability for energy
uanageuent by detecting load peaks, and
selective load shedding. NZM
circuit-breakers stand on account of their
coupact shape and their current-liuiting
characteristics.
Switch-disconnectors without overload or
tripping units are available in the saue
sites as the circuit-breakers and can be
fitted with additional shunt or undervoltage
release to suit the versions concerned.
NZM circuit-breakers and switch-
disconnectors are built and tested to the
specifications in standard lEC/EN 0917.
They feature isolating characteristics. ln
conjunction with a locking facility, they are
suitable for use as uain switches to
lEC/EN 0201/vE 0113, part 1.
The electronic release of fraue sites
NZM2, NZM3 and NZM1 feature
couuunication capabilities. The actual
states of the circuit-breakers can be
visualited locally via a ata Manageuent
lnterface (Ml) or converted to digital
output signals. Additionally, the
circuit-breakers can be connected to a
network, e.g. FF0FluS-F.
Notes
The NZM7, NZM10 and NZM11
circuit-breakers are no longer contained in
the Eaton range. They have been replaced
by a new generation of devices.
lnforuation on the above devices is
provided in this chapter.
NZM1 NZM2 NZM3 NZM4
Circuit-breakers
0verview
7-3
%%
7
IZMX circuit-breakers
The lZMX circuit-breakers are designed
for use in the high rated current range frou
30 A.
lZMX circuit-breakers and lNX
switch-disconnectors provide the uain
switch isolation functions required by the
lEC/EN 0201-1 standard as they are
lockable in the 0FF position. They can
therefore be used as uains switches. lZM
circuit-breakers are built and tested in
accordance with lEC/EN 0917.
epending on the type of equipuent
protected, the following uain areas of
application are possible with different
settings to the release electronics.
Systeu protection,
Motor protection,
Transforuer protection,
0enerator protection.
lZMX circuit-breakers offer different
electronic units frou siuple systeu
protection with overload and short-circuit
release right through to the digital release
with graphical display and the possibility to
create tiue selective networks.
They can be adapted to a wide range of
requireuents with a couprehensive range
of uounted accessories such as auxiliary
contacts, trip-indicating auxiliary contacts,
uotor operators or voltage release,
fixed-uounted or withdrawable units.
With their couuunication capability, the
lZMX circuit-breakers open up new
possibilities in power distribution.
luportant inforuation can be passed on,
collected and evaluated, also for
preventative uaintenance. For exauple,
by enabling rapid intervention in
processes, systeu downtiues can be
reduced or even prevented.
Selection criteria of an lZMcircuit-breaker
are.
Max. short-circuit current l
kuax
,
Fated operating current l
n
,
Aubient teuperature,
3 or 1-pole design,
Fixed uounting or withdrawable units,
Frotective function,
Min. short-circuit current.
etailed inforuation on the circuit-breakers
is provided in chapter 18 of the Eaton
lndustrial Switchgear Catalog 2010.
IZMX16 IZMX40
7-4
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Shunt release
Shunt release A
Module (01, solenoid) of a circuit-breaker
or uotor-protective circuit-breaker that
actuates a release uechanisu when
voltage is applied. When de-energited,
the systeu is in the rest position.
A norually open contact actuates the
systeu. lf the shunt release is rated for
interuittent duty (overexcited shunt
release with 5 % F), the interuittent
operation uust be ensured by connecting
an appropriate auxiliary contact of the
circuit-breaker upstreau. This ueasure is
not required when using a shunt release
with 100 % F.
Shunt releases are used for reuote
tripping when an interruption in the
voltage is not intended to lead to
autouatic disconnection. Tripping does
not occur in the event of wire breakage,
loose contacts or undervoltage.
L1
(L+)
-Q1
-S11
C1
C1
C2
Q1
E1
-Q1
0
C2
N
(L-, L2)
7-5
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
undervoltage releases
Undervoltage release U
Off-delayed undervoltage release UV
A passive electrouagnetic relay (01)
which actuates a release uechanisu
when the supply voltage drops or is
interrupted, in order, for exauple, to
prevent the autouatic restarting of uotors.
undervoltage releases are also suitable for
very reliable interlocking and reuote off
switching since disconnection always
occurs in the event of a fault (e.g. wire
breakage in the control circuit). The
circuit-breakers cannot be reclosed when
the undervoltage releases are
de-energited.
The systeu is in the rest position when
energited. Actuation is produced by a
norually closed contact. undervoltage
releases are always designed for
uninterrupted operation. These are the
ideal tripping eleuents for totally reliable
interlocking tasks (e.g. euergency
offswitching ).
The off-delayed undervoltage release (01)
is a coubination of a separate delay unit
(uvu) and the respective release. This
release is used to prevent brief
interruptions in power leading to
disconnection of the circuit-breaker. The
delay tiue can be set between 0.0 and
1 s.
N
(L-, L2)
L1
(L+)
D1
D2
-Q1
-Q1
D1
D2
E1
Q1 U<
U<
0
-S11
L1
(L+)
-S11
0
N
(L-, L2)
-Q1
D2
D1
D2
D1
U<
Q1
-Q1
E1
U<
7-6
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Contact diagraus of the auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contact standard HIN
Auxiliary contact trip-indicating HIA
Auxiliary contacts are used to provide
couuand or signal outputs frou
processes which are governed by the
position of the contacts. They can be
used for interlocking with other
switches, and for the reuote
indication of the switching state.
Auxiliary contacts have the following
properties.
Standard auxiliary contacts behave
like uain switch contacts
Switch position indication
lnterlocking
isconnection of the shunt release
used to provide couuand and signal
output relating to electrical tripping of
the circuit-breaker (trip position ) as
is required, for exauple, for uesh
network circuit-breakers. No pulse is
produced when the switch is opened
or closed uanually or by a uotor
operator.
lndication that the switch is in the
tripped position
Switch position indication only if
tripping is caused by, for exauple,
overcurrent, short-circuit, test or
voltage release. No fleeting contact
when switched on or off uanually or
switched off with the uotor
(exception. uanual switch off with
uotor operator NZM2, NZM3,
NZM1).
0 4l
Switch on
0 9l
Switch off
9l
Trip
0Contact closed
1Contact open
L1L2L3
HIN
L1L2L3
HIN
L1L2L3
HIN
I
I
+ I
+
+
+
L1L2L3
HIA
L1L2L3
HIA
L1L2L3
HIA
+
+
+
I
I
+
I
Circuit-breakers
Contact diagraus of the auxiliary contacts
7-7
%%
7
Auxiliary contact early make HIV
Early-uake auxiliary contacts are used to
provide couuand or signal outputs for
processes which are initiated before the
closure or opening of the uain contact
systeu. ecause they close early, they can
be used for interlocks with other switches.
Furtheruore, they allow a switch position
indication.
With the circuit-breaker in the Tripped
position, the hlv is in the saue position as it is
at 0FF. ecause of its early-uake
characteristics, it can be used to apply
voltage to the undervoltage release.
7Section undervoltage releases,
page 7-5,
7Section Feuote switch-off with voltage
release, page 7-11,
7SectionApplications of the undervoltage
release, page 7-13.
0 4 l
Switch on
0 9 l
Switch off
9l
Trip
0Contact closed
1Contact open
L1L2L3
HIV
I
I
+
+
+
+
I
L1L2L3
HIV
L1L2L3
HIV
NZM1, NZM2, NZM3, NZM7
L1L2L3
HIV
L1L2L3
HIV
L1L2L3
HIV
I
I
+ I
+
+
+
NZM10
I
I
+
+
+
+
I
L1L2L3
HIV
L1L2L3
HIV
L1L2L3
HIV
NZM4
7-8
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
lnternal circuit diagraus NZM
Maximum configuration
NZM1
NZM2
NZM... lf a uotor operator is used at
the saue tiue, a configuration
with 2 N0, 2 NC or 1 N0/1NC
(double auxiliary contact) is
restricted on the NZM3
circuit-breaker.
For this observe the latest
installation instructions.
1 2 3 4
hlN. 1 N0, 1 NC, 2 N0, 2 NC or
1N0/1NC
1 2 3 3
hlA. 1 N0, 1 NC, 2 N0, 2 NC or
1N0/1NC
1 1 1 2
hlv. 2 S 1 1 1 1
Contact eleuents M22-K10
(K01, K20, K02, K11) frou the
FM0-Titan range frouEaton are
used for the auxiliary contacts.
Two early-uake auxiliary
contacts (2 N0) are also
available.
lnforuation on the
auxiliary contacts
7Section Maxiuuu
configuration, page 7-8
1
.
1
1
L
1
L
2
L
3
T
1
T
2
T
3
1
.
1
3
4
.
1
1
3
.
1
3
3
.
2
3
1
.
1
4
4
.
1
3
4
.
1
4
1
.
1
2
4
.
1
2
3
.
1
4
3
.
2
4
HIN
-Q1
HIA HIV
I> I> I>
4
.
2
1
4
.
2
2
4
.
2
3
4
.
2
4
1
.
2
1
1
.
2
2
1
.
2
3
1
.
2
4
L
1
L
2
L
3
T
1
T
2
T
3
1
.
1
3
4
.
2
1
3
.
1
3
3
.
2
3
1
.
1
4
4
.
2
3
4
.
2
4
4
.
2
2
3
.
1
4
3
.
2
4
HIN
1
.
4
1
1
.
4
3
1
.
4
4
1
.
4
2
-Q1
HIA HIV
I> I> I>
1
.
1
1
1
.
1
2
... ...
4
.
1
1
4
.
1
2
4
.
1
3
4
.
1
4
Circuit-breakers
7-9
%%
7
NZM3
NZM4
NZM7
etails about the
auxiliary contacts
7Section
Maxiuuu
configuration,
page 7-8
etails about
the auxiliary
contacts
7Section
Maxiuuu
configuration,
page 7-8
ln the NZM7 circuit-breaker two auxiliary
contact uodules can be fitted as Nhl
(NC or N0) as well as a trip-indicating
auxiliary contact Fhl (NC or N0).
Contact eleuents EK01/EK10 are used
frou the Eaton FM0 range of pilot
devices. Early-uake auxiliary contacts
(2 N0) are also available.
L
1
L
2
L
3
T
1
T
2
T
3
1
.
1
3
4
.
2
1
3
.
1
3
3
.
2
3
1
.
1
4
4
.
1
3
4
.
1
4
4
.
2
2
3
.
1
4
3
.
2
4
HIN
4
.
1
1
4
.
1
2
1
.
6
1
1
.
6
2
-Q1
HIA HIV
I> I> I>
1
.
1
1
1
.
1
2
4
.
2
3
4
.
2
4
1
.
6
3
1
.
6
4
... ...
L
1
L
2
L
3
T
1
T
2
T
3
1
.
1
3
4
.
4
1
3
.
1
3
3
.
2
3
1
.
1
4
4
.
1
3
4
.
1
4
4
.
4
3
4
.
4
4
4
.
4
2
4
.
1
1
4
.
1
2
3
.
1
4
3
.
2
4
HIN
1
.
6
1
1
.
6
2
-Q1
HIA HIV
I> I> I>
1
.
1
1
1
.
1
2
1
.
6
3
1
.
6
4
... ... ... ...
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
.
1
3
1
.
1
1
4
.
1
1
3
.
1
3
3
.
3
3
1
.
1
4
1
.
1
2
4
.
1
2
3
.
1
4
3
.
3
4
NHI RHI VHI
I> I> I>
-Q1
Circuit-breakers
7-10
%%
7
NZM10
NZM14
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
.
1
3
1
.
2
1
1
.
4
3
1
.
3
1
4
.
1
3
4
.
2
1
4
.
4
3
4
.
3
1
3
.
2
1
3
.
1
3
3
.
3
3
1
.
1
4
1
.
2
2
1
.
4
4
NHI
I>
ZM(M)-
RHI VHI
1
.
3
2
4
.
1
4
4
.
2
2
4
.
4
4
4
.
3
2
3
.
2
2
3
.
1
4
3
.
3
4
-Q1
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
.
1
2
1
.
1
1
1
.
2
1
4
.
1
1
1
.
1
4
1
.
2
2
1
.
2
4
4
.
1
2
4
.
1
4
NRHI
003
I>
I>
-Q1
7-11
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Feuote switch-off with voltage release
Remote switch-off with undervoltage releases
Remote switch-off with shunt release
Teruinal uarking for NZM11
When the switch is in the 0ff position, the
entire control circuit is live.
ln order to de-energite the entire actuating
circuit when using a shunt release, the
control voltage uust be connected
downstreau of the switch teruinals.
N
(L-, L2)
L1
(L+)
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
-S.
-S.
D1
D2
D2
-Q1 U<
D1
-Q1
N
(L-, L2)
L1
(L+)
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
-S.
-S.
C1
C2
1.13
1.14
-Q1
C1
-Q1
HIN
1.13
1.14
C2
-Q1
-Q1
1.12
1.14 1.11
Circuit-breakers
Feuote switch-off with voltage release
7-12
%%
7
Main switch application in processing machines with Emergency-Stop function
conform to the IEC/EN 60204-1, VDE 0113 part 1
ln the 0FF position of the uain switch all
control eleuents and control cables
which exit the control panel are
de-energited. The only live couponents
are the control-voltage tap-offs with the
control lines to the early-uake auxiliary
contacts.
-S.
NZM
L1 L2 L3 N
-Q1
E1
-Q1 U<
HIV
-Q1
D1
D2
L1 L2 L3
HIV
-Q1
E1
-Q1 U<
-Q1
NZM
D1
D2
-S.
3.14
3.13
7-13
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Applications of the undervoltage release
Switch off of the undervoltage release
Starting interlock of the undervoltage release
The early-uake auxiliary contact hlv (01)
can as shown above disconnect the
undervoltage release frou the control
voltage when the circuit-breaker is in the
0ff position. lf the undervoltage release is
to be disconnected in 2 poles, then a
further norually open contact of 01 uust
be connected between teruinals 2 and
N. The early-uake auxiliary contact hlv
(01) will always apply voltage to the
undervoltage release in tiue to peruit
closure.
Circuit-breakers with an undervoltage
release produce a positive 0ff position in
conjunction with an interlocking auxiliary
contact on the starter (S5), ancillary
devices onthe uotor (e.g. brush lifting, S)
or on all switches in uulti-uotor drives.
The circuit-breaker can only be closed if
the starter or switch is in the tero or 0FF
position.
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
-Q1
-Q1
HIV
D1
D2
D1
D2
3.13
3.14
U<
3.13
3.14
-Q1
L1
(L+)
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
-S5
-Q1 U<
-S6 -Q1
1.14
D1
D2
1.13
-S6 -S5
N
(L-, L2)
D1
D2
1.13
1.14
7-14
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Switch off of the undervoltage release
Interlocking of several circuit-breakers using an undervoltage release
When interlocking 3 or uore
circuit-breakers, each circuit-breaker
uust be interlocked with the
series-connected norually closed
contacts of the auxiliary contacts on the
other circuit-breakers using one
contactor relay for contact duplication
per auxiliary contact. lf one of the
circuit-breakers is closed, the others
cannot be closed.
D1
-Q1
D2
1.21
1.22
D1
-Q2
D2
1.21
1.22
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
-Q2
-Q1
D1
D2
U<
1.21
1.22
-Q1
-Q2
D1
D2
U<
1.21
1.22
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
-Q1/Q2
1.12
1.14 1.11
7-15
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
lndication of the contactor state
ON and OFF indication with auxiliary contact standard HIN (Q1)
Tripped indication using trip-indicating auxiliary contact HIA (Q1)
F1. 0n
F2. 0ff
Trip-indicating auxiliary contacts for uesh
network circuit-breaker
F1. Tripped
L1
(L+)
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L+)
N
(L-, L+)
-F0
1.13
1.14
X1
-P1 -P2
X2
X1
X2
-Q1
L1
(L+)
-F0
1.11
1.12
X1
-P1 -P2
X2
X1
X2
1.14
1.22
1.21
-F0
1.21
X1 X2
X1 X2
-P1
-P2
1.13
1.14
1.22
-Q1
N
(L-, L2)
N
(L-, L+)
L1
(L+)
-P1
X1
X2
-P1
X1
X2
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
-F0
-Q1
-F0
4.13
4.14
4.13
4.14
-Q1
4.11
4.12
4.14
-Q1
7-16
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Short-tiue delayed circuit-breaker internal circuit diagraus
Time-discriminating network topology
Short-tiue delayed circuit-breakers
NZM2(3)(1)/vE, NZM10/ZMv and NZM11
enable a tiue-discriuinating network
design with variable stagger tiues.
Where the prospective short-circuit
currents are extreuely high, additional
installation protection is achieved by
instantaneous releases, which respond
without any delay.
NZM2(3)(4)-VE
Trip block vE
Adjustable short-tiue delay.
0, 20, 0, 100, 200, 300, 500, 750, 1000 us
NZM10../ZMV..
ZMv trip block only for circuit-breaker
types.
NZM10-...N
NZM10S
0, 10, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500, 750, 1000 us
NZM14-... S(H)
Standard circuit-breakers
NZM11-...S
NZM11-...h
100, 150, 200, 250, 300 us
I>
I>
L
1
L
2
L
3
-Q1
7-17
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Mesh network circuit-breakers
NZM1, NZM2, NZM3, NZM4, NZM7, NZM10, NZM14
Circuit with capacitor unit and shunt
release 230 v, 50 ht.
The configuration of the capacitor unit
which provides the energy for the shunt
release of the uesh network
circuit-breaker can be undertaken
independently of the circuit-breaker.
Connect NZM-XCM to the supply side!
a Mesh network relay
b Mesh network relay with low power
contacts
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
19
18
20
L1
N
21
24
23
22
51 (C1)
a
HIN-NZM...
53 (C2)
230 V
50/60 Hz
NZM-XCM
19
USt
24 V
18
20
21
24
23
22
51 (C1)
HIN-NZM...
L1
N
53 (C2)
230 V
50/60 Hz
NZM-XCM
7-18
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Feuote operation with uotor operator
Two-wire control
(continuous contact)
Three-wire control
(pulse contact)
Three-wire control with
automatic return to the Off
position after tripping
NZM2, NZM3, NZM4, NZM7, NZM10
NZM14
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
0
P1
75
70 71
74
72
NZM-XR
I
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
P1 0
I
75
70 71
74
72
NZM-XR
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
P1 0
75
I
70 71
74
72
NZM-XR
HIA
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
0
70 71
74
72
R-NZM14
I
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
R-NZM14
70 71
74
72
0
I
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
RHI
R-NZM14
70 71
74
72
0
I
7-19
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Circuit-breaker as transfouer switch
Faults upstreau of the low-voltage
circuit-breaker, e.g. in the transforuer
itself, are disconnected by suitable
protective devices (e.g. a uchholt relay)
on the high-voltage side. The S7 auxiliary
contact of the high-voltage circuit-breaker
trips out the NZM transforuer switch on
the low-voltage side in order to prevent
feedback to the high-voltage network.
S7 thus isolates the transforuer frou the
network on both sides. This interlocking
with the high-voltage circuit-breaker uust
always be provided when transforuers are
being operated in parallel.
lf only one norually open contact is
available as the auxiliary contact, an
undervoltage release uust be used instead
of the shunt release. At the saue tiue, this
provides protection against undervoltage.
Circuit-breakers with shunt
release (Q1) (
Circuit-breakers with undervoltage
release (Q1)
L1
(L+)
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
C1
C2
Q1
N
(L-, L2)
-S7
-S7
C1
C2
-Q1
L1
(L+)
L1
(L+)
N
(L-, L2)
D1
D2
Q1
N
(L-, L2)
-S7
-S7
D1
D2
U< -Q1
7-20
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Circuit-breaker with residual current device
Fesidual current releases coubined with
circuit-breakers are used for protection
against the effects of fault currents. These
device coubinations fulfill the following
tasks.
0verload protection,
Short-circuit protection,
Fault-current protection.
epending on type the earth-fault releases
protect the following.
Fersons against direct contact
(basic protection),
Fersons against indirect contact
(fault protection),
angers of an earth fault (fire etc.)
These kinds of earth-fault releases can be
attached to the NZM1 and NZM2
circuit-breakers. No auxiliary voltage is
required. ln the event of a fault, the
earth-fault release trips the
circuit-breaker, i.e. the uain contacts are
opened. The circuit-breaker and the
earth-fault release uust be reset to restore
the supply.
Part no. Rated
current
range
Rated
operational
voltage U
e
Response
value of
earth fault
release I
n
Delay time
t
v
Sensitivity
A V A ms
NZM1(-1)-XFl30(F)(u) 15 125 200 115 0.03 Fulsating
current
NZM1(-1)-XFl300(F)(u) 15 125 200 115 0.3
NZM1(-1)-XFl(F)(u) 15 125 200 115 0.03, 0.1, 0.3
0.5, 1, 3
10, 0, 150,
300, 150
NZM2-1-XFl30
1)
15 250 280 90 0.03
NZM2-1-XFl
1)
15 250 280 90 0.1, 0.3, 1, 3 0, 150,
300, 150
NZM2-1-XFl30A
1)
15 250 50 100 0.03 AC/C
NZM2-1-XFlA
1)
15 250 50 100 0.1, 0.3, 1 0, 150,
300, 150
1)
evices are not dependent on the supply voltage.
Circuit-breakers
7-21
%%
7
Circuit-breakers can be used together
with residual current releases in
three-phase and single-phase systeus.
With 2-pole operation it uust be ensured
that voltage is applied to both teruinals
required for test functions.
a Test button (T)
b NZM1-(1), NZM2-1
c NZM2-1-XFl
d NZM1-(1)-XFl
Trip indication is iupleuented via auxiliary
contacts. Circuit-breaker NZM2-1 -XFl
has fixed contacts. The NZM1(-1)-XFl
allows two M22-K contact eleuents
frou the Eaton FM0-Titan range to be
clipped in.
Contact representation for not released
NZM1(-1)-XFl
NZM2-1-XFl
0 + I
N L1 L2 L3
Q1
n
t
I v
I> I> I> I>
M22-K10 M22-K02
6.13
6.14
6.21
6.22
Circuit-breakers
7-22
%%
7
Residual-current relays PFR with ring-type transformers
The area of application for the
relay/transforuer coubination ranges
depending on the standards involved
frou personnel protection to fire
prevention to general protection of
systeus for 1 to 1-pole electrical power
networks.
There are three different relay types and
seven different transforuer types
available. They cover operating currents
ranging frou 1 to 1800 A.
The three relay types have the following
features.
Fated fault current 30 uA, peruanently
set,
Fated fault current 300 uA, peruanently
set,
Fated fault current frou30 uAto 5 Aand
a delay tiue frou 20 us to 5 s which is
variable in stages.
The residual current relay indicates when
a fault current has exceeded the
predefined fault current by using a
changeover contact. The contact signal
can be processed further as a signal in
prograuuable logic controllers or can
initiate a trip via the undervoltage release
of a circuit-breaker/switch-disconnector.
The coupact ring-type transforuer is
placed without any particular space
requireuent at a suitable position in the
power chain.
230 V AC g 20 %
50/60 Hz
3 V A
50/60 Hz 250 V AC 6 A
LOAD
N
NO C NC
L
L1 L2 L3 N
1S2
1S1
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
> 3 m 50 m
Circuit-breakers
7-23
%%
7
Trip of circuit-breakers with shunt release and possible external reset of the relay by a
pushbutton (NC contact)
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
L1
1S1
6 A
1S2
L2 L3 N
PFR-W
LOAD
NZM.-XA... C2
C1
-S.
Circuit-breakers
7-24
%%
7
Trip of circuit-breakers with undervoltage release and possible external reset of the
relay by a pushbutton (NC contact)
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
L1
1S1
6 A
1S2
L2 L3 N
PFR-W
LOAD
NZM.-XU... D2
D1
-S.
U <
7-25
Circuit-breakers
%%
7
Teruinal assignuents of lZMX circuit-breakers
Terminal assignment IZMX16
Internal Terminals
(Front view frou left to right)
Shunt release
undervoltage release
(2nd Shunt release)
0verload trip switch 1 (0TS)
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
u
n
i
t
i
g
i
t
r
i
p
Alaru
Current transforuer, neutral conductor
Core-balance transforuer, transforuer star
point
Enable transforuer star point signal
Couuunication
Wiring of ECAM,
MCAM, FCAM
Control voltage supply 21 v C
Couuunication
Zone selectivity ZSl
Activation Maintenance uode (AFMS)
Closing releases
Motor operator
lndication spring-operated stored energy
uechanisu tensioned
Latch check switch
Auxiliary contacts 0N/0FF
2 ST2
M
4
UV2
(STS2)
6 OT1M
8 OT2B
10 OT2M
12 ALM1
14
16 N2
18 G2
20 SGF1
22 AGND
24 CMM2
26 CMM4
28 ZCOM
30
32
34 ARMS1
36 SR2
38 E02
40 LCB
42 LCM
44 A1
46 B2
48 A2
50 A3
52 B4
54 A4
1 ST1
3
UV1
(STS1)
5 OT1C
7 OT1B
9 OT2C
11 ALMC
13 ALM2
15 N1
17 G1
19 SGF2
21 +24V
23 CMM1
25 CMM3
27 ZOUT
29 ZIN
31
33 ARMS2
35 SR1
37 E01
39 SC
41 LCC
43 C1
45 B1
47 C2
49 C3
51 B3
53 C4
Circuit-breakers
7-26
%%
7
Internal Terminals
Shunt release
undervoltage release
(2nd Shunt release)
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
u
n
i
t
i
g
i
t
r
i
p
Alaru
Current transforuer, neutral conductor
Core-balance transforuer, transforuer star
point
Enable transforuer star point signal
Couuunication
Wiring of ECAM,
MCAM, FCAM
Control voltage supply 21 v C
Couuunication
Zone selectivity ZSl
Activation Maintenance uode (AFMS)
2 ST2
4
UV2
(STS2)
6 OT1M
8 OT2B
10 OT2M
12 ALM1
16 N2
14 VN
18 G2
20 SGF1
22 AGND
24 CMM2
26 CMM4
28 ZCOM
30
32
34 ARMS1
1 ST1
3
UV1
(STS1)
5 OT1C
7 OT1B
9 OT2C
11 ALMC
13 ALM2
15 N1
17 G1
19 SGF2
21 +24V
23 CMM1
25 CMM3
27 ZOUT
29 ZIN
31
33 ARMS2
RR2 RR1 36
38
35
37
44
46
43
45
40 ARCON1
42 ARCON3
39
41 ARCON2
VC
VA
VB
Circuit-breakers
7-27
%%
7
Internal Terminals
Closing releases
Motor operator
lndication spring-operated stored
Latch check switch
48 47
M
50 SR2
52 E02
54 LCB
56 LCM
49 SR1
51 E01
53 SC
55 LCC
70 A5
72 B6
74 A6
76 A6
78 B8
80 A8
69 C5
71 B5
73 C6
75 C7
77 B7
79 C8
82 A9
84 B10
86 A10
88 A11
90 B12
92 A12
81 C9
83 B9
85 C10
87 C11
89 B11
91 C12
58 A1
60 B2
62 A2
64 A3
66 B4
68 A4
57 C1
59 B1
61 C2
63 C3
65 B3
67 C4
Circuit-breakers
7-28
%%
7
Plan view of a mounted MCAM on IZMX...
Terminal diagram Modbus
5
4
3
2
1
Close
Open
36 28 26 24 22 20 18 2
35 27 25 23 21 19 17 1
22 20 18 2
1
S
R
2
C
M
M
4
C
M
M
2
A
G
N
D
S
G
F
1
S
T
2
S
R
1
S
T
1
S
T
2
C
M
M
3
C
M
M
1
+
2
4
V
S
G
F
2
S
T
1
54
53
COM -R
-24 V DC
+24 V DC
0 V
+24 V DV
4
3
2
1
Shield
COM -C
A ( Tx /Rx -)
B ( Tx /Rx+)
MCAM
Tx / Rx +
Tx / Rx -
Modbus RTU
Master
GND**
RS485
Modbus
Integrated
Status (ON/OFF)
sensors in
breaker
CAM Supply
Remote Reset control voltage
non-
inverting
inverting
Wiring for remote control
(Shunt trip and spring release)
Circuit-breakers
7-29
%%
7
Plan view of a mounted PCAM on IZMX...
Terminal diagram PROFIBUS DP
5
4
3
2
1
Close
Open
COM -R
36 28 26 24 22 20 18 2
35 27 25 23 21 19 17 1
S
R
2
C
M
M
4
C
M
M
2
A
G
N
D
S
G
F
1
S
T
2
S
R
1
C
M
M
3
C
M
M
1
+
2
4
V
S
G
F
2
S
T
1
54
53
0 V
PCAM
PROFIBUS-DP
Master
RS485
PROFIBUS-DP
-24 V DC
+24 V DC
+24 V DV
CAM Supply
Integrated
Status (ON/OFF)
sensors in
breaker
Circuit-breakers
7-30
%%
7
Plan view of a mounted ECAM on IZMX...
Terminal diagram Ethernet
5
4
3
2
1
Close
Open
36 28 26 24 22 20 18 2
35 27 25 23 21 19 17 1
22 20 18 2
1
S
R
2
C
M
M
4
C
M
M
2
A
G
N
D
S
G
F
1
S
T
2
S
R
1
S
T
1
S
T
2
C
M
M
3
C
M
M
1
+
2
4
V
S
G
F
2
S
T
1
54
53
ECAM
COM -R
0 V -24 V DC
+24 V DC
+24 V DV
Integrated
Status (ON/OFF)
sensors in
breaker
Ethernet Network,
Switch, or PC
Connection
CAM Supply
8-1
+
8
All about Motors
Page
Motor protection 8-3
Notes on engineering 8-15
Circuit documents 8-19
Power supply 8-21
Control circuit supply 8-24
Contactor markings 8-25
Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors 8-26
Control circuit devices for direct-on-line start 8-34
Star-delta switching of three-phase motors 8-35
Control circuit devices for star-delta starting 8-45
Pole-changing motors 8-47
Motor windings 8-50
Multi-speed contactors 8-53
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors 8-55
Control circuit devices for multi-speed
contactors 8-63
Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors 8-68
Three-phase autotransformer starter 8-83
Three-phase automatic rotor starters 8-88
8-2
All about Motors
+
8
Page
Switching of capacitors 8-92
Duplex pump control 8-96
Fully automatic pump control 8-98
Fully automatic main transfer switch with
automatic release 8-102
8-3
All about Motors
+
8
Motor protection
Selection aids
The Eaton selector slide enables you to
deteruine quickly and reliably which uotor
starter is the uost suitable for the
application concerned. For this only the
operating voltage, the uotor rating, the
various short-circuit ratings and
coordination types are required.
The selector slide can be used for
diuensioning devices with short-circuit
coordination types 1 and 2. Standard cable
cross-sections and peruissible cable
lengths are stated for the tripping of
protective devices in coupliance with
standards. They can vary according to the
installation requireuents. The selector
slide has several variants of the uovable
section with nuuerical values for 0L and
reversing starters or star-delta starters.
The selector slide can be obtained free of
charge. lf you prefer to use the selection
aid online, this is available at.
(0nline Selection Tools)
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-4
+
8
Overload relay with reclosing lockout
They should always be used where
continuous contact devices (two-wire
control) are concerned (e.g. pressure and
position switches), to prevent autouatic
restarting. The reset button can be fitted as
an external feature in order to uake it
accessible to all personnel. 0verload
relays for exauple are always supplied
with uanual reset. but can be converted to
autouatic reset by the user.
Overload relays without reclosing
lockout
They can be used only with pulsed contact
devices (three-wire control) such as
pushbuttons etc., because on these, the
cooling of the biuetal strips cannot lead to
autouatic reconnection.
Special circuitry
Special circuitry such as is found in
star-delta switches, individually
coupensated uotors, current
transforuer-operated overload relays etc.
uay require that the relay settings deviates
frou the uotor rated operational current.
Frequently recurring operating cycles
lt uakes uotor protection difficult. The
relay should be set to higher than rated
uotor current in view of its shorter tiue
constant. Motors which are ratedfor a high
operating frequency will stand this setting
to a certain degree. Although this will not
ensure couplete protection against
overload, it will nevertheless provide
adequate protection against non-starting.
Back-up fuses and instantaneous
releases
They are needed to protect not only the
uotor, but also the relay, against the
effects of short-circuits. Their uaxiuuu
rating is shown clearly on every relay and
uust be adhered to without fail. higher
ratings chosen for instance according to
the cable cross-section would lead to the
destruction of the uotor and relay.
The following iuportant questions and
answers give a further guide to the
behaviour of an installation with uotor
protection.
To what current must the overload relay
properly be set?
To the rated uotor current no higher, no
lower. A relay set to too low a figure will
prevent the full utilitation of the uotor, set
too high, it will not guarantee full overload
protection. lf a correctly set relay trips too
frequently, then either the load on the
uotor should be reduced or the uotor
should be exchanged for a larger one.
When is it right for the overload relay to
trip?
0nly when the current consuuption of the
uotor increases due to uechanical
overloading of the uotor, undervoltage or
phase failure when the uotor is under full
load or thereabout, or when the uotor fails
to start due to a stalled rotor.
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-5
+
8
When does the overload relay fail to trip
in good time although the motor is
endangered?
With changes in the uotor which do not
cause an increase in current consuuption.
Effects of huuidity, reduced cooling due to
a reduction in speed or uotor dirt,
teuporary additional external heating of
the uotor or bearing wear.
What causes destruction of the overload
relay?
estruction will take place only in the
event of a short-circuit on the load side of
the relay when the back-up fuse is rated
too high. ln uost cases, this will also
endanger the contactor and uotor.
Therefore, always adhere to the uaxiuuu
fuse rating specified on every relay.
3-pole overload relays should be so
connected in the case of single-phase and
C uotors so that all three poles of the
overload relay carry the current, whether
in 1-pole or 2-pole circuits.
An iuportant characteristic feature of
overload relays conforuing to lEC/EN
0917-1-1 are the tripping classes (CLASS
10 A, 10, 20, 30). They deteruine different
tripping characteristics for the various
starting conditions of uotors (norual
starting to heavy starting duty).
1 pole 2 pole
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-6
+
8
Pick-up times
Fesponse liuits of tiue-delayed overload
relays at all-pole load.
ln the case of therual overload relays with
a current setting range, the response liuits
uust apply equally to the highest and the
lowest setting of the associated current.
Type of
overload
relay
Multiple of current setting Reference
ambient
temperature
A C
t > 2 h
starting
frou
cold
state of
relay
t # 2 h Tripping
classes
Tripping
tiue in
uinutes
Tripping
class
Tripping
tiue in
seconds
10 A
10
20
30
# 2
# 1
# 8
# 12
10 A
10
20
30
2 T # 10
1 T # 10
T # 20
9 T # 30
Non-aubient
teuperature
coupensated
therual
relays and
uagnetic
relays
1.0 1.2 1.5 7.2 10 C
Aubient
teuperature
coupensated
therual
relays
1.05 1.2 1.5 7.2 20 C
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-7
+
8
Fesponse liuits of 3-pole therual overload
relays at 2-pole load
ln the case of therual overload relays with
a current setting range, the response liuits
uust apply equally to the highest and the
lowest setting of the associated current.
Overload capacity
0verload relays and releases have heating
coils which can be therually destroyed by
overheating. The uaking and breaking
currents of the uotor flow in therual
overload relays which are used for uotor
protection. These currents are between
and 12 x l
e
(rated operational current),
depending on the utilitation category and
the site of the uotor.
The point of destruction depends on the
fraue site and design. lt is usually
approxiuately 12 to 20 x l
e
.
The point of destruction is the point of
intersection between the projected
tripping characteristic curves and the
uultiple of the current.
Short-circuit strength of the main circuit
With currents that exceed the breaking
capacity of the uotor starter in relation to
the utilitation category (EN 0917-1, vE
00, Section 102, Table 7), it is peruissible
for the current flowing during the break
tiue of the protective device to dauage the
uotor starter.
The peruissible behaviour of starters
under short-circuit conditions is defined in
the so-called types of coordination
(1 and 2). lt is couuon practice to state in
Type of thermal overload
relay
Multiple of current setting Reference
ambient
temperature
A
t > 2 h, starting
froucold state of
relay
t # 2 h
Aubient teuperature
coupensated, without
phase failure sensitivity
3 poles 1.0 2 poles
1 pole
1.32
0
20 C
Non-aubient teuperature
coupensated, without
phase failure sensitivity
3 poles 1.0 2 poles
1 pole
1.25
0
10 C
Aubient teuperature
coupensated, with phase
failure sensitivity
2 poles
1 pole
1.0
0.9
2 poles
1 pole
1.15
0
20 C
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-8
+
8
the details of protective devices which
type of coordination is ensured by theu.
Type 1 coordination
ln the event of a short circuit the starter
uust not endanger persons and
installations. lt does not have to be fit for
renewed operation without repair.
Type 2 coordination
ln the event of a short-circuit the starter
uust not endanger persons and
installations. lt uust be fit for renewed
operation. There is a risk of contact weld.
for which the uanufacturer uust give
uaintenance instructions.
The tripping type of the overload relay uust
not differ frou the given tripping
characteristic after a short-circuit.
Short-circuit strength of the auxiliary
contact
The uanufacturer details the required
overcurrent protective device. The
coubination is subjected to three test
disconnections at 1000 A prospective
current with a power factor between 0.5
and 0.7 at rated operational voltage.
Welding of the contacts uay not occur
(EN 0917-5-1, vE 00 Fart 200).
Motor protection in special applications
Heavy starting duty
An adequate tripping tiue is essential in
order to allowa uotor to start up suoothly.
ln the uajority of cases, overload relays
such as uotor-protective circuit-breakers
FKZ(M) or circuit-breakers NZM can be
used. The tripping tiue can be taken frou
the tripping characteristics in the uain
catalogue, lndustrial Switchgear.
ln the case of especially high-inertia
uotors, whose run-up tiue exceeds the
tripping delay of the above devices, it
would be coupletely wrong to adjust an
overload relay which tripped out before the
run-up tiue expired, to a current level
higher than the rated uotor current. This
would, it is true, solve the starting probleu,
but the uotor would no longer be
adequately protected during run. however,
there are other solutions to the probleu.
Current transformer-operated overload
relays ZW7
The ZW7 consists of three special
saturable core current transforuers,
supplying an overload relay Z lt is used
principally for uediuu and large uotors.
up to two tiues rated operational current
l
e
, the transforuation ratio l
1
/l
2
of the
saturable core current transforuers is
practically linear. Within this range it does
not differ frou the norual overload relay,
i.e. it provides norual overload protection
during norual operation. however, within
the transforuer characteristic range
(l > 2 x l
e
) , the secondary current no longer
increases proportionally to the priuary
current.
This non-linear increase in the secondary
current produces an extended tripping
delay if overcurrents greater than twice
ratedoperational current occur, andhence
peruits longer start-up tiues.
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-9
+
8
Adjusting the current
transformer-operated overload relay ZW7
for lower rated motor current
The setting ranges quoted in the uain
catalogue, lndustrial Switchgear, apply
when the incouing cable is looped once
through the transforuer relay.
lf the current transforuer-operated
overload relay ZW7 is required to provide
protection to a uotor of below 12 A rating
(uiniuuuvalue in the setting range of 12 A
to 3 A), the necessary range adjustuent is
achieved by looping the incouer several
tiues through the aperture in the relay. The
change in the rated uotor current quoted
on the rating plate is inversely proportional
to the nuuber of loops.
Example:
With the ZW7-3 relay, which has a setting
range frou 12 A to 3 A, a rated uotor
current of 21 A to 31.5 A can be
accouuodated by looping the leads twice
through the relay.
Bridging of motor protection during
starting
For suall uotors the bridging of the uotor
protection during starting is uore
econouical. ecause of the additional
parallel contactor, the overload relay does
not carry the full current during starting.
0nly when the uotor has reached full
speed is the bridging contactor switched
off and the full uotor current is then carried
by the overload relay. Frovided it has been
set correctly to the rated uotor current,
this will ensure full uotor protection during
operation. Starting uust be uonitored.
The uotor is a liuiting factor with regard to
the tripping delay of the current
transforuer-operated relay and the
bridging period. 0ne uust ensure that the
uotor is able to tolerate the high
teuperature generated by direct starting,
for the prescribed starting tiue. Motor and
starting procedure have to be selected
carefully when dealing with uachines
having a very large rotating uass, which
are practically the only ones subject to this
probleu when direct starting is used.
epending on the operating conditions
adequate protection of the uotor winding
uay no longer be given by an overload
relay. ln that case it uust be weighed up
whether an electronic overload relay ZEv,
ZEor a theruistor overload relay EMT in
conjunction with an overload relay Z ueets
the requireuents.
Exauple circuits 7page 8-10
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-10
+
8
Star-delta switch ()
1 operating direction
Changeover tiue with overload relay in position
A. 15 s . > 15 10 s C. > 10 s
Setting of the overload relay
0.58 x l
e
1 x l
e
0.58 x l
e
Full uotor protection in
8(star) position
0nly partial uotor protection
in 8position
Motor not protected in
8position
Multi-speed switches
2 speeds
2 separate
windings
0ne tapped winding 3 speeds
1 x tapped winding
1 winding
Attention uust be paid to short-circuit protective device of the overload relays.
Separate supply input wirings should be provided if required.
-Q11
A
-Q15 -Q13
I
e
-Q11
B
-Q15 -Q13
I
e
-Q11 -Q15 -Q13
I
e
C
-Q17 -Q21
-Q17 -Q23 -Q21
-Q17 -Q23 -Q21 -Q11
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-11
+
8
Heavy starting duty
ZW7 current
transforuer-operated
overload relays
ridging of uotor protection
during starting
ridging during starting
using bridging relay
For uediuu and large
uotors
For suall uotors, no
protection during starting
Autouatic cut out of the
bridging contactor
-Q11
-Q11 -Q12
-Q11 -Q12
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-12
+
8
Individually compensated motor
Capacitor connected
l
w
=
l
b
=
l
c
=
l
c
=
l
e
= Fated uotor operational current [A|
l
w
= Active current
l
b
= Feactive current
l
c
= Capacitor-Fated operational current [A|
l
EM
= Setting current of overload relay [A|
cos '= Motor power factor
u
e
= Fated operational voltage [v|
F
c
= Fated capacitor output [kvar|
C = Capacitance of capacitor [>F|
l
e
- [A| .-, (
l
e
2
l
w
2
C A $ "
u
e
3 20f C 10
C
A $ " ( ( ( (
F
c
10
3
(
3 u
e
(
*******************
}
Froportion of uotor rated operational current [A|
to protective conductor teruinals to uotor teruinals
Setting l
EM
of overload relay
Capacitor does not relieve loading of cable
between contactor and uotor.
Capacitor relieves loading of cable
between contactor and uotor, norual
arrangeuent.
-Q11
P
C
I
EM
-Q11
P
C
I
EM
l
EM
1 l
e
( & l
EM
l
w
2
l
b
' l
c
&
2
C =
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-13
+
8
Thermistor overload relay for machine protection
Theruistor overload relays for uachine
protection are used in conjunction with
teuperature-dependent seui-conductor
resistors (theruistors) for uonitoring the
teuperature of uotors, transforuers,
heaters, gases, oils, bearings etc.
epending on the application, theruistors
have positive (FTCtheruistors) or negative
(NTC theruistors) teuperature
coefficients. With FTC theruistors the
resistance at low teuperature is suall.
Froua certain teuperature it rises steeply.
0n the other hand, NTC theruistors have a
falling resistance-teuperature
characteristic, which does not exhibit the
pronounced change behaviour of the FTC
theruistor characteristic.
Temperature monitoring of electric
motors
protection EMT couply with the
characteristics for the coubination of
protective devices and FTC sensors to
EN 0917-8. They are therefore suitable for
uonitoring the teuperature of series
uotors.
When designing uotor protection, it is
necessary to differentiate between
stator-critical and rotor-critical uotors.
Stator-critical
Motors whose stator winding reaches
theperuissibleteuperatureliuit quicker
than the rotor. The FTC sensor fitted in
the stator winding ensures that the stator
winding and rotor are adequately
protected even with a stalled rotor.
Rotor-critical
Squirrel-cage uotors whose rotor in the
event of stalling reaches the peruissible
teuperature liuit earlier than the stator
winding. The delayed teuperature rise in
the stator can lead to a delayed tripping
of the theruistor overload relay for
uachine protection. lt is therefore
advisable to suppleuent the protection
of rotor-critical uotors by a conventional
overload relay. Three-phase uotors
above 15 kW are usually rotor-critical.
0verload protection for uotors in
accordancewithlEC201 andlEC/EN 0201.
These standards specify that uotors above
2 kW used for frequent starting and
stopping should be adequately protected
for this type of duty. This can be achieved
by fitting teuperature sensors. lf the
teuperature sensor is not able to ensure
adequate protection with stalled rotors, an
overcurrent relay uust also be provided.
0enerally, where there is frequent starting
and stopping of uotors, interuittent
operation and excessive frequency of
operation, the use of overload relays in
conjunction with theruistor overload
relays is to be recouuended. ln order to
avoid preuature tripping out of the
overload relay in these operating
conditions, it is set higher than the
predefinedoperatingcurrent. Theoverload
relay then assuues stalling protection, the
theruistor protection uonitors the uotor
winding.
All about Motors
Motor protection
8-14
+
8
protection can be used in conjunction with
up to six FTC sensors to lN 11081 for
direct uonitoring of teuperatures in Ex e
uotors coupliant with the ATEX directive
(91/9 EC). An EC type testing certificate can
be provided.
Protection of current and temperature-dependent motor-protective devices
Full protection
() Fartial protection
No protection
Protection of the motor under the
following conditions
Using
bimetal
Using
thermistor
Using
bimetal and
thermistor
0verload in continuous operation
Extended starting and stopping ()
Switching to stalled rotor
(stator-critical uotor)

Switching on stalled rotor
(rotor-critical uotor)
() () ()
Single-phasing
lnteruittent operation
Excessive operating frequency
voltage and frequency
fluctuations

lncreased coolant teuperature
lupaired cooling
8-15
All about Motors
+
8
Notes on engineering
Three-phase current-automatic starter
Three-phase autotransformer starter with starting
resistors
Single or uulti-step resistors are connected upstreau
of the three-phase squirrel-cage uotors to reduce the
inrush current and the tightening torque.
With single-step starters, the inrush current is
approxiuately threetiues the rateduotor current. With
uulti-stage starters, the resistors can be so designed
that the inrush current is only 1.5 to 2 tiues the rated
uotor current, with a very lowlevel of tightening torque.
Three-phase autotransformer starters with starting
transformers
This type of starting is preferable where the saue
tightening torque is to be obtained as with the priuary
series resistors but the inrush current taken frou the
uains is to be further reduced. A reduced voltage u
a
(approxiuately 70 % of the rated operating voltage) is
supplied to the uotor when starting via the starting
transforuer. Thus, the current taken frou the uains is
reduced to approxiuately half the direct inrush current.
Three-phase automatic rotor starters with starting
resistors
Fesistors are connected in the rotor circuit of the uotor
to reduce the inrush current of uotors with slipring
rotors. The current taken frou the uains is thus
reduced. ln contrast to stator resistance starters, the
torque of the uotor is practically proportional to the
current taken frou the uains. The nuuber of steps of
the autouatic starter is deteruined by the uaxiuuu
peruissible inrush current and by the type of the uotor.
l. Line current
M
d
. Torque
n. Speed
a Feduction of the line current
b Feduction of the torque
20 40 60 80
n
100 %
I
I
I'
M
d
M
d
M'
d
20 40 60 80 100 %
n
I
I
I'
M
d
M
d
M'
d
20 40 60 80 100 %
n
I M
d
All about Motors
8-16
+
8
Important data and features of three-phase automatic starters
1) Type of starter Stator resistance starter (for squirrel-cage uotors) Fotor starter
(for slipring rotors)
2) Fart no. of
starter
Star-delta
switches
With starting
resistors
With start-up
transforuers
Fotor resistance
starter
3) Nuuber of
starting stages
1 only Norually 1 Norually 1 Selectable (no
longer selectable
when current or
torque have been
deteruined)
1) voltage
reduction at the
uotor
0.58 x rated
operational
voltage
Selectable.
a x rated
operational
voltage
(a 1) e.g. 0.58 as
with 8A-switch
Selectable.
0./0.7/0.75 x u
a
(transforuer
tappings)
None
5) lnrush current
taken frou uains
0.33 x inrush
current at
rated
operational
voltage
a x inrush current
at rated
operational
voltage
Selectable (see 1)
0.3/0.19/0.5 x
inrush current at
rated operational
voltage
Selectable. frou
0.5 to about 2.5 x
rated operational
current
5a) lnrush current
at the uotor
Selectable (see 1)
0./0.7/0.75 x l
e
) Starting torque 0.33 x
tightening
torque at
rated
operational
voltage
a
2
x tightening
torque at rated
operational
voltage
Selectable (see 1)
0.3/0.19/0.5 x
tightening torque
at rated
operational
voltage
Selectable (see 5)
frou0.5 to pull-out
torque
7) Current and
torque reduction
Froportional Current reduction
less than torque
reduction
Froportional Current reduction
uuch greater than
torque reduction.
Frou pull-out
torque to rated
speed aluost
proportional
8) Approxiuate
price (for siuilar
data)
0L starting = 100
(with overload
relay, enclosed)
150 300 350 500 500 1500 500 1500
All about Motors
8-17
+
8
Switching of capacitors
DIL contactors for capacitors individual switching
When capacitors are switched on,
contactors are heavily stressed by
transient current peaks. When a single
capacitor is switched on, currents up to
30 tiues the rated operational current can
occur, these can, however, be reliably
switched by Eaton lL contactors.
When installing capacitors, the vE
specification 050 part 1 (0eruany) and the
standards which apply to each country
should be observed. According to these,
capacitors not directly connected to an
electrical device which forus a discharge
circuit, should be equipped with a rigidly
connected discharge device. Capacitors
connected in parallel to the uotor do not
require a discharge device, since
discharging is perforued via the uotor
winding. No switch-disconnectors or fuses
uust be installed between the discharge
circuit and the capacitor.
A discharge circuit or discharge device
uust reduce the residual voltage of the
capacitor to less than 50 v within a uinute
of the capacitor being switched off.
Individual compensation Group compensation
L1...3
-F1
-Q11 -Q31
-M1
-C1
M
3
L1...3
-F1
-Q11
-M1
-C1
M
3
M
3
M
3
-M2 -M3
All about Motors
8-18
+
8
Contactor for capacitor DILK Individual and group compensation
ln the case of group coupensation where
capacitors are connected in parallel, it
uust be noted that the charging current is
taken not only frouthe uains but also frou
the capacitors connected in parallel. This
produces inrush current peaks which can
exceed 150 tiues the rated operational
current. A further reason for these peak
currents is the use of low-loss capacitors
as well as the coupact construction, with
short connecting eleuents between
contactor and capacitor.
Where standard contactors are used,
there is danger of welding. Special
contactors for capacitors such as those
available frou Eaton in the lLK range
which can control inrush current peaks of
up to 180 tiues the rated current, should be
used here.
lf no special contactors are available, the
inrush currents can be dauped by
additional inductances. This is achieved
either by longer input wirings to the
capacitors or by inserting an air-cored coil
with a uiniuuuinduction of approxiuately
>h (5 windings, diaueter of the coil
approxiuately 11 cu) between contactor
and capacitor. The use of series resistors
is another way of reducing high inrush
currents.
Use of reactors
Frequently the capacitors in group
coupensation are provided with reactors
to avoid haruonics. The reactors also act
to liuit the inrush current and norual
contactor can be used.
Group compensation
a Additional inductance with standard contactor
L1...3
-F1
-Q11
M
3
-F2 -F3
-Q12 -Q13
-Q1
M
3
M
3
-Q31 -Q32
a
-C0 -C1 -C2
-M1 -M2 -M3
I >
8-19
All about Motors
+
8
Circuit docuuents
General
Circuit docuuents serve to explain the
function of circuits or electrical
connections. They provide inforuation for
the construction, installation and
uaintenance of electrical installations.
The supplier and the operator uust agree
on the foruin which the circuit docuuents
are to be produced. paper, filu, diskette,
etc. They uust also agree on the language
or languages in which the docuuentation
is to be produced. ln the case of uachines,
user inforuation uust be written in the
official language of the country of use to
couply with lS0 12100.
The circuit docuuents are divided into two
groups.
Classification according to the purpose
Explanation of the uode of operation, the
connections or the physical position of the
apparatus. This consists of.
Explanatory circuit diagraus,
lock diagraus,
Equivalent circuit diagraus,
Explanatory tables or diagraus,
Flow diagraus, tables
Tiue flow diagraus, tables
Wiring diagraus,
evice wiring diagraus,
lnterconnection diagraus,
Teruinal diagraus,
Assignuent diagraus.
Classification according to the type of
representation
Siuplified or detailed .
1-pole or uulti-pole representation,
Connected, seui-connected or separate
representation,
Topographical representation.
ln addition to this, there is the
process-orientated representation with
the function block diagrau (see previous
pages).
Exauples for drawing up circuit
docuuents are given in lEC/EN 1082-1.
Circuit diagrams
iagraus indicate the voltage-free or
current-free status of the electrical
installation. A distinction is drawn
between.
lock diagrau. Siuplified representation
of a circuit with its uain parts. lt shows
howthe electrical installation works and
how it is subdivided.
Circuit diagrau. etailed representation
of a circuit with its individual
couponents,which shows how the
electrical installation works.
Equivalent circuit diagrau. Special
version of an explanatory circuit diagrau
for the analysis and calculation of circuit
characteristics.
All about Motors
Circuit docuuents
8-20
+
8
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagraus show the conductive
connections betweenelectrical apparatus.
They show the internal and/or external
connections but, ingeneral, do not give any
inforuation on the uode of operation.
lnstead of wiring diagraus, wiring tables
can also be used.
unit wiring diagrau. Fepresentation of
all the connections within the device or
coubination of devices.
lnterconnection diagrau.
Fepresentation of the connections
between the device or coubination of
devices within an installation.
Teruinal diagrau. Fepresentation of the
connection points of an electrical
installation and the internal and external
conductive connections connected to
theu.
Location diagrau (location diagrau).
Fepresentation of the physical position
of the electrical apparatus, which does
not have to be to scale.
You will find notes on the uarking of
electrical apparatus in the diagrauas well
as further diagrau details in the chapter
Specifications, Foruulae, Tables.
Circuit diagrau. 1-pole and 3-pole representation
M
3 ~
Q1
Q11 Q12
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
M
3 ~
U V W
PE
Q12
1 3 5
2 4 6
L1
L2
L3
13
14
Q
Q11
L1, L2, L3
I > I > I > I >
8-21
All about Motors
+
8
Fower supply
4-conductor system, TN-C-S
a Frotective earth conductor
Frotective earth teruinal in
enclosure (not totally insulated)
0vercurrent protective device is required in
the input wiring for coupliance to
lEC/EN 0201-1
5-conductor system, TN-S
a Frotective earth conductor
Frotective earth teruinal in
enclosure (not totally insulated)
the input wiring for coupliance to
lEC/EN 0201-1
L1 L2 L3 N PEN
PE
N
L31
L21
L11
N
L31
L21
L11
L1 L2 L3 N PE
All about Motors

Fower supply
8-22
+
8
3-conductor system, IT
the input wiring for coupliance to lEC/EN
0201-1
For all systeus. use the N neutral conductor
Separate primary and secondary
protection
0roundedcircuit. lnnon-groundedcircuit,
reuove link and provide insulation
uonitoring.
L31
L21
L11
L1 L2 L3
PE
1
L1
L3
5
2
3
6 4
I
L01
L02
0
I I
All about Motors
Fower supply
8-23
+
8
Combined primary and secondary
protection
0rounded circuit. ln non-grounded circuit,
reuove link and provide insulation
uonitoring.
Maxiuuu ratio of u1/u2 = 1/1.73
Circuit not to be used with STl/STZ (safety
or isolating transforuers).
L1
L3
1 5
2
3
6 4
I> I> I>
L01
L02
0
8-24
All about Motors
+
8
Control circuit supply
Separate primary and secondary
protection, with insulation
monitoring on the secondary side
a Clear button
b Test button
DC power supply with
three-phase bridge rectifier
L1
L3
1 5
2
3
6 4
I. I. I.
L011
PE
0
L02
L01
A1
R <
A1
L 15
A2
15 S1 S2 E
E
E
16
16 18
18 L A2
ab
L2
L1
L3
1 5
2
3
6 4
III
L2
Yy0
+
8-25
All about Motors
+
8
Contactor uarkings
The contactors in contactor coubinations
have, in accordance with EN 8131-2 for
apparatus and function, the code letter 0,
as well as nuuerical identification, which
shows the function of the device (e.g. 022 =
uains contactor with anticlockwise
operation for high speed).
With contactor coubinations which are
uade up of several basic types, the basic
type is always uaintained. Thus, the circuit
diagrau for a reversing star-delta starter,
for exauple, is forued by coubining the
basic circuit of the reversing contactor and
that of the standard star-delta starter.
0ther uarking of electrical apparatus.
for the lEC world 7page 10-2
for North Auerica 7page 9-11
8-26
All about Motors
+
8
irect-on-line start of three-phase uotors
Typical circuits with DIL contactors
Fuseless without overload relay
Short-circuit protection
1)
and overload
protection by ueans of FKZM
uotor-protective circuit-breaker or NZM
circuit-breaker.
Fuses with overload relay
2)
for contactor and
overload relay by ueans of fuses F1.
3)
for contactor by
ueans of fuses F1.
1)
Frotective device in the input wiring in accordance with the uain catalogue,
lndustrial Switchgear or lL installation instructions.
2)
Fuse site in accordance with data on the rating plate of the overload relay.
3)
Fuse site in accordance with the uain catalogue, lndustrial Switchgear
(Technical data for contactors)
L1 L3
1 5
2
3
6 4
L2
13
14
1 5 3
2 6 4
-Q1
PE
U V W
-Q11
M
3
-M1
I > I > I >
L1 L3 L2
1 5 3
2 6 4
PE
U V W
-Q11
M
3
-M1
-F1
-F2
2 6 4 96
95 97
98
L1 L3 L2
1 5 3
2 6 4
PE
U V W
-Q11
M
3
-M1
-F1
-F2
96
95 97
98
All about Motors
8-27
+
8
Typical circuit with bridging of overload relay during starting
Control circuit device
l. 0N
0. 0FF
For connection of further actuators
7Section Three-wire control,
page 8-31
Method of operation: Actuation of
pushbutton l energites the coil of
contactor 011. The contactor switches on
the uotor and uaintains itself after the
button is enabled via its own auxiliary
contact 011/11-13 and pushbutton 0
(three-wirecontrol contact). Contactor 011
is de-energited, in the norual course of
events, by actuation of pushbutton 0. ln the
event of an overload, it is de-energited via
the norually closed contact 95-9 on the
overload relay F2. The coil current is
interrupted, and contactor 011 switches
the uotor off.
Without overload relay with overload relay
The short-circuit strength capacity of the contacts in the circuit
has to be considered when selecting F0.
ouble pushbutton
L1
(Q11/1)
-Q1
13
14
21
22
0
-S11
13
14
13
14
-Q11
A1
A2
-Q11
N
-F0
I
L1
(Q11/1)
95
96
21
22
13
14
-F2
0
-S11
I
13
14
-Q11
A1
A2
-Q11
N
-F0
2
1
2
2
13 14 96
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
1
2
2
Q11 Q11 F2
0 I
A B
All about Motors
8-28
+
8
Application on drive motors with heavy
starting duty
For connection when used with
motor-protective circuit-breakers
PKZM..., PKE and circuit-breakers
NZM(H)... 7Section Fuses with
overload relays, page 8-30
L1 L3
2 6 4
L2
1 5 3
2 6 4
-F1
PE U V W
-Q11
M
3
-M1
-F2
2 6 4
1 5 3
96 98
97 95
-Q14
All about Motors
8-29
+
8
Function
Actuation of pushbutton l energites
bridging contactor 011 which then
uaintains itself via 011/13-11. At the saue
tiue, voltage is applied to the tiuing relay
K1. The uains contactor 011 is closed by
011/11-13 and uaintains itself via
011/11-13. When the set tiue which
corresponds to the start-up tiue of the
uotor - has elapsed, the bridging contactor
011 is disconnected by K1/1-15. K1 is
likewise disconnected and, exactly as 011,
can only be energited again after the uotor
has been switched off by pressing
pushbutton 0. The N/C 011/22-21 prevents
011 and K1 closing whilst the uotor is
running. ln the event of an overload,
norually closed contact 95-9 on the
overload relay F2 effects de-energitation.
011. ridging contactor
K1. Tiuing relays
l. 0N
0. 0FF
7Section Three-wire control,
page 8-31
-Q11
-Q14 -Q14 -Q11
-K1
-K1
L1
(Q11/1)
-F2
95
96
21
22
0
-S11
16
15
13
14
-Q11
A1
A2
-Q14
N
-F0
13
14
-Q1
13
14 13
14 43
44
21
22
A1
A2
A1
A2
I
Q14 Q11
96
22 14
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
F2
0
-S11
I
A B
All about Motors
8-30
+
8
2 operating directions, DIUL reversing contactor
Fuseless without overload relay
Short-circuit protective device and
overload protection by ueans of
uotor-protective circuit-breaker FKZM,
FKE or circuit-breaker NZM.
Fuse site in the input wiring in accordance
with the uain catalogue, lndustrial
Switchgear or AWA installation
instructions.
Fuses with overload relays
1)
for contactor and
overload relay by ueans of fuses F1.
1)
for contactor by
ueans of fuses F1.
1)
Fuse site in accordance with data on the rating plate of the overload relay F2
L1 L3 L2
1 5 3
2 6 4
U V W
M
3
-M1
-Q1
1 5 3
2 6 4
1 5 3
2 6 4
-Q11 -Q12
13
14
PE
I > I > I >
L1 L3 L2
1 5 3
U V W
M
3
-M1
2 6 4
-Q11 -Q12
1 5 3
2 6 4
2 6 4
-F1
-F2
PE
96
97 95
98
L1 L3 L2
U V W
M
3
-M1
2 6 4
-Q12
1 5 3
2 6 4
-F1
PE
-F2
-Q11
1 5 3
All about Motors
8-31
+
8
Changing direction of rotation after actuation
of the 0 pushbutton
Changing direction of rotation without
actuation of the 0 pushbutton
011. Mains contactor, clockwise
012. Mains contactor,
anticlockwise operation
Control circuit
device
(three-way
pushbutton)
l = Clockwise
0 = Stop
ll = anticlockwise
operation
-Q11 -Q12
-Q11
-Q11
-Q12
95
96
21
22
13
14
21
22
13
14
13
14
13
14
21
22
13
14
A1
A2
A1
A2
21
22
21
22
L1
(Q11/1)
0
-S11
-Q12
N
-F0
-Q1
I
I
II
-F2
II
-Q11
-Q12
-Q11
-Q11
-Q12
95
96
21
22
13
14
13
14
13
14
21
22
A1
A2
A1
A2
21
22
21
22
13
14
21
22
13
14
L1
(Q11/1)
0
-S11
-Q12
N
-F0
-Q1
I
I
II
-F2
II
Q12
0
-S11
I
Q12
2
1
2
2
13 14
Q11
96
F2
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
1
2
2
A B
1
4
1
3
C
2
1
2
2
13
II
Q12 Q12 Q11
13 14
Q11
96
F2
13 14
-S11
2
1
2
2
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
1
2
2
A B
1
4
1
3
C
2
1
2
2
0 I II
All about Motors
8-32
+
8
Method of operation: Actuation of
pushbutton l energites the coil of
contactor 011. lt switches on the uotor
running clockwise and uaintains itself
after button l is enables via its own
auxiliary contact 011/11-13 andpushbutton
0 (three-wire control). The norually closed
contact 011/22-21 electrically inhibits the
closingof contactor 012. Whenpushbutton
ll is pressed, contactor 012 closes (uotor
running anticlockwise). epending on the
circuit, direction can be changed frou
clockwise to anticlockwise either after
pressing pushbutton 0, or by directly
pressing the pushbutton for the reverse
direction. ln the event of an overload,
norually closed contact 95-9 of the
overload relay F2 or the norually open
contact 13-11 of the uotor-protective
circuit-breaker or the circuit-breaker will
switch.
Operating direction and two speeds (reversing contactor)
Special circuit (tapped winding) for feed
drives, etc.
F0FWAF. feed or high-speed
FETFACT. high-speed only
ST0F. tapped winding
1 5 3
L1 L3 L2
-F1
2 6 4
PE
M
3
-M1
97 95
98 96
1 5 3
2 6 4
1 5 3
2 6 4
2 6 4 2 6 4
2 6 4
1 5 3
-F2
97 95
98 96
-F21
-Q23
1U
1V
1W
2U
2V
2W
-Q17 -Q22 -Q21
All about Motors
8-33
+
8
Method of operation: Forward travel is
initiated by pressing pushbutton l or ll
according to the speed required.
Fushbutton l switches on the feed uotion
via 017. 017 uaintains itself via its N/0
13-11. lf the feed uoveuent is to occur at
high-speed star contactor 023 is energited
via pushbutton ll which energites the high
speed contactor 021 via its N/0 023/13-11.
oth of the contactors are uaintained via
021/13-11. A direct switch over frou feed
to high-speed during the process is
possible.
high-speed reverse is initiated by
pushbutton lll. Contactor relay K1 picks up
and energites star contactor 023 via
K1/11-13. high-speed contactor 022 is
energited via norually open contacts
K1/13-11 and 023/11-13, and is uaintained
via 022/11-13. The reverse uotion can only
be stopped via pushbutton 0. irect
changeover/reversal is not possible.
0. Stop
l . Lowspeed F0FWAF
(017)
ll. high speed
F0FWAF (021 023)
lll. high speed ACK
(022 023)
017. Feed forward
021. high-speed forward
023. Star contactor
K1. Contactor relay
022. Fetract high-speed
L1
(Q17/1)
-F2/F21
95
96
21
22
0
-S11
13
14
A1
A2
N
-F0
13
14
44
21
22
III
21
22
13
14
22
21
I
13
I
II
14
21
-Q22
-Q21
-Q23
-Q17 -Q21
-Q23
31
32
-Q17
-Q17
-Q22
-Q23
A1
A2
22
21
A1
A2
13
14
-Q17
22
21
-K1
-Q21
-K1
-K1
13
14
A1
A2
-Q22
-Q23
-K1
A1
A2
43
43
44
31
32
31
32
21
22
-Q21
13
14
-Q22
13
14
21
22
III
22
II
8-34
All about Motors
+
8
Control circuit devices for direct-on-line start
Typical example of circuits with contactors DILM
Three-wire control
llluuinated pushbutton
actuators
Two double actuator pushbuttons
ouble actuator
pushbutton with indicator
light
T0-1-15511 spring-return
switchwithautouaticreturn
to position 1
T0-1-153 spring-return
switchwithautouaticreturn
to position of rest
Two-wire control
Changeover switch
T0-1-15521 with fleeting
contact in the interuediate
position
MCS pressure switches
0 I
Q11
2
1
13 14
Q11
96
F2
1
3
1
4
Q11
A2
1
3
1
4
2
1 2
2
2
2
X1 X2
0 I
Q11
13 14
Q11
96
F2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
-S11
I 0
-S11
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
22
1
2
22
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
A B B A
0
Q11
13 14
Q11
96
F2
1
3
1
4
2
1 2
2
I
2
1 2
2
1
3
1
4
A B C
Q11
A2
0
Q11
13 14
Q11
96
F2
1
0
1
2
1
3
4
S11
Start
Start
Q11
13 14
Q11
96
F2
0 1
2
1
3
4
I
0 1 I
S11
Start
Q11
13 14
Q11
96
F2
2
1
3
4
I ON
0
OFF
0 1
S11
Q11
A1
F2
96
-S12
2
1
4
I
P >
8-35
All about Motors
+
8
Star-delta switching of three-phase uotors
Star-delta switch with overload relay
Arrangement in the motor line
ln a standard circuit configuration, the
star-delta switch with overload relay, i.e. a
therually delayed overcurrent relay, is
installed in the cables leading to the uotor
teruinals u1, v1, W1 or v2, W2, u2. The
overload relay can also be operated in a
star circuit as it is usually connected in
series with the uotor winding and the relay
current flowing through it = rated uotor
current x 0.58.
The couplete circuit diagrau 7Section
Autouatic star-delta switches SAlNL,
page 8-37.
Arrangement in the mains supply line
lnstead of the arrangeuent in the uotor
line, the overload relay can be placed in the
mains supply line. The section shown here
indicates how the circuit diagrau differs
frou that on 7Section Autouatic
star-delta switches SAlNL, page 8-37.
For drives where the F2 relay trips out when
the uotor is starting in the star connection,
the F2 relay rated for the rated motor
current can be switched in the mains line.
The tripping delay is thus increased by
approxiuately four to six tiues. ln the star
connection, the current also flows through
the relay but here the relay does not offer
full protection since its liuit current is
increased to 1.73 tiues the phase current.
lt does, however, offer protection against
non-starting.
1 5 3
U1 V1 W1
2 6 4
-Q11
2 6 4
-F2
96
97 95
98
2 6 4
-Q11
-F2
96
97 95
98
-F1
2 6 4
1 5 3
U1 V1 W1
All about Motors
8-36
+
8
Configuration in the delta connection
lnstead of the arrangeuent in the uotor line
or uains supply line, the overload relay can
be placed in the delta connection. The
cutout shown here indicates the uodified
circuit diagrau frou 7Section
Autouatic star-delta switches SAlNL,
page 8-37. When heavy, long-starting
procedures are involved (e.g. for
centrifuges) the F0.58 relay, rated for relay
current = rated uotor current x 2, can also
be connected in the connecting cables
between the delta contactor 015 and the
star contactor 013. ln the star connection
no current then flows through the F2 relay.
The uotor is therefore not protected when
starting. This connection is always used
when exceptionally heavy and long starting
procedures are involved and when
saturable core current transforuer-
operated relays react too quickly.
2 6 4
-Q15
-F2
96
97 95
98
2 6 4
1 5 3
U2 W2 V2
-Q13
1 5 3
2 6 4
All about Motors
8-37
+
8
Automatic star-delta switches SDAINL
Arrangement and rating of protective devices
Rating of switchgear
011, 015 = 0.58 x l
e
013 = 0.33 x l
e
Fosition A Fosition
F2 = 0.58 x l
e
with F1 in position t
a
# 15 s
01 = l
e
t
a
> 15 10 s
Motor protection in 8- and
A-configuration
0nly partial uotor protection in
8-configuration
M
3
-M1
U1
V1
W1
W2
U2
V2
L1 L3 L2
2 6 4
-Q15
-F2
96
97 95
98
2 6 4
1 5 3
-Q13
1 5 3
-F1
1 5 3
2 6 4
1 5 3
2 6 4
-Q11
B
-Q1
A
PE
2 6 4
13
14
21
22
I > I > I >
All about Motors
8-38
+
8
Further notes on the configuration of the
overload relay 7Section Autouatic
star-delta switches SAlNL, page 8-37
SDAINLM12 to SDAINLM55
Pushbutton
K1. Tiuing relay
approx. 10 s
013. Star contactor
015. elta contactor
ouble pushbutton
Function
Fushbutton l energites
tiuing relay K1. The
norually open contact
K1/17-18 (instantaneous
contact) which applies
voltage to star contactor
013, which closes and
applies voltage to uains
contactor 011 vianorually
open contact 013/11-13.
011 and 013 uaintain
theuselves via the N/0
011/11-13 and 011/11-13.
011 applies uains voltage
to uotor M1 in star
connection.
S11
0
()N
Q11
Q13
Q13
Q15
K1
I
Q11
Q11
Q15
Q13
K1
Q15
N Y
K1
21
22
13
14
A2
A1
A2
A1
53
54
22
21
28
17 17
18
14
13
53
54
53
54
A2
A1
A2
A1
22
21
S11
0
()N
Q11
Q13
Q13
Q15
K1
I
Q11
Q11
Q15
Q13
K1
Q15
N Y
K1
21
22
13
14
A2
A1
A2
A1
13
14
22
21
28
17 17
18
14
13
13
14
43
44
A2
A1
A2
A1
22
21
All about Motors
8-39
+
8
Two-wire control
ouble pushbutton
l = 0N
0 = 0FF
For connection of further control circuit
devices 7Section Control circuit
devices for star-delta starting, page 8-15
When the set changeover tiue has
elapsed, K1/17-18 opens the circuit of 013
and after 50 us closes the circuit of 015 via
K1/17-28. Star contactor 013 drops out.
elta contactor 015 closes and switches
uotor M1 to full uains voltage. At the saue
tiue, norually closed contact 015/22-21
interrupts the circuit of 013 thus
interlocking against renewed switching on
while the uotor is running.
The uotor cannot start up again unless it
has previously been disconnected by
pushbutton 0, or in the event of an overload
by the norually closed contact 95-9 of
overload relay F2, or via norually open
contact 13-11 of the uotor-protective
circuit-breaker or standard
circuit-breaker.
44
2
43 13
14
L1
(Q11/1)
-F0
95
96
-F2
13
14
13
14
-S14
-Q11 -Q13 -Q15
-Q11
-S14
MCS
P >
2
4
1
SW
Q
1
Q11
2
1
2
2
13 14
Q11
96
F2
0 I
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
1
2
2
A B
-S11
HAND
All about Motors
8-40
+
8
Automatic star-delta switches SDAINL EM
Fushbutton actuators Maintained contact sensors
K1. Tiuing relay approx. 10 s
013. Star contactor
015. elta contactor
ouble pushbutton
l = 0N
0 = 0FF
L1
(Q11/1)
-F2
95
96
0
-S11
13
14
A1
A2
N
-F0
44
21
22
2
13
14
I
-Q11
-Q15
-K1
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
-Q15 -Q13
43
44
43
-Q11 -Q13
-F0
95
96
-F2
13
14
-S14
13
14
13
14
-Q1
-Q11
14
13
22
21
-Q13
-Q11
-S14
MCS
2
4
1
SW
Q
-K1
22
21
16
15
18
-Q13
1
L1
(Q11/1)
Q11
2
1
2
2
44 14
Q11
96
F2
0 I
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
1
2
2
A B
-S11
-Q11
P >
HAND
All about Motors
8-41
+
8
For connection of further control circuit
devices 7Section Control circuit
devices for star-delta starting, page 8-15
Function
Fushbutton l energites star contactor 013,
the norually open contact 013/11-13
applies voltage to uains contactor 011.
011 closes and applies uains voltage to
uotor M1 in star connection. 011 and 013
uaintain theuselves via norually open
contact 011/11-13 and 011 additionally via
011/11-13 and pushbutton 0. Tiuing relay
011 is energited at the saue tiue as uains
contactor K1. When the set changeover
tiue has elapsed, K1 opens the circuit of
013 via the changeover contact 15-1 and
closes the circuit of 015 via 15-18.
elta contactor 015 closes and switches
uotor M1 to full uains voltage. At the saue
tiue, norually closed contact 015/22-21
interrupts the circuit of 013 thus
while the uotor is running.
The uotor cannot be started up again
unless it has previously been disconnected
by pushbutton 0, or in the event of an
overload, by the norually closed contact
95-9 of the overload relay F2, or via the
norually open contact 13-11 of the
circuit-breaker.
All about Motors
8-42
+
8
Automatic reversing star-delta switches
2 operating directions
Rating of switchgear
011, 012. l
e
F2, 015. 0.58 x l
e
013. 0.33 x l
e
The uaxiuuuuotor output is liuited by the
upstreaureversing contactor, and is lower
than with autouatic star-delta switches for
only one direction of operating direction.
Standard version. Felay current = uotor
rated operational current x 0.58
For other arrangeuents of overload relay
7Section Star-delta switch with
overload relay, page 8-35
M
3
-M1
U1
V1
W1
W2
U2
V2
L1 L3 L2
2 6 4
-Q12
-F2
96
97 95
98
2 6 4
-Q15
1 5 3
-F1
1 5 3
2 6 4
1 5 3
2 6 4
-Q11
-Q1
PE
2 6 4
13 1 3 5
14
21
22
-Q13
1 5 3
2 6 4
I > I > I >
All about Motors
8-43
+
8
Changing direction of rotation after actuation of the 0
pushbutton
Three-way pushbutton
Control circuit devices
l = clockwise
0 = Stop
ll = anticlockwise
operation
L1
(Q11/1)
-F2
0
-S11
A1
A2
N
-F0
44
13
14
II
-Q11
-K1
A1
A2
-Q15 -Q13
43
44
43
-Q11
-Q1
-Q11
-Q11
I
21
22
95
96
21
22
-Q12
13
14
13
14
-Q12
-K1 -K1
-Q12
13
14
13
14
II
I
21
22
21
22
A1
A2
-Q15 -Q13
21
22
-Q12
A1
A2
A1
A2
21
22
21
22
18
17
28
17
0
Q12
13 14
Q11
96
F2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
I
1
3
1
4
A B C
13
Q12
II
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
22
1
2
2
-S11
All about Motors
8-44
+
8
7Section Control circuit devices for
star-delta starting, page 8-15
Function
Fushbutton l energites contactor 011
(e.g. clockwise). Fushbutton ll energites
contactor 012 (e.g. anticlockwise
operation). The contactor first energited
applies voltage to the uotor winding and
uaintains itself via its own auxiliary
contact 11-13 and pushbutton 0. The
norually open contact 11-13 fitted to each
uains contactor energites the star
contactor 013. 013 energites and switches
on uotor M1 in the star connection. At the
saue tiue, tiuing relay K1 is triggered.
When the set changeover tiue has
elapsed, K1/17-18 opens the circuit of 013.
013 drops out. K1/17-28 closes the circuit
of 015.
elta contactor 015 energites and
switches uotor M1 to the delta
configuration, i.e. full uains voltage. At the
saue tiue, norually closed contact
015/22-21 interrupts the circuit of 013, thus
while the uotor is running. Motor direction
can be changed, either after pressing
pushbutton 0, or by direct actuation of the
reverse button, depending upon the circuit.
ln the event of an overload, disconnection
is effected by the norually closed contact
95-9 of the overload relay F2.
Changing direction of rotation without actuation of the 0
l = clockwise
0 = Stop
ll = anticlockwise
operation
L1
(Q11/1)
-F2
0
-S11
A1
A2
N
-F0
44
13
14
II
-Q11 -K1
A1
A2
-Q15 -Q13
43
44
43
-Q11
18
17
-Q1
-Q11
-K1
-Q11
I
21
22
95
96
21
22
-Q12
13
14
13
14
-Q12
-Q12
13
14
13
14
II
I
21
22
21
22
A1
A2
-K1
-Q15 -Q13
21
22
-Q12
A1
A2
A1
A2
21
22
21
22
28
17
2
1
2
2
13 14 96
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
Q11 Q11 F2
0 I
A B
13
Q12
14
Q12
II
-S11
2
1
2
22
1
2
2
1
4
1
3
C
8-45
All about Motors
+
8
Control circuit devices for star-delta starting
Automatic star-delta switches
Pulse encoder
llluuinated pushbutton
actuators
Two double actuator pushbuttons
ouble actuator pushbutton
with indicator light
Spring-return switch
T0-1-15511 with autouatic
return to position 1.
return to position of rest.
Two-wire control
Changeover switch
T0-1-15521 with fleeting
contact in the interuediate
position
e.g. selector switch
Cau switch T
LS position switches
MCS pressure switches
F2 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11
2
1 2
2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
1 2
2
96 13
X1 X2
14
-S11
44 A2
0 I
F2
-S11 -S11
2
1
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
0
A B A B
I 0 I
96
Q11
14
Q11
44
2
2
96 13
1
3
2
1
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
A2 14 44
F2
-S11
Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11
A B C
1
0
Q11
13 14
Q11
96
F2
1
0
1
2
1
3
4
S11
Start
Start
Q11
13 14
Q11
96
F2
0 1
2
1
3
4
I
0 1 I
S11
Start
Q11
13 14
Q11
96
F2
2
1
3
4
I ON
0
OFF
0 1
S11
Q11
14
Q11
44
F2
S14
96
All about Motors
Control circuit devices for star-delta starting
8-46
+
8
Three-phase current-reversing contactor-reversing star-delta switch
Two-way pushbutton
1)
without
self-uaintaining circuit (inching)
for use only with reversing
contactors
Three-way pushbutton with indicator light. Feversing
after actuation of pushbutton 0
1)
T0-1-8211, without
self-uaintaining circuit
(inching)
autouatic return to off
position only for reversing
contactors
Changeover switch
1)
Switch T0-1-8210
reuains in position 1 or 2
return to position 1 or 2
Liuit switch
Connected by reuoving the links
between the contactor teruinals
011/13 and 012/22 and between
012/13 and 011/22 and
interposing the position switches.
1)
0verload relays always with reclosing lockout
-S11
2
2 2
1
1
4
1
3
2
2 2
1
1
4
1
3
I II
B A
13
Q12
13
Q11
96
F2
13
-S11
2
2 2
1
1
4
1
3
2
2 2
1
1
4
1
3
2
2 2
1
1
4
1
3
I
A
B D
E
C
Q11
A2 21 96
Q12
21 II
Q11
14
Q12
13
Q12 F2
0
2
3
4
0 1 2
1
Q12
13
F2
96
Q11
13
FS 4011
0
1 2
FS 684
0
1 2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 1 START START
7
8
Q11 F2
96 13
Q12
13
Q12
14
FS 140660
0
1 2
START START
Q11/13
Q12/22
Q12/13
Q11/22
8-47
All about Motors
+
8
Fole-changing uotors
The speed is deteruined by the nuuber of
poles on three-phase asynchronous
uotors. Several speeds can be obtained by
altering the nuuber of poles.
The usual types are.
The various tapped winding configurations
give differential output ratios for the two
speeds.
The A/ -connection coues nearest to
satisfying the uost usual requireuent for
constant torque. lt has the additional
advantage that, because nine teruinals
are available, y/d starting can be used to
provide suooth starting or to reduce the
startingcurrent for thelowspeedcondition
(7Section Motor windings,
page 8-50).
The 8/88-connection preferred for
better uatching of the uotor to uachines
in which the torque increases by a
quadratic factor (puups, fans, rotary
coupressors). All uulti-speed switches
can be used for both types of connection.
2 speeds separate windings
ln theory, uotors with separate windings
allow any coubination of speed and any
output ratio. oth windings are arranged in
y connection and are coupletely
independent of one another.
Freferred speed coubinations are.
The code nuubers are prefixed to the uain
notations to denote increasing speed.
Exauple. 1u, 1v, 1W, 2u, 2v, 2W
Couparable to EN 0031-8
two speeds 1.2 1 convertible tapped winding
2 speeds as required 2 separate windings
three speeds 1 convertible tapped winding 1.2,
a separate winding
four speeds 2 convertible tapped windings 1.2
two speeds Tapped winding
Type of connectionA/88 8/88
0utput ratio 1/1.51.8 0.3/1
Motors with tapped
winding
1500/3000 750/1500 500/1000
Motors with separate
windings
1000/1500
No. of poles 1/2 /1 8/1 12/
Code no. low/high 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
All about Motors
8-48
+
8
Motor circuit
three speeds
The 1.2 - speeds tapped windings are
suppleuented by the speed of the separate
winding. This speed can be below,
between or above the two tapped winding
speeds. The connection uust consider it
(7Figure, page 8-78).
Freferred speed coubinations are.
Connection A
Selection of low and high
speed only frou tero. No
return to lowspeed, only to
tero.
Connection B
Selection of either speed
frou tero. Switching frou
low to high speed possible.
Feturn only to tero.
Connection C
Selection of either speed
frou tero. Switching back
and forward between low
andhighspeed(highbraking
torque). Feturn also to tero.
High speed
Low speed
Off (zero)
Switch-on and further switching
Switch-off
Speeds 1000/1500/3000 750/1000/1500 750/1500/3000 = separate
winding (in the
circuit
diagraus)
No. of
poles
/1/2 8//1 8/1/2
Connection X Y Z
All about Motors
8-49
+
8
Motor circuit
four speeds
The 1.2-speeds tapped windings can follow
in sequence or overlap, as the following
exauples show.
For uotors having 3 or 1 speeds the
non-connected winding has to be opened
at certain pole ratios to avoid inductive
circulating currents. This is achieved via
additional uotor teruinals. Aseries of cau
switches is equipped with this connection
(7Section Multi-Speed Switches,
page 1-7).
Connection A
Selection of any speed only
froutero. Feturn only to tero.
Connection B
Selectionof any speedfrou
tero and frou low speed.
Feturn only to tero.
Connection C
Selectionof any speedfrou
tero and frou low speed.
Feturn to low speed (high
braking torque) or to tero.
3rd speed
2nd speed
1st speed
Off (zero)
Switch-on and
further switching
Switch-off
1st winding 500/1000 2nd winding 1500/3000 = 500/1000/1500/3000
or
1st winding 500/1000 2nd winding 750/1500 = 500/750/1000/1500
8-50
All about Motors
+
8
Motor windings
Tapped winding
2 speeds
Motor circuit
2 speeds
2 separate windings
Tapped winding
with 8--starting at
low speed
Low speed - Low speed 8 Low speed Low speed 8
high speed high speed high speed Low speed -
7Figure,
page 8-55
7Figure, page 8-55 7Figure, page 8-59
high speed
7Figure, page 8-8
1U
1W 1V
2W 2V
2U
1U
1W 1V
2W
2V 2U
1W 1V
1U
1U
1W 1V
2W1
2U2
2V1
2V2
2U1
2W2
1U
2U
1V 1W
2W 2V
1U
2U
1W
2V
1V
2W
2W 2V
2U
1V
1W
2W2
1U
2V1 2V2
2U2
2W1 2U1
1U 2V2
2U1
1V
1W
2W1 2V1
2W2
2U2
All about Motors
Motor windings
8-51
+
8
Tapped winding
3 speeds
Motor circuit X
2 windings, uediuu and
high speed tapped
winding
Motor circuit Y
2 windings, low and high
speed tapped winding
Motor circuit Z
2 windings, low and
uediuu speed tapped
winding
2 2 2
or 2 or 2 or 2
Low speed
Separate winding
1
Mediuu speed
Separate winding
1
high speed
Separate winding
1
7Figure, page 8-77 7Figure, page 8-79 7Figure, page 8-81
2U
2W 2V
3W
3V
3U
1U
1W 1V
3W
3V
3U
1U
1W 1V
2W
2V
2U
2U
2W 2V
3W 3V
3U
1U
1W 1V
3W 3V
3U
1U
1W 1V
2W 2V
2U
1W 1V
1U
2W 2V
2U
3W 3V
3U
Notes
8-52
+
8
8-53
All about Motors
+
8
Multi-speed contactors
Certain operating sequences for
pole-changing uotors uay be necessary,
or undesirable, depending on the nature of
the drive. lf, for exauple, the starting
teuperature rise is to be reduced or high
inertia loads are to be accelerated, it is
advisable to switch to low speed first and
then to high speed.
lt uay be necessary to prevent switching
frou high to low speed in order to avoid
oversynchronous braking. lnother cases, it
should be possible to switch each speed
on and off directly. The operating
sequence and indexing facilities of cau
switches allow for these possibilities.
Multi-speed contactor switches can
achieve these connecting by interlocking
with suitable control circuit devices.
Fuse protection of the overload relays
When a couuon fuse is used in the input
wiring, it uust not be larger than the
back-up fuses specified on the naueplate
of either overload relay, otherwise each
relay uust be protected by its own back-up
fuse, as shown in the diagrau.
L1
-F11
-Q17 -Q21
-F21 -F2
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
97
98
95
96
L2 L3
97
98
95
96
-F1
All about Motors
8-54
+
8
Fuseless surface mounting
Fole-changing uotors can be protected
against short-circuits and overloads by
uotor-protectivecircuit-breakersFKZ/FKE
or circuit-breakers NZM. These provide all
the advantages of a fuseless circuit.
Norually, the fuse in input wiring protects
the switches frou welding.
L1
-Q1
-Q17 -Q21
1
I > I > I >
3 5
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
13
14
L2 L3
-Q2
1
I > I > I >
3 5
2 4 6
13
14
8-55
All about Motors
+
8
Multi-speed switch for three-phase uotors
Tapped winding, 1 operating direction, 2 speeds
Fuseless, without overload relay, with
circuit-breaker.
7Section Motor windings, page 8-50
Synchronous speeds
0ne uulti-speed winding
L1
-Q1
-Q21 -Q17
PE
M
-M1
2U
2V
2W
1U
1V
1W
3
1
I > I > I >
3 5
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
-Q23
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
13
14
L2 L3
-Q2
1
I > I > I >
3 5 13
14
All about Motors
8-56
+
8
Fating of switchgear
02, 017. l
1
(low speed)
01, 021. l
2
(high speed)
023. 0.5 x l
2
Motor teruinals 1u, 1v, 1W 2u, 2v, 2W
Auount of poles 12
rpu 500 1000
Auount of poles 8 1
rpu 750 1500
Auount of poles 1 2
rpu 1500 3000
Contactors 017 021, 023
All about Motors
8-57
+
8
Connection A ( Figure, page 8-49)
1 three-way pushbutton
7Figure, page 8-3, 7Figure,
page 8-1, 7Figure, page 8-5
Function
Fushbutton l energites uains contactor
017 (lowspeed). 017 uaintains itself via its
N/0 13-11. Fushbutton ll energites star
contactor 023 and via its N/0 13-11 uains
contactor 021. 021 and 023 uaintain
theuselves via N/0 13-11 of 021.
Speed can be changed either after
pressing pushbutton 0 (connection A) or
directly by pressing the appropriate
pushbutton (connection C), depending
upon the circuit. The uotor can be
switched off either by pressing pushbutton
0, or in the event of an overload, by N/0
13-11 of the circuit-breaker.
l. Low speed (017)
0. Stop
ll. high speed (021 023)
017. Mains contactor, low speed
023. Star contactor
021. Mains contactor, high speed
L1
(Q11/1)
-F0
-Q1
-Q2
0
II
-S11
-Q17
-Q17 -Q23
N
-Q23
-Q21
I
13
14
13
14
21
22
21
22
14
13
14
13
21
22
22
21
A1
A2
A1
A2
-Q21
-Q17
-Q23
-Q21
22
21
13
14
A1
14
II
I
22
14
13
21
13
A2
-S11
14 13 13
I II 0
A B C
96
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
Q17 F21 Q21 Q21
All about Motors
8-58
+
8
Connection C ( Figure, page 8-49)
7Figure, page 8-
l. Low speed (017)
0. Stop
023. Star contactor
L1
(Q11/1)
-F0
-Q1
-Q2
0
II
-S11
-Q17
-Q17 -Q23
N
-Q23
-Q21
I
13
14
13
14
21
22
21
22
14
13
14
13
22
21
21
22
A1
A2
A1
A2
-Q21
-Q23
-Q17
-Q21
22
21
13
14
A1
14
II
I
22
14
13
21
13
A2
14
-S11
Q17
14
Q21
13
Q21
13
I II 0
A B C
Q17
96
F21
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
All about Motors
8-59
+
8
2 separate windings, an operating direction, 2 speeds
Multi-speed contactor , fuseless without
overload relay
01, 017 = l
1
(low speed)
02, 021 = l
2
(high speed)
Motor windings 7Section Motor
windings, page 8-50
L1
-Q1
-Q17 -Q21
PE
M
-M1
1U
1V
1W
2U
2V
2W
3
1
I > I > I >
3 5
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
13
14
L2 L3
-Q2
1
I > I > I >
3 5
2 4 6
13
14
All about Motors
8-60
+
8
Multi-speed contactor with fuses and
overload relay
Fuse site in accordance with data on the
naueplate of the overload relays F2 and
F21. lf overload relays F2 and F21 cannot be
protected by a couuon fuse, then use
connection 7Figure, page 8-53.
windings, page 8-50
L1
F1
F1
F21 F2
M1
1W
1V
1U
2W
2V
2U
Q17 Q21
1 3 5
2 4 6
96 98
95 97
96 98
95 97
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
L2 L3
M
3
All about Motors
8-61
+
8
Connection A (7Figure, page 8-19)
Connection C (7Figure, page 8-19)
l. Low speed (017)
0. Stop
7Figure, page 8-7
L1
FO
F2
F21
Q1
13
14
13
21
22
21
22
14
13
14
13
22
21
A1
A2
A1
13
14
14
13
21
22
95
96
95
96
21
A2
14
Q2
0
S11
Q17
Q21 Q17
Q21
I
II
Q17 Q21
N
II
I
22
L1
(Q17/1)
-F0
0
-S11
A1
A2
A1
A2
II
I II
22
21
-Q21
22
21
95
96
22
21
22
21
14
13
-Q21
-Q17
-Q21
-Q17
14
13
N
-F21
-F2
FL1
14
13
14
13
-Q1
-Q2
95
96
14
13
-Q17
22
21
14
13
I
-S11
14
Q21
13
Q21
13
I II 0
A B C
Q17
96
F21
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2 -S11
A
Q21
13
Q21
14
Q17
14
I 0 II
F21
96
Q17
13
B C
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
All about Motors
8-62
+
8
Operating principle
Actuation of pushbutton l energites the
coil of contactor 017. 017 switches on the
low speed of the uotor and after
pushbutton l is released, uaintains itself
via its auxiliary contact 13-11 and
pushbutton 0.
Speed can be changed either after
pressing pushbutton 0, or directly by
pressing the appropriate pushbutton,
depending upon the connection. The uotor
is switched off either by pressing
pushbutton 0, or in the event of an
overload, by norually closed contact 95-9
of overload relays F2 and F21.
8-63
All about Motors
+
8
Control circuit devices for uulti-speed contactors
0ne three-way pushbutton with indicator
lights
l . Low speed (017)
0. Stop
ll . high speed (021)
-F0
L1
0
A1
A2
A1
A2
II
I
22
21
-Q21
22
21
22
21
14
13
-Q21
-Q17
-Q21
14
13
N
95
96
14
13
-Q17
14
13
I
-Q17
22
21
II
-F2/F21
22
21
A
B D
B
-S11
I 0 21 II
13
A
B C
D E
2
1
2
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
4
1
3
2
1
1
3
1
4
1
4
Q17
A2
Q21
21
Q17
14
Q21
13
Q21
96
F21
All about Motors
8-64
+
8
2 three-way pushbuttons
l. Low speed (017)
0. Stop
ll. high speed (021)
Feuove existing links and rewire
-F0
L1
95
21
22
21
22
21
22
22
21
22
21
21
14
13
14
13
22
21
13
14
13
14
22
22
21
13
14
13
14
96
-F2/F21
0a
0b
IIb
Ib
IIa
IIb
IIa
-Q17
-Q21
-Q21
-Q17
A
B
Ia
Ib
Ia
13
A
96
B C
B A C
-S11 -S11
Ia
2
1
2
2
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
IIa 0a Ib IIb 0b
Q21
13
Q17
14
Q21 F21
All about Motors
8-65
+
8
Connection A (7Figure, page 8-19) T0-1-8210 changeover switch
Always set overload relay to uanual reset
Connection B (7Figure, page 8-19)
L1
95
96
-F2/F21
-S12
-Q17
-Q21
-Q17
-Q21
-S12
A B
1 2
1 3
14
13
22
14
13
21
22
21
2 4
-F0
S12
Q21
13
F2
96
Q17
13
1 0 2
1
2
3
4
L1
95
96
21
22
21
22
14
13
14
13
13
14
14
13
22
21
A1
A2
A1
A2
22
21
-F0
-F2/F21
0
II
I
A
B
II
N
-Q21 -Q17
-Q17 -Q21
-Q17 -Q21
All about Motors
8-66
+
8
Connection B (7Figure, page 8-19)
Control circuit device for connection
-F0
L1
0a
-Q21
22
21
22
21
14
13
-Q21
14
13
95
96
-Q17
IIb
IIa
-F2(1)
22
21
B
0b
22
21
Ib
21
22
Ia IIa IIb
14
13 14
13
A
14
13
-Q17
22
21
14
13
A
Q21
13
F21
96
B C
Q17
14
Q17
13
Ia
S11 S11
Q21
14
0a IIa Ib 0b IIb
21 22
13 14
21 22
13 14
21 22
13 14
21 22
13 14
21 22
13 14
21 22
13 14
A B C
All about Motors
8-67
+
8
Connection C (7Figure, page 8-19)
Control circuit device for connection C
-F0
L1
0a
-Q21
22
21
22
21
14
13
-Q21
14
13
95
96
14
13
-Q17
IIb
-Q17
IIa
-F2(1)
22
21
A
B
0b
22
21
Ib
22
21
Ia
22
21
14
13
IIa
Ib
Ia
IIb
14
13
14
13
22
21
22
21
-S11
A
Q21
13
F21
96
B C
Q17
14 13
Ia
-S11
Q21
14
0a IIa
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
Ib 0b IIb
A B C
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
8-68
All about Motors
+
8
Tapped winding, 1 operating direction, 2 speeds
Multi-speed contactor
Star-delta startup at low speed
Fuseless
Without overload relay
01, 017 = l
1
(low speed)
02, 021 = l
2
(high speed)
019, 023 = 0.5 x l
2
L1
PE
Y
-M1
3
2W1
2V1
2U1
1W 1V 1U
1 3 5
2 4
L2 L3
3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
-Q17
-Q23
-Q21
6
2W2
2V2
2U2
1 3 5
1
1 3 5
2 4 6
3 5
2 4 6
1
13
14
-Q1
-Q19
2 4 6
-Q2
14
13 1 3 5
I > I > I > I > I > I >
All about Motors
8-69
+
8
With fuses and overload relays
F2, 017 = l
1
(low speed)
F21, 021 = l
2
(high speed)
019, 023 = 0.5 x l
2
F1 = l
2
0verload relays F2 and F21 are not used on
uulti-speed contactors without uotor
protection. lf F2 and F21 cannot be
protected by a couuon fuse, then use
connection on 7Figure, page 8-53.
windings, page 8-50
L1
PE
Y
-M1
3
2W1
2V1
2U1
1W 1V 1U
L2 L3
5
2 4 6
-Q17
-Q23
-Q21
2W2
2V2
2U2
1 3 5
1
1 3 5
2 4 6
3 5
2 4 6
1
-F1
-Q19
2 4 6
-F21 -F2
2 4 6
97 95
98 96
3
97 95
98 96
2 4 6
All about Motors
8-70
+
8
Function
Actuation of pushbutton l energites the
coil of star contactor 023. lts N/0 13-11
energites the coil of contactor 017. The
uotor runs in star at low speed. The
contactors are uaintained via auxiliary
contact 017/13-11. At the saue tiue, tiuing
relay K3 is triggered. When the set tiue has
elapsed, K3/15-1 opens the circuit of 023.
023 drops out, the coil of delta contactor
019 is energited and uaintains itself via
019/13-11. The tiuing relay is de-energited
via N/C 019/32-31.
The uotor runs in delta at low speed.
Actuation of pushbutton ll de-energites
the coil of 017 and via 017/22-21 energites
the coil of 021. This state is uaintained by
021/13-11. The coil of star contactor 023 is
re-energited by norually open contact
021/11-13. The uotor runs at high speed.
Fushbutton 0 (= Stop) executes
disconnection.
Connection
Low speed selected
only frouoff position,
high speed only via
low speed without
actuation of the Stop
button.
Three-way
pushbutton
l. Low speed
(017, 019)
0. Stop
ll. high speed (021,
019, 023)
017. Mains contactor, low
speed
K3. Tiuing relays
023. Star contactor
019. elta contactor
021. Mains contactor,
high speed
-F0
-F21
-Q1
-Q2
-S11
-Q17
-Q21
-Q17
-Q17
21
21
A1
A2
N
22
22
-Q21
-Q21
-Q21
-Q17
-Q23 -Q19
-Q19
-Q23
-Q19
-Q19
-K3
-K3
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
31
32
21
22
21
A1
A2
21
22
44
43
22
13
15
16 14
13
14
13
14
13
14
43
44
L1
(Q17/1)
0
II
I
-Q23
14
13
22
21
95
96
95
96
14
13
14
13
14
13
II
-S11
A
Q17
13
Q19
44 14
F21
96
B C
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
Q17
43
Q17
14
I 0 II
Q21
22
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
All about Motors
8-71
+
8
Tapped winding, 2 operating directions, 2 speeds (direction preselected)
0verload relays F2 and
F21 are not used on
uulti-speed contactors
without uotor protection.
011, 012 = l
2
(low and
high speed)
F2, 017 = l
1
(low speed)
F1, 021 = l
2
023 = 0.5 x l
2
(high speed)
L1
PE
-M1
2W
2V
2U
1 3 5
2 4
L2 L3
-F1
2 4 6
2 4 6
-Q11
97
-Q17
6
1W
1V
1U
1 3 5
-F21
98
95
96 2 4 6
97
98
95
96
-F2
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
M
3
-Q12
-Q21
-Q23
All about Motors
8-72
+
8
Function
Contactor 011 is energited by pressing
pushbutton l. Contactor 011 selects the
operating direction, and uaintains itself
after release of pushbutton l via its
auxiliary contact 11-13 and pushbutton 0.
Speed-selection buttons lll and lv are
uade operative by 011/11-13.
Fushbutton lll energites 017, which
uaintains itself via its contact 11-13.
Fushbutton lv energites high speed
contactors 023 and 021. Auxiliary contact
021/21-22 uakes low-speed pushbutton lll
inoperative. Fushbutton 0 uust be pressed
before any change in speed or direction.
Five-way
pushbutton
Connection
Change of direction
F0FWAFFEvEFS
E after actuation of
Stop button,
optionally followed
bySL0WFASTwith
no return to low
speed.
0. Stop
l. Forward (011)
ll. ack (012)
lll. Slow (017)
lv. Fast (021 023)
L1
(Q11/1)
-F0
0
-S11
A1
A2
A1
A2
-Q17
-Q17
A1
A2
A1
A2
N
-F21
-F2
II
I
II
14
13
22
21
-Q11
-Q17
-Q11 -Q21
14
13
22
21
95
96
22
22
21
14
13
44
43
-Q11
-Q21
95
96
21
A1
A2
22
21
I
22
21
-Q11
14
13
IV
22
21
14
13
III
22
21
-Q23
-Q12
-Q23
-Q23
21
22
14
13
-Q12
-Q21
14
13
IV
III
21
22
-Q12
44
43
-Q12
14
13
14
13
Q11
13
I
F21
96
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
-S11
A C
0
B D
Q12
13
Q12
14
Q17
13
Q11
43
Q17
14
Q17
21
II III IV
E
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
All about Motors
8-73
+
8
Tapped winding, 2 operating directions, 2 speeds
(direction and speed selected simultaneously)
Multi-speed contactor Fuseless without overload relay
01, 017, 018 = l
1
(low speed)
02, 021, 022 = l
2
023 = 0.5 x l
2
(high speed)
L1
PE
M
-M1
3
1W
1V
1U
2W
2V
2U
-Q23
1 3 5
2 4 6
L2 L3
-Q1
I> I> I>
-Q2
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
-Q17
I> I> I>
13
14
-Q18 -Q21 -Q22
13
14
All about Motors
8-74
+
8
With fuses and overload relays
F2, 017, 018 = l
1
(low speed)
F21, 021, 022 = l
2
023 = 0.5 x l
2
(high speed)
0verload relays F2 and F21 are not used on
uulti-speed contactors without uotor
protection
L1
PE
M
-M1
3 1W
1V
1U
2W
2V
2U
1 3 5
2 4 6
L2 L3
-F2
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
-Q17
-F1
-Q18
97 95
98 96
-Q23
97 95
98 96
-F21
2 4 6
2 4 6
-Q21 -Q22
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
All about Motors
8-75
+
8
Connection
Siuultaneous selection of direction and
speed via one pushbutton. Always operate
Stop button before changeover.
017. Slow forward
018. Slow back
021. Fast forward
023. Star contactor
K1. Contactor relay
022. Fast back
L1
(Q17/1)
N
-F0
0
-S11
I
-Q18
A1
A2
A1
A2
-Q21
21
22
-Q21
14
13
22
21
95
96
II
22
21
-Q17
21
II
21
22
22
-Q23
21
-Q17
-Q22 -Q23
-Q22
-Q21
-Q23
A1
A2
A1
A2
-Q23
-Q22
-Q18 -Q17
22
-Q22
14
14
13
III
95
96
-F2
-F21
14
13
-Q2
-Q1
-Q17
13
31
32
-Q21
22
21
22
21
-K1
I
14
13 14
13
IV
14
13
22 21 14
21 22 13
-Q18
-K1
-K1
A1
A2
14
13
44
43
A1
A2
-K1
43
44
14
13
32
31
III
IV
21
22
-Q18
31
32
31
32 14
13
14
13
All about Motors
8-76
+
8
Function
esired speed and operating direction can
be selected by actuation of one of the four
pushbutton. Contactors 017, 018, 021 and
023 uaintain theuselves by their contact
11-13 and can be de-energited only by
actuation of pushbutton 0. Contactors 021
and 022 can uaintain theuselves only
when 023 has picked up and contact
023/13-11 or 11-13 is closed.
Five-way pushbutton
0. Stop
l. Slow forward (017)
ll. Slow back (018)
lll. Fast forward (021 023)
lv. Fast back (022 023)
Q18
22
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
-S11
A
Q21
21
Q23
22
Q17
21
I 0 II
F21
96
Q23
14
Q18
32
Q22
32
III IV
B C D E
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
22
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
All about Motors
8-77
+
8
Tapped winding, medium and high speed, 1 operating direction, 3 speeds, 2 windings
Multi-speed contactors with overload
relay 7Figure, page 8-79
Motor circuit X7Section Motor circuit
X, page 8-51
Synchronous Speed
02, 011 . l
1
(low speed)
01, 017 . l
2
(uediuu speed)
03, 021 . l
3
(high speed)
023 . 0.5 x l
3
L1
PE
M
-M1
3
3W
3V
3U
2W
2V
2U
1 3 5
2 4
L2 L3
-Q1
I> I> I>
-Q2
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6 2 4 6
-Q17
I> I> I>
13
14
-Q23
-Q11 -Q21
13
14
6
1W 1V 1U
13
14
2 4 6
I> I> I>
-Q3
1 3 5
Winding 1 2 2
Motor
teruinals
1u, 1v,
1W
2u, 2v,
2W
3u, 3v,
3W
Auount of
poles
12 8 1
FFM 500 750 1500
Auount of
poles
8 1 2
FFM 750 1500 3000
Auount of
poles
1 2
FFM 1000 1500 3000
Contactors 011 017 021,
023
All about Motors
8-78
+
8
Function
017 (low speed), pushbutton ll uains
contactor 011 (uediuuspeed), pushbutton
lll star contactor 023 and via its N/0
023/11-13 uains contactor 021 (high
speed). All contactors uaintaintheuselves
by their auxiliary contact 13-11.
Speed sequence frou low to high is
optional. Switching in steps frou high to
uediuu or low speed is not possible. The
uotor is always switched off by pressing
pushbutton 0. ln the event of an overload,
norually open contact 13-11 of the
circuit-breaker can also switch off.
Connection of uotor winding. X
Connection A
Connection A
Selection of any speed only froutero.
No return to low speed, only to tero.
Connection B
Selection of any speed frou tero or
frou low speed. Feturn only to tero.
011. Low speed winding 1
017. Mediuu speed winding 2
023. high speed winding 2
Four-way pushbuttons
0. Stop
l. Low speed (011)
ll. Mediuu speed (017)
lll. high speed (021 023)
L1
(Q17/1)
-F0
0
-S11
A1
A2
A1
A2
21
22
22
21
-Q17
21
-Q23
-Q17
-Q23 -Q21
A1
A2
A1
A2
-Q23
N
-Q17
14
13
III
14
13
-Q2
-Q1
31
32
-Q3
III
22
21
14
13
II
14
13
I
II
14
13
-Q11
14
13
13
14
22
21
22
21
-Q21
21
22
22
-Q11
-Q21
31
32
32
31
-Q11 -Q17
-Q11
-Q21
-Q23
32
31
14
13
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
A
Q21
13
Q11
14
Q17
14
I 0 II
F22
96
Q21
14
III
B C D
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
-S11
A
Q21
13
Q11
14
Q17
14
I 0 II
F22
96
Q23
14
III
B C D
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
22
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
Q11
13
Q17
13
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
All about Motors
8-79
+
8
Tapped winding, low and high speed, 1 operating direction, 3 speeds, 2 windings
Multi-speed contactor without overload
Motor circuit Y 7Section Motor circuit
Y, page 8-51
Synchronous Speed
F2, 017. l
1
(low speed)
F3, 011. l
2
(uediuu speed)
F1, 021. l
3
(high speed)
023. 0.5 x l
3
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
M1
2 4 6
F1
97 95
98 96
Q17 Q11
1 3 5
2 4 6
F2
2 4 6
F3
97 95
98 96 2 4 6
Q21
1 3 5
2 4 6
F4
97 95
98 96 2 4 6
1 3 5
Q23
1 3 5
2 4 6
3U 3V 3W
2U
2V
2W
1U
1V
1W
M
3
1 3 5 1 3 5
Winding 2 1 2
Motor
teruinals
1u, 1v,
1W
2u, 2v,
2W
3u, 3v,
3W
Auount of
poles
12 8
FFM 500 750 1000
Auount of
poles
8 1
FFM 750 1000 1500
Contactors 017 011 021,
023
All about Motors
8-80
+
8
Function
contactor 011 (uediuuspeed), pushbutton
lll star contactor 023 and via its N/0
speed). All contactors uaintaintheuselves
by their auxiliary contact 13-11.
norually closed contact 95-9 of overload
relays F2, F21 and F22 can also switch off.
Connection of uotor winding. Y
Connection A
Connection A
Selection of any speed only frou
tero. No return to low speed, only
to tero.
Connection B
Selection of any speed froutero or
froulowspeed. Feturn only to tero.
0. Stop
l. Low speed (017)
ll. Mediuu speed (011)
lll. high speed (021 022)
L1
F0
0
S2
S1
S3
S0
A1
A2
A1
A2
Q17
21
Q17 Q21
A1
A2
A1
A2
Q23
N
III
14
13
F3
F2
F4
III
II
I
II
14
13
14
13
22
21
22
21
21
22
22
Q11
31
32
32
31
Q11 Q11
Q21
Q23
14
13
22
21
95
96
22
21
22
21
14
13
14
13
Q11
31
32
Q21
Q23 Q23
32
31
Q17 Q21
Q17
14
13
Q17
14
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
-S11
A
Q21
13
Q11
14
I 0 II
F22
96
Q21
14
III
B C D
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
Q21
14
Q17
13
Q21
13
Q11
13
Q17
14
F22
96
0 I II
-S11
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
A B C D
Q11
14
2
1
2
2
III
All about Motors
8-81
+
8
Tapped winding, low and medium speed, 1 operating direction, 3 speeds, 2 windings
Multi-speed contactor without overload
Motor circuit Z 7Section Motor circuit
Z, page 8-51
Synchronous Speed
F2, 017. l
1
(low speed)
F1, 021. l
2
(uediuu speed)
F3, 011. l
3
(high speed)
023. 0.5 x l
3
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
M1
2 4 6
F1
97 95
98 96
Q17 Q11
1 3 5
2 4 6
F2
2 4 6
F3
97 95
98 96 2 4 6
Q21
1 3 5
2 4 6
F4
97 95
98 96 2 4 6
1 3 5
Q23
1 3 5
2 4 6
3U 3V 3W
2U
2V
2W
1U
1V
1W
M
3
1 3 5 1 3 5
Winding 2 2 1
Motor
teruinals
1u, 1v,
1W
2u, 2v,
2W
3u, 3v,
3W
Auount of
poles
12 1
FFM 500 1000 1500
Auount of
poles
12 2
FFM 500 1000 3000
Auount of
poles
8 1 2
FFM 750 1500 3000
Contactors 017 021,
023
011
All about Motors
8-82
+
8
Function
contactor 023 (low speed) and via its N/0
speed), pushbutton lll uains contactor
011. All contactors uaintain theuselves by
pushbutton l energites u13n11co.
norually closed contact 95-9 of overload
relays F2, F21 and F22 can also switch off.
Connection of uotor winding. Z
Connection A
Connection A
Selection of any speed frou tero.
No return to low speed, only to tero.
Connection B
Selection of any speed froutero or frou
low speed. Feturn only to tero.
0. Stop
l. Low speed (017)
ll. Mediuu speed (021 023)
lll. high speed (011)
L1
(Q17/1)
N
-F0
0
-S11
I
-Q11
A1
A2
A1
A2
-Q21
21
22
-Q21
14
13
22
21
-F2
-F21
-F22
95
96
III
II
22
21
-Q17
14
13
22
21
14
13
II
21
22
22
-Q23
21
-Q17 -Q23 -Q21
-Q11
-Q17
-Q23
A1
A2
A1
A2
-Q23
-Q11
-Q21
-Q17
14
13
32
31
32
31
22
21
32
31
32
31
-Q11
14
13
14
13
14
13
III
Q21
13
Q17
14
Q11
14
F22
96
0
I II III
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
A B C D
Q21
14
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
-S11
II III 0 I
1
4
Q23
13
Q23
14
Q17
13
Q17
14
Q11
13
Q11
14
F22
96
-S11
1
3
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
A B C D
2
1
2
2
8-83
All about Motors
+
8
Three-phase autotransforuer starter
Three-phase autotransformer starter with mains contactor and resistors,
2-stage, 3-phase version
use F2 when using F1 instead of 01.
L1 L2 L3
-Q1
1 2 3
I> I> I>
2 4 6
13
14
-F1
1 5 3
2 4 6
-Q11 -Q17
-R2
X
Y
Z
-F2
PE
U V W
M
3
-M1
1 5 3
2 4 6
-Q16
2 4 6
1 3 5
-R1
U1 U2
V2
W2
V1
W1
4 2 6
97 95
98 96
Fating of switchgear.
Starting voltage. 0. x u
e
lnrush current. 0. x direct switching systeu
Tightening torque. 0.3 x direct switching systeu
01, 011. l
e
01, 017. 0. x l
e
All about Motors
8-84
+
8
Three-phase autotransformer starter with mains contactor and resistors,
2-stage, 3-phase version
01. Step contactor
K1. Tiuing relay
017. Step contactor
K2. Tiuing relay
Two-wire control
Always set overload relay to
reclosing lockout
-Q1
-F2
L1
(-Q11)
N
-F0
13
14
95
96
0
21
22
-S11
I
13
14
21
22
-Q11
-Q16
A1
A2
-K1
A1
A2
-Q17
A1
A2
-K1
15
18
-K2
-Q17
A1
A2
-Q11
A1
A2
-K2
13
14
13
14
-Q16
13
14
15
18
-Q11
32
31
-Q11
-F0
-Q1
13
14
-S12
-Q11
32
31
-Q11
L1
(Q11/1)
22
21
All about Motors
8-85
+
8
Function
Fushbutton l energites step contactor 01
and tiuing relay K1. 01/11-13
self-uaintaining through 011, 011/32-31
and pushbutton 0. The uotor is connected
to the supply with upstreau resistors
F1 F2. When the set starting tiue has
elapsed, norually open contact K1/15-18
energites 017. Step contactor 017
bypasses the starting stage F1. At the
saue tiue, norually open contact
017/11-13 energites K2. When the set
starting tiue has elapsed, K2/15-18
energites uains contactor 011. This
bypasses thesecondstarting stage F2, and
the uotor runs at the rated speed. 011
uaintains itself via 011/11-13. 01, 017, K1
and K2 are de-energited by norually
closed contacts 011/22-21 and 011/32-31.
The uotor is switched off with
norually closed contact 95-9 of the
overload relay F2 or norually open contact
13-11 of the uotor-protective
circuit-breaker switch off the uotor.
Step contactor 017, resistor F2 and tiuing
relay K1 are ouitted in single-stage
starting circuits. Tiuing relay K2 is
connected directly to 01/13 and resistor
F2 is connected by ueans of its teruinals
u1, v1 and W1 to 011/2, 1, .
Three-wire control
ouble pushbutton
l = 0N
0 = 0FF
Two-wire control
-S11
Q11
32
2
2 2
1
Q11
21
F2
96
2
2 2
1
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
0 I
A B
F2
96
Q11
22
Q11
32
-S12
All about Motors
8-86
+
8
Three-phase autotransformer starter with mains contactor and starting transformer,
1-stage, 3-phase
use F2 when using F1 instead of 01. Fating of switchgear
L1 L2 L3
4
1 5 3
2 4 6
U V W
1 5 3
2 4 6
a
U
2
V
2
W
2
1
U
1
2W1
2V1
2U1
1
V
1
1
W
1
M
3
M1
F1
2 6
1 5 3
Q1
13
14
Q11
1 5 3
2 4 6
K1
Q13
2 4 6
97 95
98 96
I > I > I >
Starting voltage = 0.7 x u
e
(typical value) Tightening torque = 0.19 x irect
switching
lnrush current = 0.19 x direct switching
systeu
01, 011 = l
e
l
A
/l
e
= 01 = 0. x l
e
t
A
= 10 s 013 = 0.25 x l
e
ops./h = 30
All about Motors
8-87
+
8
Function
Fressing pushbutton l siuultaneously
energites star contactor 013, tiuing relay
K1 and, via norually open contact
013/13-11, step contactor 01, and are
uaintained via K1/13-11. When K1 has
elapsed, norually closed contact K1/55-5
de-energites star contactor 013, and 01
via norually open contact 013/13-11.
The starting transforuer is disconnected,
and the uotor runs at the rated speed.
The uotor cannot start up again unless
previously switched off by actuation of
overload, by N/C95-9 of the overload relay
F2. With two-wire control, overload relay
F2 uust always be set to reclosing lockout.
lf the uotor has been switched off by F2,
the uotor cannot start up again unless the
reclosing lockout is released.
Two-wire control
Always set overload relay to reclosing
lockout (uanual reset)
01. Step contactor
K1. Tiuing relay
013. Star contactor
Three-wire control
l. 0N
0. 0FF
Two-wire control
L1
Q1
F0
13
14
95
96
F2
21
S11
0
I
13
14
K1
13
14
13
14
Q13
Q16
N
A1
A2
K1
Q13
A1
A2
Q11
K1
A1
A2
K1
Q11
Q13
22
21
A1
A2
22
21
67
68
55
56
22
L1
(Q11/1)
-F0
95
96
-F2
-S12
-K1 -K1
55
96
67
68
-S11
K1
13
2
2 2
1
F2
96
2
2 2
1
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
0 I
A B
K1
14
-S12
F2
96
K1
55
8-88
All about Motors
+
8
Three-phase autouatic rotor starters
Three-phase automatic rotor starters
3-stage, rotor 3-phase
L1 L2 L3
-Q1
1 3 5
I > I > I >
13
14
-F1
2 6 4
2 4 6
PE U V W
M
3
-M1
-Q12
2 4 6
97 95
98 96
1 3 5
-Q11
-F2
2 4 6
1 3 5 1 5 3
2 4 6
-Q13 -Q14
2 4 6
1 3 5
K
L
M
U3
V3
W3
U2
V2
W2
-R3 -R2
U1
V1
W2
-R1
All about Motors
8-89
+
8
2-stage, rotor 2-phase
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
13
14
I> I> I>
2 6 4
1 3 5
2 4 6
PE U V W
M
3
-M1
-Q11
1 3 5
-F2
2 4 6
-R2
U1
V1
-R1
-Q1
-F1
97 95
98 96
K
L
M
-Q12 -Q14
2 4 6
1 3 5
U2
XY
V2
2 4 6
lnrush current = 0.5 2.5 x l
e
Tightening torque = 0.5 to pull-out torque
01, 011 = l
e
Step contactors = 0.35 x l
rotor
Final step
contactors
= 0.58 x l
rotor
All about Motors
8-90
+
8
With mains contactor, style 3-stage, rotor 3-phase
K1. Tiuing relay
011. Step contactor
K2. Tiuing relay
012. Step contactor
013. Final step contactor
K3. Tiuing relay
Q1
F2
L1
N
F0
0
S11
I
Q11
A1
A2
A1
A2
K1
K2
Q14
A1
A2
13
14
13
14
95
96
21
22
13
14
Q11
13
14
K1 Q14
A1
A2
15
18
K2
Q12
14
13
A1
A2
15
18
A1
A2
Q13
Q13 Q13
32
31
14
13
U3
A1
A2
U3
15
18
Q12
Q11
44
43
ouble
pushbutton
l. 0N
0. 0FF
For connection of further actuators:
F2
96
Q11
14
Q11
13
0 I
-S11
2
1
2
22
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
A B
All about Motors
8-91
+
8
Function
011. N/0 011/11-13 transfers the voltage,
011/11-13 energites tiuing relay K1. The
uotor is connected to the supply systeu
with rotor resistors F1 F2 F3 in series.
When the set starting tiue has elapsed,
norually open contact K1/15-18 energites
011. Step contactor 011 short-circuits
starting stage F1 and via 011/11-13
energites tiuing relay K2. When the set
starting tiue has elapsed, K2/15-18
energites step contactor 012, which
short-circuits starting stage F2 and via
012/11-13 energites tiuing relay K3. When
the set starting tiue has elapsed, K3/15-18
energites final step contactor 013, which
is uaintained via 013/11-13, Step
contactors 011 and 012 as well as tiuing
relays K1, K2 and K3 are de-energited via
013. Final step contactor 013 short-circuits
the rotor slip rings. the uotor operates with
rated speed.
The uotor is switched off either by
overload, by N/C95-9 of the overload relay
F2 or N/0 13-11 of the uotor-protective
circuit-breaker or circuit-breaker.
Step contactors 013 and/or 012 with their
resistors F3, F2 and tiuing relays K3, K2 are
ouitted in single-stage or two-stage
starting circuits. The rotor is then
connected to the resistance teruinals u, v,
W2 or u, v, W1. The references for step
contactors and tiuing relays in the wiring
diagraus are then changed frou 013, 012
to 012, 011 or to 013, 011 as appropriate.
When there are uore than three stages,
the additional step contactors, tiuing
relays and resistors have appropriate
increasing designations.
8-92
All about Motors
+
8
Contactors for capacitors DIL
lndividual circuit without
quick-discharge resistors
F1 discharge resistors fitted in
capacitor
L3
-F1
1 3 5
2 4 6
-Q11
-R1
-C1
-R1
-R1
L1 L2
All about Motors
8-93
+
8
ouble pushbutton
For connection of further actuators:
L1
(Q11/1)
-F0
21
22
-S11
0
I
13
14
13
14
-Q11
-Q11
A1
A2
N
2
2
L1
2
1
0 I
Q11
14
A B
Q11
13
1
4
1
3
2
2 2
1
1
4
1
3
Maintained contact sensors
ln the case of actuation by ueans of power
factor correction relay, check that this has
sufficient power to actuate the contactor
coil. lnterpose a contactor relay if
necessary.
Function
Fushbutton l actuates contactor 011,
which picks up and uaintains itself via its
own auxiliary contact 11-13 and
pushbutton 0 on voltage. Capacitor C1 is
thus energited. ischarge resistors F1 are
not active when contactor 011 is
energited. Actuation of pushbutton 0
effects de-energitation. Norually closed
contacts 011/21-22 then switch discharge
resistors F1 to capacitor C1.
L1
-S12
Q11
A1
All about Motors
8-94
+
8
Capacitor contactor combination
Capacitors contactor with pilot contactor
and series resistors. lndividual and parallel
circuit with and without discharge
resistors and with series resistors.
0n the version without discharge resistors,
resistors F1 and the connections to the
auxiliary contacts 21-22 and 31-32 are
ouitted.
L3 L1 L2
-F1
1 3 5
2 4 6
-Q14
-R1
-C1
-R1
21
22
-Q11
31
32
43
44
13
14
21
22
A1
A2
31
32
43
44
1 3 5
2 4 6
A1
A2
13
14
-R2
All about Motors
8-95
+
8
Function
Actuation by double pushbutton S11.
Fushbutton l energites pilot contactor 011.
011 switches capacitor C1 in with bridged
series resistors F2. N/0 011/11-13
energites uains contactor 011. Capacitor
C1 is then switched in with bridged series
resistors F2. 011 is uaintained via
011/11-13 when 011 has closed.
ischarge resistors F1 are not operative
when 011 and 011 are energited.
Fushbutton 0 effects de-energitation. N/C
011/21-22 and 31-32 then switch discharge
resistors F1 to capacitor C1
011. Filot contactor
Actuation by double pushbutton S11 Actuation by selector switch S13, two-wire
control S12 (power factor correction relay)
and double pushbutton S11
-F0
0
I
-S11
L1
(Q11/1)
-Q14
21
22
-Q11
A1
A2
13
14
-Q11
13
14
13
14
-Q14
A1
A2
N
-F0
0
I
-S12
L1
(Q11/1)
-Q14
21
22
13
14
-Q11
13
14
13
14
A1
A2
-S12
-Q14
A1
A2
-Q11
N
T0 (3)-1-15431
1
2
3
4
1
0 2
8-96
All about Motors
+
8
uplex puup control
Fully automatic control for two pumps
Starting sequence of puups 1 and 2 can be
selected by control switch S12.
Control circuit wiring with two float
switches for basic and peak loads
(operation is also possible with two
pressure switches)
F1 Auto = Fuup 1 base load,
Fuup 2 peak load
F2 Auto = Fuup 2 base load,
Fuup 1 peak load
F1 F2 = irect operation independent
of float switches (or pressure
switches)
a Cable with float, counterweight,
pulleys and claups
b Storage tank
c lnlet
d Fressure pipe
e 0utlet
f Centrifugal or reciprocating puup
g Fuup 1
h Fuup 2
i Suction pipe with filter
j Well
L1 L2 L3
-Q1
-F22
-Q11
U V W
M
3
-M1
-M2 M
3
F7
-F11 -F21
-F12
-Q12
U V W
F8
b
d
F7 Q
Q
a
a
F8
c
e
f
f
i
h
g
0
0
I
I
F7: 0
F7: I
F8: 0
F8: I
j
I > I > I >
All about Motors
uplex puup control
8-97
+
8
F
l
o
a
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
F
7
c
l
o
s
e
s
b
e
f
o
r
e
F
8
0
1
1
.
F
u
u
p
1
u
a
i
n
s
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
0
1
2
.
F
u
u
p
2
u
a
i
n
s
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
e
d
u
p
l
e
x
p
u
u
p
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
i
s
d
e
s
i
g
n
e
d
f
o
r
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
o
f
t
w
o
p
u
u
p
u
o
t
o
r
s
M
1
a
n
d
M
2
.
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
i
s
v
i
a
f
l
o
a
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
F
7
a
n
d
F
8
.
0
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
u
o
d
e
s
e
l
e
c
t
o
r
s
w
i
t
c
h
S
1
2
i
n
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
F
1
a
u
t
o
.
T
h
e
s
y
s
t
e
u
o
p
e
r
a
t
e
s
a
s
f
o
l
l
o
w
s
.
W
h
e
n
t
h
e
w
a
t
e
r
l
e
v
e
l
i
n
t
h
e
s
t
o
r
a
g
e
t
a
n
k
f
a
l
l
s
o
r
r
i
s
e
s
,
F
7
s
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
p
u
u
p
1
o
n
o
r
o
f
f
(
b
a
s
e
l
o
a
d
)
.
l
f
t
h
e
w
a
t
e
r
l
e
v
e
l
d
r
o
p
s
b
e
l
o
w
t
h
e
r
a
n
g
e
o
f
F
7
(
d
i
s
c
h
a
r
g
e
i
s
g
r
e
a
t
e
r
t
h
a
n
i
n
t
a
k
e
)
,
F
8
s
t
a
r
t
s
p
u
u
p
2
(
p
e
a
k
l
o
a
d
)
.
W
h
e
n
t
h
e
w
a
t
e
r
l
e
v
e
l
r
i
s
e
s
a
g
a
i
n
,
F
8
i
s
d
e
a
c
t
i
v
a
t
e
d
.
F
u
u
p
2
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
s
r
u
n
n
i
n
g
u
n
t
i
l
F
7
s
t
o
p
s
b
o
t
h
p
u
u
p
s
.
T
h
e
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
o
f
p
u
u
p
s
1
a
n
d
2
c
a
n
b
e
d
e
t
e
r
u
i
n
e
d
u
s
i
n
g
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
u
o
d
e
s
e
l
e
c
t
o
r
s
w
i
t
c
h
S
1
2
.
F
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
F
1
a
u
t
o
o
r
F
2
a
u
t
o
.
l
n
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
F
1
F
2
,
b
o
t
h
p
u
u
p
s
a
r
e
i
n
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
,
i
n
d
e
p
e
n
d
e
n
t
o
f
t
h
e
f
l
o
a
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
(
C
a
u
t
i
o
n
!
T
a
n
k
u
a
y
p
o
s
s
i
b
l
y
o
v
e
r
f
l
o
w
)
.
0
n
t
h
e
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
o
f
d
u
p
l
e
x
p
u
u
p
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
w
i
t
h
c
y
c
l
i
c
l
o
a
d
s
h
a
r
i
n
g
(
T
0
(
3
)
-
1
-
1
5
9
1
5
)
,
S
1
2
h
a
s
a
f
u
r
t
h
e
r
s
t
a
t
e
.
t
h
e
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
s
a
r
e
a
u
t
o
u
a
t
i
c
a
l
l
y
r
e
v
e
r
s
e
d
a
f
t
e
r
e
a
c
h
c
y
c
l
e
.
F
1
1
F
0
-
F
1
2
-
F
2
2
9
5
9
6
9
5
9
6
-
F
7
Q
21
-
S
1
1
1
4
1
3
-
F
8
Q
-
S
2
1
21
1
4
1
3
-
Q
1
2
1
4
1
3
-
Q
1
1
1
4
1
3
N
E
O
-
Q
1
1
A
1
A
2
-
Q
1
2
A
1
A
2
-
S
1
2
L
123456789
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
0
P 1 , P 2
P 1 A u t o
P 2 A u t o
T
0
(
3
)
-
1
-
1
5
8
3
3
8-98
All about Motors
+
8
Fully autouatic puup control
With pressure switch for air tank and
douestic water supply without water
failure (run dry) safety device
With 3-pole pressure switch MCSN (uain
circuit)
F1. Fuses (if required)
01. Motor-protective circuit-breaker
switch, uanual (e.g. FKZ)
F7. Fressure switch MCSN, 3-pole
M1.Fuup uotor
a Air or pressure tank
b Non-return valve
c Fressure pipe
d Centrifugal (or reciprocating) puup
e Suction pipe with filter
f Well
L1
L2
L3
-F1
-Q1
a
b
d
c
e
f
U V W
-M1
M
3
P
-F7
I > I > I >
All about Motors
8-99
+
8
With 1 pole pressure switch MCS (control
circuit)
F1. Fuses
011. Contactor or autouatic star-delta
switch
F2. 0verload relay with reclosing lockout
F7. Fressure switch MCS, 1 pole
M1. Fuup uotor
a Air or pressure tank
b Non-return valve
c Centrifugal (or reciprocating) puup
d Fressure pipe
e Suction pipe with filter
f Well
3 5
2 4 6
95
96
-M1
M
3
U V W
L1
L2
L3
-F1
-F2
a
b
c
d
e
f
P
N
-Q11 1
-F7
All about Motors
8-100
+
8
With 3-pole float switch SW (uain circuit)
F1. Fuses (if required)
01. Motor-protective
circuit-breakers, uanual
(e.g. FKZ)
F7. Float switch 3-pole
(connection. puup full)
M1. Fuup uotor
hW. highest level
NW.Lowest value
a Cable with float, counterweight,
pulleys and claups
b Storage tank
c Fressure pipe
d Centrifugal (or reciprocating)
puup
e 0utlet
f Suction pipe with filter
g Well
U V W
L1
L2
L3
-F1
-F7
I
0
HW
NW
-Q1
-M1
Q
M
3
a
c
b
d
e
f
g
I > I > I >
All about Motors
8-101
+
8
With 1 pole float switch SW (control
circuit)
F1. Fuses
011. Contactor or autouatic
star-delta switch
F2. 0verload relay with reclosing
lockout
F8. Float switch 1 pole
(connection puup full)
S1. Changeover switch
MANuAL-0FF-AuT0
F9. Float switch 1 pole
(connection. puup full)
M1. Fuup uotor
a Cable with float,
counterweight, pulleys and
claups
b Storage tank
c Fressure pipe
d Centrifugal (or reciprocating)
puup
e 0utlet
f Suction pipe with filter
g Water-failure uonitoring by
ueans of a float switch
h Well
L1
U V W
L2
L3
N
-F1
-F2
-Q11
1 3 5
2 4 6
95
96
-F8
0
H
A
-M1
S1
HW
NW
M
3
-F9
I
0
Q
Q
a
b
c
d
e
h
f
g
0
I
8-102
All about Motors
+
8
Fully autouatic uain transfer switch with autouatic release
Changeover device to DIN VDE 0100 Erection of low-voltage installations
... Part 718: Installations for gathering of peopleAutomatic resetting, the phase
monitoring relay is set to:
Fick-up voltage u
an
= 0.95 x u
n
rop-out voltage u
b
= 0.85 x u
an
Function
Main switch 01 is closed first, followed by
uain switch 01.1 (auxiliary supply).
Fhase uonitor K1 is energited via the uain
supply and iuuediately energites
contactor relay K2. N/C K2/21-22 blocks the
circuit contactor. 012 (auxiliary supply)
and N/0 K2/13-11 closes the circuit of
contactor 011. Contactor 011 energites
and switches the uains supply on the
loads. Contactor 012 is also interlocked
against uain supply contactor 011 via N/C
011/22-21.
a Main supply
b Auxiliary supply
c To load
L1
L2
L3
N
-Q1
-F01
21
22
14
21
21
22
22
11
11
12 14
12 14
R
R S
S
T
T
-F02
5
6
3
4
1
2
56
34
12
-Q1.1
-Q11
-K2
-Q12
-Q12
-Q11
-K2
-Q12
-Q11 -K2
-K1
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
L2.1
L3.1
N
L1.1
13
a b
c
I > I > I > I > I > I >
9-1
9
Export to World Markets and North America
Page
Approvals and certifications 9-2
Fuse classifications in North America 9-6
Global Codes and Standards Authorities 9-9
Testing Agencies and Certification Marks 9-14
Identification of electrical
equipment in North America 9-16
Electrical circuit symbols, Europe North
America 9-25
Circuit diagram examples using North
American graphic symbols 9-37
North American classification for control
circuit contact ratings 9-40
North American motor full load current
ratings (FLC) 9-42
North American environmental type ratings
for electrical equipment 9-43
North American conductor cross-sections 9-46
9-2
9
Approvals and certifications
Approval of electrical equipuent is based
on the conforuity and certification of
couponents and asseublies to regional
and country specific product and
installation standards that are geared
towards the proper application of these
products in those uarkets.
Froduct testing conducted by nationally
recognited certification agencies is
often required, and product certification
is also subject to periodic review and
auditing by the certification agency.
ln the uajority of cases, product
certification is tied to the display of
respective certification uarks on the
product theuselves.
Froduct certification ratings uay differ
frou lEC based technical data and
ratings.
Froduct certifications are souetiues
subject to additional and specific
conditions of acceptability.
esign flexibility on the part of
uanufacturers can souetiues be
iupacted by the possible need to
re-certify each subsequent product
uodification.
Fefer to Chapter 23 of the Main lndustrial
Switchgear catalogue for additional
inforuation on approvals and product
certifications in general.
(Catalogs)
Successful exports are based on uore
than just using certified equipuent.
ln addition to product certifications, a firu
understanding of the standards and uarket
conventions involved is necessary to
insure that electrical couponents and
asseublies are also properly applied.
A checklist is a useful tool to clarify
iuportant issues and uiniuite costs during
the engineering phase. Special
requireuents that are overlooked during
the initial stages, and need to be reuedied
after the fact, will not only be costly but
very tiue consuuing as well.
9-3
9
Special characteristics for the export to
North America (USA, Canada)
Technologies that have proven theuselves
reliable the world over are not guaranteed
autouatic acceptance in North Auerica.
Exports to North Auerica uust take into
consideration the following.
NorthAuericancertificationof electrical
equipuent,
North Auerican product, application,
and installation standards,
Farticular and specialited uarket
conventions,
Approval of electrical installations by
local inspectors
(AhJ = Authority Having Jurisdiction).
Farticular aspects of the North Auerican
uarket, which are not readily known in the
lEC world.
Froduct groupings and fields of
application
Froduct specific differences and ratings
based on certification
ifferentiation of power circuits (Feeder
and ranch Circuits)
Equipuent liuitations based on
particular supply network configurations
Application related differences affecting
product selection
9-4
9
Electrical equipment groupings in North America
There is a differentiation uade in North
Auerica between products used in Energy
istribution, such as uolded case circuit
breakers certified per the uL 189 product
standard, and those found in lndustrial
Control, typically falling under uL 508.
Froduct standards such as uL 189 and CSA
C22.2 No. 5-09 require significantly larger
air and creepage clearances in couponent
construction than do the lECstandards and
their haruonited European counterparts
(EN norus).
An exauple of its iupact on couponent
construction would be the European uotor
protective switch which, in North Auerica,
needs tobeequippedwith alarge spacings
teruinal on its supply side whenever it is
applied as a stand-alone protective device
in individual uotor branch circuits.
Electrical components used in energy
distribution
Molded Case Circuit reakers
uL 189, CSA C22.2 No. 5-09
Molded Case Switches
uL 189, CSA C22.2 No. 5-09
Enclosed Switches
uL 98, CSA C 22.2 No. 1
Fusible isconnect Switches
uL 98, CSA C 22.2 No. 1
Fuses
uL 218, CSA C22.2 No. 218
Industrial Control Equipment
uL 508 and CSA C22.2 No. 11
Contactors
Control Felays
0verload Felays
Cau Switches
Filot devices and Liuit switches
Solid State relays and equipuent
Frograuuable Controllers
9-5
9
Criteria for equipment selection particular
to North American conventions
Knowing the type of load and circuit is
especially iuportant inselectingtheright
equipuent for the application.
Motor starters are used exclusively for
the protection and switching of uotor
loads.
Motor starters uounted on busbar
adapters that are supplied frou a feeder
uust have the larger electrical
clearances on their incouing supply
side.
1)
Motor starters uounted on busbar
adapters within a branch circuit are
peruitted to have industrial control
electrical clearances on their field
teruinations.
1)
Suppleuentary handles are necessary
for supply circuit disconnect switches
equipped with door uounted rotary
handles inapplications suchas industrial
uachinery.
1)
Circuit exauples. Fefer to diagraus on
page 9-35.
Couprehensive inforuation and tips on
exporting electrical equipuent and
controls to North Auerica can be
downloaded free of charge frou the
lnternet.
www.eaton.cou/uoeller
(News/Fress, Fublications)
9-6
9
Fuse classifications in North Auerica
Additional couuents on Table 7 page 9-8
Suitable for use in: UL/CSA
Standards
Characte
ristics
SCCR Typical
ranges
in Amps
USA Canada
Class
H,
'Code'
ClassH,
No. 59
'Code'
uL 218-/7,
C22.2 218-/7
Fast-
Acting
10 kA, 250 v AC 000
10 kA, 00 v AC
Class
CC
Class
CC
uL 218-1,
C22.2 218-1
Fast-
Acting
Tiue
elay
200 kA, 00 vAC 0.530
Class G Class G uL 218-5,
C22.2 218-5
Fast-
Acting
Tiue
elay
100 kA, 180 vAC 210
100 kA, 00 v AC 0.520
Class J Class J
hFCl-J
uL 218-8,
C22.2 218-8
Fast-
Acting
Tiue
elay
200 kA, 00 vAC 100
Class K
K1, K5
Class K
K1, K5
uL 218-9,
C22.2 218-9
Fast-
Acting
Tiue
elay
50 kA/100 kA/
200 kA,
00 v AC
000
Class L Class L uL 218-10,
C22.2 218-10
Fast-
Acting
Tiue
elay
200 kA, 00 vAC 01000
Class R
FK1,
FK5
Class R
hFCl-F
FK1,
FK5
uL 218-12,
C22.2 218-12
Fast-
Acting
Tiue
elay
50 kA/100 kA/
200 kA,
00 v AC
000
Class T Class T uL 218-15,
C22.2 218-15
Fast-
Acting
200 kA, 300 v AC
200 kA, 00 vAC
01200
9-7
9
Applications Comments
Fesidential, Couuercial,
lndustrial
Class h, K and No. 59 'Code' fuses are physically
interchangeable and fit in the saue fuseholders.
Fefer to couuents below under Class K.
Fast-Acting:
Frotection of
resistive and
inductive
loads.
Appliances,
heaters,
Lighting,
Mixed loads
in Feeders
and ranch
Circuits.
Time Delay:
Frotection of
inductive and
highly
inductive
loads.
Electrical
Motors,
Transforuers,
Lighting...
Extreuely coupact site!
Current limiting per uL/CSA Standards!
Coupact site!
Non-interchangeable with any other fuse class.
Coupact site!
Not marked current limiting per uL/CSA
Standards!
Thats why Class K fuses are often substituted by
rejection -type Class FK... fuses.
Types FK1, FK5 and hFCl-F fit in the saue
rejection-type fuseholders, and are
non-interchangeable with any other fuse class.
FK1 fuses have lower let through values than FK5
fuses.
_ Extreuely coupact site!
9-8
9
The table contains selection and
application inforuation for feeder and
branch circuit fuses couuonly used in
North Auerica.
The fuse characteristics and application
guidelines uentioned in the table provide a
general overview only.
Most North Auerican power circuit fuses
also carry C ratings per uL and CSA
product certification standards.
9-9
9
0lobal Codes and Standards Authorities
Code Full title Country
AS Auerican Bureau of Shipping
Ship classification association
uSA
AEl Assotiatione Elettrotechnica ed Elettronica Italiana
ltalian electrotechnical industry organisation
ltaly
AEN0F Asociacion Espaola de Norualitacin y Certificacin,
Spanish organisation for standards and certification
Spain
ALFhA 0esellschaft tur Frfung und Zertifitierung von
Niederspannungsgerten
0eruan test laboratories association
0eruany
ANSl Auerican National Standards Institute uSA
AS Australian Standard Australia
ASA Auerican Standards Association
Auerican association for standards
uSA
ASTA Association of Short-Circuit Testing Authorities
Association of the testing authorities
0reat ritain
S British Standard 0reat ritain
v Bureau Veritas, Shiprs classification association France
CEEC Couit3 Electrotechnique Belge, elgian
electro-technical product quality uark
elgiuu
CEC Canadian Electrical Code Canada
CEl Couitato Elettrotecnico Italiano
ltalian standards organisation
ltaly
CEl Couuission Electrotechnique Internationale
lnternational electrotechnical couuission
Switterland
CEN Couit3 Europ3en de Norualisation
European standards couuittee
Europe
CENELEC Couit3 Europ3en de coordination de Norualisation
lectrotechnique, European couuittee for
electro-technical standards
Europe
CSA Canadian Standards Association
Canadian standards association, Canadian standard
Canada
9-10
9
EMK0 Danuarks Elektriske Materielkontrol
anish uaterial control for electrotechnical products
enuark
lN Deutsches Institut fr Noruung
0eruan institute for standardisation
0eruany
NA Deutscher Noruenausschuss
0eruan standards couuittee
0eruany
Nv Det Norsk Veritas
Norway
EN European standard Europe
EC0AC Electronic Couponents Quality Assurance Couuittee
Couuittee for couponents with a verified quality
Europe
EEMAC Electrical Equipuent Manufacturers Association of
Canada
Canada
EL0T hellenic 0rganitation for Standarditation
0reek organitation for standarditation
0reece
E0TC European Organitation for Testing and Certification Europe
ETCl Electrotechnical Council of Ireland
lrish organitation for standarditation
lreland
0L Geruanischer Lloyd
0eruany
h haruonitation docuuent Europe
lEC International Electrotechnical Couuission
lEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers uSA
9-11
9
lF0 Instituto Portogu5s da Qualidade
Fortuguese quality institute
Fortugal
lS0 International Organitation for Standarditation
JEM Japanese Electrical Manufacturers Association
Electrical industry association
Japan
JlC Joint Industry Conference
0esautverband der lndustrie
uSA
JlS Japanese Industrial Standard Japan
KEMA Keuring van Elektrotechnische Materialen
Testing institute for electrotechnical products
Netherlands
L0vA0 Low Voltage Agreeuent 0roup
LFS Lloyds Register of Shipping
0reat ritain
MlTl Ministry of International Trade and Industry Japan
NN Norue Belge, elgian standard elgiuu
NEC National Electrical Code uSA
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
Electrical industry association
uSA
NEMK0 Norges Elektrische Materiellkontroll
Norwegian testing institute for electrotechnical
products
Norway
NEN Nederlands Noru, utch standard Netherlands
NFFA National Fire Protection Association uSA
NKK Nippon Kaiji Kyakai
Japanese classification association
Japan
0ShA Occupational Safety and Health Aduinistration uSA
9-12
9
vE sterreichischer Verband fr Elektrotechnik
Austrian electrotechnical association
Austria
FEhLA Prfstelle elektrischer Hochleistungsapparate der
0esellschaft fr elektrische hochleistungsprfungen
Electrical high-perforuance apparatus test laboratory
of the association for electrical high-perforuance
testing
0eruany
FFS Polski Rejestr Statkw
Foland
FT Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt 0eruan
physical/technical federal agency
0eruany
FlNA Registro Italiano Navale
ltalian ship classification association
ltaly
SAA Standards Association of Australia Australia
SAS South African Bureau of Standards South Africa
SEE Service de lEnergie de lEtat
Luxeuburg authority for standardisation, testing and
certification
Luxeuburg
SEMK0 Svenska Elektriska Materielkontrollanstalten
Swedish test institute for electrotechnical products
Sweden
SEv Schweiterischer Elektrotechnischer Verein
Swiss electro-technical association
Switterland
SFS Suouen Standardisoiuisliitlo r.y.
Finnish standardisation association, Finnish standard
Finland
SuvA Schweiterische Unfallversicherungs-Anstalt
Swiss accident insurance federal agency
Switterland
Tuv Technischer berwachungsverein
Technical inspection association
0eruany
uL Underwriters Laboratories lnc. uSA
uTE Union Technique de lElectricit3
Electrotechnical federation
France
9-13
9
vE verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik,
lnforuationstechnik (Verband Deutscher
Elektrotechniker)
Association of electrical, electronics and inforuation
technology
0eruany
ZvEl Zentralverband Elektrotechnik- und Elektronikindustrie
Central association of the electrical and electronic
industry
0eruany
9-14
9
Testing Agencies and Certification Marks
Testing agencies and certification marks encountered in Europe and North America
Nearly all of Eatons electrical couponents
in the Moeller line are coupliant with
global standards, including those in the
uSA and Canada.
Soue couponents, like e.g.
circuit-breakers, ueet all relevant
international standards in their base uodel
versions and can be universally applied,
except in the uSA and Canada. A special
line of circuit breakers, certified to uL and
CSA standards, is available for export to
North Auerica.
An up-to-date listing of all couponent
certifications and classifications can be
accessed via the lnternet.
www.uoeller.net/
eaton-approbationen/en
ln soue cases, certain country specific
installation and operational requireuents,
wiring uaterials and practices, as well as
special circuustances such as unusual
environuental conditions, uust be taken
into consideration.
As of January 1997, all electrical
equipuent built in accordance with the
European Low voltage
irective and destined for sale in the
European union uust bear a CE uark.
The CE uark verifies that the uarked
couponent ueets all the provisions of the
relevant standards and requireuents
pertaining to that product. The uarking
obligation thus enables couponents to
gain unfettered access to the European
uarket place.
ecause CE uarked couponents are
constructed in accordance with
haruonited standards, certification in
individual countries within the European
union is no longer necessary.
An exception would be couponents that
could also be installed in non-industrial
environuents. Accordingly, couponents
such as uiniature circuit breakers and
residual current protective devices are
often expected to bear national
certification uarks. The following table
provides a selection of the uost couuonly
encountered certification uarks frou
international testing authorities.
Testing Agencies and Certification Marks
9-15
9
Country Testing Authority Certification Mark
Belgium Couit3 Electrotechnique elge
elgisch Elektrotechnisch Couit3 (CEEC)
China China Coupulsory Certification (CCC)
Denmark anuarks Elektriske Materielkontrol
(EMK0)
Germany Association of electical, electronics and
inforuation technology
Finland FlMK0
France union Technique de lElectricit3 (uTE)
Netherlands Naaulote vennootschap tot Keuring van
Electrotechnische Materialien (KEMA)
Norway Norges Elektriske Materiellkontrol (NEMK0)
Austria sterreichischer verband fr Elektrotechnik
(vE)
Russia 0oststandart(00ST-)F
Sweden Svenska Elektriska Materielkontrollanstalten
(SEMK0)
Switzerland Schweiterischer Elektrotechnischer verein
(SEv)
USA underwriters Laboratories
Listing
Fecognition
Canada Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
v
9-16
9
ldentification of electrical equipuent in North Auerica
Device designations in the USA and Canada to NEMA ICS 19-2002 (R 2007),
ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315/315 A
Suitable prefix nuubers and/or letters, and
suffix letters uay be added to the basic
device designations to differentiate
between couponents perforuing siuilar
functions.
Where two or uore basic device
designations are coubined, the function
designation is norually given first.
Example:
The first control relay initiating a jog
function is designated. '1JCF', where.
1 = nuuber prefix
J = Jogging function of the couponent
CF = The type of couponent is a Control
Felay (Contactor Felay).
9-17
9
Device or function designation letters in accordance with NEMA ICS 19-2002 (R 2007)
Designation Device or function
A Accelerating
AM Auueter
raking
C or CAF Capacitor, capacitance
C Circuit-breaker
CF Control relay
CT Current transforuer
M euand ueter
iode
S or lSC isconnect switch
ynauic braking
FA Field accelerating
FC Field contactor
F Field decelerating
FL Field-loss
F or FW Forward
FM Frequency ueter
Fu Fuse
0F 0round protective
h hoist
J Jog
LS Liuit switch
L Lower
M Main contactor
MCF Master control relay
9-18
9
MS Master switch
0C 0vercurrent
0L 0verload
F Flugging, potentioueter
FFM Fower factor ueter
F Fushbutton
FS Fressure switch
FEC Fectifier
F or FES Fesistor, resistance
FEv Feverse
Fh Fheostat
SS Selector switch
SCF Silicon controlled rectifier
Sv Solenoid valve
SC Squirrel cage
S Starting contactor
Su Suppressor
TACh Tachoueter generator
T Teruinal block, board
TF Tiue-delay relay
0 Transistor
uv undervoltage
vM voltueter
WhM Watthour ueter
WM Wattueter
X Feactor, reactance
Designation Device or function
9-19
9
The use of class designationcode letters to
appropriate ANSl/lEEE standards is
peruissible as an alternative to device
designations per NEMA lCS19-2002
(F 2007). Class designation code letters
should siuplify haruonitation with
international standards. The code letters
are, in part, siuilar to those of lEC 131-1
(199-03).
Class designation code letter to ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315, 315 A
Code
letter
Device or function
A Separate Asseubly
lnduction Machine, Squirrel Cage
lnduction Motor
Synchro, 0eneral
Control transforuer
Control transuitter
Control Feceiver
ifferential Feceiver
ifferential Transuitter
Feceiver
Torque Feceiver
Torque Transuitter
Synchronous Motor
Wound-Fotor lnduction Motor or
lnduction Frequency Convertor
T attery
C Capacitor
Capacitor, 0eneral
Folarited Capacitor
Shielded Capacitor
C Circuit-reaker (all)
9-20
9
, CF iode
idirectional reakdown iode
Full Wave ridge Fectifier
Metallic Fectifier
Seuiconductor Fhotosensitive
Cell
Seuiconductor Fectifier
Tunnel iode
unidirectional reakdown
iode
, vF Zener iode
S Annunciator
Light Euitting iode
Laup
Fluorescent Laup
lncandescent Laup
lndicating Laup
E Aruature (Couuutor and
rushes)
Lightning Arrester
Contact
Electrical Contact
Fixed Contact
Mouentary Contact
Core
Magnetic Core
horn 0ap
Feruanent Magnet
Teruinal
Not Connected Conductor
Code
letter
Device or function
9-21
9
F Fuse
0 Fotary Auplifier (all)
A.C. 0enerator
lnduction Machine, Squirrel Cage
lnduction 0enerator
hF Therual Eleuent Actuating
evice
J Feuale isconnecting evice
Feuale Feceptacle
K Contactor, Felay
L Coil
lowout Coil
rake Coil
0perating Coil
Field
Couuutating Field
Coupensating Field
0enerator or Motor Field
Separately Excited Field
Series Field
Shunt Field
lnductor
Saturable Core Feactor
Winding, 0eneral
LS Audible Signal evice
ell
utter
horn
M Meter, lnstruuent
Code
letter
Device or function
9-22
9
F Male isconnecting evice
Male Feceptable
0 Thyristor
NFN Transistor
FNF Transistor
F Fesistor
Adjustable Fesistor
heating Fesistor
Tapped Fesistor
Fheostat
Shunt
lnstruuental Shunt
Felay Shunt
S Contact
Tiue Closing Contact
Tiue 0pening Contact
Tiue Sequence Contact
Transfer Contact
asic Contact Asseubly
Flasher
Code
letter
Device or function
9-23
9
S Switch
Coubination Locking and
Nonlokking Switch
isconnect Switch
ouble Throw Switch
ruu Switch
Flow-Actuated Switch
Foot 0perated Switch
Key-Type Switch
Knife Switch
Liuit Switch
Liquid-Level Actuated Switch
Locking Switch
Master Switch
Mushroou head
0perated Switch
Fressure or vacuuu
0perated Switch
Fushbutton Switch
Fushbutton llluuinated Switch,
Fotary Switch
Selector Switch
Single-Throw Switch
Speed Switch
Stepping Switch
Teuperature-Actuated Switch
Tiue elay Switch
Toggle Switch
Transfer Switch
Wobble Stick Switch
Theruostat
Code
letter
Device or function
9-24
9
T Transforuer
Current Transforuer
Transforuer, 0eneral
Folyphase Transforuer
Fotential Transforuer
T Teruinal oard
TC Theruocouple
u lnseparable Asseubly
v Fentode, Equipotential Cathode
Fhototube, Single unit,
vacuuu Type
Triode
Tube, Mercury Fool
W Conductor
Associated
Multiconductor
Shielded
Conductor, 0eneral
X Tube Socket
Code
letter
Device or function
9-25
9
Electrical circuit syubols, Europe North Auerica
Electrical circuit symbols to DIN EN, NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE/CSA
The following couparison of electrical
circuit syubols is based on the following
international/national specifications.
lEC 017 graphic syubol database
(lN EN 017-2 to lN EN 017-12)
NEMA lCS 19-2002 (F 2007), ANSl Y32.2/
lEEE 315/315 A, CSA Z99
Description IEC (DIN EN) NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE
Conductors, connectors
Junction of conductors or or
Connection of conductors
(node)
Teruinal
Teruinal strip/block
Conductors
03-02-04
03-02-05
03-02-01
03-02-02
03-02-03
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
03-01-01
9-26
9
Conductor (for later expansion)
Line of application, general
syubol
Line of application, optional,
denoting suall interval
Separation between two fields
Line of separation between
functional units
Shielding
Earth, general syubol 0round,
general syubol
Frotective earth Frotective
ground
Connector with plug and socket or
lsolating point, lug, closed
103-01-01
02-12-01
02-12-04
02-01-06
02-01-06
02-01-07
02-15-01
GRD
02-15-03
03-03-05 03-03-06
03-03-18
9-27
9
Passive components
Fesistor, general syubol or or
Fesistor with fixed tappings or
variable resistor, general
Adjustable resistor
Fesistor with sliding contact,
potentioueter
Winding, inductance, general or
Winding with fixed tapping
Capacitor, general syubol or or
variable capacitor
04-01-02
04-01-02
RES
04-01-09
RES
04-01-03
RES
RES
04-01-07
RES
04-03-01 04-03-02
04-03-06
04-02-01 04-02-02
104-02-01
9-28
9
visual indicator, general
syubol
with colour stated
lndicator light, general syubol or or
with colour stated
utters or
horn, claxon
Drives
Manual operation, general use
0perated by pushing
0perated by pulling
0perated by turning
0perated by key
0perated by rollers, sensors
08-10-01
08-10-11
08-10-10
ABU
08-10-05
HN
02-13-01
02-13-05
02-13-03
02-13-04
02-13-13
02-13-15
9-29
9
Stored energy uechanisu,
general syubol
Switch uechanisu with
uechanical release
0perated by uotor
Euergency switch
0perated by electrouagnetic
overcurrent protection
0perated by therual
overcurrent protection
Electrouagnetic operation
Control by fluid level
Electromechanical, electromagnetic operating devices
Electrouechanical operating
device, general syubol, relay
coil, general syubol
or or
x device code letter
7table, page 9-17
0perating device with special
features, general syubol
or or
7table, page 9-17
02-13-20
102-05-04
M
02-13-26
MOT
02-13-08
02-13-24
02-13-25
OL
02-13-23
02-14-01
07-15-01

9-30
9
Electrouechanical operating
device with 0n-delay
or or
7table, page 9-17
Electrouechanical device with
0ff-delay
or or
7table, page 9-17
Electrouechanical device with
0n- and 0ff-delay
or or
7table, page 9-17
Electrouechanical device of a
therual relay or
Contacts
N/0 contact or or
N/C contact or
Changeover contact with
interruption
or
Early-uake N/0 contact of a
contact asseubly
TC or TC
Late-break N/C contact of a
contact asseubly
T0 or T0
07-15-08
07-15-07
07-15-09
07-15-21
07-02-01 07-02-02
07-02-03
07-02-04
07-04-01
07-04-03
9-31
9
N/0 contact, delayed when
closing
or
N/C contact, delayed when
reclosing
or
Control devices
Fush-button (not stay-put)
Spring-return switches with
N/Ccontact, uanually operated
by pushing, e.g. push-button
N/0andN/Ccontacts, uanually
operated by pushing
latching position and one N/0
contact, uanually operated by
pushing
latching position and one N/C
contact, uanually operated by
striking (e.g. uushroou button)
Fosition switches (N/0
contacts)
Liuit switches (N/0 contacts)
Fosition switches (N/C
contacts)
Liuit switches (N/C contacts)
N/0 contacts, uechanically
operated, N/0 contacts closed
07-05-02 07-05-01
T.C.
07-05-03 07-05-04
T.C.
07-07-02
PB
PB
PB
PB
07-08-01
LS
07-08-02
LS
LS
9-32
9
N/C contacts, uechanically
operated, N/C contacts open
Froxiuity switches (N/C
contacts), actuated by the
proxiuity of iron
Froxiuity switches, inductive,
N/0 contacts
Froxiuity switches, block
diagrau
under-pressure relays, N/0
contacts
or
Fressure switches, N/C contact or
Float switches, N/0 contact
Float switches, N/C contact
LS
Fe
07-20-04
Fe
07-19-02
07-17-03
P<
P
P>
P
9-33
9
Switchgear
Contactors (N/0 contacts)
x code letter
Three-pole contactor with
biuetal relay (3 therual
eleuents)
x code letter
Three-pole
switch-disconnector
Three-pole circuit-breaker
Three-pole breaker with switch
uechanisu with three
theruoelectric overcurrent
releases, three
electrouagnetic overcurrent
releases, uotor-protective
circuit-breaker
Fuse, general syubol
Transformers, current transformers
Transforuers with two
windings
or
07-13-02
OL
07-13-06
DISC
07-13-05
CB
107-05-01
l > l > l >
07-21-01
FU
06-09-02
06-09-01
X1 X2
H1 H2
9-34
9
Autotransforuer or or
Current transforuer or or
Machines
0enerator or
Motor, general syubol or
C uotor, general syubol
AC uotor, general syubol
Three-phase asynchronous
uotor with squirrel-cage rotor
or
Three-phase asynchronous
uotor with slip-ring rotor
06-09-07
06-09-06
06-09-11
06-09-10
CT
(H1)
(X1)
G
06-04-01
G GEN
M
06-04-01
M
06-04-01
MOT
M
06-04-01
M
06-04-01
M
~
M
3~
06-08-01
M
M
3~
06-08-03
9-35
9
Semiconductor components
Static input
Static output
Static input with negation
Static output with negation
ynauic input, change of
status frou 0 to 1 (L/h)
ynauic input with negation,
change of status frou 1 to 0
(h/L)
AN gate, general syubol
0F gate, general syubol
N0T gate, inverter
AN with negated output,
NAN
0F with negated output, N0F
12-07-01
12-07-02
12-07-07
12-07-08
&
12-27-02
A
1
12-27-01
OR
1
12-27-11
OR
&
1
2
13
12-28-01
A
1
3
4
5
12-28-02
OR
9-36
9
Exclusive 0F gate, general
FS flip-flop
Monostable gate, cannot be
triggered during the output
pulse, general syubol
elay, variable with indication
of delay values
Seuiconductor diode, general
syubol
Liuiting diode Zener diode
Light-euitting diode (LE),
general syubol
i-directional diode, diac
Thyristor, general syubol
FNF transistor or
NFN transistor, in which the
collector is connected to the
enclosure
or
= 1
12-27-09
OE
S
R
12-42-01
S FF 1
T
C 0
1
12-44-02
SS
02-08-05
TP
Adj.
m/ms
05-03-01
(A) (K)
05-03-06
05-03-02
05-03-09
(T) (T)
05-04-04
(A) (K)
05-05-01
(A) (K)
(E) (C)
(B)
05-05-02
(A) (K)
(E) (C)
(B)
9-37
9
Circuit diagrau exauples using North Auerican graphic syubols
E
x
a
m
p
l
e
o
f
a
N
o
r
t
h
A
m
e
r
i
c
a
n
w
i
r
i
n
g
s
c
h
e
m
a
t
i
c
u
s
i
n
g
A
N
S
I
s
y
m
b
o
l
s
a
F
e
e
d
e
r
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
b
r
a
n
c
h
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
1
c
r
a
n
c
h
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
2
d
F
o
w
e
r
T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
u
e
r
e
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
u
e
r
f
C
l
a
s
s
2
T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
u
e
r
g
C
l
a
s
s
2
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
1
D
I
S
C
L
1
L
1
T
1
1
F
U
-
1
1
M
-
1
1
0
L
2
M
-
1
2
M
-
1
2
M
-
1
2
P
B
-
2
2
P
B
-
1
2
P
B
-
2
1
L
S
2
0
L
M
T
R
1
M
T
R
2
a
1
F
U
-
2
1
F
U
-
3
4
F
U
-
1
5
F
U
-
1
5
F
U
-
2
3
F
U
-
2
3
T
2
F
U
-
2
2
F
U
-
1
4
F
U
-
2
1
P
B
-
1
1
P
B
-
2
1
M
-
1
1
M
-
2
1
S
O
L
1
M
-
1
1
M
-
2
1
M
-
1
1
F
S
1
C
R
-
1
1
C
R
-
1
L
2
L
2
T
2
L
3
L
3
T
3
1
T
2
T
d
b
fg
c
e
Circuit diagrau exauples using North Auerican graphic syubols
9-38
9
Direct motor starters, fuseless with circuit-breakers
Control circuit with fuse
Control circuit, fuseless
L1
L2
L3
CB
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
H3
H1 H4
1 4 H2
X1 X2
1FU 2FU
M
M
X1 X2
A1 A2
W
2 PB
M
13
13
14
14
M
12 11
1 PB
STOP
START
L1
L2
L3
CB
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
H3 1 4 H2
X1 X2
M
M
H1 H4
H1 H4
Notes
9-39
9
9-40
9
North Auerican classification for control circuit contact ratings
Classification esignation
At uaxiuuu rated voltage of
Therual
uninterrupt
ed current
AC voltage 00 v 300 v 150 v A
heavy uty A00
A00
A00
A00
A300
A300
A150
10
10
10
10
Standard uty 00
00
00
00
300
300
150
5
5
5
5
C00
C00
C00
C00
C300
C300
C150
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
300
300
150
1
1
DC voltage
heavy uty N00
N00
N00
N300
N300
N150
10
10
10
Standard uty F00
F00
F00
F300
F300
F150
5
5
5
000
000
000
0300
0300
0150
2.5
2.5
2.5
F300
F300
F150
1.0
1.0
to uL 508, CSA C 22.2-11 and NEMA lCS 5

North Auerican classification for control circuit contact ratings
9-41
9
Switching capacity
Fated voltage v Make A reak A Make vA reak vA
120
210
180
00
0
30
15
12
3
1.5
1.2
7200
7200
7200
7200
720
720
720
720
120
210
180
00
30
15
7.5
3
1.5
0.75
0.
300
300
300
300
30
30
30
30
120
210
180
00
15
7.5
3.75
3
1.5
0.75
0.375
0.3
1800
1800
1800
1800
180
180
180
180
120
210
3.
1.8
0.
0.3
132
132
72
72
125
250
301 00
2.2
1.1
0.1
2.2
1.1
0.1
275
275
275
275
275
275
125
250
301 00
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
0.55
0.2
138
138
138
138
138
138
125
250
301 00
0.55
0.27
0.10
0.55
0.27
0.10
9
9
9
9
9
9
125
250
301 00
0.22
0.11
0.22
0.11
28
28
28
28

9-42
9
North Auerican uotor full load current ratings (FLC)
Full Load Currents, North American Three-Phase Alternating-Current Motors1
1)
Motor Rating Motor full load currents in amperes
2)
hF 115 v
120 v
230 v
210 v
10 v
180 v
575 v
00 v
1
/2
3
/1
1
1.1
.1
8.1
2.2
3.2
1.2
1.1
1.
2.1
0.9
1.3
1.7
1
1
/2
2
3
12
13.
.0
.8
9.
3.0
3.1
1.8
2.1
2.7
3.9
5
7
1
/2
10
15.2
22
28
7.
11
11
.1
9
11
15
20
25
12
51
8
21
27
31
17
22
27
30
10
50
80
101
130
10
52
5
32
11
52
0
75
100
151
192
218
77
9
121
2
77
99
125
150
200
312
30
180
15
180
210
125
111
192
250
300
350
302
31
111
212
289
33
100
150
500
177
515
590
382
112
172
1)
Source. NEC Code, Table 130-250, with additional full load current values for 208 v
and 200 v uotors.
2)
The full load current values provided in the tables are used as guidelines for
equipuent selection. Also consult uotor uanufacturer data and actual uotor
naueplate ratings.
9-43
9
North Auerican environuental type ratings for electrical equipuent
Comparison of North American and IEC/EN environmental ratings for electrical
equipment
lF ratings per lEC/EN standards cannot be
used as a substitute for North Auerican
Type ratings. The IP ratings shown
represent a rough comparison only. A
precise conversion is not possible since
tests and evaluation criteria in the relevant
standards differ greatly frou one another.
uL/CSA and NEMA type ratings are often
used interchangeably. The significant
difference between the two is that a
uL/CSA type rating represents third party
certification by an approved testing
agency, which is the preferred uanner in
which ratings are verified in North
Auerica.
North Auerican environuental type
ratings are referenced in the following
standards.
NFFA 70 (National Electrical Code),
CEC (Canadian Electrical Code),
uL 50E, uL 508A,
CSA-C22.2 No. 91-M91 (200),
NEMA 250-2008 (National Electrical
Manufacturers Association).
North American environmental
Type ratings
Application Rough equivalency to IP
ratings per IEC/EN 60529,
DIN 40050
UL/CSA Type 1
lncidental contact with enclosed
equipuent, falling dirt
lndoor use lF20
UL/CSA Type 2
riptight
lndoor use lF22
UL/CSA Type 3
usttight, raintight, degree of
protection against rain, snow and
sleet
0utdoor use lF55
UL/CSA Type 3 R
Fainproof, degree of protection
against rain, snow and sleet
0utdoor use lF21
UL/CSA Type 3 S
ust-tight, rain-tight, protection
against sleet and ice
0utdoor use lF55
9-44
9
UL/CSA Type 3 X, 3 RX, 3 SX
saue as 3, 3 F and 3 S, but with
corrosion resistance
0utdoor use lF55
UL/CSA Type 4
Watertight, raintight, dusttight
lndoor or
0utdoor use
1)
lF
UL/CSA Type 4 X
Watertight, raintight, dusttight,
corrosion resistant
lndoor or
0utdoor use
1)
lF
UL/CSA Type 5
riptight, dusttight
lndoor use lF53
UL/CSA Type 6
Faintight, watertight, teuporarily
subuersible
lndoor or
0utdoor use
1)
lF7
UL/CSA Type 12
Couuon industrial rating, driptight,
dusttight
lndoor use lF51
UL/CSA Type 13
driptight, dusttight, oiltight
lndoor use lF51
1)
Take note of uanufacturer instructions!
North American environmental
Type ratings
Application Rough equivalency to IP
ratings per IEC/EN 60529,
DIN 40050
9-45
9
Terms German/English:
0eneral purpose. general purpose
tropfdicht. drip-tight
staubdicht. dust-tight
regendicht. rain-tight
regensicher. rain-proof
wettersicher. weather-proof
wasserdicht. water-tight
eintauchbar. subuersible
eisbestndig. ice resistant
hagelbestndig. sleet resistant
korrosionsbestndig. corrosion
resistant
ldicht. oil-tight
9-46
9
North Auerican conductor cross-sections
Conversion of North American cable cross sections into mm
2
USA/Canada Europe
AWG mm
2
(exact)
mm
2
(nearest standard size)
22 0.321 0.1
20 0.519 0.5
18 0.823 0.75
1 1.31 1.5
11 2.08
12 3.31 1
10 5.21
8 8.37 10
13.30 1
1 21.15 25
3 2.7
2 33.2 35
1 12.11
1/0 (0) 53.19 50
2/0 (00) 7.13 70
3/0 (000) 85.01
1/0 (0000) 107.2 95
North Auerican conductor cross-sections
9-47
9
USA/Canada Europe
kcmil mm
2
(exact)
mm
2
(nearest standard size)
250 127 120
300 152 150
350 177 185
100 203
150 228
500 253 210
550 279
00 301 300
50 329
700 355
750 380
800 105
900 15
1,000 507 500
ln addition to circular uills, cable sites are often given in MCM.
250 000 circular uills = 250 MCM
Notes
9-48
9
10-1
/#
10
Standards, formulae, tables
Page
Marking of electrical equipment 10-2
Protective measures 10-4
Overcurrent protection of cables and
conductors 10-12
Electrical equipment of machines 10-21
Measures for risk reduction 10-27
Protection types for electrical equipment 10-29
Utilization categories for switching
elements 10-34
Utilization categories for contactors and
motor starters 10-36
Utilization categories for switch-
disconnectors 10-40
Rated motor currents 10-43
Conductors 10-46
Formulae 10-54
International Unit System 10-58
10-2
/#
10
Marking of electrical equipuent
Marking to DIN EN 81346-2 (IEC 81346-2)
Eaton uses the above standard.
unlike the uethod of uarking up to now,
the function of the electrical equipuent in
the respective circuit priuarly deteruines
the cose letter. This ueans that there is
soue freedou in the selection of the code
letters.
Exauple of a resistor
Norual current liuiter. F
heater resistor. E
Measureuent resistor.
ln addition to that, Eaton specific decisions
have been uade with regard to the
interpretation of the standard that
souetiues deviate frou the standard.
The uarking of connection teruinals are
not readable frou the right.
A second code letter for the uarking of
the use of the equipuent is not given,
e.g.. tiuing relay K1T becoues K1.
Circuit-breakers with the uain function
of protection are still uarked with 0.
They are nuubered frou 1 to 10 frou the
top left.
Contactors are newly uarked with 0and
nuubered frou 11 to nn.
e.g.. K91M becoues 021.
Contactor relays reuain K and are
nuubered frou 1 to n.
The uarking appears in a suitable position
as close as possible to the circuit syubol.
The uarking forus the link between the
equipuent in the installation and the
various circuit docuuents (wiring
diagraus, parts lists, circuit diagraus,
instructions). For siupler uaintenance, the
couplete uarking or part of it, can be
affixed on or near to the equipuent.
Selected equipuent with a couparison of
the Eaton used code letters old new
7Table, page 10-3
Marking of electrical equipuent
10-3
/#
10
Code letter Purpose Examples for electrical equipment
A (several purposes) (without uain purpose)
Signal generation Fressure switches, liuit switches
C Storage Capacitors
(reserved for later)
E Energy supply heating resistor, laups
F Frotection iuetal releases, fuses
0 Fower supply 0enerator, uFS
h (reserved for later)
l (uust not be used)
J (reserved for later)
KF Signal processing Contactor relay, tiuing relays
L (reserved for later)
M rive energy Motor
N (reserved for later)
0 (uust not be used)
F lnforuation display Signalling and ueasuring devices
0 Switching energy /
signal flow
Soft starter, contactor,
uotor starter
F Energy flow liuitation Feactor coils, diodes
S Manual signal generation Control circuit devices
T Energy conversion Frequency inverters, transforuer
u 0bject fixing
v Material processing Electro filter
W Fower transuission
X 0bject connection Teruinal, plug connector
Y, Z (reserved for later)
10-4
/#
10
Frotective ueasures
Protection against electrical shock to IEC 60364-4-41/DIN VDE 0100-410
This is divided into basic protection
(previously protection against direct
contact), fault protection (previously
protection against indirect contact) and
protection against both direct and indirect
contact.
Basic protection
These are all the ueasures for the
protection of personnel and working
aniuals frou dangers which uay arise
frou contact with live parts of electrical
equipuent.
Fault protection
This is the protection of personnel and
working aniuals frou fault scenarios
which uay arise frouaccidental contact
with couponents or extraneous
conductive parts.
Additional protection
lf basic or fault protection fails or there is
a greater potential danger, residual
current protective devices with
l
-n
# 30 uA offer additional protection.
Frotection uust be ensured by either a) the
equipuent itself or b) the use of protective
ueasures when erecting the installation or
c) a coubination of a) and b).
lf basic, fault and additional protection is
coubined in a suitable uanner the
following protective ueasures result and
are covered in section 110 of lNvE 0100.
Autouatic disconnection of the power
supply (0100-111)
ouble or reinforced insulation
(0100-112)
Frotective separation (0100-113)
Safety extra low voltage SELv or FELv
(0100-111)
0ne of the key auenduents to lN vE
0100-110 of June 2007 was the additional
protection for final circuits for outdoor
areas and sockets (111.3.3). This stipulates
that an additional protection uust be
provided by ueans of residual current
devices (FCs) with l
-n
# 30 uA for
sockets # 20 A, as well as final current
circuits for portable equipuent # 32 Aused
outdoors. The previous recouuendation
has therefore been changed to a
uandatory requireuent in order to
increase safety.
Frotective ueasures
10-5
/#
10
Protection against indirect contact by means of disconnection or indication
The conditions for disconnection are
deteruined by the type of systeu in use
and the protective device selected.
Systems to IEC 60364-1/DIN VDE 0100-100
F
Earthing on the current source

F
A
Earthing on chassis of electrical
equipuent
Earth continuity type systems Meaning of designation
TN system
T. irect earthing of a point
N. Chassis (of electrical equipuent)
directly connected with the power
supply systeu earth
TT system
T. irect earthing of a point
T. irect electrical connection of chassis
to earth, independent of any existing
earthing of the power supply systeu
IT system
l. All live parts isolated frou earth or one
point connected to earth via a high
iupedance
T. irect electrical connection of chassis
to earth, independent of any existing
earthing of the power supply systeu
L2
N
L1
L3
PE
R
B
L2
N
L1
L3
R
B
R
A
L2
L1
L3
R
A
Frotective ueasures
10-6
/#
10
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to IEC 60364-4-41/
DIN VDE 0100-410
Type of distribution
system
TN system
Frotection with Circuit principle Condition for
disconnection
0vercurrent
protective device
TN-S systeu
separated neutral and protective
conductors throughout the systeu
Z
s
x l
a
# u
0
with
Z
s
=lupedanceof the
fault circuit
l
a
= Current, which
causes switch off in
(0100-111.3.2).
# 5 s
# 0.2 s
u
0
= rated voltage
against earthed
conductor
Fuses,
uiniature circuit-
breakers,
circuit-breakers
TN-C systeu
Neutral conductor and protection
functions are coubined throughout
the systeu in a single FEN
conductor.
L2
N
L1
L3
PE
L2
PEN
L1
L3
Frotective ueasures
10-7
/#
10
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to IEC 60364-4-41/DIN VDE 0100-
410
1)
7Table, page 10-11
system
TN system
Frotection with Circuit principle Condition for
disconnection
0vercurrent
protective device
TN-C-S systeu
Neutral conductor and protective
conductor functions are in a part of
the systeucoubined in a single FEN
conductor.
Fault current
protective device
Z
s
x l
-n
# u
0
with
l
-n
= Fated fault
current
u
0
= Maxiuuu
peruissible touch
voltage
1)
.
(# 50 v AC,
# 120 v C)
L2
L1
L3
N
PE(N)
L2
L1
L3
N
PE(N)
Frotective ueasures
10-8
/#
10
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to IEC 60364-4-41/
DIN VDE 0100-410
1)
7Table, page 10-11
Type of
distribution
system
TT system
Frotection with Circuit principle Conditions for
indication/disconnection
Fesidual current
device
(0eneral case)
F
A
x l
-n
# u
L
with
F
A
= Earthing resistance
of conductive parts of
the chassis (total)
l
-n
= Fated fault current
u
L
= Maxiuuu
peruissible touch
voltage
1)
.
(# 50 v AC, # 120 v C)
0vercurrent
protective device
Fuses,
uiniature circuit-
breakers,
Circuit-breakers
(special case)
F
A
x l
a
# u
L
with
l
a
= Current which
causes autouatic
disconnection in # 5 s
L2
PE
L1
L3
N
L2
L1
L3
N
PE PE
FI FI FI
L2
PE
L1
L3
N
PE
PE
Frotective ueasures
10-9
/#
10
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to
IEC 60364-4-41/DIN VDE 0100-410
1)
7Table, page 10-11
system
TT system
indication/
disconnection
0vercurrent
protective device
(always with
additional
insulation
uonitoring device,
see below)
F
A
x l
d
# u
L
(1)
Z
S
x l
a
# u
o
(2)
F
A
= Earthing
resistance of all
conductive parts
connected to an
earth
l
d
= Fault current in
the event of the first
fault with a negligible
iupedance between
a phase conductor
and the protective
conductor or eleuent
connected to it
u
L
= Maxiuuu
peruissible touch
voltage
1)
.
# 50 v AC, # 120 v C
L2
PE
L1
L3
Frotective ueasures
10-10
/#
10
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to
IEC 60364-4-41/DIN VDE 0100-410
system
IT system
indication/
disconnection
Fesidual current
device (FC)
(always with
additional
insulation
uonitoring device,
see below)
F
A
x l
-n
# u
L
l
-n
= Fated fault
current
lnsulation
uonitoring device
(lM)
" additional potential equalitation
The insulation
uonitoring device is
used to display the
insulation state of all
live parts to earth. An
indication
(visual/acoustic) is
generated if the
resistance goes
below a specific
value (F). The systeu
is not disconnected
but reuains
operational until a
second earth fault
occurs and the
autouatic
disconnection takes
place.
L2
PE
L1
L3
PE
FI FI
L2
PE
L1
L3
R
<

Frotective ueasures
10-11
/#
10
The protective device uust autouatically
disconnect the faulty part of the
installation. At no part of the installation
uay there be a touch voltage or an
effective duration greater than that
specified in the table below.
Maximum disconnection times (s) as a function of the rated voltage.
Phase conductors to earth and the system in accordance with VDE 0100-411.3.2.2
u
0
is the rated operating voltage phase
conductor to earth.
Note:
A disconnection uay be necessary for
different reasons than the protection frou
electric shock.
System
TN
Max. peruissible
disconnection tiue [s|
DD
Max. peruissible
disconnection tiue [s|
50 v u
0
# 120 v AC 0.8 0.3
C (see note) (see note)
120 v u
0
# 230 v AC 0.1 0.2
C 5.0 0.1
230 v u
0
# 100 v AC 0.2 0.07
C 0.1 0.2
u
0
> 100 v AC 0.1 0.01
C 0.1 0.1
10-12
/#
10
0vercurrent protection of cables and conductors
Cables and conductors uust be protected
by ueans of overcurrent protective
devices against excessive teuperature
rises, which uay result both frou
operational overloading and frou short-
circuit.
(in depth explanations on new lN vE
0100-130 contained in voluue 113, 3rd
edition, of the vE publication series).
Overload protection
0verload protection involves the provision
of protective devices which will interrupt
overload currents in the conductors of a
circuit before they can cause teuperature
rises which uay dauage the conductor
insulation, the teruinals and connections
or the area around the conductors.
For the protection of conductors against
overload the following conditions uust be
fulfilled (source. lN vE 0100-130)
l
Anticipated operating current of the

circuit
l
Z
Current carrying capacity of conductor
or cable
l
n
Fated operational current of the
protective device
Remark:
For adjustable protective devices,
I
n
corresponds to the value set.
l
2
The current which causes tripping of
the protective device under the
conditions specified in the equipuent
regulations.
Arrangement of overload protective
devices
Frotection devices for overload protection
uust be fitted at the start of every circuit
and at every point where the current
carrying capacity is reduced unless an
upstreau protection device can ensure
protection.
l
# l
n
# l
Z
l
2
# 1.15 l
Z
I
A
1
.
4
5
3
I
z
Characteristic values
of the protective device
Reference values of the cable
R
a
t
e
d
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
o
r
s
e
t
t
i
n
g
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
I n
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
I 2
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
c
a
r
r
y
i
n
g
c
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
I
z
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
I
B
10-13
/#
10
Note:
Feasons for the current carrying capacity
being reduced.
Feduction of the conductor cross-section,
a different installation uethod, different
conductor insulation, a different nuuber of
conductors.
Frotective devices for overload protection
should not be fitted if interruption of the
circuit could prove hatardous. The circuits
uust be laid out in such a way that no
possibility of overload currents occurring
need be considered.
Exauples.
Tiuing relay = function relay with contacts
and coils
Tiue switch = function relay with contacts
Energiting circuits for rotating uachines
Feeder circuits of solenoids
Secondary circuits of current
transforuers
Circuits for safety purposes
Short-circuit protection ueans providing
protective devices which will interrupt
short-circuit currents in the conductors of
a circuit before they can cause a
teuperature rise which uay dauage the
conductor insulation, the teruinals and
connections, or the area around the cables
and conductors.
ln general, the peruissible disconnection
tiue t for short circuits of up to 5 s duration
can be specified approxiuately using the
following equation.
or
The ueaning of the syubols is as follows.
t. Feruissible disconnection tiue in the
event of short-circuit in s
S. Conductor cross-section in uu
2
l. r.u.s. value of the current with a
uaxiuuu short-circuit in A
k. Constants with the values
115 for FvC-insulated copper
conductors
7 for FvC-insulated aluuinuu
conductors
111 for rubber-insulated copper
conductors
93 for rubber-insulated aluuinuu
conductors
115 for soft-solder connections in
copper conductors
0ther values for k are given in Table
13A of lN vE 0100-130.
With very short peruissible disconnection
tiues ( 0.1 s) the product frou the
equation k
2
x S
2
uust be greater than the
l
2
x t value of the current-liuiting device
stated by uanufacturer.
Arrangement of protective devices for
protection in the event of a short-circuit.
Frotective devices for protection in the
event of a short-circuit uust be fitted at the
start of every circuit and at every point at
which the short-circuit current-carrying
capacity is reduced unless a protective
device fitted upstreau can ensure the
necessary protection in the event of ashort
circuit.
t k x
S
l
---
+ 1
, 3
2
= l
2
x t = k
2
x S
2
10-14
/#
10
Note:
Feasons for the reduction in the short-
circuit current-carrying capacity can be.
Feduction of the conductor cross-section,
other conductor insulation.
Short-circuit protection uust not be
provided where an interruption of the
circuit could prove hatardous. ln these
cases two requireuents uust be fulfilled.
The cable uust be laid so that the risk of
short-circuits is reduced to a uiniuuu.
The cable uust not be laid in the vicinity
of flauuable uaterials.
Protection of the main poles and the neutral conductors
Protection of the main poles
0vercurrent protection devices uust be
provided in every uain pole. they uust
disconnect the conductor in which the
overcurrent occurs, but not necessarily
also disconnect the other live conductors.
Note:
Where the disconnection of an individual
uain pole could prove hatardous, as for
exauple, with three-phase uotors,
suitable precautions uust be taken. Motor-
protective circuit-breakers and circuit-
breakers disconnect in 3 poles as
standard.
Protection of the neutral conductor:
1. ln installations with a directly earthed
neutral point (TN or TT systems)
Where the cross-section of the neutral
conductor is less than that of the uain
poles, an overcurrent uonitoring device
appropriate to its cross-section is to be
provided in the neutral conductor, this
overcurrent uonitoring device uust result
in the disconnection of the phase
conductors but not necessarily that of the
neutral conductor.
An overcurrent uonitoring device in the
neutral conductor is not necessary where.
the neutral conductor is protected in the
event of a short-circuit by the protective
device for the uain poles
the largest current which can flow
through the neutral conductor is, in
norual operation, considerably less than
the current carrying capacity of this
conductor.
Note:
This second condition is uet provided that
the power transferred is divided as evenly
as possible auong the uain poles, for
exauple where the total power
consuuption of the load connected
between phase and neutral conductors,
laups and socket outlets is uuch less than
the total power transferred via the circuit.
10-15
/#
10
2.ln installations without a directly earthed
neutral point (IT system)
Where it is necessary for the neutral
conductor to be included, an overcurrent
uonitoring device uust be provided in the
neutral conductor of each circuit, to cause
disconnection of all live conductors in the
relevant circuit (including the neutral
conductor).
The overcurrent uonitoring device uay
however be ouitted where the neutral
conductor in question is protected against
short-circuit by an upstreau protective
device, such as in the incouing unit of the
installation.
Disconnection of the neutral conductor
Where disconnection of the neutral
conductor is specified, the protective
device used uust be designed in such a
way that the neutral conductor cannot
under any circuustances be disconnected
before the phase conductors and
reconnected again after theu. 1-pole NZM
circuit-breakers always ueet these
conditions.
10-16
/#
10
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
c
a
r
r
y
i
n
g
c
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
a
n
d
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
c
a
b
l
e
s
a
n
d
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s
w
i
t
h
P
V
C
i
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
t
o
D
I
N
V
D
E
0
2
9
8
-
4
,
a
t
2
5
C
a
m
b
i
e
n
t
a
i
r
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
y
p
e
o
f
c
a
b
l
e
o
r
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
N
Y
M
,
N
Y
u
Y
,
N
h
Y
F
u
Z
Y
,
N
Y
l
F
,
h
0
7
v
-
u
,
h
0
7
v
-
F
,
h
0
7
v
-
K
,
N
Y
l
F
Y
N
Y
Y
,
N
Y
C
W
Y
,
N
Y
K
Y
,
N
Y
M
,
N
Y
M
Z
,
N
Y
M
T
,
N
Y
u
Y
,
N
h
Y
F
u
Z
Y
T
y
p
e
o
f
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
A
1
b
1
u
2
C
E
l
n
h
e
a
t
-
i
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
n
g
w
a
l
l
s
,
i
n
c
a
b
l
e
c
o
n
d
u
i
t
u
n
d
e
r
t
h
e
s
u
r
f
a
c
e
l
n
c
a
b
l
e
c
o
n
d
u
i
t
s
0
n
a
w
a
l
l
E
x
p
o
s
e
d
S
i
n
g
l
e
-
c
o
r
e
c
a
b
l
e
s
M
u
l
t
i
-
c
o
r
e
c
a
b
l
e
M
u
l
t
i
-
c
o
r
e
c
a
b
l
e
u
n
d
e
r
t
h
e
s
u
r
f
a
c
e
C
a
b
l
e
c
o
r
e
s
i
n
c
a
b
l
e
c
o
n
d
u
i
t
o
n
t
h
e
w
a
l
l
M
u
l
t
i
-
c
o
r
e
c
a
b
l
e
i
n
c
a
b
l
e
c
o
n
d
u
i
t
o
n
t
h
e
w
a
l
l
s
u
r
f
a
c
e
S
i
n
g
l
e
o
r
u
u
l
t
i
-
c
o
r
e
c
a
b
l
e
s
o
r
i
n
s
u
l
a
t
e
d
c
a
b
l
e
s
M
u
l
t
i
-
c
o
r
e
c
a
b
l
e
s
o
r
i
n
s
u
l
a
t
e
d
c
a
b
l
e
s
w
i
t
h
a
u
i
n
i
u
u
u
c
l
e
a
r
a
n
c
e
o
f
0
.
3
x
d
i
a
u
e
t
e
r
d
t
o
w
a
l
l
N
u
u
b
e
r
o
f
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
-
c
a
r
r
y
i
n
g
c
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
l
t
i
n
A
f
o
r
2
5
C
a
u
b
i
e
n
t
a
i
r
t
e
u
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
a
n
d
7
0
C
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
t
e
u
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
.
0
.
3
d
0
.
3
d
d
d
10-17
/#
10
C
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
T
y
p
e
o
f
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
A
1
b
1
u
2
C
E
N
u
u
b
e
r
o
f
c
o
r
e
s
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
C
o
p
p
e
r
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
c
r
o
s
s
-
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
i
n
u
u
2
l
t
l
n
l
t
l
n
l
t
l
n
l
t
l
n
l
t
l
n
l
t
l
n
l
t
l
n
l
t
l
n
l
t
l
n
l
t
l
n
1
.
5
1
.
5
1
1
1
.
5
1
3
1
8
.
5
1
.
5
1
1
7
.
5
1
1
3
2
1
2
0
1
8
.
5
1
2
3
2
0
1
9
.
5
1
2
.
5
2
1
2
0
1
9
.
5
1
2
5
2
5
2
2
2
0
2
1
2
0
2
1
2
0
2
9
2
5
2
5
2
5
3
2
3
2
2
7
2
5
1
2
8
2
5
2
5
2
5
3
1
3
2
3
0
2
5
3
2
2
5
2
9
2
5
3
8
3
5
3
1
3
2
1
2
1
0
3
3
5
3
5
3
3
3
2
1
3
1
0
3
8
3
5
1
0
3
5
3
3
5
1
9
1
0
1
3
1
0
5
1
5
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
9
1
0
1
5
1
0
0
5
0
5
3
5
0
5
5
5
0
1
9
5
0
3
7
1
3
1
3
5
9
5
0
8
1
8
0
7
2
3
7
3
3
9
0
8
0
8
1
8
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
8
5
8
0
2
5
8
5
8
0
7
7
3
1
0
7
1
0
0
9
1
8
0
9
5
8
0
8
5
8
0
1
1
9
1
0
0
1
0
2
1
0
0
1
2
1
2
5
1
0
7
1
0
0
3
5
1
0
5
1
0
0
9
1
8
0
1
3
3
1
2
5
1
1
7
1
0
0
1
1
8
1
0
0
1
0
5
1
0
0
1
1
1
2
5
1
2
1
2
5
1
5
7
1
2
5
1
3
1
1
2
5
5
0
1
2
1
2
5
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
2
1
2
5
1
1
1
1
2
5
1
2
5
1
2
5
1
7
8
1
0
1
5
3
1
2
5
1
9
1
1
0
1
2
1
0
7
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
2
5
2
0
1
2
0
0
1
8
1
1
0
1
7
8
1
0
1
5
8
1
2
5
2
2
2
2
1
1
9
5
1
0
2
1
2
2
1
2
0
8
2
0
0
9
5
1
9
3
1
0
1
7
1
1
0
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
9
2
0
0
2
1
3
2
0
0
1
9
0
1
0
2
7
3
2
5
0
2
3
2
2
1
2
9
9
2
5
0
2
5
2
2
5
0
1
2
0
2
2
3
2
0
0
1
9
9
1
0
2
8
5
2
5
0
2
5
3
2
5
0
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
8
2
0
0
3
1
7
3
1
5
2
7
5
2
5
0
3
1
8
3
1
5
2
9
3
2
5
0
F
o
r
o
v
e
r
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e
d
e
v
i
c
e
s
w
i
t
h
a
r
a
t
e
d
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
a
l
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
l
n
t
h
a
t
d
o
e
s
n
o
t
c
o
n
f
o
r
u
t
o
t
h
e
v
a
l
u
e
s
g
i
v
e
n
i
n
t
h
e
t
a
b
l
e
,
s
e
l
e
c
t
t
h
e
n
e
x
t
l
o
w
e
r
a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
r
a
t
e
d
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
a
l
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
v
a
l
u
e
.
10-18
/#
10
Minimum cross-sections for protective conductors to DIN VDE 0100-540
Protective conductor or PEN
conductor
1)
Protective conductor
3)
laid
seperately
Main poles lnsulated power
cables
0./1-kv cable
with
1 conductors
Frotected unprotected
2)
uu
2
uu
2
uu
2
uu
2
Cu Al
uu
2
Cu
To 0.5 0.5 2.5 1 1
0.75 0.75 2.5 1 1
1 1 2.5 1 1
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1 1
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1

10 10 10 10 10 10
1 1 1 1 1 1
25 1 1 1 1 1
35 1 1 1 1 1
50 25 25 25 25 25
70 35 35 35 35 35
95 50 50 50 50 50
120 70 70 70 70 70
150 70 70 70 70 70
185 95 95 95 95 95
210 120 120 120 120
300 150 150 150 150
100 185 185 185 185
1)
FEN conductor , 10 uu
2
Cu or 18 uu
2
Al
2)
lt is not peruissible to lay aluuinuu conductors without protection.
3)
With uain poles of , 95 uu
2
or uore, it is advisable to use non-insulted conductors.
10-19
/#
10
Conversion factors
When the aubient teuperature is not 30 C,
to be used for thecurrent carrying capacity
of wiring or cables in air to vE 0298-1
Table 17.
1)
higher aubient air teuperatures in
accordance with inforuation given
by the uanufacturer
lnsulation uaterial
1)
NF/SF FvC EFF
Feruissible operating
teuperature
0 C 70 C 80 C
Aubient air teuperature C Conversion factors
10 1.29 1.22 1.18
15 1.22 1.17 1.11
20 1.15 1.12 1.10
25 1.08 1.0 1.05
30 1.00 1.00 1.00
35 0.91 0.91 0.95
10 0.82 0.87 0.89
15 0.71 0.79 0.81
50 0.58 0.71 0.77
55 0.11 0.1 0.71
0 0.50 0.3
5 0.35 0.55
70 0.15
75 0.32
10-20
/#
10
Conversion factors to DIN VDE 0298-4, Table 21
0rouping of several circuits
Conversion factors for the grouping of
uulti-core cables or cables on cable
troughs or trays as well as for other cases
are provided in lNvE 0298-1, tables 22 to
27.
Arrangement Number of circuits
1 2 3 1 9 12 1 20
1 Eubedded or
enclosed
1.00 0.80 0.70 0.5 0.57 0.50 0.15 0.11 0.38
2 Fixedtowalls or
floors
1.00 0.85 0.79 0.75 0.72 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
3 Fixed under
ceilings
0.95 0.81 0.72 0.8 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
10-21
/#
10
Electrical equipuent of uachines
Extract from DIN EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113-1)
This standard is used for the electrical
equipuent of uachines, unless there is a
product standard (Type C) for the type of
uachine to be equipped.
Safety requireuents regarding the
protection of personnel, uachines and
uaterial according to the European
Machinery Safety irective are highlighted
under the heading Safety of uachines.
The degree of possible danger is to be
estiuated by risk assessuent. The
standard also includes requireuents for
equipuent, engineering and construction,
as well as tests to ensure faultless function
and the effectiveness of protective
ueasures. The following paragraphs are
an extract frou the standard.
Mains isolating device (main switches)
Every uachine uust be equipped with a
uanually-operated uains isolating device.
lt uust be possible to isolate the entire
electrical equipuent of the uachine frou
the uains using the uains isolating device.
The breaking capacity uust be sufficient to
siuultaneously disconnect the stalled
current of the largest uotor in the uachine
and the total current drawn by all the other
loads in norual operation.
lts 0ff position uust be lockable and uust
not be indicated until the specified
clearances and creepage distances
between all contacts have been achieved.
lt uust have only one 0n and one 0ff
position with associated stops. Star-delta,
reversing and uulti-speed switches are
not peruissible for use as uains isolating
devices.
The tripped position of circuit-breakers is
not regarded as a switch position,
therefore there is no restriction on their
use as uains isolating devices.
Where there are several incouers, each
one uust have a uains isolating device.
Mutual interlocking uust be provided
where a hatard uay result frou only one
uains isolating device being switched off.
0nly circuit-breakers uay be used as
reuotely-operated switches. They uust be
provided with an additional handle and be
lockable in the 0ff position.
Protection against electric shock
The following ueasures uust be taken to
protect personnel against electric shock.
Basic protection/protection against direct
contact
This is understood as ueaning protection
by ueans of an enclosure which can only
be opened by qualified personnel using a
key or special tool. Such personnel is not
obliged to disable the uains isolating
device before opening the enclosure. Live
parts uust be protected against direct
contact in accordance with lN EN 50271
or vE 00-511.
Where the uains isolating device is
interlocked with the door, the restrictions
uentioned in the previous paragraph
cease to apply because the door can only
be opened when the uains isolating device
is switched off. lt is peruissible for an
10-22
/#
10
interlock to be reuovable by an electrician
using a tool, e.g. in order to search for a
fault. Where an interlock has been
reuoved, it uust still be possible to switch
off the uains isolating device.
Where it is possible for an enclosure to be
opened without using a key and without
disconnection of the uains isolating
device, all live parts uust at the very least
couply with lF2X or lFXX degree of
protection in accordance with
lN EN 0529, vE 0170-1.
Fault protection Protection against
indirect contact
This involves prevention of a dangerous
touch voltage resulting frou faulty
insulation. To ueet this requireuent,
protective ueasures in accordance with
lEC 031-1-110, vE 0100-110 uust be
used.
Protection of equipment
Protection in the event of power failure
When the power returns following a failure
in the supply, uachines or parts of
uachines uust not start autouatically
where this would result in a dangerous
situation or dauage to property. With
contactor controls this requireuent can
easily be uet via self-uaintaining circuits.
For circuits with two-wire control, an
additional contactor relay with three-wire
control in the input wiring to the actuating
circuit can carry out this function. Mains
isolating devices and uotor-protective
circuit-breakers with undervoltage
releases also reliably prevent autouatic
restarting on return of voltage.
Overcurrent protection
No overcurrent protective device is
norually required for the uains supply
cable. 0vercurrent protection is provided
by the protective device at the head of the
input wiring. All other circuits uust be
protected by ueans of fuses or circuit-
breakers.
The stipulation for fuses is that
replaceuent uust be freely obtainable in
the country in which the fuses are used.
This difficulty can be avoided by using
circuit-breakers, withtheadded benefits of
all-pole disconnection, rapid operational
readiness and prevention of single-
phasing.
Overload protection of motors
Continuously operating uotors above
0.5 kWuust beprotectedagainst overload.
0verload protection is recouuended for
all other uotors. Motors which are
frequently starting and braking are difficult
to protect and often require a special
protective device. uilt-in therual sensors
are particularly suitable for uotors with
restricted cooling. ln addition, the fitting of
overload relays is always recouuended,
particularly as protection in the event of a
stalled rotor.
10-23
/#
10
Control functions in the event of a fault
Afault in the electrical equipuent uust not
result in a dangerous situation or in
dauage. Suitable ueasures uust be taken
to prevent danger frou arising. The
expense of using appropriate ueasures
can be extreuely high if applied generally.
To peruit a better assessuent of the
uagnitude of the risk in conjunction with
the respective application, the standard
lN EN lS0 13819-1 has been published.
Safety-related parts of control systeus
Fart 1. 0eneral rules for design.
The use of risk assessuent to lN EN lS0
13819-1 is dealt with in the Eaton safety
uanual Safety Technology for Machines
and Systeus (0rder No. Fu05907001Z).
Emergency switching off device
Every uachine which could potentially
cause danger uust be equipped with an
euergency switchingoff device which, in a
uain circuit uay be an euergency
switching off switch, and in a control
circuit an euergency switching off control
circuit device.
Actuation of the Euergency-Stop device
uust result in all current loads which could
directly result in danger, being
disconnected by de-energitation via
another device or circuit, i.e.
electrouechanical devices such as
contactors, contactor relays or the
undervoltage release of the uains isolating
device.
For direct uanual operation, euergency
switching off control circuit devices uust
have a uushroou-head push-button and
positively opening contacts. 0nce the
euergency switching off control circuit
device has been actuated, it uust only be
possible to restart the uachine after local
resetting. Fesetting alone uust not allow
restarting.
Furtheruore, the following apply for both
euergency-stop switch and euergency
switching off control circuit device.
The handle uust be red with a yellow
background
Euergency switching off devices uust
be quickly and easily accessible in the
event of danger
The euergency switching off function
uust take precedence over all other
functions and operations
lt uust be possible to deteruine
functional capability by ueans of tests,
especially in severe environuental
conditions.
Where there is separation into several
Euergency-Stopareas, it uust be clearly
discernible to which area an Euergency-
Stop device applies
Emergency operations
lt is not clear however frou the teru
euergency switching off which functions
are carried out with this. ln order to be able
to give a uore precise definition here,
lN EN 0201-1 describes two specific
functions.
1. evices for euergency stop
This involves the possibility of stopping
hatardous uotion as quickly as possible.
2. evices for euergency switching off
Where there is a risk of an electric shock
by direct contact, e.g. with live parts in
electrical operating areas, then an
Euergency-0ff device shall be provided.
10-24
/#
10
Colors of pushbuttons and their meanings
to lN EN 0073, vE 0199
lN EN 0201-1, vE 0113-1, Table 2
Color Meaning Typical application
FE Euergency
Euergency switching off
Fire fighting
YELL0W Abnorual condition lntervention, tosuppressabnorual
conditions or to avoid unwanted
changes
LuE Enforced action Fesetting function
0FEEN Norual Start frou safe condition
WhlTE No specific ueaning assigned
Start/0N (preferred)
Stop/0FF
0FEY
Start/0N
Stop/0FF
LACK
Start/0N
Stop/0ff (preferred)
10-25
/#
10
Colors of indicator lights and their meanings
to lN EN 0073, vE 0199
lN EN 0201-1, vE 0113-1, Table 1
Colors of illuminated pushbutton actuators and their meanings
oth tables are valid for illuuinated
pushbutton actuators, Table 1 relating to
the function of the actuators.
Color Meaning Description Typical application
FE Euergency Warning of potential
danger or a situation
which requires iuuediate
action
Failure of pressure in the
lubricating systeu
Teuperature outside
specified (safe) liuits
Essential equipuent stopped
by action of a protective
device
YELL0W Abnorual
condition
lupending critical
condition
Teuperature
(or pressure) different frou
norual level
0verload, which is
peruissible for a liuited tiue
LuE Enforced
action
0perator action essential
Feuove obstacle
Switch over to Advance
0FEEN Norual lndication of safe
operating conditions or
authoritation to proceed,
clear way
Cooling liquid circulating
Autouatic tank control
switched on
Machine ready to be started
WhlTE Neutral Any ueaning. uay be used
whenever doubt exists
about the applicability of
thecolors FE, YELL0Wor
0FEEN, or as confiruation
Motor running
lndication of operating uodes
10-26
/#
10
Safety-related characteristic values to EN ISO 13849-1 and IEC 62061
A safety-related systeucan consist of one
or several couponents. The assessuent of
the safety-related parts of a control systeu
to ENlS013819-1 and lEC201 require the
use of characteristic values provided by
the couponent uanufacturer.
Eaton provides the characteristic values of
all safety-related couponents in the area
of safety technology.
Further details are provided in the
overview of the safety-related
characteristic values for couponents.
http.//www.uoeller.net/binary/
bl_suppleuents/bl889de.pdf
Reliability values to EN ISO 13849-1
10d Nuuber of operations until 10 % of the tested couponents fail
dangerously.
MTTFd Mean Tiue To angerous Failure.
Average of the tiue expected up to a dangerous failure
FL Ferforuance Level
Reliability values to IEC 62061
10 Nuuber of operations until 10 % of the tested couponents fail.
FFhd Frobability of a angerous Failure per hour
Frobability of a dangerous failure per hour
SlL CL Safety lntegrity Level Claiu Liuit.
SlL claiu liuit (for a subsysteu).
10-27
/#
10
Measures for risk reduction
Risk reduction in the fault scenario
Afault in the electrical equipuent uust not
result in a dangerous situation or in
dauage. Suitable ueasures uust be taken
to prevent danger frou arising.
The use of proven circuits and components
a All switching functions on the non-
earthed side
b use of break devices with positively
opening contacts (not to be confused
with interlocked opposing contacts)
c Shut-down by de-excitation(fail-safein
the event of wire breakage)
d Circuit engineering ueasures which
uake undesirable operating states in
the fault scenario unlikely (in this
instance, siuultaneous interruption via
contactor and position switch)
e Switching of all live conductors to the
device to be controlled
f Chassis earth connection of the
actuating circuit for operational
purposes (not used as a protective
ueasure)
Redundancy
This ueans the existence of an additional
device or systeu which takes over the
function in the fault scenario.
L01
0
K1
K1 I
L1
L2
L02

Measures for risk reduction
10-28
/#
10
Diversity
The construction of control circuits
according to a range of function principles
or using various types of device.
a Functional diversity by coubination of
N/0 and N/C contacts
b iversity of devices due to use of
various types of device (here, various
types of contactor relay)
c Safety barrier open
d Feedback circuit
e Safety barrier closed
Performance tests
The correct functioning of the equipuent
can be tested either uanually or
autouatically.
c
e
d
K1 K2
K1
K2
13
14
21
22
a
b
10-29
/#
10
Frotection types for electrical equipuent
Protection types for electrical equipment by enclosures, covers and similar to
DIN EN 60529; VDE 0470-1
The designation to indicate degrees of
enclosure protection consists of the
characteristic letters IP (lngress
Frotection) followed by two characteristic
nuuerals. The first nuueral indicates the
degree of protection of persons against
contact with live parts and of equipuent
against ingress of solid foreign bodies and
dust, the second nuueral the degree of
protection against the ingress of water.
Protection against contact and foreign bodies
First
nuueral
Degree of protection
escription Explanation
0 Not protected No special protection of persons against accidental
contact with live or uoving parts.
No protection of the equipuent against ingress of solid
foreign bodies.
1 Frotection
against solid
objects
, 50 uu
Frotection against contact with live parts with back of
hand.
The access probe, sphere 50 uu diaueter, uust have
enough distance frou dangerous parts.
The probe, sphere 50 uu diaueter, uust not fully
penetrate.
2 Frotection
against solid
objects
, 12.5 uu
Frotection against contact with live parts with a finger.
The articulated test finger, 12 uu diaueter and 80 uu
length, uust have sufficient distance frou dangerous
parts.
The probe, sphere 12.5 uu diaueter, uust not fully
penetrate.
10-30
/#
10
Protection against contact and foreign bodies
First
nuueral
3 Frotection
against solid
objects
, 2.5 uu
Frotection against contact with live parts with a tool.
The entry probe, 2.5 uu diaueter, uust not penetrate.
The probe, 2.5 uu diaueter, uust not penetrate.
1 Frotection
against solid
objects , 1 uu
Frotection against contact with live parts with a
conductor.
The probe, 1.0 uu diaueter, uust not penetrate.
5 Frotection
against
accuuulation
of dust
conductor.
The ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust
does not enter in sufficient quantity to interfere with
satisfactory operation of the equipuent or with safety.
Frotection
against the
ingress of dust
ust-tight
conductor.
No entry of dust.
Exauple for stating degree of protection. lF 1 1
Characteristic letter
First nuueral
Second nuueral
10-31
/#
10
Protection against water
Second
nuueral
0 Not protected No special protection
1 Frotected
against
vertically
dripping
water
ripping water (vertically falling drops) shall have no
haruful effect.
2 Frotected
against
dripping
water when
enclosure
tilted up to 15
ripping water shall have no haruful effect when the
enclosure is tilted at any angle up to 15 frou the
vertical.
3 Frotected
against
sprayed
water
Water falling as a spray at any angle up to 0 frou the
vertical shall have no haruful effect.
1 Frotected
against
splashing
water
Water splashed against the enclosure frou any
direction shall have no haruful effect.
5 Frotected
against water
jets
Water projected by a nottle against the equipuent frou
any direction shall have no haruful effect.
Frotected
against
powerful
water jets
Water projected in powerful jets against the enclosure
frou any direction shall have no haruful effect.
7 Frotected
against the
effects of
occasional
subuersion
lngress of water in haruful quantities shall not be
possible when the enclosure is iuuersed in water
under defined conditions of pressure and tiue.
10-32
/#
10
8 Frotected
against the
effects of
subuersion
lngress of water in haruful quantities uust not be
possible when the equipuent is continuously
subuerged inwater under conditions which aresubject
to agreeuent between uanufacturer and user.
These conditions uust be uore stringent than those for
characteristic nuueral 7.
9K
1)
Frotected
during
cleaning
using high-
pressure/
steau jets
Water which is directed against the enclosure under
extreuely high pressure frou any direction uust not
have any haruful effects.
Water pressure of 100 bar
Water teuperature of 80 C
1)
This characteristic nuueral originates frou lN 10050 9.
Second
nuueral
Notes
10-33
/#
10
10-34
/#
10
utilitation categories for switching eleuents
To DIN EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660-200, Table 1)
Type of
current
utilitation
category
Typical applications Norual
conditions of
use
l = lnrush current, l
c
= reaking current,
l
e
= Fated operational current,
u = voltage,
u
e
= Fated operational voltage
u
r
= Fecovery voltage,
t
0.95
= Tiue in us, until 95 %of the steady-
state current has been reached.
F = u
e
x l
e
= Fated power in Watts
Switch on
Alter-
nating
current
AC-12 Control of resistive and solid state loads
as in optocoupler input circuits
1 1
AC-13 Control of solid state loads with
transforuer isolation
2 1
AC-11 Control of suall electrouagnetic loads
(uax. 72 vA)
1
AC-15 Control of electrouagnetic loads
(above 72 vA)
10 1
C
current
C-12 Control of resistive and solid state loads
as in optocoupler input circuits
1 1
C-13 Control of electrouagnets 1 1
C-11 Control of electrouagnetic loads with
econouy resistors in the circuit
10 1
l
l
e
u
u
e
l
l
e
u
u
e
utilitation categories for switching eleuents
10-35
/#
10
Abnorual conditions of use
Switch off Switch on Switch off
cos ' cos ' cos ' cos '
0.9 1 1 0.9
0.5 1 1 0.5 10 1.1 0.5 1.1 1.1 0.5
0.3 1 1 0.3 1.1 0.7 1.1 0.7
0.3 1 1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3
t
0.95
T
0.95
T
0.95
T
0.95
1 us 1 1 1 us
x F
1)
1 1 x F
1)
1.1 1.1 x F
1)
1.1 1.1 x F
1)
15 us 1 1 15 us 10 1.1 15 us 10 1.1 15 us
1)
The value x F results frou an eupirical relationship that represents uost C
uagnetic loads to an upper liuit of F = 50 W, i.e. [us|/[W| = 300 [us|. Loads having
a power consuuption greater than 50 W are assuued to consist of sualler loads in
parallel. Therefore, 300 us is to be an upper liuit, irrespective of the power
consuuption.
l
l
e
u
u
e
l
l
e
u
u
e
l
l
e
u
u
e
l
l
e
u
u
e
l
l
e
u
u
e
l
l
e
u
u
e
10-36
/#
10
utilitation categories for contactors and uotor starters
Type of
current
utilitation
category
Typical applications.
l = lnrush current,
l
c
= reaking current,
l
e
u = voltage,
u
e
= Fated operational voltage
u
r
= Fecovery voltage
verification of
electrical lifespan
Switch on
Alter-
nating
current
AC-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive
loads, resistance furnaces
All
values
1 1
AC-2 Slip-ring uotors. starting, switch off All
values
2.5 1
AC-3 Norual AC induction uotors.
starting, switch off during running
1)
l
e
# 17
l
e
> 17
1
1
AC-1 Norual AC induction uotors.
starting, plugging, reversing, inching
l
e
# 17
l
e
> 17
1
1
AC-5a Switching of electric discharge laup
controls
AC-5b Switching of filauent laups
AC-a
3)
Switching of transforuers
AC-b
3)
Switching of capacitor banks
AC-7a Slightly inductive loads in household
appliances and siuilar applications
ata as
suppliedbythe
uanufacturer
AC-7b Motor load for douestic applications
AC-8a Switching of heruetically enclosed
refrigerant coupressor uotors with
uanual reset of overload releases
5)
AC-8b Switching of heruetically enclosed
refrigerant coupressor uotors with
autouatic reset of overload
releases
5)
l
e
[A|
l
l
e
u
u
e
10-37
/#
10
verification of switching capacity
cos
'
cos
'
cos
'
cos
'
0.95 1 1 0.95 All
values
1.5 1.05 0.8 1.5 1.05 0.8
0.5 2.5 1 0.5 All
values
1 1.05 0.5 1 1.05 0.8
0.5
0.35
1
1
0.17
0.17
0.5
0.35
l
e
# 100
l
e
> 100
8
8
1.05
1.05
0.15
0.35
8
8
1.05
1.05
0.15
0.35
0.5
0.35
1
1
0.5
0.35
l
e
# 100
l
e
> 100
10
10
1.05
1.05
0.15
0.35
10
10
1.05
1.05
0.15
0.35
3.0 1.05 0.15 3.0 1.05 0.15
1.5
2)
1.05
2)
1.5
2)
1.05
2)
1.5 1.05 0.8 1.5 1.05 0.8
8.0 1.05
1)
8.0 1.05
1)
.0 1.05
1)
.0 1.05
1)
.0 1.05
1)
.0 1.05
1)
l
c
l
e
u
r
u
e
l
e
[A|
l
l
e
u
u
e
l
c
l
e
u
r
u
e
10-38
/#
10
Type of
current
utilitation
category
l = lnrush current,
l
c
= reaking current,
l
e
u = voltage,
u
e
= Fated operational voltage,
u
r
= Fecovery voltage
verification of
electrical lifespan
Switch on
C
current
C-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive
loads, resistance furnaces
All values 1 1
C-3 Shunt uotors. starting, plugging,
reversing, inching, dynauic braking
All values 2.5 1
C-5 Series uotors. starting, plugging,
reversing, inching, dynauic braking
All values 2.5 1
C- Switching of filauent laups
1)
cos ' = 0.15 for l
e
# 100 A, cos ' = 0.35 for l
e
> 100 A
2)
Tests uust be carried out with an filauent bulb load connected.
3)
here, the test data are to be derived frou the AC-3 or AC-1 test values in accordance
with particular table.
l
e
[A|
l
l
e
u
u
e
10-39
/#
10
L/F
[us|
L/F
[us|
L/F
[us|
L/F
[us|
1 1 1 1 All
values
1.5 1.05 1 1.5 1.05 1
2 2.5 1 2 All
values
1 1.05 2.5 1 1.05 2.5
7.5 2.5 1 7.5 All
values
1 1.05 15 1 1.05 15
1.5
2)
1.05
2)
1.5
2)
1.05
2)
1)
evices for utilitation category AC-3 uay be used for occasional inching or plugging
during a liuited period such as for setting up a uachine, during this liuited tiue
period, the nuuber of operations uust not exceed a total of five per uinute or uore
than ten in a ten uinute period.
5)
heruetically enclosed refrigerant coupressor uotor ueans a coubination of a
coupressor and a uotor both of which are housed in the saue enclosure with no
external shaft or shaft seals, the uotor running in the coolant.
l
c
l
e
u
r
u
e
l
e
[A|
l
l
e
u
u
e
l
c
l
e
u
r
u
e
10-40
/#
10
utilitation categories for switch-disconnectors
For switches, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units to
DIN EN 60947-3 (VDE 0660-107, Table 2)
Type of
current
utilitation
category
l = lnrush current,
l
c
= reaking current,
l
e
u = voltage,
u
e
= Fated operational voltage,
u
r
= Fecovery voltage
Alter-
nating
current
AC-20A()
1)
Making and breaking without load
AC-21A()
1)
Switching resistive loads including low overloads
AC-22A()
1)
Switching uixed resistive and inductive loads including
low overloads
AC-23A()
1)
Switching uotors and other highly inductive loads
C
current
C-20A()
1)
Making and breaking without load
C-21A()
1)
Switching resistive loads including low overloads
C-22A()
1)
Switching uixed resistive and inductive loads, including
low overloads (e.g. shunt uotors)
C-23A()
1)
Switching highly inductive loads (e.g. series uotors)
1)
A. Frequent actuation, . 0ccasional actuation
Switch-disconnectors that are suitable for switching uotors are also tested according
to the criteria stated in 7Section utilitation categories for contactors and uotor
starters, page 10-3.
utilitation categories for switch-disconnectors
10-41
/#
10
Switch on Switch off
cos ' cos '
All
values
1) 1) 1) 1)
All
values
1.5 1.05 0.95 1.5 1.05 0.95
All
values
3 1.05 0.5 3 1.05 0.5
l
e
#100
l
e
> 100
10
10
1.05
1.05
0.15
0.35
8
8
1.05
1.05
0.15
0.35
L/F
[us|
L/F
[us|
All
values
1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
All
values
1.5 1.05 1 1.5 1.05 1
All
values
1 1.05 2.5 1 1.05 2.5
All
values
1 1.05 15 1 1.05 15
l
e
[A|
l
l
e
u
u
e
l
c
l
e
u
r
u
e
l
e
[A|
l
l
e
u
u
e
l
c
l
e
u
r
u
e
Notes
10-42
/#
10
10-43
/#
10
Fated uotor currents
Rated motor currents for three-phase motors
(recommended value for squirrel cage motors)
Minimum fuse size for short-circuit
protection of three-phase motors
The uaxiuuu value is deteruined by the
switching device or overload relay.
The rated uotor currents are for standard
1500 r.p.u. three-phaseuotors withnorual
inner and outer surface cooling.
Fated fuse currents for 8/-starting also
apply to three-phase uotors with slip-ring
rotors.
For higher rated currents, starting currents
and/or longer starting tiues, larger fuses
will be required.
This table applies to slow or gL fuses
(vE 03).
In the case of NH fuses with aM
characteristics, fuses are to be selected
according to their rated operational
current.
.0.L. starting. Maxiuuu starting
current. x rated uotor
current, uaxiuuu
starting tiue. 5 sec.
8/-starting. Maxiuuu starting
current. 2 x rated uotor
current, uaxiuuu
starting tiue. 15 sec.
Motor overload relay in
phase current. set to
0.58 x rated uotor
current.
10-44
/#
10
Motor power 230 V 400 V
Fated
uotor
current
Fuse Fated
uotor
current
Fuse
irect
starting
8/- irect
starting
8/-
kW cos ' ( [%| A A A A A A
0.0
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
58
0
0
2
0.37
0.51
0.72
1.01
2
2
1
1
2
2
0.21
0.31
0.11
0.
2
2
2
2
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
0.7
0.72
0.75
0.79
2
9
71
1.1
2
2.7
3.2
1
10
10
2
1
1
1
0.8
1.1
1.5
1.9
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
0.81
0.81
0.81
0.82
71
71
78
80
1.
.3
8.7
11.5
10
1
20
25
10
10
1
2.
3.
5
.
10
1
1
1
10
1
5.5
7.5
11
0.82
0.82
0.82
0.81
83
8
87
87
11.8
19.
2.1
38
32
32
50
80
1
25
32
10
8.5
11.3
15.2
21.7
20
25
32
10
10
1
1
25
15
18.5
22
30
0.81
0.81
0.81
0.85
88
88
92
92
51
3
71
9
100
125
125
200
3
80
80
100
29.3
3
11
55
3
3
80
100
32
10
50
3
37
15
55
75
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
92
93
93
91
117
111
173
233
200
250
250
315
125
10
200
250
8
81
99
131
125
10
200
200
80
100
125
10
90
110
132
10
0.8
0.8
0.87
0.87
91
91
95
95
279
312
101
18
100
500
30
30
315
100
500
30
11
19
231
279
250
315
100
100
200
200
250
315
200
250
315
100
0.87
0.87
0.87
0.88
95
95
9
9
07
800
30
319
137
511
83
500
30
800
1000
100
500
30
800
150
500
50
30
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
9
97
97
97
79
1000
800

10-45
/#
10
440 V 500 V 690 V
Fated
uotor
current
Fuse Fated
uotor
current
Fuse Fated
uotor
current
Fuse
irect
starting
8/- irect
starting
8/- irect
starting
8/-
A A A A A A A A A
0.19
0.28
0.37
0.51
2
2
2
2
0.17
0.25
0.33
0.18
2
2
2
2
0.12
0.18
0.21
0.35
2
2
2
2
0.7
1
1.1
1.7
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
0.7
0.9
1.2
1.5
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
0.5
0.7
0.9
1.1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2.1
3.3
1.
10
1
2
1
10
2.1
2.9
1
5.3
10
1
1
1
1
1.5
2.1
2.9
3.8
1
10
10
2
1
1
1
7.7
10.2
13.8
19.8
1
20
25
32
10
10
1
25
.8
9
12.1
17.1
1
20
25
32
10
1
1
20
1.9
.5
8.8
12.
1
1
20
25
10
10
1
2.
32.8
37
50
50
3
80
100
32
32
10
3
23.1
28.9
33
11
50
50
3
80
25
32
32
50
17
20.9
23.8
32
32
32
50
3
20
25
25
32
1
71
90
122
125
125
125
10
80
100
100
125
51
5
79
107
100
125
10
200
3
80
80
125
39
17
58
78
80
80
100
10
50
3
3
100
11
179
210
251
200
250
250
315
10
200
250
250
129
157
181
221
200
250
250
315
10
10
200
250
93
111
131
12
10
200
250
250
100
125
10
200
318
397
195
21
100
30
30
800
315
100
30
800
279
319
13
517
100
500
30
800
315
100
500
30
202
253
31
39
315
100
500
30
250
315
100
100
99
800
800
15
800
30
11
191
550
18
30
30
800
800
30
30
30
30
10-46
/#
10
Conductors
Wiring and cable entries with grommets
Cable entry into closed devices is
considerably siuplified and iuproved by
using cable grouuets.
Cable grommets
For direct and quick cable entry into an
enclosure and as a plug.
etailed inforuation on uaterial properties
7Table, page 10-18.
Membrane
grommets
metric
Cable
entry
Hole
diameter
Cable
external
diameter
For use with
NYM/NYY cables,
4-core
Cable
grommet
part no.
mm mm mm
2
lF with
built-in
push-
through
ueubrane
FE and
theruo-
plastic
elastouer,
halogen
free
M1 1.5 1 9 h03vv-F3 x 0.75
NYM 1 x 1/3 x 1.5
KT-M1
M20 20.5 1 13 h03vv-F3 x 0.75
NYM 5 x 1.5/5 x 2.5
KT-M20
M25 25.5 1 18 h03vv-F3 x 0.75
NYM 1x 10
KT-M25
M32 32.5 1 25 h03vv-F3 x 0.75
NYM 1 x 1/5 x 10
KT-M32
Conductors
10-47
/#
10
Wiring and cable entries with cable glands
etailed inforuation on uaterial properties
7Table, page 10-18.
Metric cable glands to DIN EN 50262; VDE 0619
with 9, 10, 12, 11 or 15 uu long thread.
Cable glands Cable
entry
Hole
diameter
Cable
external
diameter
For use with
NYM/NYY cables,
4-core
Cable
glands
part no.
mm mm mm
2
Withlocknut and
built-in strain
relief
lF8 up to 5 bar,
polyauide,
halogen free
M12 12.5 3 7 h03vv-F3 x 0.75
NYM 1 x 2.5
v-M12
M1 1.5 1.5 10 h05vv-F3 x 1.5
NYM 1 x 1/3 x 1.5
v-M1
M20 20.5 13 h05vv-F1 x 2.5/3 x 1
NYM 5 x 1.5/5 x 2.5
v-M20
M25 25.5 9 17 h05vv-F5 x 2.5/5 x 1
NYM 5 x 2.5/5 x
v-M25
M32 32.5 13 21 NYM 5 x 10 v-M32
M32 32.5 18 25 NYM 5 x 1 v-M320
1)
M10 10.5 1 28 NYM 5 x 1 v-M10
M50 50.5 21 35 NYM 1 x 35/5 x 25 v-M50
M3 3.5 31 18 NYM 1 x 35 v-M3
ventilation cable
glands lF9K
M20 20.5 13 h05vv-F 1 x 2.5/3 x 1
NYM 5 x 1.5/5 x 2.5
v-M20-vENT
1) Not in coupliance with lN EN 5022.
Conductors
10-48
/#
10
Material properties
KT-M V-M
Material Folyethylene and
theruoplastic elastouer,
halogen free
Folyauide, halogen free
Color grey, FAL 7035 grey, FAL 7035
Frotection type up to lF lF8 up to 5 bar (30 uin)
Cheuical resistance Fesistant to.
Alcohol,
Aniual and plant-based oils,
Weak alkalis,
Weak acids,
water
Fesistant to.
Acetone,
Fetrol,
paraffin,
iesel oil,
0reases,
0ils,
Solvents for paints and
lacquers
anger of stress fracture Felatively high low
Teuperature resistance 10 C80 C, short-tiue up to
approx. 100 C
20 C100 C, short-tiue up
to approx. 120 C
Flaue retardant 0low-wire test 750 C to
lN EN 095-2-11,
vE 0171-2-11
Flauuability to uL91 v2
Conductors
10-49
/#
10
External diameter of conductors and cables
NYM. light plastic-sheated cable
NYY. plastic-sheathed cable
h05FF-F. light rubber-sheathed flexible
cable (NLh NSh)
NYCY. cable with concentric conductor
and plastic sheath
NYCWY. cable with concentric wave-foru
conductor and plastic sheath
Number of
conductors
Approximate external diameter (mean value of various makes)
NYM NYY H05 H07 NYCY
RR-F RN-F NYCWY
Cross section uu uu uu uu uu
uu
2
uax. uax. uax.
2 x 1.5 10 11 9 10 12
2 x 2.5 11 13 13 11 11
3 x 1.5 10 12 10 10 13
3 x 2.5 11 13 11 12 11
3 x 1 13 17 11 15
3 x 15 18 1 1
3 x 10 18 20 23 18
3 x 1 20 22 25 22
1 x 1.5 11 13 9 11 13
1 x 2.5 12 11 11 13 15
1 x 1 11 1 15 1
1 x 1 17 17 18
1 x 10 18 19 23 21
1 x 1 22 23 27 21
1 x 25 27 27 32 30
1 x 35 30 28 3 31
1 x 50 30 12 31
1 x 70 31 17 38
1 x 95 39 53 13
1 x 120 12 1
1 x 150 17 52
1 x 185 55 0
1 x 210 2 70
5 x 1.5 11 11 12 11 15
5 x 2.5 13 15 11 17 17
5 x 1 15 17 19 18
5 x 17 19 21 20
5 x 10 20 21 2
5 x 1 25 23 30
8 x 1.5 15
10 x 1.5 18
1 x 1.5 20
21 x 1.5 25
Conductors
10-50
/#
10
Cables and wiring, type abbreviation
Examples for complete cable designation
FvC-sheathed wire, 0.75 uu
2
flexible,
h05v-K 0.75 black
heavy rubber-sheathed cable, 3-core,
2.5 uu
2
without green/yellow protective
conductor A07FN-F3 x 2.5
Designation of specification
haruonited specification h
Fecognited national type A
Rated operational voltage U
O
/U
300/300v 03
300/500 v 05
150/750v 07
Insulating material
FvC v
Natural- and/or synthetic rubber F
Silicon rubber S
Sheathing material
FvC v
Natural- and/or synthetic rubber F
Folychloroprene rubber N
Fibre-glass braid J
Textile braid T
Special construction feature
Flat, separable conductor h
Flat, non-separable conductor h2
Type of conductor
solid -u
stranded -F
Flexible with cables for fixed installation -K
Flexible with flexible cables -F
highly flexible with flexible cables -h
Tinsel cord -Y
Number of cores ...
Protective conductor
Without protective conductors X
With protective conductors 0
Rated conductor cross-section ...
Notes
10-51
/#
10
Conductors
10-52
/#
10
Rated operational currents and short-circuit currents for standard transformers
Fated operating voltage
400/230 V 525 V
u
n
Short-circuit
voltage u
K
1 % %
Fating Fated
operational
current
Short-circuit
current
Fated
operational
current
l
n
l
K
l
n
kvA A A A A
50 72 197 55
3 91 2178 152 9
100 111 3933 222 110
125 180 191 3278 137
10 231 293 1195 17
200 289 78 5211 220
250 31 9833 555 275
315 155 12390 820 31
100 577 15733 10189 110
500 722 19 13111 550
30 909 21779 1519 93
800 1155 20977 880
1000 1113 2221 1100
1250 1801 32777 1375
100 2309 11951 170
2000 2887 52113 2199
2500 308 5553 2719
Conductors
10-53
/#
10
690/400 V
1 % % 1 % %
Short-circuit
current
Fated
operational
current
Short-circuit
current
l
K
l
n
l
K
A A A A A
1198 12 1110
1888 1259 53 113 958
2997 1998 81 2280 1520
371 2197 105 2850 1900
1795 3197 131 318 2132
5993 399 17 150 3010
7192 1995 209 5700 3800
9110 293 21 7182 1788
11987 7991 335 9120 080
11981 9989 118 11101 700
18879 1258 527 1135 957
15983 9 1211
19978 837 15201
21973 101 19001
3195 1339 21321
3995 173 30102
19915 2092 38002
10-54
/#
10
Foruulae
Ohm's Law
Resistance of a piece of wire
Copper.
l = Length of conductor [u| Aluuinuu.
3 = Conductivity [u/?uu
2
| lron.
A = Conductor cross section
[uu
2
|
Zinc.
Resistances
Transforuer
Capacitors
lupedance
L = lnductance [h| f = Frequency [ht|
C = Capacitance [F| ' = Fhase angle
X
L
= lnductive iupedance [?|
X
C
= Capacitive iupedance [?|
Parallel connection of resistances
With 2 parallel resistances. With 3 parallel resistances.
0eneral calculation of resistances.
u l F v $ " ( &
l
u
F
*** A $ " & F
u
l
*** . $ " &
F
l
% A (
************* . $ " & % 57
u
.uu
2
--------------- &
% 33
u
.uu
2
--------------- =
% 8,3
u
.uu
2
*************** &
% 15,5
u
.uu
2
*************** &
X
L
2 0 f L . $ " ( ( ( &
X
C
1
2 0 f C ( ( (
***************************** . $ " &
Z F
2
X
L
X
C
C ' &
2
( & Z
F
cosv
************ . $ " &
F
g
F
1
F
2
(
F
1
F
2
(
***************** . $ " & F
g
F
1
F
2
( F
3
(
F
1
F
2
F
2
F
3
F
1
F
3
( ( ( ( (
**************************************************************** . $ " &
1
F
***
1
F
1
*****
1
F
2
*****
1
F
3
***** ... 1 . 2 $ " ( ( ( &
1
Z
** *
1
Z
1
*****
1
Z
2
*****
1
Z
3
***** ... 1 . 2 $ " ( ( ( &
1
X
***
1
X
1
*****
1
X
2
*****
1
X
3
***** ... 1 . 2 $ " ( ( ( &
Foruulae
10-55
/#
10
Electric power
Mechanical force between 2 parallel conductors
Mechanical force between 3 parallel conductors
Fower Current consuuption
C current
Single-phase AC
Alternating current
2 conductors with currents l
1
and l
2
s = istance between
supports [cu|
a = istance between
conductors [cu|
3 conductors with current l
F u l ( W $ " &
l
F
u
--- A $ " =
F u l cos- ( ( W $ " &
l
F
u cos- (
********************** A $ " &
F 3 u l cos- ( ( ( W $ " &
l
F
3 u cos- ( (
*********************************** A $ " &
F2
0.2 l
1
l
2
s ( ( (
a
*********************************** N $ " &
I
1
I
2
s
a
F
3
0.808 F
2
N $ " ( &
F
3
0.85 F
2
N $ " ( &
F
3
0.85 F
2
N $ " ( &
Foruulae
10-56
/#
10
Voltage drop
Calculation of cross-section from voltage drop
Known power Known current
C current
Single-phase AC
Alternating current
C current Single-phase AC Alternating current
Known power
Known current
Power loss
C current Single-phase AC
Alternating current
l = Single length of conductor [u|,
A = Conductor cross section [uu
2
|,
= Conductivity (copper. = 57, aluuinuu. = 33, iron. = 8.3 )
2u = voltage drop
u )
2 l ( F (
z A ( u (
*********************** v $ " & u )
2 l ( l (
z A (
***************** v $ " &
u )
2 l ( F (
z A ( u (
*********************** v $ " & u )
2 l ( l (
z A (
***************** cos ( - v $ " &
u )
l F (
z A ( u (
*********************** v $ " &
u ) 3
l l (
z A (
************* cos ( - v $ " ( &
A
2 l ( F (
z )u ( u (
*************************** uu
2
$ " & A
2 l ( F (
z )u ( u (
*************************** uu
2
$ " & A
l F (
z )u ( u (
*************************** uu
2
$ " &
A
2 l ( l (
z )u (
***************** uu
2
$ " & A
2 l ( l (
z )u (
***************** cos- uu
2
$ " ( & A 3
l l (
z )u (
***************** ( cos ( - uu
2
$ " &
F
loss
2 l ( F ( F (
z A ( u ( u (
********************************* W $ " & F
l oss
2 l ( F ( F (
z A ( u ( u ( cosv ( cosv (
*********************************************************************** W $ " &
F
l oss
l F ( F (
z A ( u ( u ( cosv ( cosv (
*********************************************************************** W $ " &
z z z z
u
Ouu
2
***************
Foruulae
10-57
/#
10
Power of electric motors
0utput Current consuuption
C current
Single-
phase AC
Alternating
current
F
1
= Fated uechanical power at the uotor shaft conforu to rating plate
F
2
= Electrical power consuuption
Efficiency
Auount of
poles
Synchronous speed Full load speed
2 3000 2800 2950
1 1500 1100 1170
1000 900 985
8 750 90 735
10 00 550 585
Synchronous speed = approx. no-load speed
F
1
u l ( h ( W $ " &
l
F
1
u h (
************* A $ " &
F
1
u l ( cosv ( h ( W $ " &
l
F
1
u cosv ( h (
******************************** A $ " &
F
1
1.73 u ( l ( cosv ( h ( W $ " &
l
F
1
1.73 u ( cosv ( h (
************************************************ A $ " &
h
F
1
F
2
***** (100 %) ( & F
2
F
1
h
***** W $ " &
10-58
/#
10
lnternational unit Systeu
International Unit System (SI)
Factors for conversion of old units into SI units
asic paraueters
Fhysical
paraueters
Syubol Sl basic unit Further related
Sl units
Length l u (Metre) ku, du, cu, uu, >u,
nu, pu
Mass u kg (Kilograu) Mg, g, ug, >g
Tiue t s (Second) ks, us, >s, ns
Electrical current l A (Aupere) kA, uA, >A, nA, pA
Theruo-dynauic
teuperature
T K (Kelvin)
Auount of
substance
n uole (Mol) 0uol, Muol, kuol,
uuol, >uol
Light intensity I
v
cd (Candela) Mcd, kcd, ucd
Conversion factors
Size Old unit SI unit exact Approximate
Force 1 kp
1 dyn
9.805 N
1 10
-5
N
10 N
1 10
-5
N
Mouentuu of
force
1 ukp 9.805 Nu 10 Nu
Fressure 1 at
1 Atu = 70 Torr
1 Torr
1 uWS
1 uuWS
1 uuWS
0.9805 bar
1.01325 bar
1.3332 ubar
0.09805 bar
0.09805 ubar
9.805 Fa
1 bar
1.01 bar
1.33 bar
0.1 bar
0.1 ubar
10 Fa
Tension
Energy 1 ukp
1 kcal
1 erg
9.805 J
1.188 kJ
1 10
-7
J
10 J
1.2 kJ
1 10
-7
J
1
kp
uu
2
********** 9.805
N
uu
2
**********
10
N
uu
2
**********
10-59
/#
10
Fower
1.13 W 1.1 W
1 FS 0.73519 kW 0.71 kW
heat transfer
coefficient
ynauic viscosity
1 Foise
1 Foise 0.1
Kinetic viscosity 1 Stokes
Angle (flat) 1
1 gon
1
1 gon
57,29 1 rad
3,2 gon 1 rad
Conversion factors
Size Old unit SI unit exact Approximate
1
kcal
h
********* * 1.188
kJ
h
*****
1.2
kJ
h
*****
1
kcal
h
********* *
1
kcal
u
2
hC
*************** 1.188
kJ
u
2
hK
************* 1.2
kJ
u
2
hK
*************
1
kcal
u
2
hC
*************** 1.13
W
u
2
K
********** 1.1
W
u
2
K
**********
1 10
C kps
u
2
********* # 0 9805 / 10
5 C Ns
u
2
******* # 1 10
5 C Ns
u
2
******* #
0.1
Ns
u
2
****** 0,1
Ns
u
2
******
Fa s #
1 10
1 C u
2
s
****** # 1 10
1 C u
2
s
****** #
1
30
******* *pla
2 78 / 10
3 C
pla #
1
100
******* *pla
2 5 10
3 C
pla # /
0
180
******* *rad
17 5 10
3 C
rad # /
0
200
******* *rad
15 7 / 10
3 C
pla #
10-60
/#
10
Conversion of SI units
Site Sl units
naue
Syubol asic
unit
Conversion of Sl units
Force Newton N
Force
uouentuu
Newton+
uetre
Nu
Fressure ar bar
Fascal Fa
Energy, heat Joule J 1 J = 1 Ws = 1 Nu
Fower Watt W
Tension
Angle (flat) egree
0on
1
gon
30 = 1 pla = 2* rad
100 gon = 30
Fadian rad
Full circle pla 1 pla = 2* rad = 30
voltage volts v
Fesistance 0hu ?
Conductivity Sieuens S
Electric
charge
Couloub C 1 A s
1
kg u #
s
2
************** #
1
kg u
2
#
s
2
**************** #
10
5 kg
u s
2
#
************* 1 bar 10
5
Fa 10
5 N
u
2
****** & &
1
kg
u s
2
#
************* #
1 Fa 10
5 C
bar &
1
kg u
2
#
s
2
**************** #
1
kg u
2
#
s
3
**************** #
W 1 &
J
s
** * 1
N u #
s
************ &
N
uu
2
********** 10
kg
u s
2
#
************* 1
N
uu
2
********** 10
2 N
cu
2
********* &
1
u
u
****
1
kg u
2
#
s
3
A #
**************** #
1 v 1 &
W
A
***** #
1
kg u
2
#
s
3
A
2
#
**************** #
1 . 1 &
v
A
*** 1
W
A
2
***** # & #
1
s
3
A
2
#
kg u
2
#
**************** # 1 S 1 &
A
v
*** 1 &
A
2
W
***** # #
10-61
/#
10
Decimal powers (parts and multiples of units)
Capacity Farad F
Electrical
field
Flux Weber W
b
Flux density Tesla T
Feactor henry h
Fower Frefix Syubol Fower Frefix Syubol
10
18
Atto a 10
1
eci d
10
15
Feuto f 10 eca da
10
12
Fico p 10
2
hecto h
10
9
Nano n 10
3
Kilo k
10
Micro > 10
Mega M
10
3
Milli u 10
9
0iga 0
10
2
Centi c 10
12
Tera T
Conversion of SI units
Site Sl units
naue
Syubol asic
unit
Conversion of Sl units
1
s
1
A #
kg u
2
#
**************** # 1 F 1 &
C
v
*** # 1
s A
2
#
W
************ # &
v
u
**** 1
kg u #
s
3
A #
************** # 1
v
u
**** 1
W
A u #
************ # &
1
kg u
2
#
s
2
A #
**************** #
1 W
b
1 & v s 1
W s #
A
************ # & # #
1
kg
s
2
A #
************ #
1 T
W
b
u
2
******* 1
v s #
u
2
********** # 1
W s #
u
2
A
************ # & & &
1
kg u
2
#
s
2
A
2
#
**************** #
1 h
W
b
A
******* 1
v s #
A
********** # 1
W s #
A
2
************ # & & &
10-62
/#
10
Physical units
Mechanical force
Pressure
0bsolete units
Sl unit. N (Newton)
J/u (Joule/u)
Frevious unit. kp (kilopond)
dyn (yn)
1 N = 1 J/u = 1 kg u/s
2
= 0.102 kp = 10
5
dyn
1 J/u = 1 N = 1 kg u/s
2
= 0.102 kp = 10
5
dyn
1 kg u/s
2
= 1 N = 1 J/u = 0.102 kp = 10
5
dyn
1 kp = 9.81 N = 9.81 J/u = 9.81 kg u/s
2
= 0.981 10
dyn
1 dyn = 10
5
N = 10
5
J/u = 10
5
kg u/s
2
= 1.02 10
5
kp
Sl unit. Fa (Fascal) bar
(ar)
Frevious unit. at = kp/cu
2
= 10 u Ws
Torr = uu hg
atu
1 Fa = 1 N/u
2
= 10
5
bar
1 Fa = 10
5
bar = 10.2 10
at = 9.87 10
at = 7.5 10
3
Torr
1 bar = 10
5
Fa = 1.02 at = 0.987 at = 750 Torr
1 at = 98.1 10
3
Fa = 0.981 bar = 0.98 at = 73 Torr
1 atu = 101.3 10
3
Fa = 1.013 bar = 1.033 at = 70 Torr
1 Torr = 133.3 Fa = 1.333 10
3
bar = 1.359 10
3
at = 1.31 10
3
atu
10-63
/#
10
Work
Power
Sl unit. J (Joule)
Nu (Newtonueter)
Sl unit.
(as before)
Ws (Wattsecond)
kWh (Kilowatthour)
Frevious unit. kcal (Kilocalorie) = cal 10
3
1 Ws = 1 J = 1 Nu 10
7
erg
1 Ws = 278 10
9
kWh = 1 Nu = 1 J = 0.102 kpu = 0.239 cal
1 kWh = 3. 10
Ws = 3. 10
Nu = 3. 10
J = 37 10
kpu = 80 kcal
1 Nu = 1 Ws = 278 10
9
kWh = 1 J = 0.102 kpu = 0.239 cal
1 J = 1 Ws = 278 10
9
kWh = 1 Nu = 0.102 kpu = 0.239 cal
1 kpu = 9.81 Ws = 272 10
kWh = 9.81 Nu = 9.81 J = 2.31 cal

1 kcal = 1.19 10
3
Ws = 1.1 10
3
kWh = 1.19 10
3
Nu = 1.19 10
3
J = 127 kpu
Sl unit. Nu/s (Newtonueter/s)
J/s (Joule/s)
Sl unit.
(as before)
W (Watt)
kW (Kilowatt)
Frevious unit. kcal/s (Kilocalorie/sec.) = cal/s 10
3
kcal/h (Kilocalorie/hour.) = cal/h 10
kpu/s (Kilopondueter/Sec.)
FS (uetric horsepower)
1 W = 1 J/s = 1 Nu/s
1 W = 10
3
kW = 0.102 kpu/s = 1.3 10
3
FS = 80 cal/h = 0.239 cal/s
1 kW = 10
3
W = 102 kpu/s = 1.3 FS = 80 10
3
cal/h = 239 cal/s
1 kpu/s = 9.81 W = 9.81 10
3
kW = 13.3 10
3
FS = 8.13 10
3
cal/h = 2.31 cal/s
1 FS = 73 W = 0.73 kW = 75 kpu/s = 32 10
3
cal/h = 17 cal/s
1 kcal/h = 1.1 W = 1.1 10
3
kW = 119 10
3
kpu/s = 1.58 10
3
FS = 277.8 10
3
cal/s
1 cal/s = 1.19 W = 1.19 10
3
kW = 0.127 kpu/s = 5.9 10
3
FS = 3. kcal/h
10-64
/#
10
Magnetic field strength
Magnetic flux
Magnetic flux density
Sl unit.
Frevious unit. 0e = (0erstedt)
= 0.0125 0e
= 12.5 0e
1 0e
1
A
u
**** 0.001
kA
u
****** &
1
kA
u
****** 1000 &
A
u
****
79.
A
u
**** & 0.079
kA
u
****** &
Sl unit. Wb (Weber)
>Wb (Microweber)
Frevious unit. M = Maxwell
1 Wb = 1 Tu
2
1 Wb = 10
>Wb = 10
8
M
1 >Wb = 10
Wb = 100 M
1 M = 10
8
Wb = 0.01 >Wb
Sl unit. T (Tesla)
uT (Millitesla)
Frevious unit. 0 = 0auss
1 T = 1 Wb/u
2
1 T = 10
3
uT = 10
1
0
1 uT = 10
3
T = 10 0
1 0 = 0.1
3
T = 0.1 uT
10-65
/#
10
Conversion of Imperial/American units into SI units
Length 1 in 1 ft 1 yd 1 uile
Land uile
1 uile
Sea uile
u 25.1 10
3
0.3018 0.9111 1.09 10
3
1.852 10
3
Weight 1 lb 1 ton (uK)
long ton
1 cwt (uK)
long cwt
1 ton (uS)
short ton
1 ounce 1 grain
kg 0.153 101 50.80 907.2 28.35 10
3
1.80 10
Area 1 sq.in 1 sq.ft 1 sq.yd 1 acre 1 sq.uile

u
2
0.152 10
3
92.90 10
3
0.831 1.017 10
3
2.590 10
3
voluue 1 cu.in 1 cu.ft 1 cu.yd 1 gal (uS) 1 gal (uK)
u
3
1.39 10
28.32 10
3
0.71 3.785 10
3
1.51 10
3
Force 1 lb 1 ton (uK)
long ton
1 ton (uS)
short ton
1 pdl
(poundal)
N 1.118 9.91 10
3
8.897 10
3
0.1383
Speed 1 knot
0.117 0.5111 0.3018 5.080 10
3
Fressure 1 in hg 1 ft h
2
0 1 in h
2
0
bar 5.95 10
-3
33.8 10
-3
29.89 10
-3
2.191 10
-3
Energy,
Work
1 hFh 1 Tu 1 FCu
J 2.81 10
1.055 10
3
1.90 10
3
1
uile
h
********* * 1
ft
s
*** 1
ft
uin
********
u
s
****
10-66
/#
10
Conversion of Imperial/American units into SI units
Length 1 cu 1 u 1 u 1 ku 1 ku
0.3937 in 3.2808 ft 1.093 yd 0.211 uile
(land uile)
0.5399 uile
(sea uile)
Weight 1 g 1 kg 1 kg 1 t 1 t
15.13 grain 35.27 ounce 2.201 lb. 0.9812 long
ton
1.1023 short
ton
Area 1cu
2
1 u
2
1 u
2
1 u
2
1 ku
2
0.155 sq.in 10.739 sq.ft 1.19 sq.yd 0.2171 10
3
acre
0.381
sq.uile
voluue 1cu
3
1 l 1 u
3
1 u
3
1 u
3
0.0102
cu.in
0.03531 cu.ft 1.308 cu.yd 21.2 gal
(uS)
219.97 gal
(uK)
Force 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N
0.2218 lb 0.1003 10
3
long
ton (uK)
0.1123 10
3
short
ton (uS)
7.230 pdl
(poundal)
Speed
1 u/s 1 u/s 1
u/s
1 u/s
3.2808 ft/s 19.08
ft/uin
1.911 knots 2.237 uph
Fressure 1 bar 1 bar 1 bar 1 bar
11.50 psi 29.53 in hg 33.15 ft h
2
0 101.11 in
h
2
0
Energy,
Work
1 J 1 J 1 J
0.3725 10
hFh 0.9178 10
3
Tu 0.523 10
3
FCu
11-1
11
Index
A
AC/C sensitive ............................................................ 7-20
Accelerating torque ....................................................... 2-6
Accessories contactors ............................................... 5-14
Add-on board ................................................................ 0-26
Analog inputs, easy ........................................... 1-531-56
Analog output, easy ..................................................... 1-61
Anticlockwise rotation field ........................................... 2-4
Arc fault protective systeu AFC0N ............................ 0-32
AFC0N quenching device ............................................ 0-32
ATEX approval
EMT ........................................................................ 8-14
Motor protection systeu ZEv ................................. 5-27
Motor-protective circuit-breakers FKZM0, FKZM1 6-4
0verload relays ....................................................... 5-20
Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKE .......................... 6-5
Theruistor overload relay for uachine
protection EMT ...................................................... 5-33
Autouatic stator starters
Engineering starting resistor .................................. 8-15
Engineering start-up transforuer ........................... 8-15
Exauple resistors .................................................... 8-83
Exauple start-up transforuer ................................. 8-86
Auxiliary contact
Motor-protective circuit-breakers FKZ, FKE ........... 6-9
Norual ....................................................................... 7-6
Auxiliary contact uodule ............................................... 5-2
Auxiliary switches
Early uake ................................................................. 7-7
Trip-indicating ........................................................... 7-6
B
asic circuits
easy ............................................................... 1-811-86
iuetal
Motor protection ..................................................... 8-14
Motor-protective circuit-breakers ........................... 6-4
0verload relay ......................................................... 5-20
raking, oversynchronous ........................................... 8-53
reakdown Torque ......................................................... 2-6
Index
11-2
11
ridging during starting
heavy starting duty ..................................................8-11
Motor contactor .........................................................8-9
0verload relays ........................................................8-27
usbar systeu ...............................................................0-38
utter, general syubol .................................................9-28
ypass circuit ...............................................................2-37
ypass contactor ..........................................................2-61
ypass contacts ..............................................................2-9
C
Cable entries ...............................................................10-46
Cables
external diaueters .................................................10-49
type abbreviation ...................................................10-50
Cables, external diaueters .........................................10-49
Cables, type abbreviation ...........................................10-50
Cage Claup ...................................................................5-15
Cau switches
Changeover switches, reversing switches ...............4-5
heater switches .......................................................4-14
lnterlock circuits ......................................................4-11
Main switch, uaintenance switch ............................4-3
Meter changeover switches ...................................4-12
Multi-speed switches ................................................4-7
Speed switching ......................................................8-53
Star-delta, reversing star-delta .................................4-6
Step switches ...........................................................4-15
use, designs ...............................................................4-2
Capacitive sensors ........................................................3-32
Capacitor
0eneral syubol ........................................................9-27
0roup coupensation, use of reactors ....................8-18
Single, group coupensation ....................................8-17
Capacitor group coupensation ....................................8-18
Cascade control ............................................................2-40
Changeover switch .........................................................4-5
Auueter ...................................................................4-12
voltueter ..................................................................4-12
Wattueter ................................................................4-13
Cl insulated distribution boards ...................................0-37
Index
11-3
11
Circuit diagraus contactor relays ................................. 5-6
Circuit docuuents
general ..................................................................... 8-19
Wiring diagrau ........................................................ 8-20
Circuit exauples
ridging during starting .......................................... 8-27
Contactors lL ......................................................... 8-26
Circuit-breaker
as transforuer switches ......................................... 7-19
Contactor state ........................................................ 7-15
lnternal circuit diagraus ........................................... 7-8
lZMX .......................................................................... 7-3
Meshed network circuit-breakers .......................... 7-17
Meshed network circuit-breakers .......................... 7-17
Motor operated reuote switch ............................... 7-18
NZM ........................................................................... 7-2
NZM internal circuit diagraus .................................. 7-8
Feuote operation with uotor operator .................. 7-18
Fesidual current device ............................... 7-207-21
Selection criteria ....................................................... 7-3
short-tiue delayed .................................................. 7-16
Tiue-discriuinating ................................................ 7-16
Transforuer switches ............................................. 7-19
with residual current device ................................... 7-22
Circuit-breakers
Clockwise rotation field ................................................. 2-4
CM (Contactor Monitoring evice) ........................... 5-36
Coil Functions ............................................................... 1-79
Coils .............................................................................. 1-77
Colors
of indicator lights ................................................... 10-25
of pushbuttons ....................................................... 10-24
C0M-LlNK connection ................................................. 1-74
Coupact distribution board for flush uounting and
surface uounting ......................................................... 0-34
Coupact FLC .............................................................. 1-108
Coupensated uotor ..................................................... 8-12
Conductor
0eneral syubol ............................................... 9-25, 9-26
Index
11-4
11
Connection exauples
S1 ............................................................................2-65
Connection for overload relay 1 pole, 2 pole .................8-5
Contact protection relay ...............................................5-34
Contact, self-uonitoring .................................................3-9
Contactor for capacitor ................................................8-94
Contactor relays circuit diagraus ..................................5-6
Contactor relays reference letters .................................5-3
Contactors
C operated .............................................................5-16
lLM .........................................................................5-15
0eneral syubol ........................................................9-33
Marking ....................................................................8-25
0verview .......................................................... 5-85-9
Contacts ........................................................................1-77
Control circuit devices ..................................................1-24
For direct-on-line start .............................................8-34
For uulti-speed contactors ......................... 8-638-67
For star-delta ............................................................8-45
FM0 ............................................................................3-2
Control circuit supply uotor .........................................8-24
Control Felays ...............................................................1-30
Control relays aeasyFelays ............................ 1-43, 1-44
Core-balance transforuer ............................................5-26
Current Liuiter
aCurrent liuiters FKZM0, FKZM1 .........................6-8
Current liuiters FKZM0, FKZM1 .....................................6-8
Current uonitoring relays .............................................1-40
Current peaks ................................................................1-40
Current sensors ZEv .....................................................5-28
Current transforuer integrated ....................................5-23
D
C uotors ........................................................................8-5
eceleration raup ........................................................2-11
eceleration tiue ..........................................................1-38
elta circuit ........................................................... 2-5, 2-15
elta circuit, uotor .......................................................2-96
ielectric constant ........................................................3-34
Index
11-5
11
igital inputs, easy
AC devices ............................................................... 1-51
C devices ............................................................... 1-52
lL contactors
0verload protection ................................................ 8-26
irect Motor start ........................................................... 2-2
0L starters ................................................................ 2-100
Motor-protective circuit-breakers ........................... 6-3
with FKE ................................................................... 1-12
with FKZ ..................................................................... 1-8
ouble-fraue teruinal ................................................. 5-15
rive systeu ........................................................ 2-69, 2-72
E
Early-uake auxiliary contacts ....................................... 7-7
Early-uake auxiliary switches ....................................... 7-7
Earth, general syubol 0round ..................................... 9-26
Earth-fault
ZE ........................................................................... 5-23
ZEv ........................................................................... 5-26
Earth-fault release ........................................................ 7-20
Earth-fault release circuit-breaker .............................. 7-20
easy
isplay ..................................................................... 1-92
Fower supply ........................................................... 1-50
Frograuuing ................................................ 1-771-93
Felay outputs ........................................................... 1-58
easy expansion .................................................. 1-621-63
easy expansion units for networking .......................... 1-70
easy inputs ......................................................... 1-511-57
easy local expansion .................................................... 1-62
easy uodeu operation ................................................. 1-76
easy outputs ...................................................... 1-581-61
easy power supply ....................................................... 1-50
easy printer connection ............................................... 1-75
easy reuote expansion ................................................ 1-62
easy systeu overview ....................................... 1-431-44
easyhMl ........................................................................ 1-46
easyNet .............................................................. 1-641-68
easyFelay ............................................................ 1-43, 1-44
Eaton selector slide for uotor starter ........................... 8-3
Index
11-6
11
Eaton Wiring Manual ......................................................0-8
EC1F .............................................................................1-108
Efficiency .........................................................................2-6
Electrical connector .......................................................6-7
Electrical equipuent of uachines ..............................10-21
Electronic Catalog .........................................................0-11
Electronic uotor starter ..................................................2-2
Electronic overload relays ZE ........................ 5-235-25
Electronic safety relays ................................................1-29
Electronic tiuing relays ................................................1-36
EMC coupliance
in FS .......................................................................2-72
Euergency stop function ..............................................1-34
Euergency stop pushbutton ...........................................3-8
Euergency switch, general syubol .............................9-29
Euergency-off pushbutton .............................................3-9
Euployers liability insurance Association ..................3-25
EN 50011 ..........................................................................5-3
Engineering
easy .............................................................. 1-501-76
Motor ............................................................ 8-158-18
Switching of capacitors ...........................................8-17
Three-phase-autouatic starter ...............................8-15
Error uessage, differential ...........................................6-12
Ethernet uodule ............................................................1-73
Ex e uotors
0verload relays ........................................................5-20
FKZM0, FKZM1 .................................................. 6-4, 6-5
External diaueters, cables .........................................10-49
F
Fast counters .................................................................1-57
Fault current ..................................................................5-26
Feedback Circuit ...........................................................1-26
First environuent ..........................................................2-73
Flashing .........................................................................1-38
Fleeting contact
on de-energitation ...................................................1-38
on energitation .........................................................1-37
Fleeting pulse ................................................................1-38
Float switch, general syubol ........................................9-32
Index
11-7
11
Floor-standing
istribution board .................................................... 0-37
Enclosure ................................................................. 0-35
Foruulae ..................................................................... 10-54
Freely graphical function block diagrau ................... 1-133
Free-wheel diode suppressor ........................................ 5-4
Frequency generators .................................................. 1-57
Frequency inverter ......................................................... 2-2
Control section ........................................................ 2-68
esign ...................................................................... 2-66
Earthing ueasures .................................................. 2-76
Electrical uains connection ................................... 2-71
EMC-coupliant surface uounting ................. 2-76, 2-81
Filtering ueasures ................................................... 2-80
Functions ................................................................. 2-86
lnstallation ............................................................... 2-76
M-Max ......................................................... 2-85, 2-87
0perating principle .................................................. 2-66
Fower section ......................................................... 2-68
Shielded ueasures .................................................. 2-78
Frequency-controlled three-phase uotor ................... 2-70
Function lock iagrau ............................................. 1-132
Function blocks easy .................................................... 1-77
Functions easy .............................................................. 1-48
Fuseless, Feversing contactor luL ........................... 8-30
G
0ALlLE0 visualitation tool ......................................... 1-133
0enerator, general syubol .......................................... 9-34
0lobal Codes, Standards Authorities worldwide .......... 9-9
0roup coupensation .................................................... 8-17
0roup protection Motor-protective circuit-breakers ... 6-8
0uard ............................................................................ 1-32
H
hatard reduction .......................................................... 1-29
heater switches ........................................................... 4-14
Index
11-8
11
heavy starting duty
ridging during starting ...........................................8-11
Exauple ....................................................................8-28
Motor protection ........................................................8-8
Frotection .................................................................5-23
hMl-FLC ........................................................................1-94
I
l/0 uodules ...................................................................1-25
l/0 systeu ....................................................................1-124
l/0assistant .................................................................1-126
lEC 201 ........................................................................1-29
lL ..................................................................................1-130
lupulse relays ...............................................................1-84
lncreuental encoders ..................................................1-57
ln-delta connection .......................................................2-56
lndicator light, general syubol .....................................9-28
lndividual coupensation ...............................................8-17
lnductive sensors ..........................................................3-30
lnfra-red touch panel ....................................................1-96
ln-line circuit .................................................................2-56
lnput uodules ................................................................1-25
lnsulated enclosures ....................................................0-37
lnsulation uonitoring relays .........................................1-42
lnterlock circuits, cau switches ..................................4-11
lnternal C link ..............................................................2-67
lnternational unit Systeu (Sl) ....................................10-58
lnverter uodule .............................................................2-67
lsolating point, general syubol ....................................9-26
L
Labeleditor .....................................................................3-13
Ladder diagrau ...........................................................1-132
Light barriers .................................................................3-36
Line filters ......................................................................2-80
Liquid level uonitoring relay .........................................1-41
Load Torque ....................................................................2-6
Load-shedding contact ...................................................4-4
Index
11-9
11
M
Mains
Chokes ..................................................................... 2-83
Switches .................................................................. 7-12
voltage ..................................................................... 2-10
voltages in North Auerica ...................................... 2-71
Maintenance switch .................................................... 2-78
Maintenance switches
Circuit diagrau .......................................................... 4-4
Maintenance switches, cau switches ......................... 4-4
Marking of electrical equipuent ................................. 10-2
Markings, contactor ..................................................... 8-25
Measureuent and uonitoring relay EMF1 ................. 1-40
Mechanical interlock ................................................... 5-16
Miniuuu cross-sections for protective conductors 10-18
Mirror contact .............................................................. 5-19
M0AN .............................................................. 0-290-31
Modular FLC ............................................................... 1-113
Modular switchgear systeu ........................................ 0-29
Monitoring relays ......................................................... 1-40
Motor
Anticlockwise operation ........................................... 2-4
Circuit docuuents ................................................... 8-19
Clockwise operation ................................................. 2-4
Control circuit devices for direct-on-line start ...... 8-34
Control circuit supply .............................................. 8-24
Engineering ................................................... 8-158-18
0eneral syubol ........................................................ 9-34
lnforuation on the rating plate ................................. 2-4
Motor windings ....................................................... 8-50
Multi-speed contactors .......................................... 8-53
0perating direction ................................................... 2-4
0verload .................................................................. 5-26
Fole changing ............................................... 8-478-49
Fower supply ........................................................... 8-21
Separate windings .................................................. 8-47
Star-delta of three-phase uotors ................ 8-358-44
Switching of capacitors ............................... 8-928-95
Switching on three-phase uotors ............... 8-268-33
Tapped winding ....................................................... 8-47
Index
11-10
11
Motor overload relay, uotor-protection ......................5-20
Motor Fower ...................................................................2-6
Motor power supply ......................................................8-21
Motor protection ................................................. 8-38-14
ridging during starting .............................................8-9
Soft starter ...............................................................2-19
variants ....................................................................2-19
Motor protective circuit breakers ................................2-19
Motor rating ..................................................................5-15
Motor reactors ..............................................................2-83
Motor starter, FAM0 ....................................................2-99
Motor torque ...................................................................2-6
Motor windings .............................................................8-50
For starter coubinations ...........................................6-6
0perating principle schematics PKZ, PKE ...... 6-116-13
0verview ....................................................................6-1
Motor-protective trip blocks ...........................................6-5
Motor-starter coubination MSC ....................................6-7
Multi-function display ...................................................1-46
Multifunction relay ........................................................1-36
Control circuit devices ................................. 8-638-67
Star-delta ..................................................................8-68
Multi-speed switch ridging during starting ...............8-10
Multi-speed switch of three-phase uotors ..... 8-558-62
Star-delta ...................................................... 8-688-82
Multi-speed switches cau switches .............................4-7
Multi-speed switching, uarking ...................................8-25
N
N/C contact, general syubol ........................................9-30
N/0 contact, general syubol ........................................9-30
Networking easy ...................................................1-62??
Norual AC induction uotor ..........................................2-14
Nuuber of pole pairs ......................................................2-4
NZM circuit-breakers ...................................................1-23
O
0ff-delayed ....................................................................1-37
0ff-delayed undervoltage release ..................................7-5
Index
11-11
11
0hus Law .................................................................. 10-54
0n-delayed ................................................................... 1-37
0n-0ff function ............................................................. 1-39
0perands ...................................................................... 1-77
0perating frequency ...................................................... 8-4
0ptical sensors ............................................................. 3-35
0vercurrent protection of cables and conductors ... 10-12
0verload uotor ............................................................. 5-26
0verload uotor-protective circuit-breaker ................... 6-2
0verload protection
Contactor ................................................................. 8-26
Electronic ................................................................. 5-23
0verload relay
Function (ZMT) .......................................................... 1-7
Motor protection overload relay ............................. 5-20
Tiue-delayed ............................................................. 8-6
Tripping ...................................................................... 8-4
0verload relay aMotor protection overload relay .. 5-20
0verload relay ZE, tripping characteristics .............. 5-25
0verload relays ................................................... 2-19, 2-51
ln delta connection ................................................. 8-36
ln uotor circuit, in uains line ................................. 8-35
ZE, electronic ............................................. 5-235-25
0verload relays ZE ..................................................... 5-24
0versynchronous braking ............................................ 8-53
0vervoltage .................................................................. 2-51
P
Farallel connection ...................................................... 1-82
Faraueteritable contacts ............................................ 5-27
FS ............................................................................... 2-72
Feruanent contact ....................................................... 1-84
Fersonnel protection
Enhanced ................................................................. 3-20
LS ............................................................................. 3-19
LSF ........................................................................... 3-24
Fhase cutting .................................................................. 2-9
Fhase failure ................................................................. 5-26
Fhase failure uotor protective relay Z ........................ 5-20
Fhase failure sensitive ................................................... 6-4
Fhase iubalance relay ................................................. 1-41
Index
11-12
11
Fhase uonitoring relays ...............................................1-40
Fhase sequence relays ................................................1-41
Fhotovoltaics in residental buildings
Fequireuents, the C isolation gap ........................0-15
Coubination switch .................................................0-18
Coufort, safety and energy uanageuent ...............0-21
Coupact isolator for inverter ...................................0-16
Converting solar energy efficiently .........................0-15
C string protective device .....................................0-17
C surge protection .................................................0-18
C switch-disconnector ..........................................0-15
igital residual current device ................................0-18
istribution board ....................................................0-19
Energy ueasuring sensor ........................................0-19
Fireuans switch ......................................................0-16
Fuse switch-disconnector with integrated
short-circuit protective device ................................0-17
0rid-connected power inverters .............................0-15
lncrease building safety and coufort .....................0-18
lndoor use ................................................................0-15
Miniature circuit-breaker ........................................0-19
0utdoor use ..............................................................0-15
0vervoltage protection ............................................0-19
Ferfect enclosure for outdoor uounting ................0-16
Safe isolation, switching and protecting ................0-14
Safe photovoltaic systeus ......................................0-14
Siuple uounting ......................................................0-17
Specifications ..........................................................0-15
String circuit-breaker ..............................................0-17
Wireless uonitoring of Fv systeu and
siuple energy uanageuent ....................................0-19
Foint-to-point connection .............................................1-74
Folarisation reflex sensor .............................................3-36
Fole-changing uotors ...................................... 8-478-49
Fosition switch LS-Titan ............................................3-18
rive .........................................................................3-25
Standards .................................................................3-25
Suitable applications ...............................................3-25
Fositive opening ............................................................3-18
Fotential isolation ...........................................................5-2
Index
11-13
11
Fower distribution systeus ......................................... 0-22
Fower Factor .................................................................. 2-6
Frocess protection ....................................................... 3-22
Frograuuing easy ............................................ 1-771-93
Frotection against earth fault ............................. 5-23, 5-26
Frotection types for electrical equipuent ................. 10-29
Frotective conductors, uiniuuu cross-sections ..... 10-18
Frotective doors ........................................................... 1-32
Frotective earth, Frotective ground ............................ 9-26
Frotective ueasures .................................................... 10-4
Ft100/Ni1000 inputs, easy ............................................ 1-56
FTC theruistors
Motor protection ..................................................... 8-13
Theruistor overload relays for
uachine protection ................................................. 5-33
Full-up torque ................................................................. 2-6
Fulse generating .......................................................... 1-38
Fulse shaping ............................................................... 1-37
Fuup control ................................................................ 2-37
Float switches ....................................................... 8-100
Fressure switches ................................................... 8-98
Two puups .............................................................. 8-96
Fuup operation ............................................................ 2-37
Fushbutton actuators ................................................... 8-63
R
Fadio interference suppression filters ........................ 2-76
Faup tiue ..................................................................... 2-10
Fapid Link ..................................................................... 2-98
Fated uotor current ..................................................... 2-13
of three-phase uotors .......................................... 10-43
Fated operational current .............................................. 2-6
Fated speed .................................................................... 2-6
Fated torque ................................................................... 2-6
FC suppressor ................................................................ 5-4
FC ............................................................................... 2-18
Feclosing lockout ........................................................... 8-4
Fectifier ........................................................................ 2-67
Feference letter contactor relays ................................. 5-3
Feflected-light beau .................................................... 3-36
Felay outputs, easy ...................................................... 1-58
Index
11-14
11
Feliability values .........................................................10-26
Feuote display ..............................................................1-71
Feuote operator circuit-breaker .................................7-18
Feuote switch off .........................................................7-12
Feuote switch off FKZ, FKE .........................................6-13
Feuote switch-off circuit-breaker ...............................7-11
Feuote tripping ...............................................................7-4
Fesidual current protection ..........................................7-20
Fesidual-current protection relays ..............................7-22
Fesidual-current relays ................................................7-22
Fesistive touch panel ....................................................1-96
Fesistor, general syubol ..............................................9-27
Feversing coubination aFeversing contactor .........8-30
Feversing contactor .....................................................8-30
Feversing star-delta
Cau switches .............................................................4-6
irection change ......................................................8-43
Feversing star-delta switch
2 operating directions ..............................................8-42
Feversing starter .........................................................2-101
Motor-protective circuit-breakers ............................6-3
Feversing starter with FKE ................................... 1-8, 1-13
Feversing switch .............................................................4-5
Fisk reduction ...............................................................1-29
in the fault scenario...................................................10-27
SFF/CS .....................................................................1-29
FM01 .............................................................................3-2
FM0-Titan ....................................................................3-3
Fogowski principle ........................................................5-26
Fogowski sensor ...........................................................5-32
Foot -3 circuit ................................................................2-56
Fotor autouatic starter
Engineering starting resistor ...................................8-15
Froperties of slipring rotor ......................................8-16
Slipring rotor ............................................................8-88
Fotor-critical .................................................................8-13
FS flip-flop, general syubol ..........................................9-36
Index
11-15
11
S
Safety of uachinery
lN EN 0201-1 ...................................................... 10-21
EN lS0 12100-1 ........................................................ 1-29
Safety position switches .............................................. 3-18
Safety product .............................................................. 1-30
Safety Felays ................................................................ 1-29
Safety standards .......................................................... 1-29
Safety technical data ................................................. 10-26
Safety Technology ........................................................ 1-29
Safety-related applications ......................................... 1-26
SASY0 .......................................................................... 0-38
Sealing power ............................................................... 5-15
Second environuent .................................................... 2-73
Self uaintaining ............................................................ 1-83
Sensor belt ZEv ............................................................ 5-28
Separate windings
Multi-speed switch ...................................... 8-598-62
Speeds ..................................................................... 8-47
Separation galvanic ....................................................... 5-2
Sequential Function Chart .......................................... 1-131
Series connection ........................................................ 1-82
Service distribution board ............................................ 0-35
Shaft output .................................................................... 2-6
Sheet steel housing
lvS ............................................................................ 0-35
M0AN .................................................................... 0-29
Wall-uounting housing CS ..................................... 0-33
xEnergy .................................................................... 0-22
xvtl ........................................................................... 0-26
Shielding, general syubol ............................................ 9-26
Shift register ................................................................. 1-90
short-circuit currents ................................................. 10-52
Short-circuit uonitoring ............................................... 5-31
Short-circuit protective device .................................... 8-26
Short-circuit releases .................................................... 6-4
Short-circuit strength ..................................................... 8-7
Index
11-16
11
Shunt releases
Circuit-breaker reuote tripping .................................7-4
Circuit-breakers .......................................................7-19
FKZ, FKE....................................................................6-10
Feuote switch-off ....................................................7-11
Signal uodules ............................................................1-114
Signalling units ..............................................................1-24
Single-phase uotors .......................................................8-5
Sinusoidal filter .............................................................2-84
SL signal towers ............................................................3-14
Slip speed
....................................................................................2-6
Slipring rotor aFotor autouatic starter ....................8-88
SuartWire-T .................................................................1-2
SuartWire-T Couuunication Systeu .........................1-2
Soft starter .......................................................................2-9
idirectional operation ............................................2-33
Classification types ..................................................2-17
Controlled deceleration ...........................................2-11
M1 ..........................................................................2-44
S7 ............................................................................2-27
Exauples ..................................................................2-20
0verload current profile ..........................................2-11
Farallel connection of several uotors ....................2-20
Selection criteria ......................................................2-13
three-phase controlled ............................................2-12
two-phase controlled ...............................................2-12
Soft stop raup ...............................................................2-29
Special purpose relays .................................................1-36
Speed ...............................................................................2-6
Speeds, separate windings ..........................................8-47
Spring-cage teruinal ....................................................5-15
Stairwell lighting ...........................................................1-87
Standard auxiliary contact .............................................7-6
0N-0FF indication ....................................................7-15
Standard transforuers, rated and
short-circuit currents ..................................................10-52
Star circuit
Motor ........................................................................2-97
Frinciple .....................................................................2-5
Index
11-17
11
Star-delta ...................................................................... 1-39
ridging during starting .......................................... 8-10
Cau switches ............................................................ 4-6
easy .......................................................................... 1-85
Marking .................................................................... 8-25
Multi-speed contactors .......................................... 8-68
SAlNL ......................................................... 8-378-41
Three-phase uotors ..................................... 8-358-44
Star-delta starter ................................................... 1-16, 2-2
Star-delta starters
with overload relays ................................................ 8-35
Start voltage ................................................................. 2-10
Starting current .............................................................. 2-6
Starting torque ....................................................... 2-6, 2-14
Stator autouatic starters
Froperties of squirrel cage rotor ............................ 8-16
Stopping in the event of an euergency ...................... 1-34
Structured Text ........................................................... 1-130
Support Fortal ................................................................. 0-9
Suppressor circuit .......................................................... 5-4
Suppressor circuit integrated, pluggable ................... 5-15
Switch position indication .............................................. 4-4
Switch position indication circuit-breaker .................. 7-15
Switch-disconnector, lNX .............................................. 7-3
Switch-disconnectors use, uounting forus ................. 4-2
Switching of capacitors .................................... 8-928-95
Switching on three-phase uotors .................... 8-268-33
Synchronous speed ....................................................... 2-6
Systeu M0AN ............................................................ 0-29
Systeu-protective circuit-breakers ..................... 6-26-5
Systeu-protective trip block .......................................... 6-5
Index
11-18
11
T
Tapped winding .............................................................8-10
Cau switch ..................................................... 4-74-10
Feed drive .................................................................8-32
Four speeds ..............................................................8-49
Marking ....................................................................8-25
Multi-speed switch star-delta .................................8-68
Fole-changing uotors .............................................8-47
Three speeds ............................................................8-48
Teuperature coupensated ............................................6-4
Teuperature uonitoring ...............................................8-13
Teuperature, conversion factors ...............................10-19
Teruinal .........................................................................0-36
Teruinal assignuent
lZMX1 .....................................................................7-25
lZMX10 .....................................................................7-26
Teruinal strip, general syubol .....................................9-25
Testing Agencies, Certification Marks .........................9-14
Text display, easy ..........................................................1-92
Therual overload relays ...............................................5-20
Theruistor .....................................................................8-13
Theruistor uotor protection ............................... 2-19, 5-30
Theruistor overload relay for uachine
protection EMT ............................................................5-33
Theruistor protection ...................................................5-30
Three-phase asynchronous uotor .................................2-2
0eneral syubol ........................................................9-34
Startup characteristics ..............................................2-6
Three-phase autouatic rotor starter ............... 8-888-91
Three-phase autotransforuer starter ..... 8-15, 8-838-87
Three-phase current slip-ring uotor ............................2-22
Three-phase current-autouatic starter .......................8-15
Three-phase uonitor ....................................................1-42
Three-phase uotors
Connection .................................................................2-3
Fated uotor currents .............................................10-43
Star-delta Multi speed switch ..................... 8-688-82
Tiue selectivity circuit-breaker ...................................7-16
Index
11-19
11
Tiue-discriuinating network topology ........................ 7-16
Tiuing relay, on-delayed .............................................. 1-84
Tiuing relays ................................................................ 1-36
Top of Faup ........................................................... 2-9, 2-10
Touch display ............................................................... 1-95
Touch panel .................................................................. 1-96
Transforuer-protective circuit-breaker ........................ 6-6
Transistor, general syubol .......................................... 9-36
Trip blocks ...................................................................... 6-5
Trip-indicating auxiliary contact circuit-breaker .......... 7-6
Trip-indicating auxiliary contacts
for uesh network circuit-breaker .......................... 7-15
for uotor protective circuit-breakers FKZ, FKE ...... 6-9
Tripping characteristics uotor protection systeu ..... 5-28
Tripping characteristics 0verload relays ........... 5-21, 5-25
Tripping CLASS .................................................... 5-23, 5-26
Tripping classes CLASS ................................................. 6-5
Two way switch ............................................................ 1-83
Type 1 coordination ...................................................... 2-17
Type 2 coordination ...................................................... 2-17
Type abbreviation, cables .......................................... 10-50
Types of coordination uotor protection ........................ 8-8
Types of coordination of soft starter ........................... 2-17
U
u/f uethod .................................................................... 2-88
unbalanced current consuuption ...................... 5-23, 5-26
undervoltage releases
Circuit-breakers ...................................................... 7-19
lnterlocking of uultiple switches ........................... 7-14
Motor-protective circuit-breakers FKZ, FKE ......... 6-10
0ff-delayed ................................................................ 7-5
Feuote switch-off ................................................... 7-11
Starting interlock ..................................................... 7-13
Switch off ................................................................. 7-13
use or reactor capacitor .............................................. 8-18
utilitation categories
contactors, uotor starters .................................... 10-36
for switch-disconnectors ...................................... 10-40
for switching eleuents .......................................... 10-34
utilitation categories for switching eleuents ........... 10-34
Index
11-20
11
V
varistor suppressor ........................................................5-4
visual indicator, general syubol ..................................9-28
visualitation ..................................................................1-94
visualitation, easyhMl .................................................1-93
voltage releases
lnterlock with undervoltage releases .....................7-14
Motor-protective circuit-breakers FKZ, FKE ..........6-10
Starting interlock undervoltage releases ...............7-13
W
Wall-uounting
istribution systeu ..................................................0-37
housing ........................................................... 0-33, 0-37
Wide-range overload protection ....................................6-5
Wide-range overload protection, electronic ...............5-23
Winding, general syubol ..............................................9-27
Wiring diagraus ............................................................8-20
lnterconnection diagrau .........................................8-20
Location diagrau .....................................................8-20
Teruinal diagrau .....................................................8-20
unit wiring diagrau ..................................................8-20
X
XC FLCs .......................................................................1-113
Xl/0N ...........................................................................1-125
Xl0C signal uodules ...................................................1-114
Z
ZEv uotor protection systeu ........................... 5-265-32
ZW7 current transforuer-operated overload relays .....8-8
Eatons Electrical Sector is a global
leader in power distribution, power
quality, control and automation, and
monitoring products. When combined
with Eatons full-scale engineering
services, these products provide
customer-driven PowerChain solutions
to serve the power system needs of
the data center, industrial, institutional,
public sector, utility, commercial,
residential, IT, mission critical, alternative
energy and OEM markets worldwide.
PowerChain solutions help enterprises
achieve sustainable and competitive
advantages through proactive
management of the power system as a
strategic, integrated asset throughout its
life cycle, resulting in enhanced safety,
greater reliability and energy efficiency.
For more information, visit
www.eaton.com/electrical
Adresses worldwide:
www.eaton.com/moellerproducts
E-Mail: info-bonn
@
eaton.com
Internet:
www.eaton.com/moellerproducts
www.eaton.com
Issued by:
Eaton Corporation
Electrical Sector EMEA

Eaton Industries GmbH
Hein-Moeller-Str. 7-11
D-53115 Bonn
2008 by Eaton Industries GmbH
Subject to alterations
PU08703001Z-EN (09/11) bb/Doku/DHW/CPI
Printed in Germany
(09/2011)
Article No.: 165291
For service issues please contact your Eaton representative
or the After Sales Service.
Hotline: +49 (0) 180 5 228322 (de, en) 24/7
Tel.: +49 (0) 228 602-3640
Fax: +49 (0) 228 602-61400
E-Mail: AfterSalesEGBonn@eaton.com
Internet:
www.eaton.com/moeller/aftersales

Wiring Manual 2011 EATON

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wiring Manual 2011 EATON

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

L1

Series appears on former Moeller products,

The M0AN is a type-tested uodular

arc fault protective system

Switching, control, visualization

Switching, control, visualization

Contactor function with

Cycle pulse on falling

Fulse shaping switching

Switching with flashing

Eaton Wiring Manual 0/11

Electronic motor starters and drives

Electronic motor starters and drives

Electronic motor starters and drives

Electronic motor starters and drives

Supply via uain cable

Frofi 7.1 for

position switches 3-16

electronic position switches 3-26

. The use of LE eleuents

Actuating devices RMQ-Titan

electronic position switches

Contactors and relays

Eaton Wiring Manual 0/11

All about Motors

Export to World Markets and North America

to uL 508, CSA C 22.2-11 and NEMA lCS 5

Eaton Wiring Manual 0/11

Earthing on the current source

Standards, formulae, tables

Anticipated operating current of the

Standards, formulae, tables

Standards, formulae, tables

kWh = 9.81 Nu = 9.81 J = 2.31 cal

Area 1 sq.in 1 sq.ft 1 sq.yd 1 acre 1 sq.uile

You might also like